MELSEC and MELDAS are registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

Microsoft, Windows and Microsoft Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PC-9800 is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
All other company names and product names in this document are trademarks or registered
trademarks of the respective companies.
 Introduction

These specifications are the programming manual used when creating the sequence
program with the PLC development software, or Mitsubishi Electric Co.'s integrated FA
software MELSOFT series (GX Developer).
The PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) instructions are largely categorized into the
basic instructions, function instructions and exclusive instructions. There are many types of
instructions. The instructions can be used according to the purpose and application such as
the PLC support function used when supporting the user PLCs.
In addition to the explanation of instructions and functions, the environment to develop the
user PLC using GX Developer, especially the usage unique to MITSUBISHI CNC, is
described. Explanations on the built-in PLC edit function (onboard PLC edit function)
operations are also given.

Details described in this manual

CAUTION
An effort has been made to describe special handling of this machine, but items that are not
described must be interpreted as "not possible".
Some screens and functions may differ or some functions may not be usable depending on
the NC version.

General precautions

Refer to each manual for details on the MITSUBISHI CNC Series PLC, and for details on the
various tools in this manual.
The explanations and screens for the various tools in this manual may differ slightly according to
the tool version. Refer to the respective manual for details.

[MELSEC Series Software Package Manual]

GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual (Startup Section)

GXDEV8-0-IN-E 13JU40 SH-080372E
GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual
GXDEV8-0-E 13JU41 SH-080373E
GX Converter Version 1 Operating Manual
SW0D5-CNVW (OPE)-E 13J949 IB-080004E

(Caution)
• The version numbers are current as of the editing of this manual, but may be updated in
the future.
• GX Developer Version 8 (Model SW8D5C-GPPW) is the new name of the old "Windows
Version GPP Function Software package" (common name GPPW).
 Precautions for Safety
Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and
attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to
ensure correct use.
Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

When there is a great risk that the user could be subject to fatalities or
DANGER serious injuries if handling is mistaken.

When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if

WARNING handling is mistaken.

When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical damage

CAUTION could occur if handling is mistaken.

Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the
situation. In any case, important information that must always be observed is described.

DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.

WARNING
Not applicable in this manual.

CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual
For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction
manual issued by the machine tool builder takes precedence over this manual.
An effort has been made to describe special handling of this machine, but items that are
not described must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Refer to the
specifications issued by the machine tool builder before starting use.
Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine tool builder for details on each
machine tool.
Some screens and functions may differ or some functions may not be usable depending
on the NC version.
2. Items related to start up and maintenance
Read this manual carefully and confirm the safety enough before executing the operation
of the program change, forced output, RUN, STOP, etc. during operation. Operation
mistakes may cause damage of the machine and accidents.
(To be continued to the next page.)
 CAUTION
3. Items related to program development
Always observe the cautions before development to develop a program.
If the data transferred does not follow the file name rule, the CNC will mistake it for another
data, resulting in unexpected operation, e.g. PLC program erasure.
Do not read a sequence program on which a conversion error occurred into the GX
Developer. The file may include unexpected contents to result an illegal operation.
When an error occurred at GX Developer On-line function, the error message may not
explain exactly the state in the CNC side.
Always refer to the error list.
 Contents

I OUTLINE
1. System Configuration....................................................................................................................1
1.1 System Configuration for PLC Development ...........................................................................1
1.2 User PLC (Ladder) Development Procedure...........................................................................2

II PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION
1. Outline.................................................................................................................................................1
2. PLC Processing Program...................................................................................................................2
2.1 PLC Processing Program Level and Operation.......................................................................2
2.2 Outline of PLC Processing Program (Two Program Method) ..................................................3
2.3 Independent Program Method .................................................................................................3
2.4 Multi-program Method..............................................................................................................3
2.4.1 Number and Types of Registerable Programs ..................................................................4
2.4.2 Program Execution Order..................................................................................................4
2.5 User Memory Area Configuration and Size .............................................................................5
2.5.1 Independent Program Method...........................................................................................5
2.5.2 Multi-program Method .......................................................................................................5
2.6 Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode ..........................................................6
2.6.1 Path from Storage to Execution.........................................................................................6
2.6.2 Conversion of Instruction Code at Execution ....................................................................6
2.6.3 How to Confirm the Number of Steps at Storage/Execution..............................................6
3. Input/Output Signals ...........................................................................................................................7
3.1 Input/Output Signal Types and Processing..............................................................................7
3.2 Handling of Input Signals Designated for High-speed Input ....................................................8
3.3 High-speed Input/Output Designation Method.........................................................................9
4. Parameters .......................................................................................................................................10
4.1 PLC Constants.......................................................................................................................10
4.2 Bit Selection Parameters .......................................................................................................12
4.3 Other Parameters ..................................................................................................................15
4.3.1 PLC Startup Condition Switchover ..................................................................................15
5. Explanation of Devices ...............................................................................................................16
5.1 Devices and Device No. ........................................................................................................16
5.2 List of Devices .......................................................................................................................16
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices ............................................................................................17
5.3.1 Input/Output X, Y .............................................................................................................17
5.3.2 Internal Relays M and F, Latch Relay L...........................................................................18
5.3.3 Special Relay for Link (SB), Special Register for Link (SW)............................................18
5.3.4 Link Relay B, Link Register W .........................................................................................19
5.3.5 Special Relay SM, Special Register SD ..........................................................................19
5.3.6 Edge relay V ....................................................................................................................20
5.3.7 Timer T ............................................................................................................................21
5.3.8 Integrated Timer ST.........................................................................................................23
5.3.9 Counter C ........................................................................................................................24
5.3.10 Data Register D .............................................................................................................25
5.3.11 File Register R ...............................................................................................................26
5.3.12 Index register Z..............................................................................................................26
5.3.13 Nesting N.......................................................................................................................27
5.3.14 Pointer P........................................................................................................................28
5.3.14.1 General Pointers .....................................................................................................29
5.3.14.2 Local Pointers .........................................................................................................29
 5.3.14.3 Common Pointers ...................................................................................................30
5.3.14.4 Reserved Pointers...................................................................................................31
5.3.15 Decimal Constant K.......................................................................................................33
5.3.16 Hexadecimal Constant H...............................................................................................33
6. Explanation of Instructions..........................................................................................................34
6.1 Compatible Instructions and Extended Instructions...............................................................34
6.2 Instruction Tables...................................................................................................................36
6.2.1 How to Read Instruction Table.........................................................................................36
6.2.2 Basic instructions.............................................................................................................38
6.2.3 Comparison Instructions..................................................................................................40
6.2.4 Arithmetic Operation Instructions.....................................................................................41
6.2.5 BCD<->BIN Conversion Instructions ...............................................................................43
6.2.6 Data Transmission Instructions .......................................................................................44
6.2.7 Program Branch Instruction.............................................................................................45
6.2.8 Logical Operation Instructions .........................................................................................46
6.2.9 Rotation Instructions........................................................................................................48
6.2.10 Data Processing Instructions.........................................................................................49
6.2.11 Other Function Instructions............................................................................................50
6.2.12 Special Instructions for Old Machine Type Compatible .................................................51
6.2.13 Exclusive Instructions ....................................................................................................51
6.3 Data Designation Method ......................................................................................................52
6.3.1 Bit Data............................................................................................................................52
6.3.2 Word (16-bit) Data ...........................................................................................................53
6.3.3 Using double word data (32 bits).....................................................................................55
6.4 Index Qualification .................................................................................................................57
6.5 Operation Error ......................................................................................................................58
6.6 Execution Condition of Instruction .........................................................................................59
6.7 Counting Step Number ..........................................................................................................60
6.8 Operations when the OUT, SET/RST, or PLS/PLF instruction of the same device is used ...61
6.9 How to Read Instruction Tables .............................................................................................63
7. Basic Instructions........................................................................................................................64
8. Function Instructions.................................................................................................................103
9. Exclusive Instructions ...............................................................................................................217
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction ....................................................................................................218
9.1.1 Outline of ATC Control...................................................................................................218
9.1.2 ATC Operation ...............................................................................................................218
9.1.3 Explanation of Terminology ...........................................................................................218
9.1.4 Relationship between Tool Registration Screen and Magazines...................................219
9.1.5 Use of ATC and ROT Instructions .................................................................................220
9.1.6 Basic Format of ATC Exclusive Instruction....................................................................221
9.1.7 Instruction List ...............................................................................................................222
9.1.8 Control Data Buffer Contents.........................................................................................222
9.1.9 File Register (R Register) Assignment and Parameters................................................223
9.1.10 Details of Each Instruction...........................................................................................227
9.1.11 Precautions for Using ATC Exclusive Instructions .......................................................236
9.1.12 Examples of Tool Registration Screen.........................................................................236
9.1.13 Display of Spindle Tool and Standby Tool ....................................................................238
9.2 ROT Instructions..................................................................................................................239
9.2.1 Instruction List ...............................................................................................................239
10. PLC Help Function..................................................................................................................244
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System) ...........................................................245
10.1.1 Outline of Tool Life Management Function ..................................................................245
10.1.2 Tool Life Management Methods ..................................................................................246
10.1.3 Procedure when tool command is executed................................................................246
 10.1.4 Procedure When Spindle Tool is Changed ..................................................................247
10.1.5 Tool Life Management II Method .................................................................................247
10.1.6 Maximum Number of Registerable Tools.....................................................................248
10.1.7 Tool Data .....................................................................................................................249
10.1.8 Usage Time, Work Count ............................................................................................251
10.1.9 Tool Data Flow (R Register) ........................................................................................252
10.1.10 User PLC processing.................................................................................................254
10.1.11 Interface with PLC .....................................................................................................255
10.2 External Search .................................................................................................................258
10.2.1 Detailed Explanation....................................................................................................258
10.2.2 PLC → NC Interface Signal.........................................................................................259
10.2.3 NC → PLC Interface Signal.........................................................................................260
10.2.4 Timing Chart ................................................................................................................260
10.2.5 External Search Status ................................................................................................260
10.2.6 Precautions..................................................................................................................261
10.2.7 Usage Example ...........................................................................................................261
10.3 PLC Axis Control .....................................................................................................................262
10.3.1 Specifications ..............................................................................................................262
10.3.2 Detailed explanation ....................................................................................................263
10.3.3 PLC Interface...............................................................................................................264
10.3.4 Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data..............................................................266
10.3.5 Timing Chart ................................................................................................................273
10.3.6 Reference Position Return Near Point Detection ........................................................278
10.3.7 Handle Feed Axis Selection.........................................................................................278
10.3.8 Single Mode.................................................................................................................279
10.3.9 Buffering Mode ............................................................................................................279
10.3.10 PLC Axis Monitor .......................................................................................................282
10.3.11 Absolute Position Detection .......................................................................................282
10.3.12 Usage Example .........................................................................................................282
10.4 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation .......................................................283
10.5 Alarm Message Display .....................................................................................................284
10.5.1 Interface.......................................................................................................................284
10.5.2 Screen Display ............................................................................................................286
10.5.3 Message creation ........................................................................................................286
10.5.4 Parameters ..................................................................................................................287
10.6 Operator Message Display ................................................................................................289
10.6.1 Interface.......................................................................................................................289
10.6.2 Operator Message Preparation ...................................................................................290
10.6.3 Operator Message Display Validity Parameter............................................................290
10.7 PLC Switches ....................................................................................................................291
10.7.1 Explanation of Screen .................................................................................................291
10.7.2 Explanation of Operation .............................................................................................292
10.7.3 Signal Processing........................................................................................................293
10.7.4 Switch name preparation.............................................................................................297
10.8 Load Meter Display............................................................................................................298
10.8.1 Interface.......................................................................................................................298
11. Appendix .................................................................................................................................302
11.1 Example of Faulty Circuit ...................................................................................................302

III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT

1. Outline...........................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Software Configuration ............................................................................................................2
1.2 Operating Environment............................................................................................................3
2. GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC ..........................................................4
2.1 Function Support Conditions (General Section) ......................................................................4
2.2 Function Support Conditions (Online Section).........................................................................8
3. Preparation .................................................................................................................................12
3.1 Installing the Tools .................................................................................................................12
3.2 Preparation for Serial (RS-232C) Communication.................................................................12
3.2.1 Connecting the Serial Cable............................................................................................12
3.2.2 Setting the Connection Target .........................................................................................13
3.3 Preparation for Ethernet Communication ..............................................................................14
3.3.1 Confirming IP address of the CNC unit ...........................................................................14
3.3.2 Setting IP address for the Personal Computer Side........................................................14
3.3.3 Connecting the Ethernet Cable .......................................................................................14
3.3.4 Setting the Connection Target .........................................................................................15
4. Common Items............................................................................................................................16
4.1 Precautions before Development ..........................................................................................16
4.2 NC-related Parameters..........................................................................................................17
4.3 PLC Data Storage Areas........................................................................................................18
4.4 File Name ..............................................................................................................................21
4.4.1 File name rule for sequence program, parameter, and device comment ........................21
4.4.2 File name rule for message data .....................................................................................22
4.5 Creating a Project ..................................................................................................................24
4.5.1 Project .............................................................................................................................24
4.5.2 Operating Procedures .....................................................................................................25
4.6 Setting the Parameters ..........................................................................................................26
4.6.1 Parameter Setting Screen ...............................................................................................26
4.6.2 Setting the Number of Device Points...............................................................................27
4.6.3 Setting the Number of Common Pointer Points...............................................................28
4.6.4 Setting the Program Execution Order..............................................................................29
4.6.5 Writing and Reading Parameters to and from the CNC Controller..................................30
4.7 Starting/Stopping the PLC of the CNC Controller ..................................................................31
4.7.1 Operation Procedure .......................................................................................................31
4.8 Keyword Registration.............................................................................................................32
4.8.1 Data Protected by a Keyword..........................................................................................32
4.8.2 Operations Prohibited by a Keyword ...............................................................................32
4.8.3 Structure of the Keyword Function ..................................................................................32
4.8.4 File Names Excluded from the Target of Keyword Protection .........................................33
4.8.5 Compatibility and Precautions when Using the System with No Keyword Support.........33
4.8.6 Registering a Keyword ....................................................................................................34
4.8.7 Canceling the Keyword....................................................................................................35
4.8.8 Disabling the Keyword.....................................................................................................35
4.8.9 Disabling the Keyword as Required when Accessing to CNC.........................................36
5. Sequence Program Development...............................................................................................37
5.1 Development Procedures ......................................................................................................37
5.1.1 Method for Using Sequence Program Developed with PLC4B .......................................37
5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller ..........................................................38
5.2.1 Operation Procedure .......................................................................................................38
5.2.2 Writing Operation.............................................................................................................38
5.2.3 Operations and Check Items at Conversion Error...........................................................39
5.2.4 Operations and Check Items at the Other Errors ............................................................41
5.3 Reading the Sequence Program from the CNC Controller....................................................43
5.3.1 Operation Procedure .......................................................................................................43
5.4 Verifying the Sequence Programs .........................................................................................45
5.4.1 Operation Procedure .......................................................................................................45
5.5 Using Sequence Programs from Older Models .....................................................................46
 5.5.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted......................................46
5.5.2 Conversion Format Setting..............................................................................................46
5.6 Monitoring the Sequence Program ........................................................................................49
5.6.1 Operation Procedure .......................................................................................................49
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device ....................................................................................50
5.7.1 Basic Operation ...............................................................................................................51
5.7.2 Basic Specifications.........................................................................................................52
5.7.3 Status of Special Relay during Sampling Trace...............................................................55
5.7.4 Sampling Trace Operation Screen ..................................................................................56
5.7.4.1 Sampling Trace Main Screen ....................................................................................57
5.7.4.2 Wizard Setting/Execution Screen..............................................................................58
5.7.4.3 Trace Setting .............................................................................................................59
5.7.4.4 Trace Execution ........................................................................................................65
5.7.4.5 Trace Result ..............................................................................................................67
5.7.5 Operation at Error............................................................................................................68
5.7.6 Operation Example..........................................................................................................69
5.7.7 Precautions......................................................................................................................71
6. PLC Message Development .......................................................................................................72
6.1 Development Procedure ........................................................................................................72
6.1.1 Using a General Text Editor.............................................................................................73
6.1.2 Entering Messages Directly from GX Developer .............................................................73
6.2 Message Data Description Method........................................................................................74
6.2.1 Description Format ..........................................................................................................74
6.2.2 Description Method..........................................................................................................75
6.2.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................76
6.3 Converting Data into GX Developer Format ..........................................................................77
6.3.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted......................................77
6.3.2 Conversion Format Setting..............................................................................................77
6.4 Entering/Editing Data using GX Developer............................................................................79
6.4.1 Interlinear Statement Display using Circuit Display .........................................................79
6.4.2 Interlinear Statement Display using List Display..............................................................80
6.4.3 Editing of Integrated Type Interlinear Statements............................................................81
6.5 Writing to the CNC Controller ................................................................................................82
6.5.1 Operation Procedure .......................................................................................................82
6.5.2 Writing Operation.............................................................................................................82
6.5.3 Operation at Write Error ..................................................................................................83
6.5.4 How to Confirm the Error Position ...................................................................................84
6.6 Reading and Verifying from the CNC Controller ....................................................................85
6.6.1 Menu Selection/Screen Operation...................................................................................85
7. Device Comment Creation..........................................................................................................86
7.1 Development Procedure ........................................................................................................86
7.2 Description Method for Indirect Entry ....................................................................................87
7.3 Converting Comment Data into GX Developer Data .............................................................88
7.3.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted......................................88
7.3.2 Conversion Format Setting..............................................................................................88
8. Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................................91
8.1 List of Errors During GX Developer Online Operations .........................................................91
8.2 Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side............................................................93
8.2.1 Operating Procedures .....................................................................................................93
8.2.2 Details of Each Display....................................................................................................94
8.2.3 Detailed Error Information Display...................................................................................94
8.2.4 Display of the Error-generated Ladder ............................................................................95
8.2.5 List of Corresponding PLC Alarms ..................................................................................95
8.3 Initialization for PLC Data Storage Area ................................................................................97
 8.3.1 Operation Procedure .......................................................................................................97
9. Procedures for Backing Up Data Such as Sequence Programs.................................................98
9.1 Backup Target Data ...............................................................................................................98
9.2 Backup Procedures ...............................................................................................................98
9.3 Restoring Backed Up Data ....................................................................................................99

IV Explanation of built-in editing function

1. Outline...........................................................................................................................................1
2. Starting and Ending Onboard........................................................................................................6
2.1 Starting.....................................................................................................................................6
2.1.1 Startup with Standard Operation Mode..............................................................................6
2.1.2 Startup with Simple Operation Mode .................................................................................7
2.1.3 70 Series Startup ...............................................................................................................8
2.2 Ending......................................................................................................................................9
2.3 Switching from Simple Operation Mode to Standard Operation Mode ..................................10
2.4 Switching from Standard Operation Mode to Simple Operation Mode .................................. 11
3. Screens.......................................................................................................................................12
3.1 Screen Resolution .................................................................................................................12
3.2 Types .....................................................................................................................................12
3.3 Full Screen Display................................................................................................................12
3.4 Color-coded Display of "LADDER" Screen............................................................................15
3.5 Split Display ...........................................................................................................................16
3.6 Popup Screen ........................................................................................................................17
3.7 Confirmation Popup Screen...................................................................................................18
3.8 Error Display Popup Screen ..................................................................................................18
3.9 Screen Title Display ...............................................................................................................19
3.10 Menu Key Display................................................................................................................19
3.11 Basic Screen Operations .....................................................................................................20
3.12 Language.............................................................................................................................25
3.12.1 Screen Display Language .............................................................................................25
3.12.2 Comment (Statement, Note, Comment, Device Name) Language................................25
4. PLC Data ....................................................................................................................................26
4.1 PLC Data Storage Area .........................................................................................................26
4.2 Type of Data ..........................................................................................................................28
4.2.1 Program Data ..................................................................................................................29
4.2.2 Device Comment Data ....................................................................................................30
4.2.3 Parameter Data ...............................................................................................................30
5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard).........................................................................31
5.1 Basic Operation Keys ............................................................................................................31
5.2 Menu Keys.............................................................................................................................32
5.2.1 Menu Keys in Standard Operation Mode and Simple Operation Mode...........................32
5.2.2 Menu Key Hierarchies and Movement ............................................................................32
5.2.2.1 Menu keys in standard operation mode ....................................................................32
5.2.2.2 Menu keys in simple operation mode........................................................................32
5.2.2.3 Menu Keys in 70 Series ............................................................................................33
5.2.3 Details of Menu Keys.......................................................................................................34
5.2.3.1 Menu keys in standard operation mode ....................................................................34
5.2.3.2 Menu keys in simple operation mode........................................................................38
5.2.3.3 Menu Keys in 70 Series ............................................................................................41
6. Environment Setting....................................................................................................................45
6.1 Setting the Connected NC Control Unit .................................................................................46
6.1.1 Arbitrary Switchover of Connected NC ............................................................................47
6.1.2 Information to be updated at connection switchover .......................................................47
6.2 NC File Operation Setting......................................................................................................48
 6.2.1 Setting the Storage Destination of Device Comment ......................................................48
6.3 Simple Operation Mode Menu Key Switchover .....................................................................49
6.4 Ladder Display Setting...........................................................................................................50
6.4.1 Maximum Number of Contacts ........................................................................................50
6.4.2 Zoom Display...................................................................................................................50
6.4.3 Current Monitor Value Display.........................................................................................50
6.5 Comment Display Setting ......................................................................................................51
6.5.1 Comment Line .................................................................................................................51
6.5.2 Various Displays ..............................................................................................................51
6.5.3 Common Comment File...................................................................................................52
7. Basic Operations.........................................................................................................................53
7.1 Basic Operations 1 (Steps for Creating a Program for the First Time) ..................................53
7.2 Basic Operations 2 (Creating, Monitoring and Testing Programs).........................................54
7.3 Basic Operations 3 (Correcting Programs Stored in NC) ......................................................55
7.4 Basic Operations 4 (Creating Multiple Programs with Multi-program Method)......................56
7.5 Basic Operations 5 (Creating Device Comments) .................................................................57
7.6 Basic Operations 6 (Upgrading the Program Version)...........................................................58
7.7 Basic Operations 7 (Loading Programs Created with GX Developer)...................................59
8. Circuit Operations .......................................................................................................................60
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)..............................................................................................60
8.1.1 Restrictions......................................................................................................................61
8.1.2 Starting and Stopping Monitoring.....................................................................................62
8.1.3 Device Registration Monitor (Split Screens) ....................................................................63
8.1.4 Ladder Entry Monitor (Split Screens)...............................................................................66
8.1.5 Registering the Monitor ...................................................................................................67
8.1.6 Testing the Devices .........................................................................................................68
8.1.7 Changing the Current Value Monitor ...............................................................................70
8.1.8 Movement on Split Screen...............................................................................................71
8.1.9 Searching ........................................................................................................................71
8.1.10 Deleting All the Entry Ladders .......................................................................................71
8.1.11 Changing the Split Ratio ................................................................................................71
8.1.12 Setting the Monitor Stop Conditions ..............................................................................72
8.2 Editing....................................................................................................................................73
8.2.1 Changing to Circuit Editable Screen................................................................................74
8.2.2 Restrictions......................................................................................................................75
8.2.3 Inputting a Circuit.............................................................................................................77
8.2.4 Inserting a Line ................................................................................................................81
8.2.5 Deleting a Line.................................................................................................................81
8.2.6 Designating the Range ....................................................................................................81
8.2.7 Deleting in a Batch ..........................................................................................................82
8.2.8 Copy & Paste...................................................................................................................83
8.2.9 Converting a Program .....................................................................................................84
8.2.10 Editing a Statement .......................................................................................................86
8.2.11 Editing a Note ................................................................................................................87
8.2.12 Editing a Comment ........................................................................................................89
8.2.13 Editing a PLC Message .................................................................................................90
8.2.14 Undoing the Last Editing Operation...............................................................................94
8.3 Searching and Replacing.......................................................................................................95
8.3.1 Searching for Ladder (Simple search).............................................................................95
8.3.2 Searching for Step No. (Simple search) ..........................................................................97
8.3.3 Searching for Contacts and Coils ....................................................................................98
8.3.4 Searching for Device .......................................................................................................99
8.3.5 Instruction Search..........................................................................................................100
8.3.6 Step No. Search ............................................................................................................101
 8.3.7 Character String Search ................................................................................................102
8.3.8 Changing the AB Contacts ............................................................................................103
8.3.9 Replacing Devices.........................................................................................................104
8.3.10 Changing the T/C Setting Value ..................................................................................106
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details...........................................................................................107
8.4.1 Changing Data (Program, Device Comment)................................................................107
8.4.1.1 Data Changeover ....................................................................................................107
8.4.1.2 Program Changeover..............................................................................................108
8.4.2 Comment Display ..........................................................................................................109
8.4.3 Comment ON/OFF ........................................................................................................ 111
8.4.4 Setting the Circuit Display Scale ................................................................................... 112
9. Other Functions ........................................................................................................................ 115
9.1 Contact Coil Usage List ....................................................................................................... 115
9.2 List of Used Devices ............................................................................................................ 116
9.3 Program Check.................................................................................................................... 118
10. Device Monitor Operations .....................................................................................................120
10.1 Device Batch Monitor.........................................................................................................120
10.2 Device Registration Monitor...............................................................................................122
10.3 Sampling Trace..................................................................................................................124
10.3.1 MAIN Screen ...............................................................................................................128
10.3.2 Trace Count Setting.....................................................................................................132
10.3.3 Trace Point Setting ......................................................................................................133
10.3.4 Trigger Point Setting ....................................................................................................137
10.3.5 Trace Data Setting.......................................................................................................141
10.3.6 Trace execution ...........................................................................................................143
10.3.7 Trace Result Display....................................................................................................145
10.3.8 Creating CSV File........................................................................................................149
10.3.9 File Input ...........................................................................................................................151
10.3.10 File Output ......................................................................................................................152
10.3.11 Deleting File ....................................................................................................................154
10.3.12 Selecting Project.............................................................................................................156
11. Setting the Parameters............................................................................................................157
11.1 Setting the Program ...........................................................................................................158
11.2 Common Pointer Setting....................................................................................................160
12. File Operations........................................................................................................................161
12.1 Adding New Data ...............................................................................................................162
12.2 Deleting PLC Data .............................................................................................................163
12.3 Renaming the PLC Data....................................................................................................164
12.4 Initialization ........................................................................................................................165
13. NC File Operations .................................................................................................................166
13.1 Opening PLC Data from the Temporary Memory...............................................................167
13.2 Saving PLC Data to the Temporary Memory .....................................................................170
13.3 Verifying with the PLC Data in the Temporary Memory .....................................................172
13.4 Writing PLC Data in Temporary Memory to ROM ..............................................................174
13.5 Deleting the PLC Data from the Temporary Memory .........................................................175
13.6 Formatting the Temporary Memory....................................................................................177
13.7 Controlling the PLC RUN/STOP ........................................................................................178
13.8 Updating the PLC Version (Maintenance Function)...........................................................179
13.8.1 Storing the Upgraded Data ..........................................................................................179
13.8.2 PLC VERSION UP Screen ..........................................................................................180
13.8.3 Operations of This Function ........................................................................................181
13.9 Keyword.............................................................................................................................183
13.9.1 Disabling the Keyword on the KEYWORD Screen......................................................183
13.9.2 Disabling the Keyword as Required at the Read or Write Operation ..........................185
 13.10 File list..............................................................................................................................186
14. External File Operations .........................................................................................................187
14.1 Opening PLC Data from a Project .....................................................................................189
14.2 Saving PLC Data from a Project........................................................................................193
14.3 Deleting a Project ..............................................................................................................197
14.4 Verifying the Project PLC Data ..........................................................................................200
15. Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................204
15.1 PLC Diagnostics ................................................................................................................204
16. Help.........................................................................................................................................206
17. Error Messages.......................................................................................................................207
17.1 Warning Messages ............................................................................................................207
17.2 User PLC Alarm .................................................................................................................208
17.3 Error Message ...................................................................................................................208

V APPENDIX
Appendix 1. Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model...................................................1
Appendix 1.1 Development Tools, etc. ..........................................................................................1
Appendix 1.2 Devices and Device Assignments............................................................................2
Appendix 1.3 Instructions with Changed Designation Format .......................................................6
Appendix 1.3.1 Alternative Circuits Resulted from the Ban on DEFR Instruction.......................7
Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer ..............................................................8
Appendix 2.1 Sequence Instructions .............................................................................................8
Appendix 2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions .........................................................................9
Appendix 2.3 Application Instructions ..........................................................................................14
Appendix 3.List of Special Relays and Special Registers ...............................................................17
Appendix 3.1 Special Relay .........................................................................................................18
Appendix 3.2 Special Register.....................................................................................................19
Appendix 4. List of PLC Alarms ......................................................................................................22
I OUTLINE
 1. System Configuration
1.1 System Configuration for PLC Development

1. System Configuration

1.1 System Configuration for PLC Development

The general configuration of the development environment is shown below.
Most of the development work is carried out with "GX Developer", which runs on a personal computer. GX
Developer and the CNC control unit are connected with Ethernet or an RS-232C cable at this time.
On the CNC unit PLC onboard edit screen, it is possible to use the data saved with GX Developer or
develop PLC programs, as well. Note that some functions may be limited. (Print output, Japanese input, etc.)

Offline development
Personal computer
GX Developer
Printout
General-purpose printer

PLC program creation

Ladder printout
Message creation
Message printout
Ladder monitor

Ethernet IC card
or
RS-232C

CNC control unit PLC onboard edit screen

PLC program creation

Ladder monitor
ROM making

General configuration of development environment

I-1
 1. System Configuration
1.2 User PLC (Ladder) Development Procedure

1.2 User PLC (Ladder) Development Procedure

User PLC programs can be created and input by means of either GX Developer installed in the external PC or
PLC onboard edit screen.
Procedures for creating/inputting PLC programs with either method are shown below.

Start

GX Developer PLC onboard

Create

Create by GX Developer Create by PLC

onboard

GX Developer PLC onboard

Write into NC
Write
temporary memory

Ethernet RS232C Save sequence program in

Connection IC card by using GX
Developer

Write into NC Write into NC Open the sequence program

temporary memory by temporary memory by saved in IC card by using
using Ethernet using RS232C PLC onboard
communication

Write into NC temporary

memory

Write sequence program into NC

ROM

Complete

I-2
 1. System Configuration
1.2 User PLC (Ladder) Development Procedure

Next, procedures for creating sequence programs are shown below.

Procedure Personal Computer CNC Unit

Start

Determination of
machine Determination
of CNC and PLC
specifications
Determination of the
numbers of I/O points Commercially available
spreadsheet tool The data created with the
Device Name Comment
commercially available
Assignment of I/O X0 X-OT X-axis OT
signals X1 Y-OT Y-axis OT spreadsheet tool can be
Assignment of internal X2 Z-OT Z-axis OT
used as ladder comment
relays
data.
GX Developer PLC onboard edit screen
Onboard
Use GX Developer for
Programming programming.
After completion, download
the data through RS-232C.
A new program can also be
created by using the CNC
GX Developer Onboard onboard function.
Debugging
Debugging Perform monitoring/correction
(temporary
(RAM memory)
operation)
with GX Developer's online
function or onboard function.
Program correction

Is debugging Onboard
NO complete? Perform ROM making
YES operations with F-ROM write
screen.
ROM writing

ROM operation by
Input/output
CNC unit screen
Output binary data with
Is ROM maintenance data format
operation OK? using input/output screen.
NO
YES GX Developer

Printout Printout to a commercial

printer connected with the
personal computer from GX
Developer.

Program data:
Data save onto FLD
Saved using GX Developer
Binary data:
Completion Program data Binary data
(Maintenance data format) Saved using input/output
screen

I-3
II PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION
 1. Outline

1. Outline
This programming manual is used when creating a sequence program for this CNC using the MELSEC PLC
development software package (GX Developer).
The PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) instructions are largely categorized into the basic instructions,
function instructions and exclusive instructions. There are many types of instructions. The instructions can be
used according to the purpose and application such as the PLC support function used when supporting the
user PLCs.

II - 1
 2. PLC Processing Program
2.1 PLC Processing Program Level and Operation

2. PLC Processing Program

2.1 PLC Processing Program Level and Operation

The details of the user PLC processing level and the time chart are shown below.

PLC processing level

Program name Description (frequency, level, etc.)
Initial processing program This program starts only once at power ON. When this program operates,
machine input and operation board input are not read.
High-speed processing This program starts periodically at each standard interrupt signal.
program This program has the highest level as a program that starts periodically.
It is used in signal processing where high-speed processing is required.
The steps for high-speed processing program should be up to 1000 steps
with basic instructions.
(Application example) Position count control of turret and ATC magazine
(Note) The standard interrupt signal cycle differs according to each model,
and must be confirmed separately.
Main processing program This program runs constantly except during the high-speed process program.
When the user PLC one-scan process is completed, the next scan process
starts at the next reference interrupt signal cycle.

When reference interrupt signal is 3.5ms

3.5ms
Reference
interrupt signal

High speed
processing

Main processing

NC processing

PLC processing program operation timing chart

II - 2
 2. PLC Processing Program
2.2 Outline of PLC Processing Program

2.2 Outline of PLC Processing Program (Two Program Method)

The MITSUBISHI CNC 700 series program execution control methods include the conventional method
which controls with one program, and the method that splits the program into multiple sections for each
control unit.
When splitting into multiple programs, the order for executing the split programs can be designated on the
setting screen. This is called the multi-programming function.

• Method controlling with one program (conventional method) : Independent program method
• Method splitting control into multiple programs : Multi-program method

Control with one program Control by splitting into multiple

(Independent control method) programs (Multi-program method)

Program A
Control details A Control details A

Program B
Control details B Control details B Split and register for
each control detail

Program n
Control details n Control details n

2.3 Independent Program Method

This method lays importance on compatibility with the conventional models.
One sequence program can be stored. The execution type and head of processing are designated with
reserved labels.
The execution type and execution order cannot be designated on the setting screen.

• Initialization process (reserved label P4003) : This starts up only once when the power is turned ON.
• High-speed process (reserved label P4001) : This starts up at the standard interrupt cycle.
• Main process (reserved label P4002) : This starts up constantly except during the high-speed
process.

2.4 Multi-program Method

Several sequence programs can be registered in the CNC and sequentially executed.
By using this function, the sequence program can be split into each process and developed.
With the multi-program method, the execution type and execution order are designated on the GX Developer
setting screen, and the parameter files are sent to the NC.
The execution type and the head of the process cannot be designated with reserved labels.

II - 3
 2. PLC Processing Program
2.4 Multi-program Method

2.4.1 Number and Types of Registerable Programs

Up to 20 sequence programs can be registered. Only one execution type can be set in one program. The
following five types of execution types can be used.

• "Initial" (Initialization process) : This starts up only once when the power is turned ON.
• "Scan" (High-speed process) : This starts up at the standard interrupt cycle.
• "Scan" (Main process) : This starts up constantly except during the high-speed process.
• "Standby" (Standby process) : This is called from the high-speed process or main process.
• "Low speed" : This execution type is not used.

2.4.2 Program Execution Order

Several programs are executed in a predetermined order. They are not executed simultaneously. The order
is determined with the development tool (GX Developer or onboard) setting screen. The programs are
executed from the smallest number in the same execution type. An example of the setting screen for GX
Developer is shown below.

The execution order when seven sequence programs are registered in the CNC, as shown in the above
setting screen, is indicated below.
Program Execution
Execution type Remarks
name order
Starts up only once when the power is turned
INIT Initialization sequence program 1
ON.
HLAD1 High-speed process execution 1 "Scan type" for which program name starts
program with "H"
HLAD2 Execution type is set as "Scan" 2
MAIN 1
Main process sequence program "Scan type" for which program name does not
MLAD1 Execution type is set as "Scan" 2 start with "H"
MLAD2 3
Here, subroutine that is called from MLAD2
SUB1 Standby sequence program 1
with CALL instruction is stored

HLAD1 HLAD2

SUB1
High-speed
process

Main process
MAIN MLAD1 MLAD2 MAIN MLAD1
One scan
[Caution] If the process jumps to END (P4005) in the sequence program, the process will jump to the
end of each process (high-speed, main) instead of the end of the program.

II - 4
 2. PLC Processing Program
2.5 User Memory Area Configuration and Size

2.5 User Memory Area Configuration and Size

The user memory area approximate configuration and size are shown below. The configuration and size
differ according to the program method.

2.5.1 Independent Program Method

P4001 Control information (1) Internal information table of User PLC

(high-speed) (The table is automatically generated.)
P4002 High speed processing
(medium- (2) Sequence program storage area
speed) This is not required for programs other than the main process.
The initialization, high-speed and main process program order
Main processing is arbitrary.
User PLC
data area Total 700 Series 42000 steps
70 Series type A 32000 steps
type B 20000 steps
(3) Data storage area (Other than sequence program)
• Message data • Alarm messages
• Contact/coil • Operator messages
comment data • PLC switches
• Load meter (Each can be stored in eight languages)
• Contact/coil comment data, etc.

Total 256 Kbyte

2.5.2 Multi-program Method

Control information (1) Internal information table of User PLC

(The table is automatically generated.)
Program 1
(2) Sequence program storage area
The initialization, high-speed, main and standby processes
Program 2 can be split into multiple programs for each control unit and
stored.
User PLC Program 3 The program storage order is arbitrary.
data area There must be at least one main process.

Total 700 Series 42000 steps

Program n 70 Series type A 32000 steps
type B 20000 steps
(3) Data storage area (Other than sequence program)
• Message data • Alarm messages
• Contact/coil • Operator messages
comment data • PLC switches
• Load meter (Each can be stored in eight languages)
• Contact/coil comment data, etc.

Total 256 Kbyte

II - 5
 2. PLC Processing Program
2.6 Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode

2.6 Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode

The user memory area storage method and the PLC processing program execution method are explained.
User memory area is stored in the internal flash ROM (internal F-ROM) and a sequence program is executed
according to the following path.

2.6.1 Path from Storage to Execution

(1) During PLC development
Sequence program data transferred from development environment such as GX Developer or PLC
onboard is stored in the volatile RAM (hereinafter, D-RAM) for the temporary memory. The sequence
program is transferred to the PLC processor execution area before PLC execution, and is then executed.
The D-RAM in the temporary memory is not held when the power is turned OFF. If the data needs to be
held even after the power is turned OFF, it must be stored in the internal F-ROM.

(2) At power ON
The data is transferred from the internal F-ROM to the PLC processor execution area via the temporary
memory D-RAM, and is then executed.

Right after the PLC RUN

instruction, converts into the
PLC processor instruction
MELSEC instruction code method and copies to
code format PLC onboard the execution area.
Edit
Transfer Temporary PLC processor
GX Developer memory area Conversion execution area
D-RAM
Manual
save At power ON

Internal F-ROM

CNC

2.6.2 Conversion of Instruction Code at Execution

In the internal F-ROM/temporary memory area shown on the left in the figure above, a sequence program is
stored in the instruction code format that is compatible with the MELSEC sequencer. During execution,
however, a sequence program is analyzed to optimize the references and/or converted into the PLC
processing processor instruction code for the CNC. Thus, the length (number of steps) of an instruction for
each instruction changes before and after the conversion. Refer to "6.2 Instruction List" for details on the
number of steps during storage and execution for each instruction.

2.6.3 How to Confirm the Number of Steps at Storage/Execution

The number of steps under the PLC development environment (GX Developer, PLC onboard edit function) is
usually all displayed as the number of steps at "storage".
The number of steps at execution can be checked with some dedicated methods. Refer to "III PERIPHERAL
DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT 5.2.4 (2) How to confirm the size of execution area" or "IV EXPLANATION
OF BUILT-IN EDITING FUNCTION 13.2 (9) EXECUTE STEP" for details.

II - 6
 3. Input/Output Signals
3.1 Input/Output Signal Types and Processing

3. Input/Output Signals

3.1 Input/Output Signal Types and Processing

The input/output signals handled in user PLC are as follows:
(1) Input/output from/to controller
(2) Input/output from/to operation board (Note 1)
(3) Input/output from/to machine

The user PLC does not directly input or output these signals from or to hardware or controller; it inputs or
outputs the signals from or to input/output image memory. For the reading and writing with the hardware or
controller, the controller will perform the input/output according to the level of the main process or high-speed
process.

Controller

Input/output
Operation Controller image memory User PLC
board (device X, Y)

Machine

(Note 1) The operation board here refers to when the remote I/O is installed on the
communication terminal.

Concept of input/output processing

High-speed processing Main processing

input/output input/output

The controller reads the The controller reads the

high-speed input input other than the high-
designation input, and speed input designation, and
sets in the image memory. sets in the image memory.

User PLC high-speed User PLC main

processing processing

The controller outputs The controller outputs

the high-speed output the output other than the
designation output from high speed output
the image memory to the designation from the
machine. image memory to the machine.

Input/output processing conforming to program level

II - 7
 3. Input/Output Signals
3.1 Input/Output Signal Types and Processing

The table below shows whether or not high-speed input/output can be performed.

Whether or not high-speed input/output can be performed

High-speed input High-speed output
specification specification
Input signal from control unit × ×
Output signal to control unit × ×
Input signal from machine (2-byte units) ×
Output signal to machine × (2-byte units)
Input signal from operation
× ×
board
Output signal to operation board × ×
Input signal from MELSEC when
× ×
connected to MELSEC
Output signal to MELSEC when
× ×
connected to MELSEC
: Possible × : Not possible

The operation board here refers to when the remote I/O is installed on the communication terminal.

3.2 Handling of Input Signals Designated for High-speed Input

The input/output signals used in user PLC are input/output for each program level as shown in the figure
below. In high-speed processing, input/output signal for which high-speed input or output designation
(parameter) is made is input or output each time the high-speed processing program runs. In main
processing, signals other than the high-speed input/output designation are input/output.

When high-speed input designation signal is used in main processing, the input signal may change within one
scan because high-speed processing whose level is higher than main processing interrupts. Input signal
which must not change within one scan should be saved in temporary memory (M), etc., at the head of main
processing and the temporary memory should be used in the main program, for example.

Input image memory

PLC one scan

Main processing A B

(1)
High-speed
processing

(2)

(1) Set at the head of main processing.

(2) Set at the head of high-speed processing.

The hatched area is high-speed input designation part. Whenever the high-speed processing program runs,
data is reset in the hatched area. Thus, the signal in the hatched area may change in main processing (A)
and (B) because the high-speed process interrupts between (A) and (B) and re-reads the input signal in the
hatched area.

II - 8
 3. Input/Output Signals
3.3 High-speed Input/Output Designation Method

3.3 High-speed Input/Output Designation Method

High-speed input/output is designated by setting the corresponding bit of the bit selection parameter as
shown below.

(1) High-speed input designation

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Bit X70 X60 X50 X40 X30 X20 X10 X00 These bits
selection correspond to the
parameter low-order byte
#6457 X7F X6F X5F X4F X3F X2F X1F X0F (bits 0 to 7) of file
register R7828
XF0 XE0 XD0 XC0 XB0 XA0 X90 X80 These bits
correspond to the
#6458 high-order byte
XFF XEF XDF XCF XBF XAF X9F X8F
(bits 8 to F) of file
register R7828

If there are multiple remote I/O connection channels, designate RIO2 with the same configuration as
RIO1 above.
RIO2 : Designate X100 to X1FF with bit selection parameters #6459 and #6460
RIO3 : Designate X200 to X2FF with bit selection parameters #6465 and #6466

(2) High-speed output designation

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Bit Y70 Y60 Y50 Y40 Y30 Y20 Y10 Y00 These bits
selection correspond to the
parameter low-order byte
#6461 Y7F Y6F Y5F Y4F Y3F Y2F Y1F Y0F (bits 0 to 7) of file
register R7830
YF0 YE0 YD0 YC0 YB0 YA0 Y90 Y80 These bits
correspond to the
#6462 high-order byte
YFF YEF YDF YCF YBF YAF Y9F Y8F
(bits 8 to F) of file
register R7830

If there are multiple remote I/O connection channels, designate RIO2 with the same configuration as
RIO1 above.
RIO2 : Designate Y100 to Y1FF with bit selection parameters #6463 and #6464
RIO3 : Designate Y200 to Y2FF with bit selection parameters #6473 and #6474

• As listed above, one bit corresponds to two bytes (16 points).

• Input or output in which 1 is set in the table is not performed at the main processing program level.
• Although the number of bits set to 1 is not limited, set only necessary ones from viewpoint of overhead.
• High-speed input/output designation corresponds to the bit selection parameter and can be set in the
parameter. However, it is recommended to set in a sequence program to prevent a parameter setting
error, etc.
(Example) —[MOV H3 R7828]— ..... To designate X00 to X0F, X10 to X1F (bit 0 and 1 for H3)

II - 9
 4. Parameters
4.1 PLC Constants

4. Parameters

4.1 PLC Constants

The parameters that can be used in user PLC include PLC constants set in the data type. The PLC constants
include the basic area and the extended area.

(1) Basic area

Set up data is stored in a file register and is backed up. In contrast, if data is stored in the file register
corresponding to PLC constant by using sequence program MOV instruction, etc., it is backed up.
However, display remains unchanged. Display another screen once and then select the screen again.
150 PLC constants are set (the setting range is ±8 digits). (Signed 4-byte binary data)

PLC constant No. and R register correspondence table

Corresponding
Item (# No.) Details Setting range
register
PLC constant #1 LOW side R7500
(#18001) HIGH side R7501
PLC constant #2 LOW side R7502
(#18002) HIGH side R7503
PLC constant #3 LOW side R7504
(#18003) HIGH side R7505 -99999999 to
Data type parameters
99999999
… … which can be used in
(Signed 8-digit
PLC constant #148 LOW side R7794 user PLC
integer)
(#18148) HIGH side R7795
PLC constant #149 LOW side R7796
(#18149) HIGH side R7797
PLC constant #150 LOW side R7798
(#18150) HIGH side R7799

PLC constant setting and display screen

II - 10
 4. Parameters
4.1 PLC Constants

(2) Extended area

Up to 750 PLC constants can be secured by using the user backup area (R8300 to R9799) as the
extended area. The extended area start register and number can be set with the parameters. A total of
900 PLC constants can be set with 150 (#18001 to #18150) in the basic area and up to 750 (#18151 to
#18900) in the extended area.
Set up data is stored in a file register and is backed up. In contrast, if data is stored in the file register
corresponding to PLC constant by using sequence program MOV instruction, etc., it is backed up.
However, display remains unchanged. Display another screen once and then select the screen again.
750 PLC constants are set (the setting range is ±8 digits). (Signed 4-byte binary data)

PLC constant No. and R register correspondence table

Corresponding
Item (# No.) Details Setting range
register
PLC constant #151 LOW side
(#18151) HIGH side
PLC constant #152 LOW side
(#18152) HIGH side
R8300 to R9799
PLC constant #153 LOW side
The area for the
(#18153) HIGH side -99999999 to
number Data type parameters
99999999
… determined with which can be used in
(Signed 8-digit
parameter #1326 user PLC
PLC constant #898 LOW side integer)
(#18898) is continuously
HIGH side secured.
PLC constant #899 LOW side
(#18899) HIGH side
PLC constant #900 LOW side
(#18900) HIGH side

The extended area quantity is set with basic common parameter #1326.

# No. Item Details Setting range

PLC Const Ext. • Set number of PLC constant extension points.
1326 0 to 750
Number • This is valid after the power is turned OFF and ON.

II - 11
 4. Parameters
4.2 Bit Selection Parameters

4.2 Bit Selection Parameters

The parameters that can be used in user PLC include bit selection parameters set in the bit type.
Set up data is stored in a file register and is backed up.
When using bit operation in a sequence program, use a word device bit-designation format.
If data is stored in the file register corresponding to bit selection by using the MOV instruction etc., it is backed
up. However, display remains unchanged. Once display another screen and again select screen.
The corresponding between the bit selection parameters and file registers is listed below. The setting and
display screens are also shown.

Corresponding Setting
Bit selection parameter (# No.) Details
register range
#1 (#6401) R7800-Low side
#2 (#6402) R7800-High side
#3 (#6403) R7801-L
#4 (#6404) R7801-H
Use bit selection parameters
… … #6401 to #6448 freely.
#45 (#6445) R7822-L
#46 (#6446) R7822-H
#47 (#6447) R7823-L
#48 (#6448) R7823-H
#49 (#6449) R7824-L
#50 (#6450) R7824-H
#51 (#6451) R7825-L Bit selection parameter
#52 (#6452) R7825-H #6449 to #6496 are PLC
operation parameters used
… … by the machine tool builder
#93 (#6493) R7846-L and MITSUBISHI.
#94 (#6494) R7846-H The contents are fixed.
#95 (#6495) R7847-L
#96 (#6496) R7847-H
#97 (#6497) R7848-L
#98 (#6498) R7848-H 8 bits
#99 (#6499) R7849-L
#100 (#6500) R7849-H
#101 (#6501) R7850-L
#102 (#6502) R7850-H
#103 (#6503) R7851-L
#104 (#6504) R7851-H
#105 (#6505) R7852-L
#106 (#6506) R7852-H
Use bit selection parameters
… … #6497 to #6596 freely.
#187 (#6587) R7893-L
#188 (#6588) R7893-H
#189 (#6589) R7894-L
#190 (#6590) R7894-H
#191 (#6591) R7895-L
#192 (#6592) R7895-H
#193 (#6593) R7896-L
#194 (#6594) R7896-H
#195 (#6595) R7897-L
#196 (#6596) R7897-H

II - 12
 4. Parameters
4.2 Bit Selection Parameters

Contents of bit selection parameters #6449 to #6496

Symbol
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
name
#6449 Setting and
Control unit Integrated
display unit Counter C PLC counter PLC timer
0 R7824 L thermal - timer ST
thermal retention program on program on
alarm on retention
mgmt on
#6450 External 1 0
Alarm/ Full screen R F
R7824 H alarm Operator Alarm
1 - operator display of -
message message on method method message on
change message
display
#6451 Serial Onboard Onboard
R7825 L GPP editing not simple Onboard
2 - -
communi- possible operation mode on
cation on on
#6452 Branch
Serial handy Extended PLC
R7825 H destination
3 - terminal - - instruction -
label check
comm. on mode valid
valid
#6453 Integrated timer ST
4 R7826 L - Variable/fixed
- - Message language change code
Number of points setting

#6454 Counter C Timer T

5 R7826 H Variable/fixed Variable/fixed
Number of points setting Number of points setting

#6455
6 R7827 L - - - - - - - -

#6456
7 R7827 H - - - - - - - -

#6457
8 R7828 L

High-speed input specification 1

#6458
9 R7828 H

#6459
A R7829 L

High-speed input specification 2

#6460
B R7829 H

#6461
C R7830 L

High-speed output specification 1

#6462
D R7830 H

#6463
E R7831 L

#6464 High-speed output specification 2

F R7831 H

II - 13
4. Parameters
4.2 Bit Selection Parameters

Symbol
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
name
#6465
0 - - - - - - - -
R7832 L High-speed input specification 3
#6466
1 R7832 H - - - - - - - -

#6467
2 R7833 L - - - - - - - -
High-speed input specification 4
#6468
3 R7833 H
#6469
4 R7834 L - - - - - - - -

#6470
5 R7834 H - - - - - - - -

#6471
6 R7835 L - - - - - - - -

#6472
7 R7835 H - - - - - - - -

#6473
8 R7836 L - -
High-speed output specification 3
#6474
9 R7836 H
#6475
A R7837 L
High-speed output specification 4
#6476
B R7837 H
#6477
C R7838 L - - - - - - - -

#6478
D R7838 H - - - - - - - -

#6479
E R7839 L - - - - - - - -

#6480
F R7839 H - - - - - - - -

(Note 1) Be sure to set the bits indicated - and blanks to 0.

(Note 2) Parameters #6481 to #6496 are reserved for debugging by MITSUBISHI.
(Note3) Functions marked with may not be available for some machine types.

II - 14
 4. Parameters
4.2 Bit Selection Parameters

Bit selection screen

4.3 Other Parameters

4.3.1 PLC Startup Condition Switchover
Parameter "#11004 PLCautorun enable" allows PLC to startup at NC startup even if no setting display unit is
used.
For safety, use this function only for the machine with no NC screen displayed by HMI.

(1) Basic common parameter

# No. Item Details Setting Standard

range value
PLC Switch starting condition of the PLC.
11004 PLCautorun
automatic 0: Start PLC after NC screen startup 0, 1 0
(PR) enable
startup valid 1: Start PLC at NC startup

(2) Precautions
Parameter "#11004 PLCautorun enable" is the parameter prepared on the assumption that the setting
and display unit is not used.
For the machine with NC screen displayed, to ensure your safety, always set "#11004 PLCautorun
enable" to "0" and start PLC after NC screen startup.
When PLC automatic startup is validated without confirming the pre-operation status on the NC screen,
unexpected incident may occur.

II - 15
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.1 Devices and Device No.

5. Explanation of Devices

5.1 Devices and Device No.

The devices are address symbols to identify signals handled in PLC. The device Nos. are serial Nos.
assigned to the devices. The device Nos. of devices X, Y, SB, B, SW, W and H are represented in
hexadecimal notation. The device numbers of other devices are represented in decimal notation.

5.2 List of Devices

Device Device Range Units Details Remarks

X X0 to X1FFF 8192 points 1-bit Input signals to the PLC. Machine input, etc.
Y Y0 to Y1FFF 8192 points 1-bit Output signals from the PLC. Machine output,
etc.
M M0 to M10239 10240 points 1-bit Temporary memory
L L0 to L511 512 points 1-bit Latch relay (Backup memory)
F F0 to F1023 1024 points 1-bit Temporary memory. Alarm message interface
SB SB to SB1FF 512 points 1-bit Special relay for link
B B0 to B1FFF 8192 points 1-bit Link relay
SM SM0 to SM1023 1024 points 1-bit Special relay
V V0 to V255 256 points 1-bit Edge relay
SW SW0 to SW1FF 512 points 16-bit Special register for link
SD SD0 to SD1023 1024 points 16-bit Special register
T T0 to T703 704 points 1-bit/16-bit Timer (Fixed/variable boundary is set with *1
parameters)
ST ST0 to ST63 64 points 1-bit/16-bit Incremented timer (100ms unit)
C C0 to C255 256 points 1-bit/16-bit Counter (Fixed/variable boundary is set with
parameters)
D D0 to D2047 2048 points 16-bit/32-bit Data register. Register for calculation
R R0 to R13311 13312 points 16-bit/32-bit File register. CNC word I/F
W W0 to W1FFF 8192 points 16-bit/32-bit Link register
Z Z0 to Z1 2 points 16-bit Address index
N N0 to N7 8 points Master controller nesting level
P P0 to P2047 2048 points Conditional jump, subroutine call label *2
P4000 to P4005
K K-32768 to K32767 Decimal constant for 16-bit instruction
K-2147483648 to Decimal constant for 32-bit instruction
K2147483647
H H0 to HFFFF Hexadecimal constant for 16-bit instruction
H0 to HFFFFFFFF Hexadecimal constant for 32-bit instruction

*1 : The 10ms timer and 100ms timer are differentiated with instructions. (Refer to 5.3.4 Timer T)
*2 : The P device has two types of pointers, local and common. The number of points given above is the
total number of points.

II - 16
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.1 Input/Output X, Y
Input/output X and Y are windows for executing communication with the PLC and external device or
controller.

Input X

(a) This issued commands or data from an external device such as a push-button, changeover
switch, limit switch or digital switch to the PLC.
(b) Assuming that there is a hypothetical relay Xn built-in the PLC per input point, the program uses
the "A" contact and "B" contact of that Xn.
(c) There is no limit to the number of "A" contacts and "B" contacts of the input Xn that can be used
in the program.
PLC
Hypothetical relay

PB1 X10 X10

LS2 X11 X11

PB16 X1F X1F

「 「 「

Input circuit Program

(d) The input No. is expressed with a hexadecimal.

Output Y
(a) This outputs the results of the program control to the solenoid, magnetic switch, signal lamp or
digital indicator, etc.
(b) The output (Y) can be retrieved with the equivalent of one "A" contact.
(c) There is no limit to the number of "A" contacts and "B" contacts of the output Yn that can be used
in the program.
PLC

Y10
24V

Y10 Load

Y10

Y10

Program Output circuit

(d) The output No. is expressed with a hexadecimal.

II - 17
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.2 Internal Relays M and F, Latch Relay L

The internal relay and latch relay are auxiliary relays in the PLC that cannot directly output to an external
source.

Internal relay M

(a) The relay is cleared when the power is turned OFF.

(b) There is no limit to the number of "A" contacts and "B" contacts of the internal relays that can be
used in the program.
(c) The internal relay No. is expressed with a decimal.

Internal relay F

Internal relay F is an interface for the alarm message display.

Use the bit selection parameter to determine whether to use this relay for the alarm message
interface. The target will be all F0 to F1023. This internal relay can be used in the same manner as the
internal relay M when not used as the alarm message interface.

Latch relay L

(a) The original state is held even when the power is turned OFF.
(b) There is no limit to the number of "A" contacts and "B" contacts of the latch relay that can be used
in the program.
(c) The latch No. is expressed with a decimal.

5.3.3 Special Relay for Link (SB), Special Register for Link (SW)

Special relay for

link (SB)
(a) This interacts between various kinds of network cards and PLC programs.
(b) ON/OFF control is applied due to various factors occurred at the time of data link. By monitoring
the special relay for link, abnormal state of data link can be detected.

Special register for

link (SW)
(a) This interacts between various kinds of network cards and PLC programs.
(b) Information at the time of data link is stored. By monitoring the special register for link, abnormal
area and the cause can be examined.

II - 18
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.4 Link Relay B, Link Register W

(1) Link relay B is the bit type device that performs data link with various link functions.
Unused area can be used as the primary memory, etc.

(2) Link register W is the word type device that performs data link with various link functions.
Unused area can be used as the primary memory, etc.

Link relay B, link

register W
(a) This relay is cleared when the power is turned OFF.
(b) There is no limit in the number that can be used in the program.
(c) The relay and register No. are expressed with a hexadecimal.

5.3.5 Special Relay SM, Special Register SD

(1) Special relay is the relay whose application is fixed. (i.e. Carry flag of operation result, display request
signal to the setting display device, etc.) Do not use the currently unused area from SM0 to SM1023 as
the primary memory.

(2) Special register SD is the data register whose application is fixed. (i.e. 1-second counter) Do not use the
currently unused area from SD0 to SD1023 as the primary memory.

Link relay B, link

register W
(a) This relay is cleared when the power is turned OFF.
(b) There is no limit in the number that can be used in the program.
(c) The relay and register No. are expressed with a decimal.

II - 19
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

(3) Some of the main relays and registers whose applications are fixed are listed below.
Refer to "Appendix 3 List of Special Relays and Special Registers" for details.

Device Name Details

SM0 PLC error Turns ON at PLC error occurrence; resets when
changed from STOP to RUN.
SM12 Carry flag Used with various machine types
SM400 Always ON Always ON
SM401 Always OFF Always OFF
SM402 After RUN, turned ON by only (For medium-speed ladder)
1 scan.
SM403 After RUN, turned OFF by
only 1 scan.
SM404 After RUN, turned ON by only (For high-speed ladder)
1 scan.
SM405 After RUN, turned OFF by
only 1 scan.
SM410 0.1-second clock • ON/OFF is repeated every specified amount of time
SM411 0.2-second clock divided by 2.
SM412 1-second clock • Operation is continued even during STOP
SM413 2-second clock • Starts from OFF when starting up
SM414 2n-second clock ON/OFF is repeated according to the second
specified with SD414.
Device Name Details
SD0 PLC error No. Error code when a PLC error occurs.
SD412 1-second clock Number of counts in 1sec unit
SD414 2n-second clock set Used for the 2n-second clock setting
SD420 Scan counter (Medium-speed Number of counts per 1 scan
ladder) • After RUN, +1 is added every 1 scan.
SD430 Scan counter (High-speed
ladder)

5.3.6 Edge relay V

Edge relay V
(a) This stores the operation result (ON/OFF information) from the head of ladder block.
(b) This can be used only at contacts. This cannot be used as a coil.

X0 X1 X10 V1

Edge relay
Operation results of X0,X1 and X10
are stored.

(c) The relay No. is expressed with a decimal.

II - 20
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.7 Timer T
(4) The 100ms timer and 10ms timer are available for this count-up type timer.
The 100ms timer and 10ms timer are differentiated by the instructions used. Refer to the following
explanation on basic instructions for details.

100ms Timer T

(a) When the input conditions are set, the count starts. When the set value is counted, that timer
contact will turn ON.
(b) If the input conditions are turned OFF, the 100ms timer count value will be set to 0, and the
contact will turn OFF.
ON
X5 X5 OFF
K50
「 T193 T193 coil OFF ON
5 seconds
T193 contact OFF
Input 100ms timer
conditions ON

(c) The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767 (0.1 to 3276.7 s).
The data register D or file register R data can be used as the setting value.

10ms Timer T

(a) When the input conditions are set, the count starts. When the set value is counted, that timer
contact will turn ON.
(b) If the input conditions are turned OFF, the 10ms timer count value will be set to 0, and the contact
will turn OFF.

Display for 10ms timer instruction

ON
X5 X5 OFF
H K500
T1 T1 coil OFF ON
5 secnds
T1 contact OFF
Input 10ms timer
conditions ON

(c) The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767 (0.01 to 327.67 s).
The data register D or file register R data can be used as the setting value.

(2) With the device T, the contact/coil is handled as bit device, and the current value is handled as word
device. In the function instructions described after, the word device T indicates the current value even if
there is no description about it.

II - 21
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

(3) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods.
• Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (Fixed timer)
• Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (Variable timer)
(Note that even when this method is used, the setting value (Kn) must be programmed in the
sequence program. In this case, the Kn value will be ignored during the operation. When a data
register D is used for the setting value, the contents of the data register D will be the setting value
regardless of the parameter.)

(a) Methods for setting the number of fixed timer and variable timer points
The ratio of the fixed timer and variable timer in all of the timer T points can be set with the bit
selection parameter.
The boundary of the two setting methods is set using 100 points of the timer as one unit. This setting
is validated when the PLC is restarted.

Variable timer Bit selection (#6454)

Remarks
Number of points Range Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 0 0 Use all points as fixed timer
100 (0 to 99) 0 0 0 1
200 (0 to 199) 0 0 1 0
300 (0 to 299) 0 0 1 1 Use range other than that shown on
400 (0 to 399) 0 1 0 0 left as fixed timer
500 (0 to 499) 0 1 0 1
600 (0 to 599) 0 1 1 0
All points (0 to 703) 0 1 1 1 Use all points as variable timer

(b) Variable timer validity setting bit on program side

A bit selection parameter is provided as a switch for the variable timer to invalidate all of the setting
values set from the setting and display unit and validate the setting values in the sequence program.
This setting is valid when the PLC is restarted. (This bit is valid also for the integrated timer.)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
# (6449) Data (0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1)
↑
0: PLC timer screen setting valid
Use No. 6449
1: PLC timer program valid
0: PLC counter screen setting valid
1: PLC counter program valid

(c) Methods for setting the setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer and counter setting value can be set from the parameter setting screen. Steps 1 to 4 also
apply for the counter.
1) The set value is validated when the PLC is restarted.
2) On the setting screen, only the number of variable timer points set with (a) are valid. The (a)
setting is immediately reflected on the display of the settable range.
3) The setting screen values are not affected even if the (b) "variable timer validity setting bit on
program side" setting is changed.
4) It is possible to judge whether the setting value is valid within the current storage ladder
(whether that timer is used with the setting value (Kn) in the ladder).
5) The timer type (10ms, 100ms) can be judged on the setting screen.

II - 22
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.8 Integrated Timer ST

(1) The 100ms integrated timer is available for this count-up type timer.
100ms Integrated timer ST

(a) When the input conditions are set, the count starts. When the set value is counted, that timer
contact will turn ON.
(b) Even the input conditions are turned OFF, the 100ms integrated timer current value (count value)
will be held, and the contact state will not change.
(c) The 100ms integrated timer count value will be set to 0 and the contact will turn OFF when the RST
instruction is executed.
X5
K100 ON
ST47
X5 OFF 9 seconds 6 seconds
Input conditions 1.5 seconds
X7 100ms integrated timer
ON
RST ST47 X7 OFF

Reset input ST47 reset instruction

ON
9 seconds 6 seconds
ST47 coil OFF
1 second

ON
ST47 contact OFF

ST47 current value 0 1 90 91 100 0 1 60

(d) The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767 (0.1 to 3267.7 s). The data
register D or file register R data can be used as the setting value.
(e) When the bit selection parameter is set, the 100ms integrated timer current value (count value) will
be held even when the power is turned OFF.

(2) Handling the device ST types

With the device ST, the contact/coil is handled as bit device, and the current value is handled as word
device. In the function instructions described after, the word device T indicates the current value even if
there is no description about it.

(3) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The ratio of the variable and fixed can be set with the bit selection parameter in the same manner as
timer T.
Variable integrated timer Bit selection (#6453)
Remarks
Number of points Range Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
0 0 0 0 Use all points as fixed integrated timer
20 (0 to 19) 0 0 1 Use range other than that shown on left
40 (0 to 39) 0 1 0 as fixed integrated counter
All points (0 to 63) 0 1 1 Use all points as variable integrated timer

In the same manner as timer T, a bit selection parameter is provided as a switch for the variable
integrated timer to invalidate all of the setting values set from the setting and display unit and validate the
setting values in the sequence program. (This bit is used for both the timer T and integrated timer ST.)

II - 23
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.9 Counter C

(1) The counter counts up and detects the rising edge of the input conditions. Thus, the count will not take
place when the input conditions are ON.

Counter C

(a) The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767. The data register D or
file register R data can be used as the setting value.
(b) The counter count value will not be cleared even if the input conditions turn OFF. The counter
count value must be cleared with the RST instruction.
(c) When the bit selection parameter is set, the counter current value (count value) will be held even
when the power is turned OFF. Note that some cannot be held depending on the version of
CNC.

(2) With the device C, the contact/coil is handled as bit device, and the current value (counter value) is
handled as word device. In the function instructions described after, the word device C indicates the
current value (counter value) even if there is no description about it.

(3) The counter C setting value can be set with the following two methods.
(a) Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (Fixed counter)
(b) Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (Variable counter)
(Note that even when this method is used, the setting value (Kn) must be programmed in the
sequence program. In this case, the Kn value will be ignored during the operation. When a data
register D is used for the setting value, the contents of the data register D will be the setting value
regardless of the parameter.)

The ratio of the fixed counter and variable counter in all of the counter C points can be set with the bit
selection parameter.

Variable counter Bit selection (#6454)

Remarks
Number of points Range Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
0 0 0 0 0 Use all points as fixed counter
40 (0 to 39) 0 0 0 1
80 (0 to 79) 0 0 1 0
120 (0 to 119) 0 0 1 1 Use range other than that shown on
160 (0 to 159) 0 1 0 0 left as fixed counter
200 (0 to 199) 0 1 0 1
240 (0 to 239) 0 1 1 0
All points (0 to 255) 0 1 1 1 Use all points as variable counter

The bit selection parameter is set using 40 counter points as one unit.
A bit selection parameter is provided as a switch for the variable counter to invalidate all of the setting
values set from the setting and display unit and validate the setting values in the sequence program.
(Refer to the explanation on the timer.)

II - 24
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.10 Data Register D

(1) The data register is the memory that stores the data in the PLC.
(2) The data register has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units.
To handle 32-bit data, two points must be used. The data register No. designated with the 32-bit
instruction will be the low-order 16-bit, and the designated data register No. +1 will be the high-order
16-bit.
Circuit example (Example) Use of the DMOV instruction is shown below.

The X0 to 1F data is
0 DMOV K8X0 D0 stored in D0, 1.

Data storage
D1 D0

High-order 16-bit Low-order 16-bit

(X1F to X10) (XF to X0)

(3) The data that is stored once in the sequence program is held until other data is stored.
(4) The data stored in the data register is cleared when the power is turned OFF.
(5) Values that can be stored: Decimal -32768 to 32767 For 16-bit instruction (Using Dn)
Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF
Decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647 For 32-bit instruction
Hexadecimal 0 to FFFFFFFF (Using Dn+1, Dn)
(6) Data registers D0 to D2047 are all user release data registers.

II - 25
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.11 File Register R

(1) As with the data registers, the file registers are memories used to store data. However, there are some
that have fixed applications, and those that are released.
(2) The file register has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units.
To handle 32-bit data, two points must be used. The file register No. designated with the 32-bit instruction
will be the low-order 16-bit, and the designated file register No. +1 will be the high-order 16-bit.

Circuit example (Example) Use of the DMOV instruction is shown below.

The X0 to 1F data is
0 DMOV K8X0 R0 stored in R0, 1.

Data storage
R1 R0
High-order 16-bit Low-order 16-bit

(X1F to X10) (XF to X0)

(3) The data that is stored once in the sequence program is held until other data is stored.
(4) With the file registers, the following registers are the user release.
R8300 to R9799, R9800 to R9899
The following registers of the registers above are not cleared when the power is turned OFF.
R8300 to R9799
The other file registers have fixed applications such as interface of the PLC and CNC, parameter
interface, etc., so use according to the application.
(5) Values that can be stored: Decimal -32768 to 32767 For 16-bit instruction (Using Rn)
Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF
Decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647 For 32-bit instruction
Hexadecimal 0 to FFFFFFFF (Using Rn+1, Rn)

5.3.12 Index register Z

(1) The index register is used as ornaments for the device (T, ST, C, D, R, W, SW, SD).

159 MOV K3 Z0

165 MOV K4X0 D5Z0 D5Z0 indicates D(5+Z0)=D8

(2) The index register has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units.
(3) The data stored in the index register is cleared when the power is turned OFF.
(4) Values that can be stored: Decimal -32768 to 32767
Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF

II - 26
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.13 Nesting N

(1) This indicates the master control nesting structure.

(2) The master control nesting N is used in order from smallest No.

MC N0 M15
N0 M15

B Execute when A condition is set.

MC N1 M16
N1 M16

C Execute when A, B conditions are set.

MC N2 M17
N2 M17

Execute when A, B, C conditions are set.

MCR N2
Reset MC2 to 7
Execute when A, B conditions are set.
MCR N1
Reset MC1 to 7
Execute when A condition is set.
Reset MC0 to 7
MCR N0

Execute regardless of A,B,C conditions.

(a) The conditions for each master control to turn ON are as follow.

MC N0 M15 .......... ON when condition A is ON

MC N0 M16 .......... ON when conditions A, B are ON

MC N0 M17 .......... ON when conditions A, B, C are ON

(b) The timer and counter when the master control is OFF is as follows.
· 100ms timer, 10ms timer : The count value is set to 0.
· 100ms integrated timer : The current count value is retained.
· Counter : The current counter value is retained.
· OUT instruction : All turn OFF.

II - 27
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.14 Pointer P

(1) What is a pointer?

A pointer is a device used with branch instructions. A total of 2048 points is used in all executed
programs.
The reserved pointers use the 4000 addresses separately.

(2) Pointer applications

(a) Jump instruction (CJ, JMP) jump destination designation and label (Designation of jump destination
head)

X13
CJ P20 Jump to label P20 when
X13 turns ON.
Label
Pointer

P20

(b) Subroutine call instruction (CALL) call destination and label (Designation of subroutine program
head)

X10
CALL P33 Execute sub-routine
Label program designated with
Pointer
label P33 when X10 turns
P33

RET

(3) Types of pointers

The details of the pointers differ according to the program method.
(a) Independent program method
The following two types of pointers are used.
• General pointer : Pointer which can jump or call with a jump instruction or subroutine call
instruction
• Reserved pointer : Pointer with fixed application, such as a start label
(b) Multi-program method
The following three types of pointers are used.
• Local pointer : Pointer used independently in each program
• Common pointer : Pointer which can be called with subroutine call instruction from all programs
being executed
• Reserved pointer : Pointer with fixed application, such as an END label

II - 28
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.14.1 General Pointers

General pointers are pointer which can be used only with the independent program method, which lays
importance on compatibility with conventional models.
The general pointer can be used with the jump instructions and subroutine call instructions. The same pointer
No. cannot be used.

5.3.14.2 Local Pointers

Local pointers are pointers that can be used only with the multi-program method.
(1) What is a local pointer?
(a) A local pointer is a pointer that can be used independently with each program stored in the CNC
controller. The local pointer can be used with the jump instructions and subroutine call instructions.
(b) The same pointer No. can be used in each program.
The pointers from P0 to the common pointer usage range setting value (explained later) can be
used.

Program A Program B
The same pointer
can be used.
CALL P0 CALL P0

FEND FEND

P0 P0

RET RET

END END

(2) Concept of number of local pointer points

The local pointers split and use the local pointer area (arbitrarily settable with user settings) in all
programs. Up to the maximum No. of local pointers in use can be used in each program. When using the
local pointers in multiple programs, start use from P0.
An error will occur if the total of local pointers used in each program exceeds the setting number.

Program A Program B Program C

Use P0 to P99 Use P100 to P199 Use only P249

in the program in the program in the program

100 points from P0 to 200 points from P0 to 250 points from P0 to Total of 550 points
P99 are occupied P199 are occupied P249 are occupied are used

When P0 to P99 are When P0 is

used, only 100 used, only one
points are occupied. point is occupied.

II - 29
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.14.3 Common Pointers

Common pointers are pointers that can be used only with the multi-program method.

(1) What is a common pointer?

(a) A common pointer is a pointer that calls the subroutine program from all programs executed with the
CNC controller.
The common pointer can be used only with the subroutine call instruction, and cannot be used with
the jump instruction.
(b) The same pointer No. cannot be used as a label.

Program A Program C

CALL P1804 P1804 CALL P0

END RET

Program B P1805

CALL P1805 RET

END END

(2) Common pointer usage range

The common pointer usage range can be set with the GX Developer parameter settings. The range
following the set No. is the common pointers. The range that can be set as the head No. of the common
pointer is P0 to P2047. The default value is set to 1800, and P1800 to P2047 can be used as common
pointers.

II - 30
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.14.4 Reserved Pointers

Reserved pointers are pointers with fixed applications.

(1) Independent program method

P4001 (high-speed) : Start label for PLC high-speed processing program.
P4002 (medium-speed) : Start label for PLC main (ladder) processing program.
P4005 (END) : Label indicating END.
P4005 (END) can be used as a device for the CJ instruction, etc., but cannot be used as a label.
In addition, it cannot be used for a CALL instruction device.

X17
723 CJ P4005 Jump to END when X17
turns ON.
726

[CAUTION]
1. Do not omit the P4002 (medium-speed) label even when using only the PLC main processing
program.
2. Do not use P4001 (high-speed) or P4002 (medium-speed) as a CJ instruction or CALL instruction
device.
3. Do not program to jump to P** in the PLC high-speed processing program from the PLC main
processing program.
4. P** used as a CJ instruction or CALL instruction device must be programmed so that it is in the same
program file as the label instruction.

The PLC will not run properly if even one of Cautions 1 to 4 is not observed.

II - 31
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

(2) Multi-program method

(a) Label indicating END (P4005)
P4005 is used as the CJ instruction jump destination, and cannot be used as a normal label. It also
cannot be used as the CALL instruction call destination.
If CJ P4005 is executed when multiple PLC programs are registered with the multi-programming
function, the process will jump to the end of all PLC programs (in other words, the scan process is
canceled).

To jump to end of all processes

X17
CJ P4005 Cancel process (jump to
END of last program in
process) when X17 turns
ON.

The following two methods of jumping to the end of each program are available.
• Sets the local pointer right before the END instruction and jumps to that position.
• Executes GOEND instruction. (Usable only with the extended instruction mode)

To jump to the end of the program

X17
CJ P100 Jump to pointer before

END when X17 turns

ON.

P100 END

X17
GOEND Jump to END with
GOEND instruction
when X17 turns ON.

[Cautions for pointers in multi-program method]

1. Each process (initialization, high-speed, main) is executed from the head of the program executed at
the start of each process.
Thus, the reserved labels for starting, used with the conventional models, cannot be used.
2. The common pointers can be used only with subroutine call instructions, and cannot be used with
jump instructions.
3. The labels using the CJ instruction, JMP instruction or CALL instruction as a device must be
programmed so that one of the following exists.
• If the pointer is a local pointer, it must exist in the same program file as the used instruction.
• If the pointer is a common pointer, it must exist in one of the registered program files.

The PLC will not run properly if even one of Cautions 1 to 3 is not observed.

II - 32
 5. Explanation of Devices
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.15 Decimal Constant K

(1) The decimal constant can be used in the following ways.

(a) Timer counter setting value : Designate in the range of 1 to 32767.
(b) Pointer No. : 0 to 159
(c) Bit device digit designation : 1 to 8
(d) Basic instruction, function instruction, exclusive instruction value setting
• 16-bit instruction : -32768 to 32767
• 32-bit instruction : -2147483648 to 2147483647

(2) The decimal constant is stored by binary value in the PLC.

5.3.16 Hexadecimal Constant H

(1) The hexadecimal constant is used to designate the basic instruction, function instruction and exclusive
instruction values.
• 16-bit instruction : 0 to FFFF
• 32-bit instruction : 0 to FFFFFFFF

II - 33
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.1 Compatible Instructions and Extended Instructions

6. Explanation of Instructions
6.1 Compatible Instructions and Extended Instructions
The following two PLC instruction modes are available with this CNC. Characteristics and setting methods for
these instructions are explained here.
• Compatible PLC instruction mode (Usable model: 700 Series, 70 Series type A/type B)
• Extended PLC instruction mode (Usable model: 700 Series, 70 Series type A)

(1) Outline and differences of each mode

"Compatible PLC instruction mode" is set when instructions must be compatible with those of the
conventional machine type. In this mode, only the PLC instruction specification which is conventionally
compatible with can be used. If the extended PLC instruction is used, an execution error occurs at the
time of input or edit.

"Extended PLC instruction mode" is set when the extended instruction specification is used. "Extended
PLC instruction mode" includes the specification of "Compatible PLC instruction mode". (Note that
operations may differ for some instructions. Details are explained later.)
Specifications for each mode are given below.

Compatible Extended PLC

Conventional
PLC instruction instruction
machine type
mode mode
Number of basic
22 instructions ← 37 instructions
instructions
Number of function 198
71 instructions ←
instructions instructions
Usable device 15 devices 22 devices ←
Device designation
range of instruction － ← Extended
argument

(2) Setting method of PLC instruction mode

PLC instruction mode is set by bit selection parameter #6452.
(a) Bit selection parameter

Setting Standard
# No. Bit Item Details
range value
The condition of the usable instruction
PLC for the built-in PLC can be switched.
instruction 0: Operated in the compatible PLC
6452 Bit 1 0, 1 0
extension instruction mode
valid 1: Operated in the extended PLC
instruction mode

(b) Notes
• This parameter will be valid when the power is turned OFF and ON again.
• If expanding the PLC instruction is disabled during the use of expansion PLC instruction, an error
occurs at PLC RUN.
• Even if expanding the PLC instruction is enabled in 70 Series type B, the instruction is ignored
and operated in the compatible PLC instruction mode.

II - 34
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.1 Compatible Instructions and Extended Instructions

(3) Notes
The following instructions have different operations even if they are the same instructions, depending on
each instruction mode. For these instructions, it is highly recommended that the instructions should be
replaced with ones that are usable in both modes.
Compatible PLC instruction Extended PLC instruction Instruction
Instruction
mode mode replacement method
Operated as comparison "Replaceable
LD<= Operated as bit test instruction.
operation instruction. instructions" given in
AND<= (Alternative instruction for
(LD<=,AND<=,OR<= the instruction
OR<= LDBIT,ANDBIT,ORBIT)
instruction) specification details for
"LDBIT" indicated in
Operated as comparison
LD<> Operated as bit test instruction. "6.2.12 Special
operation instruction.
AND<> (Alternative instruction for Instructions for Old
(LD<>,AND<>,OR<>
OR<> LDBII,ANDBII,ORBII) Machine Type
instruction)
Compatible"
Refer to "Appendix
Operated as leading edge
Alternative instruction for DEFR 1.3.1 Alternative
pulse series connection
ANDP (pulse in respect to the Circuits Resulted from
instruction. (ANDP
operation result) instruction the Ban on DEFR
instruction)
Instruction"

II - 35
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.1 How to Read Instruction Table
The instruction tables have been made according to the following format.
No. of
Process unit

Description
steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
+ + S D
(D)+(S) (D) ■ 3 3 86
(BIN)
+P +P S D ■ 3 7 86
+ (BIN)

16-bit

+ + S1 S2 D 4 4 88
(S1)+(S2) (D)
(BIN)
+P + P S1 S2 D ■ 4 8 88

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

(1) • • • Classifies instructions according to their application

(2) • • • Indicates the processing unit of instructions.

(3) • • • Indicates the instruction symbol used to enter the instruction in a program
Instruction code is built around the 16-bit instruction, with the following notations used to mark 32-bit
instructions, instructions executed only at the leading edge of OFF to ON, real number instructions,
and character string instructions.
• 32-bit instruction • • • The letter "D" is added to the first line of the instruction
(Example)
+ D+

16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

• Instructions executed only at the leading edge of OFF to ON • • • The letter "P" is appended to
the end of the instruction
(Example)
+ +P

Instructions Instructions executed only at the

executed when ON leading edge of OFF to ON

(4) • • • Shows symbol drawing on the ladder

+ S D + S1 S2 D

Indicates destination Indicates destination

Indicates source Indicates source
Indicates instruction symbol Indicates instruction symbol

Destination……….Indicates where data will be sent following operation

Source………………Stores data prior to operation

II - 36
6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

(5) • • • Indicates the type of processing that is performed by individual instructions

(D) + (S) (D) (D+1,D) + (S+1,S) (D+1,D)

16 bits 16 bits

Indicates 16 bits Indicates 32 bits

D+1 D
Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits

(6) • • • The details of conditions for the execution of individual instructions are as follows.
Symbol Execution Condition
No Instruction executed under normal circumstances, with no regard to the ON/OFF status
symbol of conditions prior to the instruction.
recorded If the precondition is OFF, the instruction will conduct OFF processing.
Executed during ON; instruction is executed only while the precondition is ON. If the
precondition is OFF, the instruction is not executed and no processing is conducted.
Executed once at ON; instruction executed only at leading edge when precondition
goes from OFF to ON. Following execution, instruction will not be executed and no
processing conducted even if condition remains ON.
Executed once at OFF; instruction executed only at trailing edge when precondition
goes from ON to OFF. Following execution, instruction will not be executed and no
processing conducted even if condition remains OFF.

(7) • • • "■" mark indicates that the instruction is an extended instruction.

An extended instruction operates in "Extended PLC instruction mode". When an extended instruction
is used in "Compatible PLC instruction mode", an error occurs at input, edit or execution.

(8) • • • Indicates the number of steps when storing each instruction.

This is the number of steps that is consumed when each instruction is stored in F-ROM. Refer to "2.6
Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode " for details.

(9) • • • Indicates the number of steps when executing each instruction.

This is the number of steps that is consumed in the PLC processor execution area when each
instruction is executed. The number of steps may be different from that of when stored in F-ROM.
Refer to "2.6 Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode " for details.

(10) • • • Indicates the page numbers where the individual instructions are discussed.

II - 37
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.2 Basic Instructions

No. of
Process unit

Description
Instruction steps

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
Start of logic operation 1/2 1/2
LD 58
(A contact operation start) *1 *2

Start of logic negation operation 1/2 1/2

LDI 58
(B contact operation start) *1 *2

Logical AND 1/2 1/2

AND 58
(A contact serial connection) *1 *2

Logical AND negation 1/2 1/2

ANI 58
(B contact serial connection) *1 *2

Logical OR 1/2 1/2

OR 58
(A contact parallel connection) *1 *2

Logical OR negation 1/2 1/2

ORI 58
(B contact parallel connection) *1 *2

AND between logical blocks (Serial

ANB 1 1 60
connection between blocks)
OR between logical blocks
ORB 1 1 60
(Parallel connection between blocks)
LDP Starts leading edge pulse operation ■ 1/2*1 4 62
Basic instruction

LDF Starts trailing edge pulse operation ■ 1/2*1 4 62

■ 1/2*1
Bit

ANDP Leading edge pulse series connection 4 62

ANDF Trailing edge pulse series connection ■ 1/2*1 4 62

ORP Leading edge pulse parallel connection ■ 1/2*1 4 62

ORF Trailing edge pulse parallel connection ■ 1/2*1 4 62

INV Inversion of operation result ■ 1 3 64

Conversion of operation result to leading

MEP
edge pulse
■ 1 3 65

Conversion of operation result to

MEF ■ 1 3 65
trailing edge pulse
Conversion of operation result to
EGP Vn
■ 1 3 66
leading edge pulse (Stored at Vn)
Vn Conversion of operation result to
EGF ■ 1 3 66
trailing edge pulse (Stored at Vn)
OUT Device output 1/2 1/2 67
*1 *2

OUT T/C 100ms timer/counter output 4 3 69,71

OUT H 10ms timer output 4 3 69

(To be continued on the next page)
*1: Argument will be 2 steps at F device.
*2: Argument will be 1 step at bit device, 2 steps at word device.

II - 38
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

Basic instructions (continued)

No. of
Process unit

Description
steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
SET SET D Device set 1/2 1/2 73
*1 *2

RST RST D Device reset 1/2 1/2 75

*1 *2

RST T/C RST D Timer/counter reset 4 2 75

MC MC n D Master control start 2 2 77

MCR MCR n Master control release 1 1 77

PLS D Generate one cycle worth of pulses at

PLS 2 2 79
rising edge of input signal
PLF D Generate one cycle worth of pulses at
PLF 2 2 79
falling edge of input signal
Basic instruction

FF FF D Reversal of device output ■ 2 5 81

Bit

SFT SFT D 2 1/2 82

*2
Device 1-bit shift
SFTP SFTP D ■ 2 6 82

MPS Registration of operation result 1 1 84

MPS Read of operation results registered in

MRD 1 1 84
MRD
MPS
Reading and resetting of operation
MPP MPP 1 1 84
results registered in MPS
Ignored (For program deletion or
NOP 1 1 86
space)
Ignored (To change pages during
NOPLF NOPLF ■ 1 1 86
printouts)
Ignored (Subsequent programs will be
PAGE PAGE n ■ 1 1 86
controlled from step 0 of page n)

*1: 2 steps when the argument is F device.

*2: 1 step when the argument is bit device; 2 steps when the argument is word device.

II - 39
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.3 Comparison Instructions

No. of
Process unit

Description
Instruction steps

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
LD= = S1 S2 3 3 90
16-bit

Continuity state when (S1) (S2)

AND= = S1 S2 3 3 90
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR= = S1 S2 3 3 90

LDD= D= S1 S2 3/4 3/4 92

Continuity state when *1 *1
32-bit

(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) 3/4 3/4

ANDD= D= S1 S2 92
Non-continuity state when *1 *1

(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) 3/4 3/4

ORD= D= S1 S2 92
*1 *1

LD<> <> S1 S2 ■ 3 3 90
16-bit

Continuity state when (S1) (S2)

AND<> <> S1 S2 ■ 3 3 90
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR<> <> S1 S2 ■ 3 3 90

LDD<> D <> S1 S2 ■ 3/4

*1
3/4
*1
92
Continuity state when
32-bit

(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ANDD<> D <> S1 S2
Non-continuity state when
■ 3/4
*1
3/4
*1
92
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ORD<> D <> S1 S2 ■ 3/4
*1
3/4
*1
92

LD> > S1 S2 3 3 90
16-bit

Continuity state when (S1) (S2)

AND> > S1 S2 3 3 90
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR> > S1 S2 3 3 90

LDD> D> S1 S2 3/4 3/4 92

Continuity state when *1 *1
32-bit

(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) 3/4 3/4

ANDD> D> S1 S2 92
Non-continuity state when *1 *1

(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) 3/4 3/4

ORD> D> S1 S2 92
*1 *1

LD>= >= S1 S2 ■ 3 3 90
16-bit

Continuity state when (S1) (S2)

AND>= >= S1 S2 ■ 3 3 90
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR>= >= S1 S2 ■ 3 3 90

LDD>= D > = S1 S2 ■ 3/4 3/4 92

Continuity state when *1 *1
32-bit

(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ANDD>= D > = S1 S2 ■ 3/4 3/4 92
Non-continuity state when *1 *1

(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ORD>= D > = S1 S2 ■ 3/4
*1
3/4
*1
92
(To be continued on the next page)
*1: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

II - 40
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

Comparison instructions (continued)

No. of
Process unit

Description
steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
LD< < S1 S2 3 3 90
16-bit

< S1 S2
Continuity state when (S1) (S2)
AND< 3 3 90
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR< < S1 S2 3 3 90

LDD< D< S1 S2 3/4 3/4 92

Continuity state when *1 *1
32-bit

D< S1 S2
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) 3/4 3/4
ANDD< Non-continuity state when *1 *1
92

S1 S2
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) 3/4 3/4
ORD< D< 92
*1 *1

LD<= <= S1 S2 ■ 3 3 90
16-bit

Continuity state when (S1) (S2)

AND<= <= S1 S2 ■ 3 3 90
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR<= <= S1 S2 ■ 3 3 90

LDD<= D < = S1 S2 ■ 3/4 3/4 92

Continuity state when *1 *1
32-bit

(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ANDD<= D < = S1 S2 ■ 3/4 3/4 92
Non-continuity state when *1 *1

(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ORD<= D < = S1 S2 ■ 3/4
*1
3/4
*1
92

*1: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

6.2.4 Arithmetic Operation Instructions

No. of
Process unit

steps Description
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution

Symbol Process details

Storage

+ + S D ■ 3 3 96
(D)+(S) (D)
(BIN)
+P +P S D ■ 3 7 96
16-bit

+ + S1 S2 D 4 4 94
(S1)+(S2) (D)
(BIN)
+P + P S1 S2 D ■ 4 8 94
+ (BIN)

D+ D+ S D ■ 3/4 3/4 100

(D+1,D)+(S+1,S) (D+1,D) *1 *1

(BIN)
D+P D+P S D ■ 3/4 7/8 100
32-bit

*1 *1

D+ D + S1 S2 D 4/5 4/5 98
(S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) *2 *2

(BIN)
D+P D+P S1 S2 D ■ 4/5
*2
8/9
*2
98
(To be continued on the next page)
*1: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.
*2: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

II - 41
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

Arithmetic operation instructions (continued)

No. of
Process unit

Description
steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
- - S D ■ 3 3 96
(D) (S) (D)
(BIN)
-P -P S D ■ 3 7 96
16-bit

- - S1 S2 D 4 4 94
(S1) (S2) (D)
(BIN)
-P -P S1 S2 D ■ 4 8 94
- (BIN)

D- D- S D ■ 3/4 3/4 100

(D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D) *1 *1

(BIN)
D-P D-P S D ■ 3/4 7/8 100
32-bit

*1 *1

D- D- S1 S2 D 4/5 4/5 98
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) *2 *2

(BIN)
D-P D-P S1 S2 D ■ 4/5
*2
8/9
*2
98

* * S1 S2 D 4 4 102
16-bit

(S1) (S2) (D+1,D)

(BIN)
*P *P S1 S2 D ■ 4 8 102
* (BIN)

D* D * S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) 4/5 4/5 104

32-bit

*2 *2
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
D*P D*P S1 S2 D (BIN) ■ 4/5
*2
8/9
*2
104

/ / S1 S2 D (S1) (S2) 4 4 102

16-bit

Quotient(D),Remainder(D+1)
/P /P S1 S2 D (BIN) ■ 4 8 102
/ (BIN)

D/ S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) 4/5 4/5

D/ 104
32-bit

Quotient(D+1,D), *2 *2

Remainder(D+3,D+2)
D/P D/P S1 S2 D ■ 4/5
*2
8/9
*2
104
(BIN)
B+ B + S1 S2 D ■ 4 5 106
(S1)+(S2) (D)
(BCD)
Four arithmetic operations (BCD)

B+P B+P S1 S2 D ■ 4 9 106

B- B- S1 S2 D ■ 4 5 106
(S1) (S2) (D)
(BCD)
B-P B-P S1 S2 D ■ 4 9 106
16-bit

B* B* S1 S2 D ■ 4 5 108
(S1) (S2) (D+1,D)
(BCD)
B*P B*P S1 S2 D ■ 4 9 108

B/ B/ S1 S2 D (S1) (S2) ■ 4 5 108

Quotient(D),Remainder(D+1)
B/P B/P S1 S2 D (BCD) ■ 4 9 108
(To be continued on the next page)
*1: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.
*2: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

II - 42
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

Arithmetic operation instructions (continued)

No. of
Process unit

Description
steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
INC INC D 2 2 110
16-bit

(D)+1 (D)
INCP INCP D ■ 2 6 110
+1
DINC DINC D 2 2 112
32-bit

(D+1,D)+1 (D+1,D)
DINCP DINCP D ■ 2 6 112

DEC DEC D 2 2 110

16-bit

(D) 1 (D)
DECP DECP D ■ 2 6 110
-1
DDEC DDEC D 2 2 112
32-bit

(D+1,D) 1 (D+1,D)
DDECP DDECP D ■ 2 6 112

NEG NEG D 2 2 114

Complement of 2

16-bit

• (D) (D)
BIN data
NEGP NEGP D ■ 2 6 114

DNEG DNEG D
• (D+1, D) (D+1, D) ■ 2 2 114
32-bit

DNEGP DNEGP D BIN data ■ 2 6 114

*1: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.

*2: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

6.2.5 BCD<->BIN Conversion Instructions

No. of
Process unit

Description
steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution

Symbol Process details

Storage

BCD S D BCD
BCD 3 3 116
16-bit

conversion
• ___
(S) (D)
BCDP BCDP S D BIN (0 to 9999) ■ 3 7 116
BCD

DBCD DBCD S D BCD 3 3 116

32-bit

conversion
• _______
(S+1, S) (D+1, D)
DBCDP DBCDP S D BIN (0 to 99999999) ■ 3 7 116

BIN BIN S D BIN 3 3 118

16-bit

conversion
• ___
(S) (D)
BINP BINP S D BCD (0 to 9999) ■ 3 7 118
BIN

DBIN DBIN S D BIN 3 3 118

32-bit

conversion
• _______
(S+1, S) (D+1, D)
DBINP DBINP S D BCD (0 to 99999999) ■ 3 7 118

II - 43
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.6 Data Transmission Instructions

No. of
Process unit

Description
Instruction steps

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
MOV MOV S D 3 3 120
16-bit

⋅ (S) (D)
MOVP MOVP S D ■ 3 7 120

DMOV DMOV S D 3/4 3/4 120

32-bit

*1 *1
⋅ (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
Transmission

DMOVP DMOVP S D ■ 3/4

*1
7/8
*1
120

CML CML S D ■ 3 3 122

16-bit

⋅ (S) (D)
CMLP CMLP S D ■ 3 7 122

DCML DCML S D ■ 3/4 3/4 122

32-bit

*1 *1
⋅ (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
DCMLP DCMLP S D ■ 3/4
*1
7/8
*1
122

XCH XCH D1 D2 3 3 124

16-bit

⋅ (D1) (D2)
Conversion

XCHP XCHP D1 D2 ■ 3 7 124

DXCH DXCH D1 D2 3 3 124

32-bit

⋅ (D1+1,D1) (D2+1,D2)
DXCHP DXCH D1 D2 ■ 3 7 124
transmission of same data

BMOV BMOV S D n (S) (D) 4 4 126

16-bit
Batch

n
BMOVP BMOVP S D n ■ 4 8 126
transmission

FMOV FMOV S D n (D) 4 4 128

16-bit
Batch

(S)
n
FMOVP FMOVP S D n ■ 4 8 128
transmission

S.TMOV S D
Timer

Transfer of timer and counter setting

S.TMOV 6 3 130
value

*1: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.

II - 44
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.7 Program Branch Instruction

No. of
Process unit

Description
Instruction steps

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
CJ
Jump to Pn upon establishment of
CJ P** 2 2 131
input condition
Jump

- JMP JMP P** Jump to Pn unconditionally ■ 2 2 131

Jump to END instruction upon
GOEND GOEND ■ 1 2 134
establishment of input condition
End process during sequence
Program Subroutine

- FEND FEND 1 1 133

program
end

END END End sequence program 1 1

- CALL CALL P** 2 3 135

Execute P** sub-routine program after
call

input conditions are met

- CALLP CALLP P** ■ 2 7 135

RET
Return

Return to main program from

- RET 1 1 135
subroutine program

- FOR FOR n Execute the interval between FOR ■ 2 3 137

Repetition

- NEXT NEXT and NEXT for n times. ■ 1 3 137

Forcibly end the execution of the
- BREAK BREAK D P** ■ 3 4 139
interval between FOR and
- BREAKP BREAKP D P** ■ 3 8 139
NEXT , and jump to the pointer Pn.

II - 45
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.8 Logical Operation Instructions

No. of
Process unit

Description
Instruction steps

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
WAND WAND S D ■ 3 3 142
⋅ (D) (S) (D)
WANDP WAND S D ■ 3 7 142
16-bit

WAND WAND S1 S2 D 4 4 141

⋅ (S1) (S2) (D)
Logical AND

WANDP WANDP S1 S2 D ■ 4 8 141

DAND DAND S D 3/4 3/4 142

*1 *1
⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
DANDP DAND S1 S2 D ■ 3/4 7/8 142
32-bit

*1 *1

DAND DAND S1 S2 D ■ 4/5

*2
4/5
*2
141
⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DANDP DANDP S1 S2 D ■ 4/5
*2
8/9
*2
141
(To be continued on the next page)
*1: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.
*2: 1step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

II - 46
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

Logical operation instructions (continued)

No. of
Process unit

Description
steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
WOR WOR S D ■ 3 3 145
⋅ (D) (S) (D)
WORP WORP S D ■ 3 7 145
16-bit

WOR WOR S1 S2 D 4 4 144

⋅ (S1) (S2) (D)
Logical OR

WORP WORP S1 S2 D ■ 4 8 144

DOR DOR S D 3/4 3/4 145

*1 *1
⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
DORP WNXR S1 S2 D ■ 3/4 7/8 145
32-bit

*1 *1

DOR DOR S1 S2 D ■ 4/5

*2
4/5
*2
144
⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DORP DORP S1 S2 D ■ 4/5
*2
8/9
*2
144

WXOR WXOR S D ■ 3 3 148

⋅ (D) (S) (D)
WXORP WXORP S D ■ 3 7 148
16-bit

WXOR WXOR S1 S2 D 4 4 147

⋅ (S1)
Exclusive OR

(S2) (D)
WXORP WXORP S1 S2 D ■ 4 8 147

DXOR DXOR S D 3/4 3/4 148

*1 *1
⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
DXORP DXORP S D ■ 3/4 7/8 148
32-bit

*1 *1

DXOR DXOR S1 S2 D ■ 4/5

*2
4/5
*2
147
⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DXORP DXORP S1 S2 D ■ 4/5
*2
8/9
*2
147

WXNR WXNR S D ■ 3 3 151

⋅ (D) (S) (D)
WXNRP WXNR S D ■ 3 7 151
16-bit
Non exclusive logical sum

WXNR WXNR S1 S2 D ■ 4 4 150

⋅ (S1) (S2) (D)
WXNRP WXNRP S1 S2 D ■ 4 8 150

DXNR DXNR S D ■ 3/4

*1
3/4
*1
151
⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
DXNRP DXNRP S D ■ 3/4 7/8 151
32-bit

*1 *1

DXNR DXNR S1 S2 D ■ 4/5

*2
4/5
*2
150
⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DXNRP DXNRP S1 S2 D ■ 4/5
*2
8/9
*2
150

*1: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.

*2: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

II - 47
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.9 Rotation Instructions

No. of
Process unit

Description
Instruction steps

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
ROR D n b15 (D) b0 SM12
ROR 3 3/4 153

RORP RORP D n Rotate n bits right. ■ 3 7/8 153

16-bit

RCR RCR D n b15 (D) b0 SM12 3 3/4 153

Right rotation

RCRP RCRP D n Rotate n bits right. ■ 3 7/8 153

(D+1) (D)
DROR DROR D n b31 ~ b16 b15 ~ b0 SM12 3 3/4 157

DRORP DRORP D n ■ 3 7/8 157

32-bit

Rotate n bits right.

(D+1) (D)
DRCR DRCR D n b31 ~ b16 b15 ~ b0 SM12 3 3/4 157

DRCRP DRCRP D n ■ 3 7/8 157

Rotate n bits right.

D n SM12 b15 (D) b0

ROL ROL 3 3/4 155

ROLP ROLP D n Rotate n bits left. ■ 3 7/8 155

16-bit

RCL RCL D n SM12 b15 (D) b0 3 3/4 155

Left rotation

RCLP RCLP D n Rotate n bits left. ■ 3 7/8 155

(D+1) (D)
DROL DROL D n SM12 b31 ~ b16 b15 ~ b0 3 3/4 159

DROLP DROLP D n ■ 3 7/8 159

32-bit

Rotate n bits left.

(D+1) (D)
DRCL DRCL D n SM12 b31 ~ b16 b15 ~ b0 3 3/4 159

DRCLP DRCLP D n ■ 3 7/8 159

Rotate n bits left.

SFR SFR D n b15 bn b0 3 3/4 161

16-bit

■
Right shift

SFRP SFRP D n b15 b0 SM12 3 7/8 161

0~0
n
Device unit

DSFR DSFR D n 3 3/4 163

(D)

DSFRP DSFRP D n ■ 3 7/8 163

0

SFL SFL D n b15 bn b0 3 3/4 161

16-bit

SFLP SFLP D n SM12 b15 b0 ■ 3 7/8 161

Left shift

0~0
n
Device unit

DSFL DSFL D n 3 3/4 163

(D)

DSFLP DSFLP D n ■ 3 7/8 163

0

II - 48
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.10 Data Processing Instructions

No. of
Process unit

Description
Instruction steps

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
(S2)
SER SER S1 S2 D (S1) 5 6 165
16-bit

SERP SERP S1 S2 D (D): Match No. ■ 5 10 165

Search

(D+1): Number of matches

32 bit
DSER DSER S1 S2 D
(S1)
(S2) ■ 5 6 165
32-bit

n
DSERP DSERP S1 S2 D (D): Match No. ■ 5 10 165
(D+1): Number of matches
Number of bits set to "1"

SUM SUM S D (S) 3 3 167

16-bit

b15 b0
SUMP SUMP S D (D): Number of "1"s ■ 3 7 167

DSUM DSUM S D (S＋1) (S) ■ 3 3 167

32-bit

(D): Number of "1"s

DSUMP DSUMP S D ■ 3 7 167

SEG SEG S D
b3 to bO 3 3 169
16-bit

(S) (D)
7SEG
■
Decode

SEGP SEGP S D 3 7 169

DECO DECO S D n 8 256 decode 4 4 171

2n bit

(D)
(S) Decode
2 n bit
DECOP DECOP S D n n ■ 4 8 171

■
Encode

ENCO ENCO S D n 256 8 encode 4 4 173

2 bit

(S)
n

Encode (D)
2 bit
ENCOP ENCOP S D n n ■ 4 8 173

16-bit data average value

Average
16-bit
value

S.AVE S.AVE S D n 1 n ■ 7 4 175

Σ
n i=1 (S+i) → (D)

II - 49
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.11 Other Function Instructions

No. of
Process unit

Description
Instruction steps

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
Carry flag set

Carry flag contact (SM12) is turned

― S.STC S.STC 4 1 176
ON.
Carry flag
reset

Carry flag contact (SM12) is turned

― S.CLC S.CLC 4 1 176
OFF.

II - 50
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.12 Special Instructions for Old Machine Type Compatible

No. of
Process unit

Description
Instruction steps

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
Bit test (A contact operation start
LDBIT <= S1 n 3 2 177
handling) (Note 1)
Bit test (A contact series connection
ANDBIT <= S1 n 3 2 177
handling) (Note 1)
Bit test (A contact parallel connection
ORBIT <= S1 n 3 2 177
handling) (Note 1)
1-bit
BIT

Bit test (B contact operation start

LDBII <> S1 n 3 2 179
handling) (Note 1)
Bit test (B contact series connection
ANDBII <> S1 n 3 2 179
handling) (Note 1)
Bit test (B contact parallel connection
ORBII <> S1 n 3 2 179
handling) (Note 1)
(Note) These instructions can be used with the compatible instruction mode as they are compatible with old
machine types but will not be available in the future.

6.2.13 Exclusive Instructions

No. of
Process unit

Description
steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
K1: Tool No. search 191
K2: Tool No. AND operation search 192
K3: Tool change 193
K4: Arbitrary position tool change 194
K5: Forward run of pointer 195
ATC

― S.ATC S.ATC Kn Rn Rm Mn K6: Reverse run of pointer 8 5 195

K7: Forward run of tool table 196
K8: Reverse run of tool table 196
K9: Tool table read 197
K10: Tool table write 198
K11: Automatic write of tool table 199
K1: Rotary body index 204
ROT

― S.ROT S.ROT Kn Rn Rm Mn 8 5
K3: Ring counter 207

II - 51
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.3 Data Designation Method

6.3 Data Designation Method

The following three types of data can be used in each instruction.
(1) Bit data
(2) Word (16-bit) data
(3) Double-word (32-bit) data

6.3.1 Bit Data

Bit data is data which handles contacts and coils, etc., in 1-bit units.
"Bit devices" and "bit-designated word devices" can be used as bit data.

(1) When using bit devices

The bit device is designated with a 1-point unit.

One M0 point is target.

M0
SET Y10

One Y10 point is target.

(2) When using word devices

With the word device, when the bit No. is designated, the bit for the designated bit No. can be used as bit
data.

b15 ~ b0
Word device 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

Each bit can be used with 1 as ON and 0 as OFF

The word device bit is designated as "word device","bit number".

(The bit No. is designated with a hexadecimal.)
For example, D0 bit 5 (b5) is designated as D0.5, and D0 bit 10 (b10) is designated as D0.A.
Note that the bit designated cannot be used for the timer (T), integrated timer (ST) or counter (C).

Word device bit designation

X0
(Turn D0 bit 5(b5) ON(1).)
SET D0.5
Word device bit designation
D0.5 (Turn ON/OFF by setting D0 bit 5(b5) to 1/0.)
SET Y10

II - 52
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.3 Data Designation Method

6.3.2 Word (16-bit) Data

Word data is a 16-bit numerical value data used with the basic instructions and applied instructions.
Word devices and digit-designated bit devices can be used with the word data.

(1) When using bit devices

Bit devices can be used as word devices by designating digits.
The bit data digit is designated as "number of digits""bit device head No.".
The digits can be designated between K1 and K4 with a 4-point (4-bit) unit.
The target numbers of points when X0 is designated as the digit are shown below.
• K1X0 --- 4 points X0 to X3 are the target
• K2X0 --- 8 points X0 to X7 are the target
• K3X0 --- 12 points X0 to XB are the target
• K4X0 --- 16 points X0 to XF are the target

XF to XC XB to X8 X7 to X4 X3 to X0

K1 designation
range
(4 points)
K2 designation
range
(8 points)
K3 designation
range
(12 points)
K4 designation
range
(16 points)

List of Numeric Values that Can Be Dealt with as Source Data for Digit Designation at Source (S) Side
Number of Digits Designated With 16-Bit Instruction
K1 (4 points) 0 to 15
K2 (8 points) 0 to 255
K3 (12 points) 0 to 4095
K4 (16 points) -32768 to 32767

If the source side is a digit-designated bit device, and the destination is a word device, the word device
on the destination side will be 0 after the digit-designated bits on the source side.

Ladder Example Processing

With 16-bit instruction
K1X0 X3X2X1X0

MOV K1X0 D0 Become 0

b15 …………………… b4 b3 b2 b1b0

Source (S) data D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X3X2X1X0

II - 53
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.3 Data Designation Method

When a digit is designated on the destination (D) side, the No. of points designated by the digit will be the
target of the destination side.

Ladder Example Processing

When source data (S) is a numerical value
1 2 3 4

H1234 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
MOV H1234 K2M0

M15･････････････M8M7･･････････････M0
Destination (D) K2M0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

Do not change 3 4

When source data (S) is a bit device

M15･･･････････････M8M7････････････････M0
K1M0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

(Note)

MOV K1M0 K2M100 M115･････････････M108M107･･M104M103･･M100

K2M100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

Destination (D) Do not change 0 is Data in M3 to

transferred M0 is
transferred.

When source data (S) is a word device

M15･･･････････････M8M7････････････････M0
D0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

MOV D0 K2M100
M115･････････････M108M107･･M104M103･･M100
K2M100 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
Destination (D)
Do not change

(2) When using word devices

Word devices are designated in 1-point (16 bits) units.

M0
MOV K100 D0

1 D0 point (16 bits) is word device

II - 54
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.3 Data Designation Method

6.3.3 Using Double Word Data (32 bits)

Double word data is 32-bit numerical data used by basic instructions and application instructions.
Word devices and bit devices designated by digit designation can be used as double word data.

(1) When using bit devices

Digit designation can be used to enable a bit device to deal with double word data.
Digit designation of bit devices is done by designating "Number of digits" and "Initial number of bit
device".
Digit designation of bit devices can be done in 4-point (4-bit) units, and designation can be made for K1
to K8.
For example, if X0 is designated for digit designation, the following points would be designated:
• K1X0 ….. The 4 points X0 through X3 are designated
• K2X0 ….. The 8 points X0 through X7 are designated
• K3X0 ….. The 12 points X0 through XB are designated
• K4X0 ….. The 16 points X0 through XF are designated
• K5X0 ….. The 20 points X0 through X13 are designated
• K6X0 ….. The 24 points X0 through X17 are designated
• K7X0 ….. The 28 points X0 through X1B are designated
• K8X0 ….. The 32 points X0 through X1F are designated

X1F X1CX1B X18X17 X14X13 X10XF XCXB X8X7 X4X3 X0

K1 designation range
(8 points)
K2 designation range
(8 points)
K3 designation range
(12points)
K4 designation range
(16 points)
K5 designation range
(20 points)
K6 designation range
(24 points)
K7 designation range
(28 points)
K8 designation range
(32 points)

List of Numeric Values that Can Be Dealt with as Source Data for Digit Designation at Source (S) Side
Number of Digits With 32-bit Number of
Digits With 32-bit Instructions
Designated Instructions
K1 (4 points) 0 to 15 K5 (20 points) 0 to 1048575
K2 (8 points) 0 to 255 K6 (24 points) 0 to 16772165
K3 (12 points) 0 to 4095 K7 (28 points) 0 to 268435455
K4 (16 points) 0 to 65535 K8 (32 points) -2147483648 to 2147483647

In cases where the source is a bit device designated by digit designation, and the destination is a word
device, the word device for the destination becomes 0 following the bit designated by digit designation at
the source.

II - 55
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.3 Data Designation Method

Ladder Example Processing

With 32-bit Instructions
K1X0 X3X2X1X0
Become 0
DMOV K1X0 D0 b15･･･････････････････････b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X3X2X1X0
D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Source (S) data b31 ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ b16

Become 0

(2) When using word devices

A word device designates devices used by the lower 16 bits of data.
A 32-bit instruction uses (designation device number) and (designation device number + 1).

M0
DMOV K100 D0

The 2 points D0 and D1(32 bits) are used

32-bit data transfer instruction

II - 56
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.4 Index Qualification

6.4 Index Qualification

Index qualification is an indirect setting made by using an index register.
When an index qualification is used in a sequence program, the device to be used will become the device
number designated directly plus the contents of the index register.
For example, if D0Z2 has been designated, and the content of Z2 is 3, D(2+3), or D5, will become the
designated device.

(1) The index (Z0,Z1) can be set in the range of –32768 to 32767 with a sign added.
(2) The index qualification is used only for the MOV instruction. (DMOV cannot be used.)
(3) The usable instruction format is as shown below.
(a) Transmission of data to Z0, Z1.

MOV Kn Z0

MOV
Kn or Hn is used
Z0 or Z1

(b) Possible device combination of MOV instruction with index qualification

S (Source) D (Destination) Program example
Constant (Word device)•Z
MOV K100 D0Z0
Kn or Hn Example: D0Z0, R500Z1
Word device (Word device)•Z
MOV D0 D100Z1
Example: D0,R1900 Example: D0Z0, R500Z1
(Word device)•Z (Word device)•Z
MOV MOV D0Z0 D20Z0
Example: D0Z0 Example: D1Z0, D0Z1
(Word device)•Z Bit device digit designation
MOV D0Z0 K2M10
Example: D0Z0 Example: K2Y20
Bit device digit designation (Word device)•Z
MOV K2M10 D0Z0
Example: K2M00 Example: D0Z0, R1900Z1
(Note 1) Word device indicates T, C, D, R, W, SW, and SD.

[Note] The range of the devices will not be checked if index qualification is applied to the devices during
sequence program execution. Thus, keep in mind that the index register contents exceeds the
device range at qualification, unexpected type of device are referred or renewed.

II - 57
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.5 Operation Error

6.5 Operation Error

Operation error occurs in the following cases during execution of basic instruction and function instruction.

• In the case where an error described in each instruction's explanation page has occurred:

(1) Device range check

The range check for the devices to be used in basic instruction and function instruction is as shown below.
(a) If instruction handles a fixed length of device (MOV, DMOV, etc.), device range check will not be
performed. In case that the relevant device range has exceeded, the data is written into another
device.
In such a case indicated below, error will not occur even if D2047 has been exceeded.

DMOV K100 D2047

D2047 and D2048 are supposed to be the
targets; however, since D2048 does not exist, the
contents of the other device will be destroyed.

Device range check will not be performed when index qualification is carried out.

(b) If instruction handles a variable length of device (BMOV, FMOV, etc. that would specify the number of
transfers), device range check will not be performed. In case that the relevant device range has
exceeded, the data is written into another device.
In such a case indicated below, error will not occur even if D2047 has been exceeded.

BMOV K100 D2047 K2

D2047 and D2048 are supposed to be the
targets; however, since D2048 does not exist, the
contents of the other device will be destroyed.

(2) Device data check

Device's data check used for the basic instruction and function instruction is as shown below.
(a) BIN data
• Error does not occur even if the operation result is overflowed or underflowed. At this time, carry flag
does not turn ON either.
(b) BCD data
• Checking as to whether each digit is BCD value (0/ to 9) is performed.
If the digit is other than 0 to 9 (A to F), an operation error will result.
• Error does not occur even if the operation result is overflowed or underflowed. At this time, carry flag
does not turn ON either.

II - 58
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.6 Execution Condition of Instruction

6.6 Execution Condition of Instruction

There are the following 4 kinds of execution conditions for basic instruction and function instruction.
• Execute all the time … Instruction executed regardless of device's ON/OFF
Example: LD X0 , OUT Y10
• Execute at ON … Instruction executed when input condition is turned ON
Example: MOV instruction, CJ instruction
• Execute at rising edge … Instruction executed only at the rising edge (OFF to ON) of input condition
Example: PLS instruction, MOVP instruction
• Execute at falling edge … Instruction executed only at the falling edge (ON to OFF) of input
condition
Example: PLF instruction

With coil equivalent basic instruction and function instruction, if "execution at ON" and "execution at rising
edge" are both possible with the same instruction, add "P" at the end of instruction to differentiate the
execution condition.
• Instruction when executed at ON Instruction name
• Instruction when executed at rising edge Instruction name + P

With MOV instruction, execution at ON and execution at rising edge are specified as shown below.

MOV K4X0 D0

Execute at ON

MOVP K4X0 D0

Execute at rising edge

II - 59
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.7 Counting Step Number

6.7 Counting Step Number

There are the following 2 step numbers. Refer to "2.6 Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode
" for details on the sequence program storage and execution.

(1) Number of steps during storage

This is the number of steps to be consumed when each instruction is stored in F-ROM. This is stored in
the instruction code format which is compatible with the MELSEC sequencer.

Basic number of steps for basic instruction and function instruction is (number of specified devices + 1).
For example, if "+ instruction", the number of steps is as shown below.

+ D0 R0
(1) (2) Indicates the number of devices
3 steps

+ D0 R0 D10
(1) (2) (3)
4 steps

Devices where number of steps increases

Condition Added Steps Example

Specified device is a 32 bit
1 DMOV K123 D0
constant
When the number of characters
(S.xxx's "xxx") in the character
string is:
Instruction is a character string
Even number : Number of S.AVE D882 D0 K7
(S.xxx)
characters /2 + 1
Odd number : (Number of
characters+1)/2 + 1

(2) Number of steps during execution

This is the number of steps to be consumed when each instruction is executed. When executed, a
sequence program is analyzed, optimizing the references and converting into the instruction code for the
PLC processing processor which is unique to the CNC. Thus, the length of each instruction (number of
step) is varied before and after the conversion.
The number of steps at storage and execution for each instruction is shown in "6.2 Instruction Tables".

Instruction list
No. of
Process unit

Description

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.

See for
Class

sign

Execution

Symbol Process details

Storage

+ + S D ● 3 3 86
+ (BIN)

16-bit

(D)+(S) (D)
+P S D (BIN) ●
+P 3 7 86

(a) (b)

II - 60
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.8 Operations when the OUT, SET/RST, or PLS/PLF Instruction of the Same Device is Used

6.8 Operations when the OUT, SET/RST, or PLS/PLF Instruction of the Same Device is
Used
Operations when multiple OUT instructions, SET/RST instructions or PLS/PLF instructions using the same
device are executed in one scan are explained.

(1) When the OUT instruction of the same device is used:

Do not execute the OUT instruction of the same device multiple times within one scan.
When the OUT instruction of the same device is executed multiple times in one scan, a specified device
is turned ON/OFF at the time of each execution of OUT instruction, depending on the operation result up
to the OUT instruction.
Because ON/OFF of the specified device is determined at the time of each execution of OUT instruction,
ON/OFF may be repeated within one scan.
In the ladder example below, the same internal relay (M0) is turned ON/OFF with the input X0 and X1.

[Ladder] [Timing chart]

X0 X0
X0 M0 M0
M0 X1 X1
M0 M0
END END END
X1
M0 ON
X0 OFF
ON
X1 OFF
ON
M0 OFF

M0 turns OFF M0 turns ON when

because X1 is OFF X1 is ON.
M0 turns ON
M0 remains OFF
because X0 is ON.
because X0 is OFF.

In the case of refresh type CPU unit, when output (Y) is specified with OUT instruction, ON/OFF status of
the OUT instruction executed at the end of 1 scan is output.

(2) When the SET/RST instruction of the same device is used:

(a) The SET instruction turns a specified device ON when the SET command is ON and it does not
operate when the SET command is OFF. Therefore, when the SET instructions of the same device
are executed multiple times within one scan, and if one or more SET commands are ON, the
specified device will be turned ON.

(b) The RST instruction turns a specified device OFF when the RST command is ON and it does not
operate when the RST command is OFF. Therefore, when the RST instructions of the same device
are executed multiple times within one scan, and if one or more RST commands are ON, the
specified device will be turned OFF.

(c) When both the SET instruction and RST instruction of the same device exist within one scan, the SET
instruction turns a specified device ON when the SET command is ON, and the RST instruction
turns a specified device OFF when the RST command is ON.
When both the SET command and RST command are OFF, the specified device's ON/OFF status
does not change.

II - 61
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.8 Operations when the OUT, SET/RST, or PLS/PLF Instruction of the Same Device is Used

[Ladder] [Timing chart]

X0 X0
X0 SET M0 SET M0
SET M0 X1 X1
RST M0 RST M0
END END END
X1
RST M0
X0 OFF
ON
X1 OFF
ON
M0 OFF

RST executes no M0 turns OFF

operation because X1 is because X1 is ON.
OFF. (M0 remains ON.)
SET executes no
M0 turns ON operation because X0 is
because X0 is ON. OFF. (M0 remains ON.)

(3) When the PLS/PLF instruction of the same device is used:

The PLS instruction turns a specified device ON when the PLS command changes from OFF to ON, and
it turns a specified device OFF when the PLS command changes in a way other than "from OFF to ON"
(which means from OFF to OFF, ON to ON, or ON to OFF). Also, the PLF instruction turns a specified
device ON when the PLF command changes from ON to OFF, and it turns a specified device OFF when
the PLF command changes in a way other than "from ON to OFF" (which means from OFF to OFF, OFF
to ON, or ON to ON). Note that, however, the PLS/PLF command's previous scan status is stored in the
area that is unique to the device specified with the PLS/PLF instruction. Thus, when the PLS/PLF
instruction of the same device is executed multiple times in one scan, the PLS/PLF command status
saved with the first PLS/PLF instruction is used as the second PLS/PLF instruction's PLS/PLF
command's previous scan status. In this way, when the PLS/PLF instruction is executed multiple times in
one scan, the operation may not be carried out in a way as expected by the PLS/PLF instruction.

[Ladder] [Timing chart]

X0 X0
X0 PLS M0 PLS M0
PLS M0 X1 X1
PLS M0 PLS M0
END END END
X1
PLF M0
X0 OFF
ON
X1 OFF
ON
M0’ OFF

ON
M0 OFF

(Saves PLS/PLF M0 turns OFF because M0 turns ON because

instruction status.) MO’ = ON → X1 = ON. MO’ = OFF → X1 = ON.
MO’ saves X1 = ON. MO’ saves X1 = ON.
M0 turns ON because M0 remains OFF because
MO’ = OFF → X0 = ON. MO’ = ON → X0 = OFF.
MO’ saves X0 = ON at the MO’ saves X0 = OFF.
same time.

II - 62
 6. Explanation of Instructions
6.9 How to Read Instruction Tables

6.9 How to Read Instruction Tables

The basic instructions and function instructions are explained as follows.
Instruction symbol is displayed Outline of instruction is displayed

○D+, D+P, D-, D-P ……BIN32-bit addition and subtraction (Storage destination device independent type)

Compatible
Usable instruction: D + , D -
instruction mode
Usable device
Digit
Setting
data Bit device Word device Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended
- - Blank - - (Usable for any instructions)
instruction mode
Usable device
Digit
Setting
data Bit device Word device Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A circle is placed when digit

"T" is representing T, ST, and C. designation is possible for the bit
device.
A circle is placed for the device that can be
used with the D+/D- instruction. A triangle is A circle is placed for the instruction
placed when there is a restriction in use. where index (Z0 to Z1) can be used.

A list of usable instructions and devices for each instruction mode is provided here.
"Compatible instruction mode" is the PLC instruction mode having instruction's compatibility
with the conventional machine type. "Extended instruction mode" is the instruction mode in
which the kinds of instructions and usable devices are extended. Refer to "6.1 Compatible
Instructions and Extended Instructions" for details.

Instruction Execution
indicates D+ / D-
symbol condition
Command
D+, D- S1 S2 D
Command
D + P, D - P P S1 S2 D

Execution condition and ladder display of D+ / D- instructions are shown below.

Execution Always Executes at Executes Executes once
condition executes ON once at ON at OFF
Signs in the
No sign
explanation page

Setting data Details Data type

Augend/minuend data or head No. of the device where
S1
augend/minuend data is stored.
Addend/subtrahend data or head No. of the device where BIN 32 bits
S2
addend/subtrahend data is stored.
D Head No. of the device to store addition/subtraction result.

Explanation of the setting data and data type for each instruction is provided.

The functions first, then execution conditions, then program examples are described on the following pages.

II - 63
 7. Basic Instructions

7. Basic Instructions
Basic instructions include instructions to describe relay control ladders, etc. They are divided into the
following categories.

Instruction Meaning
Contact instruction Operation start, series connection, parallel connection
Connection instruction Ladder block connection, creation of pulses from operation
results, store/read operation results
Output instruction Bit device output, pulse output, output reversal
Shift instruction Bit device shift
Master control instruction Master control
Termination instruction Program termination
Other instructions Instructions which do not fall into the above categories,
such as no operation.

II - 64
 7. Basic Instructions
LD, LDI

{ LD, LDI (Operation start) AND, ANI (Series connection) OR, ORI (Parallel connection)
Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Con-
data Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig- Index
stant nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this
instruction.

Instruction Execution
symbol condition
Bit device number / Bit designation of word device
X1/D0.1
LD

X1/D0.1
LDI

X2/D0.2
AND

X2/D0.2
ANI

OR X3/D0.3

ORI X3/D0.3

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Devices used as connections Bit

II - 65
 7. Basic Instructions
LD, LDI

Functions
LD,LDI (1) LD is the A contact operation start instruction, and LDI is the B contact operation start
instruction. They read ON/OFF information from the designated device (if a word device bit has
been designated, this becomes the 1/0 status of the designated bit), and use that as an
operation result.

AND,ANI (1) AND is the A contact series connection instruction, and ANI is the B contact series connection
instruction. They read the ON/OFF data of the designated bit device (if a bit designation has
been made for a word device, the 1/0 status of the designated bit is read), perform an AND
operation on that data and the operation result to that point, and take this value as the
operation result.

OR,ORI (1) OR is the A contact single parallel connection instruction, and ORI is the B contact single
parallel connection instruction. They read ON/OFF information from the designated device (if a
word device bit has been designated, this becomes the 1/0 status of the designated bit), and
perform an OR operation with the operation results to that point, and use the resulting value as
the operation result.

REMARK
Word device bit designations are made in hexadecimal. Bit b11 of D0 would be D0.B.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors with LD,LDI,AND,ANI,OR,or ORI instructions.

Program Example
(1) A program using LD, AND,OR, and ORI instructions.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y33 Steps Inst. Device
X3
0 LD X3
0
1 OR D0.5
D0.5
b15 ‥‥‥ b5 ‥ b0
2 OR X5
1
D0 0 X5 3 OUT Y33
4 LD X5
X5 M11 Y34 5 AND M11
4 6 ORI X6
X6 7 OUT Y34
8 END

8 END

II - 66
7. Basic Instructions
LD, LDI

(2) A program linking contact points established through the use of ANB and ORB instructions.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y33 Steps Inst. Device
X3 D6.1 M9
b15 ‥‥‥‥‥ b4 b1b0 0 LD X3
1 1 0
D6 0 0 1 AND D6.1
D6.4 X7
ORB 2 LDI D6.4
X5 M8 M1 Y34 3 ANI X7
7 4 ORB
M9 5 ANI M9
ANB 6 OUT Y33
7 LD X5
13 END 8 LD M8
9 OR M9
10 ANB
11 ANI M11
12 OUT Y34
13 END

(3) A parallel program with OUT instruction

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y35 Steps Inst. Device
X3
0 LD X5
0
Y36 1 OUT X35
X8
2 AND X8
X9 Y37 3 OUT Y36
4 ANI X9
5 OUT Y37
6 END 6 END

II - 67
 7. Basic Instructions
ANB,ORB

{ ANB,ORB … Ladder block series connections and parallel connections

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable devices Digit
Set
data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P

The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this
instruction.
Instruction Execution
symbol condition
ANB

ANB

Block A Block B

Block A
ORB
ORI
1 contact series connections
Block B use OR or ORI.

Functions
ANB (1) Performs an AND operation on block A and block B, and takes the resulting value as the
operation result.
(2) The symbol for ANB is not the contact symbol, but rather is the connection symbol.
(3) When programming in the list mode, up to 7 instructions of ANB and ORB combined (8 blocks)
can be used consecutively.

ORB (1) Conducts an OR operation on block A and block B, and takes the resulting value as the
operation result.
(2) ORB is used to perform parallel connections for ladder blocks with two or more contacts. For
ladder blocks with only one contact, use OR or ORI; there is no need for ORB in such cases.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 X1 Y10 0 LD X0
0 1 AND X1
2 LD X2
X2 X3
3 AND X3
4 ORB
5 OR X4
X4
6 OUT Y10

(3) The ORB symbol is not the contact symbol, but rather is the connection symbol.
(4) When programming in the list mode, up to 7 instructions of ANB and ORB combined (8 blocks)
can be used consecutively.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors with ANB or ORB instructions.

II - 68
 7. Basic Instructions
ANB,ORB

Program Example
(1) A program using ANB and ORB instructions

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 X1 M0 Steps Inst. Device

0 0 LD X0
X2 X3 1 OR X2
2 LD X1
X4 X5
3 OR X3
4 ANB
9 END 5 LD X4
6 AND X5
7 ORB
8 OUT M0
9 END

II - 69
 7. Basic Instructions
LDP,LDF,ANDP,ANDF,ORP,ORF

{ LDP,LDF,ANDP,ANDF,ORP,ORF … Pulse operation start, pulse series connection, pulse parallel

connection
Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S

Instruction Execution
symbol condition
Bit device number / Bit designation of word device
X1/D0.1
LDP

X1/D0.1
LDF

X2/D0.2
ANDP

X2/D0.2
ANDF

ORP X3/D0.3

ORF X3/D0.3

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Devices used as contacts Bit

II - 70
 7. Basic Instructions
LDP,LDF,ANDP,ANDF,ORP,ORF

Functions
LDP,LDF (1) LDP is the leading edge pulse operation start instruction, and is ON only at the leading
edge of the designated bit device (when it goes from OFF to ON).
If a word device has been designated, it is ON only when the designated bit changes from
0 to 1.
In cases where there is only an LDP instruction, it acts identically to instructions for the
creation of a pulse that are executed during ON ( P).
A ladder using LDP instruction A ladder not using an LDP instruction
X0 X0
MOV K0 D0 MOVP K0 D0
X0 X0
M0 PLS M0

(2) LDF is the trailing edge pulse operation start instruction, and is ON only at the trailing edge
of the designated bit device (when it goes from ON to OFF). If a word device has been
designated, it is ON only when the designated bit changes from 1 to 0.

ANDP,ANDF (1) ANDP is a leading edge pulse series connection instruction, and ANDF is a trailing edge
pulse series connection instruction. They perform an AND operation with the operation
result to that point, and take the resulting value as the operation result.
The ON/OFF data used by ANDP and ANDF are indicated in the table below:

Devices Designated by ANDP Devices Designated by ANDF

Word Device ANDP State Word Device ANDF State
Bit Device Bit Device
Bit Designation Bit Designation
OFF→ON 0→1 ON OFF→ON 0→1
OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF
ON 1 OFF ON 1
ON→OFF 1→0 ON→OFF 1→0 ON

ORP,ORF (1) ORP is a leading edge pulse parallel connection instruction, and ORF is a trailing edge
pulse parallel connection instruction. They perform an OR operation with the operation
result to that point and take the resulting value as the operation result.

Devices Designated by ORP Devices Designated by ORF

Word Device ORP State Word Device ORF State
Bit Device Bit Device
Bit Designation Bit Designation
OFF→ON 0→1 ON OFF→ON 0→1
OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF
ON 1 OFF ON 1
ON→OFF 1→0 ON→OFF 1→0 ON

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors with LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, or ORF instructions.

II - 71
 7. Basic Instructions
LDP,LDF,ANDP,ANDF,ORP,ORF

Program Example
(1) The following program executes the MOV instruction at input X0, or at the leading edge of b10 (bit 10)
of data register D0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 Steps Inst. Device
0 MOV K0 D0 0 LDP X0
D0. A* 2 ORP D0. A
4 MOV K0
6 END D0
6 END

REMARK
1)*: Word device bit designations are performed in hexadecimal.
Bit b10 of D0 would be D0.A.

II - 72
 7. Basic Instructions
INV

{ INV … Operation results inversion

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P

Instruction Execution
symbol condition

INV

Functions
Inverts the operation result immediately prior to the INV instruction.
Operation Result Immediately Prior to Operation Result Following the
the INV Instruction. Execution of the INV Instruction.
OFF ON
ON OFF

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the INV instruction.

Program Example
(1) A program which inverts the X0 ON/OFF data, and outputs from Y10.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y10 Steps Inst. Device
X0
0 0 LD X0
1 INV
3 END 2 OUT Y10
3 END

[Timing Chart]
ON

X0 OFF

Y10 ON
OFF

POINT
(1) The INV instruction operates based on the results of calculation made until the
INV instruction is given. Accordingly, use it in the same position as that of the
AND instruction.
The INV instruction cannot be used at the LD and OR positions.

II - 73
 7. Basic Instructions
MEP,MEF

{ MEP,MEF … Operation result pulse conversion

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P

Instruction Execution
symbol condition

MEP

MEF

Functions
MEP (1) If operation results up to MEP instruction are leading edge (from OFF to ON), goes ON
(continuity state).
If operation results up to MEP instruction are anything other than leading edge, goes OFF
(non-continuity state).
(2) Use of the MEP instruction simplifies pulse conversion processing when multiple contacts are
connected in series.

MEF (1) If operation results up to MEF instruction are trailing edge (from ON to OFF), goes ON (continuity
state).
If operation results up to MEF instruction are anything other than trailing edge, goes OFF
(non-continuity state).
(2) Use of the MEF instruction simplifies pulse conversion processing when multiple contacts are
connected in series.
Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the MEP or MEF instructions.
Program Example
(1) A program which performs pulse conversion on the operation results of X0 and X1.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X0 X1 Steps Inst. Device
0 SET M0 0 LD X0
1 AND X1
4 END
2 MEP
3 SET M0
4 END

POINT
(1) Because the MEP and MEF instructions operate with the operation results
immediately prior to the MEP and MEF instructions, the AND instruction should
be used at the same position.
The MEP and MEF instructions cannot be used at the LD or OR position.

II - 74
 7. Basic Instructions
EGP,EGF

{ EGP,EGF … Pulse conversion of edge relay operation results

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P

Instruction Execution
symbol condition

Command Vn
EGP

Command Vn
EGF

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Vn Edge relay No. where operation results are stored Bit

Functions
EGP (1) Operation results up to the EGP instruction are stored in memory by the edge relay (V).

(2) Goes ON (continuity state) at the leading edge (OFF to ON) of the operation result up to the EGP
instruction.
If the operation result up to the EGP instruction is other than a leading edge (i.e., from ON to ON,
ON to OFF, or OFF to OFF), it goes OFF (non-continuity state).

(3) The EGP instruction can be used like an AND instruction.

EGF (1) Operation results up to the EGF instruction are stored in memory by the edge relay (V).

(2) Goes ON (continuity state) at the trailing edge (from ON to OFF) of the operation result up to the
EGF instruction.
If the operation result up to the EGF instruction is other than a trailing edge (i.e., from OFF to
ON, ON to ON, or OFF to OFF), it goes OFF (non-continuity state).

(3) The EGF instruction can be used like an AND instruction.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the EGP or EGF instructions.

POINT
(1) Because the EGP and EGF instructions operate with the operation results
immediately prior to the EGP and EGF instructions, the AND instruction should
be used at the same position.
The EGP and EGF instructions cannot be used at the LD or OR position.

II - 75
 7. Basic Instructions
OUT(Y,M,L,F,B,SB,SM)

{ OUT(Y,M,L,F,B,SB,SM) … Out instructions (Y,M,L,F,B,SB,SM)

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Instruction Execution
symbol condition
Bit device number (D)
OUT
Y35

Bit designation of word device (D)

D0.5

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D Number of device to be turned ON and OFF Bit

Functions
(1) Operation results up to the OUT instruction are output to the designated device.
When Bit Designation has
When Using Bit Devices been Made for Word
Operation Device
results
Contact
Coil Bit Designated
A Contact B Contact
OFF ON Non-continuity Continuity 0
ON ON Continuity Non-continuity 1

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the OUT instruction.

II - 76
 7. Basic Instructions
OUT(Y,M,L,F,B,SB,SM)

Program Example
(1) When bit device is in use

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X5 Steps Inst. Device
0 Y33 0 LD X5
X6
2 Y34 1 OUT Y33
2 LD X6
Y35 3 OUT Y34
5 END 4 OUT Y35
5 END

(2) When bit designation has been made for word device

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X5 Steps Inst. Device
0 D0.5 0 LD X5
X6
2 D0.6 1 OUT D0.5
2 LD X6
D0.7 3 OUT D0.6
5 END 4 OUT D0.7
5 END

b15 ‥‥‥ b7b6b5 ‥ b0

D0

II - 77
 7. Basic Instructions
OUT(T,ST), OUTH(T)

{ OUT(T,ST), OUTH(T) … 100ms, 10ms timer output

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
Set
value
The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this
instruction.
Instruction Execution
symbol condition
Set value (Valid from 1 to 32767)
K50
T0
OUT T
(100ms timer)
OUT ST Set value
(100ms retentive (Valid from 1 to 32767 of the contents of data register)
D10
timer)
T0

Set value (Valid from 1 to 32767)

OUTH T Display of 10ms timer output instruction H K50

(10ms timer) T0

Set value (Valid from 1 to 32767 of the contents of data register)

H D10
T0

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D Timer number Bit
Set value Value set for timer BIN 16 bits

REMARK
(1) Timer values can be set only as a decimal constant (K). Hexadecimal constants (H) cannot be used
for timer settings.
(2) The retentive timer (ST) cannot be used for the 10ms timer.

Functions
(1) When the operation results up to the OUT instruction are ON, the timer coil goes ON and the timer
counts up to the value that has been set; when the time up state (total numeric value is equal to or
greater than the setting value), the contact responds as follows:

A contact Continuity
B contact Non-continuity

II - 78
 7. Basic Instructions
OUT(T,ST), OUTH(T)

(2) The following will apply if the calculation result up to OUT instruction changes from ON to OFF.

Present Value Prior to Time Up After Time Up

Type of Timer Timer Coil
of Timer A Contact B Contact A Contact B Contact
Non- Non-
100ms timer OFF 0 Continuity Continuity
continuity continuity
100ms Maintains the Non- Non-
OFF Continuity Continuity
retentive timer present value continuity continuity
Non- Non-
10ms timer OFF 0 Continuity Continuity
continuity continuity

(3) The contact status of retentive timer after time-up will not be changed until the RST instruction is
executed.

(4) A negative number (-32768 to -1) cannot be set as the setting value for the timer.
If a negative value is set for the word device, operation is carried out taking the value as a positive
value with no signs.

(5) When 0 is set for the set value, time will be up instantly.

(6) In cases where the OUT instruction is not executed while the OUT instruction is ON due to the JMP
instruction, etc., no present value update or contact ON/OFF operation is conducted. Also, if the
same OUT instruction is conducted two or more times during the same scan, the present value will
be updated for the number of times executed.

POINT
(1) Setting the timer setting value using the setting display device.
The method for setting the value of timer T and retentive timer ST includes the
following two ways.
• A method in which the setting value (Kn) programmed by a sequence
program is validated. (Fixed timer)
• A method in which the setting value set with the setting display device is
validated. (Variable timer)
Refer to "5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices" for details on variable timer.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the OUT T or OUTH T instruction.

Program Example
(1) The following program turns Y10 and Y14 ON 10 seconds after X0 has gone ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 K100 Steps Inst. Device
0 T1 0 LD X0
T1
4 Y10 1 OUT T1
K100
Y14 4 LD T1
7 END 5 OUT Y10
6 OUT Y14
7 END

II - 79
7. Basic Instructions
OUT(T,ST), OUTH(T)

(2) The following program uses the BCD data at X10 to X1F as the timer's set value.

[Ladder Mode]
X0
0 BINP K4X10 D10 Converts BCD data at X10 to X1F to BIN and
stores at D10.
X2 D10
4 T2 When X2 goes ON, the data stored at D10 is
T2 calculated as the set value.
8 Y15 Y15 goes ON when T2 counts up.
10 END

[List Mode] Steps Inst. Device

0 LD X0
1 BINP K4X10
D10
4 LD X2
5 OUT T2
D10
8 LD T2
9 OUT Y15
10 END

(3) The following program turns Y10 ON 250ms after X0 has gone ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 H K25 Steps Inst. Device
0 T0 0 LD X0
T0
5 Y10 1 OUTH T0
K25
7 END 5 LD T0
6 OUT Y10
7 END

II - 80
 7. Basic Instructions
OUT(C)

{ OUT(C) … Counters
Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
Set
value
The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this instruction.

Instruction Execution
symbol condition
Set value (Valid from 1 to 32767)
K50
OUT C C0

Set value (Valid from 1 to 32767 of the contents of data register)

D10
C0

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D Counter No. Bit
Set value Counter set value BIN 16 bits

REMARK
(1) Only decimal constant (K) can be used for the counter setting value.
Hexadecimal constant (H) cannot be used for the counter setting value.

Function
(1) When the operation results up to the OUT instruction change from OFF to ON, 1 is added to the
present value (count value) and the count up status (present value = set value), and the contacts
respond as follows:
A contact Continuity
B contact Non-continuity
(2) Not counted if the operation result is remained ON. (There is no need to perform pulse conversion on
count input.)
(3) After "present value≧set value" has been realized, the contact state will not be changed until RST
instruction is executed, but the present value is further added by +1.
In this case, the present value is added by +1 up to 65535, and then counted up again by +1 from 0.
(4) A negative number (-32768 to -1) cannot be set as the setting value. If a negative value is set for the
word device, operation is carried out taking the value as a positive value with no signs. If the set
value is 0, the processing is identical to that of when 1 is set.
POINT
(1) Setting the timer setting value using the setting display device.
The method for setting the value of timer T and retentive timer ST includes the following two ways.
• A method in which the setting value (Kn) programmed by a sequence program is validated.
(Fixed timer)
• A method in which the setting value set with the setting display device is validated. (Variable timer)
Refer to "5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices" for details on variable timer.

II - 81
 7. Basic Instructions
OUT(C)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the OUT C instruction.

Program Example
(1) The following program turns Y30 ON after X0 has gone ON 10 times, and resets the counter when X1
goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 K10 Steps Inst. Device
0 C10 0 LD X0
C10
4 Y30 1 OUT C10
X1 K10
6 RST C10 4 LD C10
9 END 5 OUT Y30
6 LD X1
7 RST C10
9 END

(2) The following program sets the value for C10 at 10 when X0 goes ON, and at 20 when X1 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode]

X0 X1
0 MOVP K10 D0 Stores 10 at D0 when X0 goes ON
X1 X0
5 MOVP K20 D0 Stores 20 at D0 when X1 goes ON
X3 D0
10 C10 C10 takes data stored at D0 as set value, and counts
C10
14 Y30 Y30 goes ON when C10 reaches count up state

16 END

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X0
1 ANI X1
2 MOVP K10
D0
5 LD X1
6 ANI X0
7 MOVP K20
D0
10 LD X3
11 OUT C10
D0
14 LD C10
15 OUT Y30
16 END

II - 82
 7. Basic Instructions
SET

{ SET … Setting devices (ON)

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Instruction Execution
symbol condition
SET input
SET D
SET

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D Bit device number to be set (ON) Bit

Functions
(1) When SET input is ON, the designated devices respond as follows:
Device Device Status
Bit device Coils and contacts turned ON
Word device Designation bit set at 1

(2) Devices turned ON will stay ON even if SET input goes to OFF. Devices turned ON by the SET
instruction can be turned OFF by the RST instruction.
ON
X5 X5 OFF
SET Y10
X7 ON
RST Y10 X7 OFF

Y10 OFF ON

(3) Device status does not change when SET input is OFF.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the SET instruction.

II - 83
 7. Basic Instructions
SET

Program Example
(1) When X8 is turned ON, Y8B is set (turned ON); when X9 is turned ON, Y8B is reset (turned OFF).

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X8 Steps Inst. Device
0 SET Y8B 0 LD X8
X9 1 SET Y8B
2 RST Y8B
2 LD X9
4 END 3 RST Y8B
4 END

(2) When X8 is turned ON, D0 bit5 (b5) is turned to 1; when X9 is turned ON, D0 bit 5 (b5) is turned to 0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X8 Steps Inst. Device
0 SET D0.5 0 LD X8
Turn D0 b5 to 1
X9 1 SET D0.5
2 RST D0.5
Turn D0 b5 to 0 2 LD X9
4 END 3 RST D0.5
4 END
b5 b0
D0

II - 84
 7. Basic Instructions
RST

{ RST … Resetting devices

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Instruction Execution
symbol condition
RST input
RST D
RST

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D Device No. to be reset Bit

Functions
(1) Designated devices respond as follows when RST input is turned ON:
Device Device Status
Bit device Turns coils and contacts OFF
Timers and Sets the present value to 0, and turns coils and contacts OFF
counters
Word device Sets value of designated bit to 0

(2) Device status does not change when RST input goes OFF

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the RST instruction.

II - 85
 7. Basic Instructions
RST

Program Example
(1) Reset of 100ms retentive timer and counter is executed.

[Ladder Mode]
X4 K18000 When ST60 is set for the retentive timer, ST60 is turned
0 ST60 ON when X4's ON time reaches 30 minutes.
ST60 K16
C23
The number of times when ST60 has turned ON is
5
counted.
RST ST60 When ST60 is turned ON, ST60 is reset.
C23
14 Y55 When C23 counts up, Y55 is turned ON.
X5
16 RST C23 When X5 is turned ON, C23 is reset.

21 END

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X4
1 OUT ST60
K18000
5 LD ST60
6 OUT C23
K16
10 RST ST60
14 LD C23
15 OUT Y55
16 LD X5
17 RST C23
21 END

II - 86
 7. Basic Instructions
MC,MCR

{ MC,MCR … Setting and resetting the master control

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Level desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H N
n
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Level desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H N
n
D

Instruction Execution
symbol condition
Command
MC MC n D
n
D
Master control ladder

MCR MCR n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
n Nesting (N0 to N7) Nesting
D Number of device to turn ON Bit

Functions
The master control instruction is used to enable the creation of highly efficient ladder switching
sequence programs, through the opening and closing of a common bus for ladders.

Ladder as displayed in Ladder Mode Ladder as it actually operates

X0 X0
MC N1 M0 MC N1 M0
N1 M0 X1 X3 M7 N1 M0 X1 X3 M7
Y47 Y47
Executed only
M5 M5 when X0 is ON
Y4F Y4F
X6 X4 X6 X4

X0 X0
MCR N1 MCR N1

X0F XF
Y10 Y10

A ladder using the master control would look as shown below:

II - 87
7. Basic Instructions
MC,MCR

MC (1) If the ON/OFF command of the MC instruction is ON when master control is commenced, the
operation result between the MC instruction and MCR instruction will be exactly as the
instruction (ladder) shows.

If the MC ON/OFF instruction is OFF, the operation result between MC and MCR instructions
will be as follows:

Device Device Status

100ms, 10ms timer Count value goes to 0
100ms cumulative timer counter Current count value is kept as it is.
Devices in OUT instruction All turned OFF
Devices in the following instructions:
Maintain current status
SET/RST, SFT function

(2) Nesting can be used up to 8 times (N0 to 7). When using nesting, nests should be inserted from
the lower to higher nesting number (N) with the MC instruction, and from the higher to the lower
order with the MCR instruction.

(3) Regardless of the MC instruction's ON/OFF state, scan between MC instruction and MCR
instruction can be executed.

(4) MC instruction can be used as many times as you wish within one scan by changing devices in
the destination D.

(5) When MC instruction is ON, coil of the device specified in the destination turns ON.

MCR (1) This is the instruction for recovery from the master control, and indicates the end of the master
control range of operation.

(2) Specified nesting (N) No. and after are cleared.

MCR N3 N3 to N7 master control
is cleared

II - 88
 7. Basic Instructions
MC,MCR

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the MC or MCR instructions.

Program Example
The master control instruction can be used in nesting. The different master control regions are
distinguished by nesting (N). Nesting can be used from N0 through N7.
The use of nesting enables the creation of ladders which successively limit the execution condition
of the program.
A ladder using nesting would appear as shown below:

Ladder as displayed in ladder mode Ladder as it actually operates

A A
MC N0 M15 MC N0 M15
N0 M15 N0 M15
Executed when A
is ON
B B
MC N1 M16 MC N1 M16
N1 M16 N1 M16
Executed when A
and B are ON
C C
MC N2 M17 MC N2 M17
N2 M17 N2 M17
Executed when A,
B, and C are ON
MCR N2 MCR N2

Executed when A
and B are ON
MCR N1 MCR N1

Executed when
A is ON
MCR N0 MCR N0

No relation to
status of A, B, or C

II - 89
 7. Basic Instructions
PLS,PLF

{ PLS,PLF … Pulse (1 scan ON)

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Instruction Execution
symbol condition
Command
PLS D
PLS

Command
PLF D
PLF

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D Pulse conversion device Bit

Functions
PLS (1) When PLS instruction is turned OFF to ON, turn specified device ON for 1 scan; otherwise
(ON→ON,ON→OFF,OFF→ON), turn OFF.
ON
X5 X5 OFF
PLS D ON

M0 OFF
1 scan 1 scan

(2) If the RUN key switch is changed from RUN to STOP after the execution of the PLS instruction,
the PLS instruction will not be executed again even if the switch is set back to RUN. PLS
instruction will be executed if the PLS instruction has been ON when the power was turned ON.

(3) When a latch relay (L) is specified for the PLS instruction, switching power OFF with the latch
relay (L) ON and then switching it ON again executes the specified device's 1scan ON.

II - 90
 7. Basic Instructions
PLS,PLF

PLF (1) When PLF instruction is changed from ON to OFF, the designated device is turned 1 scan ON.
For the other cases (OFF→OFF,OFF→ON,ON→ON), the designated device is turned OFF.

ON
X5 X5 OFF
PLF D ON

M0 OFF

1 scan 1 scan

(2) Turn the sequence program RUN switch to STOP after PLF instruction. Even if switched to
RUN again, PLF instruction will not be executed.

POINT
Note that the device designated by D may be ON more than one scan if the PLS or
PLF instruction is jumped by the CJ instruction or if the subroutine program where
the PLS/PLF instruction had been executed was not called by the CALL instruction.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the PLS or PLF instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program executes the PLS instruction when X9 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X9 Steps Inst. Device
0 PLS M9 0 LD X9
1 PLS M9
3 END
3 END

ON

X9 OFF
ON

M9 OFF
1 scan

(2) The following program executes the PLF instruction when X9 goes OFF.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X9 Steps Inst. Device
0 PLF M9 0 LD X9
1 PLF M9
3 END
3 END

ON

X9 OFF
ON

M9 OFF
1 scan

II - 91
 7. Basic Instructions
FF

{ FF … Reversing the operation result

Compatible
instruction mode
Not available

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Instruction Execution
symbol condition
Command
FF D
FF

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D Device number to invert Bit

Function
(1) The status of the device designated by (D) is inverted when the inversion command goes from OFF to
ON.

Device Status
Device
Prior to FF execution After FF execution
OFF ON
Bit device
ON OFF
Bit designation of word 0 1
device 1 0

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the FF instruction.

II - 92
 7. Basic Instructions
FF

Program Example
(1) The following program inverts the output of Y10 when X9 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X9 Steps Inst. Device
0 FF Y10 0 LD X9
1 FF Y10
3 END
3 END

ON

X9 OFF
ON

Y10 OFF

(2) The following program reverses b10 (bit 10) of D10 when X0 goes ON

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 Steps Inst. Device
0 FF D10.A 0 LD X0
1 FF D10.A
3 END
3 END

II - 93
 7. Basic Instructions
SFT,SFTP

{ SFT,SFTP … Device shift

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable instruction: SFT
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Instruction Execution
symbol condition
Command
SFT D
SFT

Command
SFTP D
SFTP

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D Number of device to shift Bit

II - 94
 7. Basic Instructions
SFT,SFTP

Functions
(1) When bit device is used
(a) Shifts to a device designated by (D) the ON/OFF status of the device immediately prior to
the one designated, and turns the prior device OFF.

Shift input
Shift range
M0
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8
SFTP M14
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 X02 ON
0
SFTP M13
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 After first shift input
0
SFTP M12
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 After second shift input
SFTP M11 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 X02 ON
X2 0
SET M10 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 After third shift input
0
First device to shift 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 After fourth shift input
0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 After fifth shift input

*At M8 to 15, "1" indicates ON and "0" indicates OFF.

For example, if M11 has been designated by the SFT instruction, when the SFT instruction
is executed, it will shift the ON/OFF status of M10 to M11, and turn M10 OFF.

(b) Turn the first device to be shifted ON with the SET instruction.

(c) When the SFT and SFTP are to be used consecutively, the program starts from the device
with the larger number.

(2) When word device bit designation is used

(a) Shifts to a bit in the device designated by (D) the 1/0 status of the bit immediately prior to the
one designated, and turns the prior bit to 0.
For example, if D0.5 (bit 5 [b5] of D0) has been designated by the SFT instruction, when
the SFT instruction is executed, it will shift the 1/0 status of b4 of D0 to b5, and turn b4 to 0.

Prior to shift b15 b5 b4 b0

execution 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
D0 0
After shift
execution 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the SFT(P) instruction.

II - 95
 7. Basic Instructions
SFT,SFTP

Program Example
(1) The following program shifts Y57 to Y5B when X8 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode]
X8
0 SFT Y5B

SFT Y5A
Shifts Y57 to Y5B when X8 goes ON
SFT Y59
Begin programming from larger
device number
SFT Y58
X7
10 SET Y57 Y57 turned ON when X7 goes ON

13 END

[Timing Chart] [List Mode]

ON Steps Inst. Device
X8 OFF 0 LDP X8
2 SFT Y5B
X7 OFF 4 SFT Y5A
6 SFT Y59
Y57 OFF
8 SFT Y58
10 LDP X7
Y58 OFF
12 SET Y57
Y59 OFF 13 END

Y5A OFF

Y5B OFF

II - 96
 7. Basic Instructions
MPS,MRD,MPP

{ MPS,MRD,MPP … Store, read and clear of operation result

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P

The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this
instruction.
Instruction Execution
symbol condition
MPS, MRD, and MPP are not displayed as a part of the ladder display.

MPS

MRD

MPP

Function
MPS (1) Stores in memory the operation result (ON or OFF) immediately prior to the MPS instruction.

(2) Up to 8 MPS instructions can be used successively. However, if an MPP instruction is used in
the middle of process, the number of uses calculated for the MPS instruction will be
decremented by one.

MRD (1) Reads the operation result stored for the MPS instruction, and uses that result to perform the
operation in the next step.

MPP (1) Reads the operation result stored for the MPS instruction, and uses that result to perform the
operation in the next step.

(2) Clears the operation results stored by the MPS instruction.

POINT
(1) The following shows ladders both using and not using the MPS, MRD, and MPP
instructions.
Ladder using the MPS, MRD, and MPP Ladder not using MPS, MRD, and MPP
instructions. instructions.

X0 X1 X2 X0 X1 X2
Y10 Y10
X3 X4 X0 X1 X3 X4
Y11 Y11
X5 X0 X1 X5
Y12 Y12

Operation Errors
(1) There are no errors associated with the MPS, MRD, or MPP instructions.

II - 97
 7. Basic Instructions
MPS,MRD,MPP

Program Example
(1) A program using the MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X1C M8 Steps Inst. Device
10 Y30 10 LD X1C
(a)
(a) 11 MPS
(b) Y31
X1D (c) M9 (d) M68 12 AND M8
16 Y32 13 OUT Y30
T0 (b) 14 MPP
(e) Y33
15 OUT Y31
(f) Y34 16 LD X1D
X1E M81(g) M96
(c) 17 MPS
27 Y35
M97 18 AND M9
(h) Y36 (d) 19 MPS
M98
(i) Y37 20 AND M68
21 OUT Y32
(j) Y38 (e) 22 MPP
40 END 23 AND T0
24 OUT Y33
(f) 25 MPP
26 OUT Y34
27 LD X1E
28 AND M81
(g) 29 MPS
30 AND M96
31 OUT Y35
(h) 32 MRD
33 AND M97
34 OUT Y36
(i) 35 MRD
36 AND M98
37 OUT Y37
(j) 38 MPP
39 OUT Y38
40 END

II - 98
 7. Basic Instructions
NOP,NOPLF,PAGE n

{ NOP,NOPLF,PAGE n … No operation
Compatible
instruction mode
Usable instruction: NOP
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
n

Instruction Execution *NOP is not displayed in ladder display.

symbol condition

NOP NOP

NOPLF NOPLF

PAGE n PAGE n

Functions
NOP (1) This is a no operation instruction that has no impact on any operations up to this point.

(2) The NOP instruction is used in the following cases:

(a) To insert space for sequence program debugging.
(b) To delete an instruction without having to change the number of steps. (Replace the
instruction with NOP)
(c) To temporarily delete an instruction.

NOPLF (1) This is a no operation instruction that has no impact on any operations up to that point.

(2) The NOPLF instruction is used when printing from a peripheral device to force a page change at
any desired location.
(a) When printing ladders
• A page break will be inserted between ladder blocks with the presence of the NOPLF
instruction.
• The ladder cannot be displayed correctly if an NOPLF instruction is inserted in the midst of
a ladder block.
Do not insert an NOPLF instruction in the midst of a ladder block.
(b) When printing instruction lists
• The page will be changed after the printing of the NOPLF instruction.

(3) See the Operating Manual for the peripheral device in use for more information regarding
printouts from peripheral devices.

II - 99
 7. Basic Instructions
NOP,NOPLF,PAGE n

PAGE n (1) This is a no operation instruction that has no impact on any operations up to that point.

(2) Programs after PAGEn instruction are controlled as 0 step and after of the specified n-th page.
(Peripheral device display, printers, etc.)

(3) If there is no PAGEn instruction, processing begins from page 0.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no errors associated with the NOP, NOPLF, or PAGE instructions.

Program Example
NOP

(1) Contact closed…Deletes AND or ANI instruction

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Before change Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X8
X8 Y97 Y96
0 Y12 1 AND Y97
2 ANI X96
Changed to NOP 3 OUT Y12
4 END

[List Mode]
After change Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X8
X8 Y96
0 Y12 1 NOP
2 ANI X96
3 OUT Y12
4 END

II - 100
7. Basic Instructions
NOP,NOPLF,PAGE n

(2) Contact closed…LD, LDI changed to NOP

(Note carefully that changing the LD and LDI instructions to NOP completely changes the nature of
ladder.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Before change Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X0
X0
0 Y16 1 OUT Y16
X56 T3 2 LD X56
2 Y66 3 AND T3
4 OUT Y66
Changed to NOP
5 END

[List Mode]
After change Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X0
X0 Y96
0 Y16 1 OUT Y16
T3 2 NOP
Y66 3 ANI T3
4 OUT Y66
5 END

NOPLF

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X0 0 LD X0
0 MOV K1 D30
1 MOV K1
D30
4 NOPLF
4 NOPLF

5 MOV K2 D40 5 MOV K2

D40

NOPLF 8 NOPLF
8
9 LD X1
X1
Y40 10 OUT Y40
9
11 END

II - 101
7. Basic Instructions
NOP,NOPLF,PAGE n

• Printing the ladder will result in the following:

X000
0 MOV K1 D30

MOV K2 D40
Page change forced
when NOPLF is inserted
8 NOPLF
between two ladder
blocks.
‐1‐

X001
9 X001

PAGE n

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
10 PAGE K5
10 PAGE K5
X0 X1
12 LD X0
12 Y0
13 AND X1
X2
15 NOP Y1 14 OUT Y0
15 LD X2
NOPLF 16 NOP
18
17 OUT Y1
PAGE K6 18 NOPLF
19
19 PAGE K6
X3
21 Y2 21 LD X3
22 OUT Y2
23

II - 102
 8. Function Instructions

8. Function Instructions
The function instruction includes the following types.

Type of Instructions Meaning

Comparison operation instruction Compare data to data
Arithmetic operation instruction Adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, increments, or decrements
data with other data
Data conversion instruction Coverts data types
Data transfer instruction Transmits designated data
Program branch instruction Program jumps
Logical operation instructions Logical operations such as logical sum, logical product, etc.
Rotation instruction Rotation/shift of designated data
Data processing instructions Data searches, data processing such as decoding and encoding
Other instructions Instructions which do not fall into the above categories
Special instructions for old Instructions used to achieve the compatibility with sequence
machine type compatible programs in the old machine type.
(Can be used in the compatible instruction mode only.)

II - 103
 8. Function Instructions
=, <>, >, <=, <, >=

{ =, <>, >, <=, <, >= … 16-bit data comparisons

Compatible
Usable instruction =, >, <
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs =, < > , >, < = , <, > =
Symbol] Condition]

LD S1 S2

AND S1 S2

OR
S1 S2

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S1 Comparative data, or device No. where comparative data
BIN 16 bits
S2 is stored

Functions
(1) Treats BIN 16-bit data from device designated by (S1) and BIN 16-bit data from device
designated by (S2) as an A contact, and performs comparison operation.

(2) The results of the comparison operations for the individual instructions are as follows:
Comparison Comparison
Instruction Instruction
Condition Operation Condition Operation
Symbol in Symbol in
Result Result
= S1＝S2 = S1≠S2
<> S1≠S2 <> S1＝S2
> S1＞S2 > S1≦S2
Continuity Non-continuity
<= S1≦S2 <= S1＞S2
< S1＜S2 < S1≧S2
>= S1≧S2 >= S1＜S2

II - 104
 8. Function Instructions
=, <>, >, <=, <, >=

(3) In cases where hexadecimal constants have been designated by (S1) and (S2), or when a
numerical value (8 to F) where the highest bit (b15) will be 1 has been designated, the value will
be read as a negative BIN value number for purposes of the comparison.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the =, <>, >, <=, <, or >= instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program compares the data at X0 to XF with the data at D3, and turns Y33 ON if
the data is identical.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Y33 Steps Inst. Device

0 = K4X0 D3 0 LD= K4X0

D3
4 END 3 OUT Y33
4 END

(2) The following program compares BIN value K100 to the data at D3, and establishes continuity if
the data in D3 is something other than 100.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Y33 Steps Inst. Device
M3
0 <> K100 D3 0 LD M3
1 AND<> K100
5 END D3
4 OUT Y33
5 END

(3) The following program compares BIN value K100 to the data at D3, and establishes continuity if
the D3 data is less than 100.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
M3 Y33 Steps Inst. Device

0 > K100 D3 0 LD M3
M8 1 LD> K100
D3
7 END 4 OR M8
5 ANB
6 OUT Y33
7 END

(4) The following program compares the data in D0 and D3, and if the data in D0 is equal to or less
than the data in D3, establishes continuity.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Y33 Steps Inst. Device
M3 M8
0 0 LD M3
1 AND M8
<= D0 D3 2 OR<= D0
END D3
6
5 OUT Y33
6 END

II - 105
 8. Function Instructions
D=,D<>,D>,D<=,D<,D>=

{ D=,D<>,D>,D<=,D<,D>= … 32-bit data comparison

Compatible
Usable instruction: D=, D>, D<
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs D = , D < > , D > , D < = , D < , D > =
Symbol] Condition]

LD S1 S2

AND S1 S2

OR
S1 S2

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S1 Comparative data, or device No. where comparative data
BIN 32 bits
S2 is stored

Functions
(1) Treats BIN 32-bit data from device designated by (S1) and BIN 32-bit data from device
designated by (S2) as an A contact, and performs comparison operation.

(2) The results of the comparison operations for the individual instructions are as follows:
Comparison Comparison
Instruction Instruction
Condition Operation Condition Operation
Symbol in Symbol in
Result Result
D= S1＝S2 D= S1≠S2
D<> S1≠S2 D<> S1＝S2
D> S1＞S2 D> S1≦S2
Continuity Non-continuity
D<= S1≦S2 D<= S1＞S2
D< S1＜S2 D< S1≧S2
D>= S1≧S2 D>= S1＜S2

II - 106
 8. Function Instructions
D=,D<>,D>,D<=,D<,D>=

(3) In cases where hexadecimal constants have been designated by (S1) and (S2), or when a
numerical value (8 to F) where the highest bit (b31) will be 1 has been designated, the value will
be read as a negative BIN value number for the purpose of the comparison.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the D=, D<>, D>, D<=, D<, or D>= instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program compares the data at X0 to XF with the data at D3 and D4, and turns
Y33 ON if the data is identical.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Y33 Steps Inst. Device
0 D= K8X0 D3 0 LDD= K8X0
D3
4 END 3 OUT Y33
4 END

(2) The following program compares BIN value K38000 to the data at D3 and D4, and establishes
continuity if the data in D3 and D4 is something other than 38000.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Y33 Steps Inst. Device
M3
0 D<> K38000 D3 0 LD M3
1 ANDD<> K38000
6 END D3
5 OUT Y33
6 END

(3) The following program compares BIN value K-80000 to the data at D3 and D4, and establishes
continuity if the data in D3 and D4 is less than –80000.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Y33 Steps Inst. Device
M3
0 D> K-80000 D3 0 LD M3
M8 1 LDD> K-80000
D3
8 END 5 OR M8
6 ANB
7 OUT Y33
8 END

(4) The following program compares the data in D0 and D1 with the data in D3 and D4, and
establishes continuity if the data in D0 and D1 is equal to or less than the data in D3 and D4.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Y33 Steps Inst. Device
M3 M8
0 0 LD M3
1 AND M8
D<= D0 D3 2 ORD<= D0
6 END D3
5 OUT Y33
6 END

II - 107
 8. Function Instructions
+, +P, -, -P

{ +, +P, -, -P … BIN 16-bit addition and subtraction operations

(Device at storage destination: Independent type)
Compatible
Usable instruction: +, -
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs + / -
Symbol] Condition]
Command
+, - S1 S2 D

Command
+ P, - P P S1 S2 D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number
S1
of the device storing such data
Addition or subtraction data, or first number of device BIN 16 bits
S2
storing addition or subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data
Functions
+ (1) Adds 16-bit BIN data designated by (S1) to 16-bit BIN data designated by (S2) and stores at the
device designated by (D).
S1 S2 D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) + 1234 (BIN) 6912 (BIN)

(2) Values for S1, S2, and D can be designated between –32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b15).
b15 Judgment (+/-)
0 Positive
1 Negative

II - 108
 8. Function Instructions
+, +P, -, -P

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result:
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
• K32767+K2 → K-32767 ---- A negative value is generated if b15 is 1.
(H7FFF) (H0002) (H8001)
• K-32768+K-2 → K32766 ---- A positive value is generated if b15 is 0.
(H8000) (HFFFE) (H7FFE)

- (1) Subtracts 16-bit BIN data designated by (S1) from 16-bit BIN data designated by (S2) and stores
the result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D).
S1 S2 D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) - 1234 (BIN) 4444 (BIN)

(2) Values for S1, S2, and D can be designated between –32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b15).

b15 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result:
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
• K-32768-K2 → K32766 ---- A positive value is generated if b15 is 0.
(H8000) (H0002) (H7FFE)
• K32767-K-2 → K-32767 ---- A negative value is generated if b15 is 1.
(H7FFF) (HFFFE) (H8001)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the +(P) or -(P) instructions.

II - 109
 8. Function Instructions
+, +P, -, -P

Program Example
(1) The following program adds the contents of D3 and the contents of D0 when X5 goes ON, and
outputs result to Y38 through 3F.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X5 Steps Inst. Device
0 +P D3 D0 K2Y38 0 LD X5
1 +P D3
5 END
D0
K2Y38
5 END

(2) The following program outputs the difference between the set value for timer T3 and its present
value to Y40 to 53 by BCD.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X3 K18000 Steps Inst. Device
0 T3 0 LD X3
M400
5 - K18000 T3 D3 1 OUT T3
K18000
DBCD D3 K5Y40 5 LD M400
13 END 6 - K18000
T3
D3
10 DBCD D3
K5Y40
13 END

II - 110
 8. Function Instructions
+, +P, -, -P

{ +, +P, -, -P … BIN 16-bit addition and subtraction operations

(Device at storage destination: Shared type)
Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "6.2 Instruction Tables" for correspondence.

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs + / -

Symbol] Condition]
Command
+, - S D

Command
+ P, - P P S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Addition or subtraction data, or first number of device
S
storing addition or subtraction data
First number of device storing data to be added to or BIN 16 bits
D subtracted from
(Addition or subtraction data is stored in this device.)
Functions
+ (1) Adds 16 bit BIN data designated by (D) to 16 bit BIN data designated by (S), and stores the
result of the addition at the device designated by (D).
D S D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) + 1234 (BIN) 6912 (BIN)

(2) The value for (S) and (D) can be designated at between –32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b15).
b15 Judgment (+/-)
0 Positive
1 Negative
(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
• K32767+K2 → K-32767 ---- A negative value is generated if b15 is 1.
(H7FFF) (H0002) (H8001)
• K-32768+K-2 → K32766 ---- A positive value is generated if b15 is 0.
(H8000) (HFFFE) (7FFE)

II - 111
 8. Function Instructions
+, +P, -, -P

- (1) Subtracts 16-bit BIN data designated by (D) from 16-bit BIN data designated by (S) and stores
the result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D).
D S D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) - 1234 (BIN) 4444 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S) and (D) can be designated at between –32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b15).
b15 Judgment (+/-)
0 Positive
1 Negative
(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
• K-32768-K2 → K32766 ---- A positive value is generated if b15 is 0.
(H8000) (H0002) (H7FFE)
• K32767-K-2 → K-32767 ---- A negative value is generated if b15 is 1.
(H7FFF) (HFFFE) (H8001)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the +(P) or -(P) instructions.

II - 112
 8. Function Instructions
D+, D+P, D-, D-P

{ D+, D+P, D-, D-P … BIN 32-bit addition and subtraction operations
(Device at storage destination: Independent type)
Compatible
Usable instruction: D+, D-
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs D+ / D-
Symbol] Condition]
Command
D+, D- S1 S2 D

Command
D+P, D-P P S1 S2 D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number
S1
of the device storing such data
Addition or subtraction data, or number of device storing BIN 32 bits
S2
addition or subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data

Functions

D+ (1) Adds 32-bit BIN data designated by (S1) to 32-bit BIN data designated by (S2), and stores the
result of the addition at the device designated by (D).
S1+1 S1 S2+1 S2 D+1 D
b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0
567890 (BIN) + 123456 (BIN) 691346 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S1), (S2) and (D) can be designated at between –2147483648 and 2147483647
(BIN 32 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b31).
b31 Judgment (+/-)
0 Positive
1 Negative

II - 113
 8. Function Instructions
D+, D+P, D-, D-P

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
• K2147483647+K2 → K-2147483647 ---- A negative value is generated if b31 is 1.
(H7FFFFFFF) (H0002) (H80000001)
• K-2147483648+K-2 → K2147483646 ---- A positive value is generated if b31 is 0.
(H80000000) (HFFFE) (H7FFFFFFE)

D- (1) Subtracts 32-bit BIN data designated by (S1) from 32-bit BIN data designated by (S2), and
stores the result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D).
S1+1 S1 S2+1 S2 D+1 D
b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0
567890 (BIN) - 123456 (BIN) 444434 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S1), (S2) and (D) can be designated at between –2147483648 and 2147483647
(BIN 32 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b31).
b31 Judgment (+/-)
0 Positive
1 Negative

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
• K-2147483648-K2 → K2147483646 ---- A positive value is generated if b31 is 0.
(H80000000) (H0002) (H7FFFFFFE)
• K2147483647-K-2 → K-2147483647 ---- A negative value is generated if b31 is 1.
(H7FFFFFFF) (HFFFE) (H80000001)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the D+(P) or D-(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program adds 28-bit data from X10 to X2B to the data at D9 and D10 when X0
goes ON, and outputs the result of the operation to Y30 to Y4B.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X0 Steps Inst. Device
0 D+P K7X10 D9 K7Y30 0 LD X0
1 D+P K7X10
5 END
D9
K7Y30
5 END

(2) The following program subtracts the data from M0 to M23 from the data at D0 and D1 when XB
goes ON, and stores the result at D10 and D11.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
XB Steps Inst. Device
0 D-P D0 K6M0 D10 0 LD X0B
1 D-P D0
5 END
K6M0
D10
5 END

II - 114
 8. Function Instructions
D+, D+P, D-, D-P

{ D+, D+P, D-, D-P … BIN 32-bit addition and subtraction operations
(Device at storage destination: Shared type)
Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "6.2 Instruction Tables" for correspondence.

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs D+ / D-

Symbol] Condition]
Command
D+, D- S D

Command
D+P, D-P P S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Head No. of the addition/subtraction data or device in
S
which addition or subtraction data is stored.
BIN 32 bits
Head No. of the device in which augend/dividend data is
D
stored. (Addition result is stored in this device.)

Functions
D+ (1) Adds 32-bit BIN data designated by (D) to 32-bit BIN data designated by (S) and stores at the
device designated by (D).
D+1 D S+1 S D+1 D
b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0
567890 (BIN) + 123456 (BIN) 691346 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S) and (D) can be designated at between –2147483648 and 2147483647 (BIN
32 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b31).
b31 Judgment (+/-)
0 Positive
1 Negative
(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
• K2147483647+K2 → K-2147483647 ---- A negative value is generated if b31 is 1.
(H7FFFFFFF) (H0002) (H80000001)
• K-2147483648+K-2 → K2147483646 ---- A positive value is generated if b31 is 0.
(H80000000) (HFFFE) (H7FFFFFFE)

II - 115
 8. Function Instructions
D+, D+P, D-, D-P

D- (1) Subtracts 32-bit data designated by (D) from 32-bit data designated by (S) and stores the result
of the subtraction at the device designated by (D).
D+1 D S+1 S D+1 D
b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0
567890 (BIN) - 123456 (BIN) 444434 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S) and (D) can be designated at between –2147483648 and 2147483647 (BIN
32 bit).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b31).
b31 Judgment (+/-)
0 Positive
1 Negative

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
• K-2147483648-K2 → K2147483646 ---- A positive value is generated if b31 is 0.
(H80000000) (H0002) (H7FFFFFFE)
• K2147483647-K-2 → K-2147483647 ---- A negative value is generated if b31 is 1.
(H7FFFFFFF) (HFFFE) (H80000001)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the D+(P) or D-(P) instructions.

II - 116
 8. Function Instructions
*, *P, /, /P

{ *, *P, /, /P … BIN 16-bit multiplication and division operations

Compatible
Usable instruction: *, /
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SMV T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs * / /
Symbol] Condition]

Command
*, / S1 S2 D

Command
*P, /P P S1 S2 D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number
S1
of the device storing such data
BIN 16 bits
Addition or subtraction data, or first number of device
S2
storing addition or subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data BIN 32 bits

Functions
* (1) Multiplies BIN 16-bit data designated by (S1) and BIN 16-bit data designated by (S2), and stores
the multiplication result in the device designated by (D).
S1 S2 D+1 D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) 1234 (BIN) 7006652 (BIN)

(2) If (D) is a bit device, designation is made from the lower bits.
Example K1 --- Lower 4 bits (b0 to 3)
K4 --- Lower 16 bits (b0 to 15)
K8 --- 32 bits (b0 to 31)

(3) The values for (S1) and (S2) can be designated at between –32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

II - 117
 8. Function Instructions
*, *P, /, /P

(4) Judgments whether (S1),(S2), and (D) are positive or negative are made on the basis of the
most significant bit (b15 for (S1) and (S2), and b31 for (D)).
b15/b31 Judgment (+/-)
0 Positive
1 Negative

/ (1) Divides BIN 16-bit data designated by (S1) and BIN 16-bit data designated by (S2), and stores
the division result in the device designated by (D).
Quotient Remainder
S1 S2 D D+1

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) 1234 (BIN) 4(BIN) 742 (BIN)

(2) If a word device has been used, the result of the division operation is stored as 32 bits, and both
the quotient and remainder are stored.
Quotient ---- Stored at the lower 16 bits
Remainder --- Stored at the higher 16 bits

(3) The values for (S1) and (S2) can be designated at between –32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

(4) Judgment whether values for (S1), (S2), and (D) are positive or negative is made on the basis of
the most significant bit (b15 for (S1) and (S2), and b31 for (D)).
b15/b31 Judgment (+/-)
0 Positive
1 Negative

(5) When divisor S2 is 0, no operation is carried out.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the *, *P, /, or /P instructions.

II - 118
 8. Function Instructions
*, *P, /, /P

Program Example
(1) When X5 is turned ON, "5678" of BIN and multiplication result of D0 are stored in D3 and D4.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X5 Steps Inst. Device
0 *P K5678 D0 D3 0 LD X5
1 *P K5678
5 END D0
D3
5 END

(2) Multiplication result of BIN data of X8 to XF and BIN data of X10 to X1B is output to D0 and D1.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
M402 Steps Inst. Device
0 * K2X8 K3X10 D0 0 LD M402
1 * K2X8
5 END K3X10
D0
5 END

(3) When X3 is turned ON, the data of X8 to XF is divided by 3.14 and the result is output to D3 and
D4.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X3 Steps Inst. Device
0 *P K2X8 K100 D0 0 LD X3
1 *P K2X8
/P D0 K314 D3
K100
9 END D0
5 /P D0
K314
D3
9 END

II - 119
 8. Function Instructions
D*, D*P, D/, D/P

{ D*, D*P, D/, D/P … BIN 32-bit multiplication and division operations
Compatible
Usable instruction: D*, D/
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs D* / D/
Symbol] Condition]

Command
D*, D/ S1 S2 D

Command
D*P, D/P P S1 S2 D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number
S1
of the device storing such data
Addition or subtraction data, or first number of device BIN 32 bits
S2
storing addition or subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data

Functions
D* (1) Multiplies BIN 32-bit data designated by (S1) and BIN 32-bit data designated by (S2), and stores
the multiplication result in the device designated by (D).
S1+1 S1 S2+1 S2 D+3 D+2 D+1 D
b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b63‥‥b48b47‥‥b32b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0
567890 (BIN) 123456 (BIN) 70109427840 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S1) and (S2) can be designated at between –2147483648 and 2147483647
(BIN 32 bits).
(3) Judgment whether values for (S1), (S2), and (D) are positive or negative are made on the basis
of the most significant bit (b31 for (S1) and (S2), and b63 for (D)).
b31/b63 Judgment (+/-)
0 Positive
1 Negative

II - 120
 8. Function Instructions
D*, D*P, D/, D/P

D/ (1) Divides BIN 32-bit data designated by (S1) and BIN 32-bit data designated by (S2), and stores
the division result in the device designated by (D).
S1+1 S1 S2+1 S2 D+1 D D+3 D+2
b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0
567890 (BIN) 123456 (BIN) 4 (BIN) 74066 (BIN)

(2) If a word device has been used, the result of the division operation is stored as 64 bits, and both
the quotient and remainder are stored.
Quotient ---- Stored at the lower 32 bits
Remainder --- Stored at the upper 32 bits

(3) The values for (S1) and (S2) can be designated at between –2147483648 and 2147483647
(BIN 32 bits).

(4) Judgment whether values for (S1), (S2), (D), and (D)+2 are positive or negative is made on the
basis of the most significant bit (b31).
(A sign is used with both the quotient and the remainder)
b31 Judgment (+/-)
0 Positive
1 Negative

(5) When divisor S2 is 0, no operation is carried out.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the D*, D*P, D/, or D/P instructions.

Program Example
(1) When X5 is turned ON, multiplication result of BIN data of D7 and D8 and BIN data of D18 and
D19 is stored in D1 to D4.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X5 Steps Inst. Device
0 D*P D7 D18 D1 0 LD X5
1 D*P D7
5 END
D18
D1
5 END

(2) When X3 is turned ON, the data of X8 to XF is multiplied by 3.14 and the result is output to Y30
to Y3F.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X3 Steps Inst. Device
0 *P K2X8 K314 D0 0 LD X3
1 *P K2X8
D/P D0 K100 D2
K314
MOVP D2 K4Y30 D0
5 D/P D0
13 END
K100
D2
10 MOVP D2
K4Y30
13 END

II - 121
 8. Function Instructions
B+, B+P, B-, B-P

{ B+, B+P, B-, B-P … BCD 4-digit addition and subtraction operations
Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D

This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "6.2 Instruction Tables" for correspondence.
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs B+ /B-
Symbol] Condition]

Command
B+, B- S1 S2 D

Command
B+P, B-P P S1 S2 D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number
S1
of the device storing such data
Addition or subtraction data, or the head No. of device BCD 4-digit
S2
storing addition or subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data

Functions

B+ (1) Adds the BCD 4-digit data designated by "S1" and the BCD 4-digit data designated by "S2", and
stores the result of the addition at the device designated by "D".
S1 S2 D

5 6 7 8 + 1 2 3 4 6 9 1 2

(2) The values for "S1", "S2", and "D" can be specified between 0 and 9999 (BCD 4-digit).

(3) If the result of the addition operation exceeds 9999, the higher bits are ignored. The carry flag in
this case does not go ON.

6 4 3 2 + 3 5 8 3 0 0 1 5

II - 122
 8. Function Instructions
B+, B+P, B-, B-P

B- (1) Subtracts the BCD 4-digit data designated by "S1" and the BCD 4-digit data designated by "S2",
and stores the result of the subtraction at the device designated by "D".
S1 S2 D

0 6 7 8 - 0 2 3 4 0 4 4 4
Digits higher than those which were designated
will be read as 0.

(2) The values for "S1", "S2", and "D" can be specified between 0 and 9999 (BCD 4-digit).

(3) The following will result if an underflow is generated by the subtraction operation:
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.

0 0 0 1 - 0 0 0 3 9 9 9 8

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• The "S1", "S2" or "D" BCD data is outside the 0 to 9999 range. (Error code: 80)

Program Example
(1) The following program adds the D3 BCD data and the Z1 BCD data when X20 goes ON, and
outputs the result to Y8 to Y17.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X20 Steps Inst. Device
0 B+P D3 D10 K4Y8 0 LD X20
1 B+P D3
5 END D10
K4Y8
5 END

(2) The following program subtracts the BCD data at D20 from the BCD data at D10 when X20 goes
ON, and stores the result at R10.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X20 Steps Inst. Device
0 B-P D10 D20 R10 0 LD X20
1 B-P D10
5 END
D20
R10
5 END

II - 123
 8. Function Instructions
B*, B*P, B/, B/P

{ B*, B*P, B/, B/P … BCD 4-digit multiplication and division operations
Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "6.2 Instruction Tables" for correspondence.
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs B* /B/
Symbol] Condition]

Command
B*, B/ S1 S2 D

Command
B*P, B/P P S1 S2 D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number
S1
of the device storing such data
BCD 4-digit
Addition or subtraction data, or the head No. of device
S2
storing addition or subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data BCD 8-digit

Functions
B* (1) Multiplies BCD 4-digit data designated by "S1" and BCD 4-digit data designated by "S2", and
stores the result in the device designated by "D".
D+1 D
S1 S2 (Upper 4 digits) (Lower 4 digits)

5 6 7 8 0 8 7 6 0 4 9 7 3 9 2 8

(2) Values for "S1" and "S2" can be specified between 0 and 9999 (BCD 4 digits).

B/ (1) Divides BCD 4-digit data designated by "S1" and BCD 4-digit data designated by "S2", and
stores the result in the device designated by "D".
S1 S2 D D+1(Remainder)

5 6 7 8 0 8 7 6 0 0 0 6 0 4 2 2
Digits higher than those which were designated
will be read as 0.

(2) 0 to 9999 (BCD 4-digit) for S1, and 1 to 9999 (BCD 4-digit) for S2 can be specified.

II - 124
 8. Function Instructions
B*, B*P, B/, B/P

(3) Division result (quotient and remainder) is stored by using 32 bits.

Quotient (BCD 4 digits) .................. Stored at the lower 16 bits
Remainder (BCD 4 digits) .................. Stored at the upper 16 bits

(4) When divisor S2 is 0, no operation is carried out.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• The BCD data of "S1","S2" or "D" is outside the 0 to 9999 range. (Error code: 80)

Program Example
(1) The following program multiplies the BCD data at X0 to XF and the BCD data at D8 when X1B
goes ON, and stores the result at D0 and D1.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X1B Steps Inst. Device
0 B*P K4X0 D8 D0 0 LD X1B
1 B*P K4X0
5 END D8
D0
5 END

D+1 D
D8 (Upper 4 digits) (Lower 4 digits)
XF‥‥‥‥‥‥X0

9 7 5 3 x 8 6 4 2 8 4 2 8 5 4 2 6

Multiplicand Multiple Multiplication result

(2) The following program divides the BCD data D7 by the BCD data 1234, stores the result at
D502 and D503, and at the same time outputs the quotient to Y30 to Y3F.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
M400 Steps Inst. Device
0 B/P D7 H1234 D502 0 LD M400
1 B/P D7
MOVP D502 K4Y30
H1234
8 END D502
5 MOVP D502
K4Y30
8 END

D+1 D
D7 (Upper 4 digits) (Lower 4 digits)

5 6 7 8 ÷ 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 4 0 7 4 2
Quotient Remainder

X3F‥‥‥‥‥‥X30

0 0 0 4
Quotient

II - 125
 8. Function Instructions
INC,INCP,DEC,DECP

{ INC,INCP,DEC,DECP … Incrementing and decrementing 16-bit BIN data

Compatible
Usable instruction: INC, DEC
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs INC/DEC

Symbol] Condition]
Command
INC, DEC D

Command
INCP,
DECP P D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Head number of device conducting INC (add 1) or
D BIN 16 bits
DEC (subtract 1) operation

Functions

INC (1) Adds 1 to device designated by "D" (16-bit data).

D D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) ＋ 1 5679 (BIN)

(2) If the contents of the device designated by "D" were 32767, and the INC or INCP instruction
were executed on that device, the value -32768 would be stored in the device designated by
"D".

DEC (1) Subtracts 1 from device designated by "D" (16-bit data).

D D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) － 1 5677 (BIN)

(2) If the contents of the device designated by "D" were 0, and the DEC or DECP instruction were
executed on that device, the value -1 would be stored in the device designated by "D".

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the INC(P) or DEC(P) instructions.

II - 126
 8. Function Instructions
INC,INCP,DEC,DECP

Program Example
(1) The following is a down counter program.
[Ladder Mode]
X7
0 MOVP K100 D8 Transfers the value of 100 to D8 when X7 is ON
X8 M38
4 DECP D8 When M38 is OFF, X8 goes from OFF to ON, and 1 is
decremented from D8.
8 = K0 D8 M38
At D8=0, M38 goes ON.
12 END

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X7
1 MOVP K100
D8
4 LD X8
5 ANI M38
6 DECP D8
8 LD= K0
D8
11 OUT M38
12 END

II - 127
 8. Function Instructions
DINC,DINCP,DDEC,DDECP

{ DINC,DINCP,DDEC,DDECP … Incrementing and decrementing 32-bit BIN data

Compatible
Usable instruction: DINC, DDEC
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs DINC/DDEC

Symbol] Condition]
Command
DINC, DDEC D

Command
DINCP,
DDECP P D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Head number of device what will execute the DINC
D BIN 32 bits
(+1) or DDEC (-1) operation

Functions
DINC (1) Adds 1 to the device designated by "D" (32-bit data).
D+1 D D+1 D

b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0

73500 (BIN) ＋1 73501 (BIN)

(2) If the contents of the device designated by "D" are 2147483647, and the DINC or DINCP
instruction is executed, the value -2147483648 will be stored at the device designated by "D".

DDEC (1) Subtracts 1 from the device designated by "D" (32-bit data).
D+1 D D+1 D

b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0

73500 (BIN) －1 73499 (BIN)

(2) If the contents of the device designated by "D" are 0, and the DDEC or DDECP instruction is
executed, the value -1 will be stored at the device designated by "D".

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the DINC(P) or DDEC(P) instruction.

II - 128
 8. Function Instructions
DINC,DINCP,DDEC,DDECP

Program Example
(1) The following program adds 1 to the data at D0 and D1 when X0 is ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X0 Steps Inst. Device
0 DINCP D0 0 LD X0
1 DINCP D0
3 END
3 END

(2) The following program adds 1 to the data set at X10 to X27 when X0 goes ON, and stores the
result at D3 and D4.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X0 Steps Inst. Device
0 DMOVP K6X10 D3 0 LD X0
1 DMOVP K6X10
DINCP D3 D3
6 END 4 DINCP D3
6 END

(3) The following program subtracts 1 from the data at D0 and D1 when X0 goes ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X0 Steps Inst. Device
0 DDECP D0 0 LD X0
1 DDECP D0
3 END 3 END

(4) The following program subtracts 1 from the data set at X10 to X27 when X0 goes ON, and
stores the result at D3 and D4.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X0 Steps Inst. Device
0 DMOVP K6X10 D3 0 LD X0
1 DMOVP K6X10
DDECP D3 D3
4 DDECP D3
6 END
6 END

II - 129
 8. Function Instructions
NEG,NEGP,DNEG,DNEGP

{ NEG,NEGP,DNEG,DNEGP … Complement of 2 of BIN 16- and 32-bit data (sign reversal)

Compatible
Usable instruction: NEG
instruction mode
Usable Devices
Digit
Set Consta Pointer desig- Index
Data Bit Devices Word Devices
nt nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices
Digit
Set Consta Pointer desig- Index
Data Bit Devices Word Devices
nt nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs NEG/DNEG

Symbol] Condition]
Command
NEG, DNEG D

Command
NEGP,
DNEGP P D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Head number of the device where data for the
D BIN 16/32 bits
complement of 2 operation is stored.

Functions
NEG (1) Reverses the sign of the 16-bit device designated by "D" and stores at the device designated by
"D".

32 Bit
b15･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
Before execution "D" 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 ‥‥ -21846

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sign conversion 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
-

b15･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
After execution "D" 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 ‥‥ 21846

(2) Used when reversing positive and negative signs.

II - 130
 8. Function Instructions
NEG,NEGP,DNEG,DNEGP

DNEG (1) Reverses the sign of the 32-bit device designated by "D" and stores at the device designated by
"D".
32 Bit
b31･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
Before execution "D" 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 ‥‥ -218460

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sign conversion
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
-

b31･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
After execution "D" 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 ‥‥ 218460

(2) Used when reversing positive and negative signs.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the NEG(P) or DNEG(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program calculates a total for the data at D10 through D20 when XA goes ON, and
seeks an absolute value if the result is negative.
[Ladder Mode]
XA
0 < D10 D20 M3 M3 goes ON when D10 is smaller than D20.
XA
5 - D10 D20 D10 Subtracts D20 from D10.
M3
NEG D10 Seeks an absolute value (complement of 2) when
M3 is ON.
13 END

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD XA
1 AND< D10
D20
4 OUT M3
5 LD XA
6 - D10
D20
D10
10 AND M3
11 NEG D10
13 END

II - 131
 8. Function Instructions
BCD,BCDP,DBCD,DBCDP

{ BCD,BCDP,DBCD,DBCDP … Conversion from BIN data to 4-digit and 8-digit BCD

Compatible
Usable instruction: BCD, DBCD
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

[Execution indicates the signs BCD/DBCD

[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
Command
BCD, DBCD S D

Command
BCDP, DBCDP P S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Head number of the device where BIN data is
S BIN 16/32 bits
stored
D Head number of the device that will store BCD data BCD 4/8 digits

Functions
BCD (1) Converts BIN data (0 to 9999) at the device designated by "D" to BCD data, and stores it at the
device designated by "D".

3276816384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

S BIN 9999 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Always set these to 0 BCD conversions

8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1

D BCD 9999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

Thousands Hundreds Tens Ones

digits digits digits digits

II - 132
 8. Function Instructions
BCD,BCDP,DBCD,DBCDP

DBCD (1) Converts BIN data (0 to 99999999) at the device designated by "S" to BCD data, and transfers it
at the device designated by "D".

S+1(Upper 16 bits) S (Lower 16 bits)

231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212

210
211

29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
S BIN 99999999 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Always set these to 0
BCD conversions
(Upper 5 bits)

×107

×106

×105

×104

×103

×102

×101

×100
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
D BCD 99999999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Ten Millions Hundred Ten Thousands Hundreds Tens Ones
millions digits thousands thousands digits digits digits digits
digits digits digits
D+1(Upper 4 digits) D (Lower 4 digits)

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• The data at S was not in the 0 to 9999 range when the BCD instruction was issued.
(Error code: 80)
• The data at "S"+1 and "S" was not in the 0 to 99999999 range when the DBCD instruction
was issued. (Error code: 80)

Program Example
(1) The following program outputs the present value of C4 from Y20 to Y2F to the BCD display
device.
Y2D
Y2C
Y2E

Y2B
Y2A
Y2F

Y29
Y28

Y27
Y26
Y25
Y24

Y23
Y22
Y21
Y20
8000
4000
2000
1000

800
400
200
100

80
40
20
10

8
4
2
1

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

7-element display unit

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M400 Steps Inst. Device
0 BCDP C4 K4Y20 0 LD M400
1 BCDP C4
4 END K4Y20
4 END

II - 133
8. Function Instructions
BCD,BCDP,DBCD,DBCDP

(2) The following program outputs bit data from D0 to D1 to Y40 to Y67.

Y67 to Y64 Y63 to Y60 Y5F to Y5C Y5B to Y58 Y57 to Y54 Y53 to Y50 Y4F to Y4C Y4B to Y48 Y47 to Y44 Y43 to Y40

7-element display unit

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M400 Steps Inst. Device
0 D/ D0 K10000 D2 0 LD M400
1 D/ D0
DBCDP D2 K6Y50 K10000
D2
BCD D4 K4Y40 6 DBCDP D2
K6Y50
12 END 9 BCD D4
K4Y40
12 END

II - 134
 8. Function Instructions
BIN,BINP,DBIN,DBINP

{ BIN,BINP,DBIN,DBINP … Conversion from BCD 4-digit and 8-digit data to BIN data
Compatible
Usable instruction: BIN, DBIN
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs BIN/DBIN

Symbol] Condition]
Command
BIN, DBIN S D

Command
BINP,
DBINP P S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Head number of device storing BCD data BCD 4/8 digit
D Head number of device that will store BIN data BIN 16/32 bits

Functions
BIN (1) Converts BCD data (0 to 9999) at device designated by "D" to BIN data, and stores at the device
designated by "D".

8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1

S BCD 9999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Thousands Hundreds Tens digits Ones
digits digits digits
BIN conversion
32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

D BIN 9999 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

Always set these to 0

II - 135
 8. Function Instructions
BIN,BINP,DBIN,DBINP

DBIN (1) Converts BCD data (0 to 99999999) at device designated by "S" to BIN data, and stores at the
device designated by "D".

S+1 S

×107

×106

×105

×104

×103

×102

×101

×100
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
S BCD 99999999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

Ten millions Millions Hundred Ten Thousands Hundreds Tens digits Ones digits
digits digits thousands thousands digits digits
digits digits BIN conversions
231 D+1 D
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212

210
211

29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
D BIN 99999999 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Always set these to 0

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases, an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• When values other than 0 to 9 are designated to any digits of "S". (Error code: 81)

Program Example
(1) The following program converts the BCD data at X10 to X1B to BIN when X8 is ON, and stores it
at D8.

Digital switch
BCD

Can be used
at other
800
400
200
100

80
40
20
10

8
4
2
1

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
Y1F

Y1D
Y1C

Y19
Y18

Y17
Y16
Y15
Y14

Y13
Y12
Y11
Y10
Y1E

Y1B
Y1A

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M40 Steps Inst. Device
0 BINP K3X10 D8 0 LD M400
1 BINP K3X10
4 END D8
4 END

II - 136
8. Function Instructions
BIN,BINP,DBIN,DBINP

(2) The following program converts the BCD data at X10 to X37 to BIN when X8 is ON, and stores it
at D0 and D1.
BCD digital switch

X37 to X34 X33 to X30 X2F to X2C X2B to X28 X27 to X24 X23 to X20 X1F to X1C X1B to X18 X17 to X14 X13 to X10

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X8 Steps Inst. Device
0 DBINP K6X20 D9 0 LD X8
1 DBINP K6X20
D* D9 D10000 D5
D9
BIN K4X10 D3 4 D* D9
D10000
MOV K0 D4 D5
D+ D3 D5 D0 8 BIN K4X10
D3
17 END 11 MOV K0
D4
13 D+ D3
D5
D0
17 END

II - 137
 8. Function Instructions
MOV,MOVP,DMOV,DMOVP

{ MOV,MOVP,DMOV,DMOVP … 16-bit and 32-bit data transfers

Compatible
Usable instruction: MOV, DMOV
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S 1
3
D 2

1: Z cannot be used independently at the source side unless index qualification is given to the word device.
2: Transferring to Z from bit device is not possible.

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
3
D
3: Index qualification is possible only with MOV(P)0 and is not possible with DMOV(P).

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs MOV/DMOV

Symbol] Condition]
MOV, DMOV S D

MOVP, DMOVP P S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Transfer data, or number of device storing transfer data
BIN 16/32 bits
D Number of device to store transferred data

Functions
MOV (1) Transfers the 16-bit data from the device designated by "S" to the device designated by "D".
b15･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
Prior to transfer "S" 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Transmission
b15･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
After transfer "D" 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

II - 138
 8. Function Instructions
MOV,MOVP,DMOV,DMOVP

DMOV (1) Transfers the 32-bit data from the device designated by "S" to the device designated by "D".
S+1 S

b15･････････････････････････b0 b15･････････････････････････b0
Prior to transfer "S" 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

Transmission
D+1 D

b15･････････････････････････b0 b15･････････････････････････b0
After transfer "D" 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the MOV(P) or DMOV(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program stores input data from X0 to XB at D8.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
M3 Steps Inst. Device
0 MOV K3X0 D8 0 LD M3
1 MOV K3X0
4 END
D8
4 END

(2) The following program stores the constant K155 at D8 when X8 goes ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X8 Steps Inst. Device
0 MOVP K155 D8 0 LD X8
1 MOVP K155
4 END
D8
4 END
009BH
b15･･･････････････b8b7････････････････b0
D8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

(3) The following program stores the data from D0 and D1 at D7 and D8.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
M3
0 DMOV D0 D7 0 LD M3
1 DMOV D0
4 END D7
4 END

(4) The following program stores the data from X0 to X1F at D0 and D1.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
M3
0 DMOVP K8X0 D0 0 LD M3
1 DMOVP K8X0
4 END D0
4 END

II - 139
 8. Function Instructions
CML,CMLP,DCML,DCMLP

{ CML,CMLP,DCML,DCMLP … 16-bit and 32-bit negation transfers

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs CML/DCML

Symbol] Condition]
CML, DCML S D

CMLP, S D
P
DCMLP

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Data to be inverted, or number of device storing this
S
data BIN 16/32 bits
D Number of device that will store results of inversion

Functions
CML (1) Inverts 16-bit data designated by S bit by bit, and transfers the result to the device designated by
"D".

b15･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
Before execution "S" 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

Inversion
b15･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
After execution "D" 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

DCML
(1) Inverts 32-bit data designated by S bit by bit, and transfers the result to the device designated by
"D".
S+1 S

b15･････････････････････････ b0b15･････････････････････････b0
Before execution "S" 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

Inversion
D+1 D

b15･････････････････････････ b0b15･････････････････････････b0
After execution "D" 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the CML(P) or DCML(P) instructions.

II - 140
 8. Function Instructions
CML,CMLP,DCML,DCMLP

Program Example
(1) The following program inverts the data from X0 to X7, and transfers result to D0.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
M3 Steps Inst. Device
0 CML K2X0 D0 0 LD M3
1 CML K2X0
4 END
D0
4 END

When the number of bits at "S" is less than the number of bits at "D"

X7 ･････････ X0
These bits are all 11010000
read as "0".

b15 ････････ b8 b7 ････････ b0

D0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

(2) The following program inverts the data at M16 to M35, and transfers the result to Y40 to Y53.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
M3
0 DCML K5M16 K6Y40 0 LD M3
1 DCML K5M16
4 END K5Y40
4 END

When the number of bits at "S" is less than the number of bits at "D"

M35 ･･････････ M24M23････････ M16

These bits are all
read as "0". 0100 0111 0010110 0

Y57 ･････Y53 ･･････････ Y48Y47 ････････ Y40

1111 1011 1000 11010011

(3) The following program inverts the data at D0 and D1 when X3 is ON, and stores the result at
D16 and D17.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X3 Steps Inst. Device
0 DCMLP D0 D16 0 LD X3
1 DCMLP D0
4 END D16
4 END

b31 ････････ b24 ･･･････ b8 b7 ･････････ b0

D0,D1 0000 0100 0111 00101100

b31 ････････ b24 ･･･････ b8 b7 ･････････ b0

D16,D17 1111 1011 1000 11010011

II - 141
 8. Function Instructions
XCH,XCHP,DXCH,DXCHP

{ XCH,XCHP,DXCH,DXCHP … 16-bit and 32-bit data exchanges

Compatible
Usable Devices: XCH, DXCH
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D1
D2

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D1
D2

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs XCH/DXCH

Symbol] Condition]
XCH, DXCH D1 D2

XCHP, D1 D2
P
DXCHP

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D1 Head number of device storing data to be
BIN 16/32 bits
D2 exchanged

Functions
XCH (1) Conducts 16-bit data exchange between "D1" and "D2".
D1 D2
b15･･････････････････b8 b7･･････････････････b0 b15･････････････････b8 b7･･･････････････････b0

Before execution 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

D1 D2
b15･････････････････b8 b7･･･････････････････b0 b15･･････････････････b8 b7･･････････････････b0

After execution 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

II - 142
 8. Function Instructions
XCH,XCHP,DXCH,DXCHP

DXCH (1) Conducts 32-bit data exchange between "D1"+1, "D1" and "D2"+1, "D2".
D1+1 D1 D2+1 D2
b31･････････････････････b16 b15･･････････････････････b0 b31･････････････････････b16 b15･･････････････････････b0

Before execution 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

D1+1 D1 D2+1 D2
b31･････････････････････b16 b15･･････････････････････b0 b31･････････････････････b16 b15･･････････････････････b0

After execution 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the XCH(P) or DXCH(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program exchanges the present value of T0 with the contents of D0 when X8 goes
ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X8 Steps Inst. Device
0 XCHP T0 D0 0 LD X8
1 XCHP T0
4 END
D0
4 END

(2) The following program exchanges the contents of D0 with the data from M16 to M31 when X10
goes ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X10 Steps Inst. Device
0 XCHP D0 K4M16 0 LD X10
1 XCHP D0
4 END
K4M16
4 END

(3) The following program exchanges the contents of D0 and D1 with the data at M16 to M47 when
X10 goes ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X10 Steps Inst. Device
0 DXCHP D0 K8M16 0 LD X10
1 DXCHP D0
4 END
K8M16
4 END

(4) The following program exchanges the contents of D0 and D1 with those of D9 and D10 when M0
goes ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
M0 Steps Inst. Device
0 DXCHP D0 D9 0 LD M0
1 DXCHP D0
4 END
D9
4 END

II - 143
 8. Function Instructions
BMOV,BMOVP

{ BMOV,BMOVP … 16-bit data block transfers

Compatible
Usable Devices: BMOV
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D
n

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D
n

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
Command
BMOV BMOV S D n

Command
BMOVP BMOVP S D n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Head number of device storing data to transfer
D Head number of destination device BIN 16 bits
n Number of transfers

Functions
(1) Batch transfers "n" points of 16-bit data starting from the device designated by "S" to the area of
"n" points starting from the device designated by "D".

b15‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥b0

S H1234 D H1234
Batch
S+1 H5678 transfer D+1 H5678
S+2 H7FF0 D+2 H7FF0
n n

S+(n-2) H6FFF D+(n-2) H6FFF

S+(n-1) H553F D+(n-1) H553F

II - 144
 8. Function Instructions
BMOV,BMOVP

(2) When transfer source and transfer destination are duplicated, the following operations are
expected.
(a) Transferring to a smaller device No. results in normal operation.

(Example) When BMOV D0 D5 K10 are executed

D0 Normal transfer

Duplicated D5
device
D9

D14

(b) Transferring to a larger device No. results in abnormal operation.

(Example) When BMOV D5 D0 K10 are executed

Abnormal transfer D5

D0 Duplicated
device
D14

D9

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• In the case where a part of device area between S/D and n-th device does not exist. (Error
code: 82)
POINT
Note that if the number of devices in the area between S/D and n-th device exceeds the
relevant device, error will not occur. (In this case, transferred to the other device, as well.)

Program Example
(1) The current value of T33 to T48 is transferred to D908 to D923.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
M90 Steps Inst. Device
0 BMOV T33 D908 H10 0 LD M90
1 BMOV T33
6 END
D908
H10
6 END

Before execution After transfer

(Transfer source) (Transfer destination)

T31 0100 D906 0000

T32 0010 D907 03FF
T33 0100 D908 0100
T34 0999 D909 0999
T35 1005 D910 1005 16 data blocks

T48 0115 D923 0115

T49 0000 D924 1000

II - 145
 8. Function Instructions
FMOV,FMOVP

{ FMOV,FMOVP … 16-bit identical data batch transfer

Compatible
Usable Devices: FMOV
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D
n

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D
n

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
Command
FMOV FMOV S D n

Command
FMOVP FMOVP S D n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Data to transfer, or head number of device storing
S
data to transfer
D Head number of destination device BIN 16 bits

n Number of transfers

Functions
(1) Transfers 16-bit data from device designated by "S" to location n-points from device designated
by "D".

b15‥‥‥‥b0

D H3456
b15‥‥‥‥b0 Transmission D+1 H3456
S H3456 D+2 H3456
n

D+(n-2) H3456
D+(n-1) H3456

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• In the case where a part of device area between D and n-th device does not exist.
(Error code: 82)

II - 146
 8. Function Instructions
FMOV,FMOVP

Program Example
(1) When XA is turned ON, D8 to D23 is reset (cleared).
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
XA Steps Inst. Device
0 FMOV K0 D8 H10 0 LD XA
1 FMOV K0
6 END
D8
H10
6 END

S D

0 D8 0
D9 0

16 blocks
Transfer D21 0
D22 0
D23 0

II - 147
 8. Function Instructions
S.TMOV

{ S.TMOV … Transfer of timer and counter setting value

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D
The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this instruction.

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
Command
S.TMOV S.TMOV S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
No. of timer and counter device to which setting value is
S
transferred. BIN 16 bits
D Device No. of the transfer destination

Functions
The setting value of timer and counter device specified with S is transferred to the device specified
with D.
Note that, however, the actual setting value is transferred only if specified with constant.
If the setting value is specified with word device, normal transfer will not be carried out.
Setting value designation method with the
Timer setting Setting value to be transferred by TMOV
timer output instruction
Fixed timer Constant designation OUT Tx Kn Constant "n"
setting Word device designation OUT Tx Dn Constant 0(zero)
Setting value set with the setting
Constant designation OUT Tx Kn
Variable timer display device
setting Setting value set with the setting
Word device designation OUT Tx Dn
display device
[Note]
When this instruction is monitored, the current value is displayed on the timer and counter
device specified with S. If the timer and counter device are used with any function instructions
other than above, everything indicates the current value.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the S.TMOV instruction.

II - 148
 8. Function Instructions
S.TMOV

Program Example
(1) The setting value of T10 is transferred to D0.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X1 Steps Inst. Device
0 T10 K10 0 LD X1
X2 1 OUT T10
5 S.TMOV T10 D0
K10

END 5 LD X2
12
6 S.TMOV T10
In this example, D0 equals to 10. D0
12 END

(2) The setting value of C20 is transferred to D0.

Condition: Variable timer is set for the counter C20. This is the case where 100 is set for C20,
using the setting display device.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X1 Steps Inst. Device
0 C20 K50 0 LD X1
X2 1 OUT C20
5 S.TMOV C20 D0
K50

END 5 LD X2
12
6 S.TMOV C20
In this example, D0 equals to 100. D0
12 END

II - 149
 8. Function Instructions
CJ,JMP

{ CJ,JMP ……Conditional jump

Compatible
Usable instruction: CJ
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
P

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
P

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
Command
CJ CJ P**

Command
JMP
JMP P**
Label
Command
P**

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
P Pointer number of jump destination Device name

Functions
CJ (1) Executes program of designated pointer number within the same program file when jump
command is ON.

(2) Executes next step in program when jump command is OFF.

ON

Jump command OFF

Executed
CJ
each scan

JMP (1) A program of specified pointer No. in the same program file is executed unconditionally.

II - 150
 8. Function Instructions
CJ,JMP

POINTS
Note the following points when using the jump instruction.
(1) Jump instructions can be used only for pointer numbers within the same program file.

(2) After the timer coil has gone ON, accurate measurements cannot be made if there is an attempt to
jump the timer of a coil that has been turned ON using the CJ or JMP instructions.

(3) Scan time is shortened if the CJ or JMP instruction is used to force a jump to the rear.

(4) The CJ and JMP instructions can be used to jump to a step prior to the step currently being
executed.

P8 X9
30 ･ Y80
･
･
･
･
M3 Jumps to P8 label when M3 goes ON.
1001 CJ P8
X10 Executes when M3 is OFF.
1004 Y91

(5) The device to which a jump has been made with CJ or JMP does not change.

XB
20 CJ P19 Jumps to label P19 when XB goes ON.
XC
23 Y43
Y43 and Y49 do not change regardless of
XB
whether XB and XC are ON/OFF during
25 Y49
execution of CJ instruction.
P19 X9
27 Y4C

(6) The lable (P**) occupies step 1.

X8
14 CJ P9
M33
Occupies 17 Y30
step 1 M3
19 Y36
P9 M36
21 Y39
X9
24 Y3E

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation is returned, the error flag (SM0) goes ON, and the error code
is stored at SD0.
• A pointer number which is not in use as a label in the same program has been designated.
(Error code: 20 or 85)
• A common pointer in the other program has been designated. (Error code: 20 or 85)

II - 151
 8. Function Instructions
CJ,JMP

Program Example
(1) The following program jumps to P3 when X9 goes ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X9 Steps Inst. Device
0 CJ P3 0 LD X9
X30 1 CJ P3
3 Y6F
X41 3 LD X30
P3
6 Y7E 4 OUT Y6F
5 P3
8 END
6 LD X41
7 OUT Y7E
8 END

II - 152
 8. Function Instructions
FEND

{ FEND … Program termination

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P

The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this instruction.

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
FEND FEND

Functions
(1) FEND instruction is used when branching a sequence program operation by CJ instruction, etc.,
or when dividing between the main routine program and the sub routine program.
0
Main routine CALL P**
program Jump caused by the
CJ P** Main routine
Operations when CJ instruction
program
the CJ instruction Main routine
is not executed program Operation performed
FEND
when the CJ instruction
FEND was executed
P** Sub routine
P** Main routine program
program
FEND END
END
(a) When using the CJ instruction (b) When there is a subroutine program

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• A FEND instruction is executed after the execution of the CALL instruction, and before the
execution of the RET instruction. (Error code: 26)

II - 153
 8. Function Instructions
FEND

Program Example
(1) The following program uses the CJ instruction.
[Ladder Mode]
X0
0 Y20
X0B When XB is ON, jumps to label P23; from P23,
2 CJ P23
executes the next step
X13
5 Y30
X14 Executed when XB is OFF
7 Y31

9 FEND
P23 X1
Indicates the termination of the sequence program
11 Y22 when XB is OFF

13 END

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X0
:
:
9 FEND
10 P23
11 LD X1
12 OUT Y22
13 END

II - 154
 8. Function Instructions
GOEND

{ GOEND … Jump to END

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P

This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "6.2 Instruction Tables" for correspondence.

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
Command
GOEND GOEND

Functions
(1) Jumps to FEND or END instruction in the same program file.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• A GOEND instruction has been executed after the execution of the CALL instruction, and prior
to the execution of the RET instruction. (Error code: 26)

Program Example
(1) The following program jumps to the END instruction if D0 holds a negative number.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 < D0 K0 GOEND 0 LD< D0
K0
3 GOEND

II - 155
 8. Function Instructions
CALL,CALLP,RET

{ CALL,CALLP,RET … Sub-routine program calls and return from sub-routine programs

Compatible
Usable instruction: CALL, RET
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
P

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
P

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
Command
CALL CALL Pn

Command
CALLP CALLP Pn

RET RET

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Pn First pointer number of sub-routine program Device name

Functions
CALL (1) When the CALL (P) instruction is executed, executes the sub-routine program of the program
specified by Pn.
Main routine Sub-routine
program program
Pn

RET
CALL Pn

END

II - 156
 8. Function Instructions
CALL,CALLP,RET

(2) CALL or CALLP instructions can be nested up to 8 deep.

POINT
There are the following two pointer numbers to be set by the CALL(P) instruction.
Refer to "5.3.14 Pointer P" of "5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices" for details.
• Local pointer
• Common pointer

RET (1) Indicates end of sub-routine program

(2) When the RET instruction is executed, returns to the step following the CALL(P) instruction
which called the sub-routine program.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• Following the execution of the CALL(P) instruction, an END or FEND instruction is executed
before the execution of the RET instruction. (Error code: 26)
• An RET instruction is executed prior to the execution of the CALL (P) instruction.
(Error code: 26)
• When stuck area has exceeded due to CALL(P) instruction's nesting, etc. (Error code: 86)

Program Example
(1) The following program executes a sub-routine program when X1 turns ON from OFF.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X8 Steps Inst. Device
10 Y11 10 LD X8
X1 11 OUT Y11
12 CALL P23
12 LD X1
X9
13 CALL P33
15 Y13
15 LD X9
「 16 OUT Y13
17 FEND
17 FEND
P33 XA 18
500 Y33
:
Y34 500 P33
501 LD XA
504 RET 502 OUT Y33
503 OUT Y34
504 RET
505

II - 157
 8. Function Instructions
FOR,NEXT

{ FOR,NEXT … FOR to NEXT instruction loop

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
n
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "6.2 Instruction Tables" for correspondence.

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]

FOR FOR n
Repeated program
NEXT
NEXT

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Number of repetitions of the FOR to NEXT loop
n BIN 16 bits
(from 1 to 32767)

Functions
(1) When the processing in the FOR to NEXT loop is executed n-times without conditions, the step
following the NEXT instruction will be executed.

(2) The value of n can be designated at between 1 and 32767. If it is designated at a value of from
-32768 to 0, it will be executed as though n=1.

(3) If you do not desire to execute the processing called for within the FOR to NEXT loop, use the
CJ instruction to jump. Setting the repetition times to "0" would not allow you to skip the process
between FOR and NEXT instructions.

(4) To force an end to the repetitious execution of the FOR to NEXT loop during the execution of the
loop, insert a BREAK instruction. Premature termination with CJ instruction, etc. will result in an
operation error.

(5) FOR instructions can be nested up to 16 deep.

II - 158
 8. Function Instructions
FOR,NEXT

FOR K5
X0

FOR K3
X1

FOR instructions can be

FOR K100 nested up to 16 deep.
X2

NEXT

NEXT

NEXT

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• An END (FEND) instruction is executed after the execution of a FOR instruction, but before
the execution of a NEXT instruction. (Error code: 31)
• A NEXT instruction is executed prior to the execution of a FOR instruction. (Error code: 31)
• The 17th FOR instruction is encountered when FOR instructions have been nested.
(Error code: 30)

Program Example
(1) The following program executes the FOR to NEXT loop when X8 is OFF, and does not execute
it when X8 is ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X8 Steps Inst. Device
0 CJ P8 0 LD X8
M0 1 CJ P8
3 MOV K0 D100
3 LDI M0
6 FOR K4 4 MOV K0
M0 D100
8 MOV D100 Z0 6 FOR K4
8 LDI M0
MOV D100 D0Z0 9 MOV D100
Z0
INC D100
12 MOV D100
16 NEXT D0Z0
15 INC Z3
P8 XA
17 Y33 16 NEXT
17 P8
20 END 18 LD XA
19 OUT Y33
20 END

II - 159
 8. Function Instructions
BREAK,BREAKP

{ BREAK,BREAKP … Forced end of FOR to NEXT instruction loop

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
P
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "6.2 Instruction Tables" for correspondence.

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
Command
BREAK BREAK D Pn

Command
BREAKP BREAKP D Pn

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Number of device that will store the number of
D BIN 16 bits
repetitions remaining
Number of branch destination pointer when the end Device name
Pn
of processing repetitions. (pointer)

Functions
(1) Forces the end of repetition processing based on the FOR to NEXT instruction loop, and shifts
to the execution of the pointer designated by Pn.
Only the pointer within the same program file can be specified for Pn.
If a pointer in the other program file is specified for Pn, an operation error is resulted.

FOR K
If the BREAK instruction has
Forced end condition not been executed, execution
BREAK D Pn will return to the FOR
When forced end condition instruction for the number of
has been established times designated by the FOR
NEXT instruction.

Pn

(2) The number of repetitions remaining at the point that the FOR to NEXT loop was brought to a
forced end is stored at "D".
However, the number of times when the BREAK instruction was executed is also included in
the number of repetitions remaining.

(3) The BREAK instruction can be used only during the execution of a FOR to NEXT instruction
loop.

(4) The BREAK instruction can be used only when there is only one level of nesting.
If an end is forced when there are multiple nesting levels, execute the same number of BREAK
instructions as there are nesting levels.

II - 160
 8. Function Instructions
BREAK,BREAKP

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• The BREAK instruction is used in a case other than with the FOR to NEXT instruction loop.
(Error code: 32)
• The jump destination for the pointer designated by Pn does not exist. (Error code: 85)
• The pointer of another program file is designated for Pn. (Error code: 85)

Program Example
(1) The following program forces the FOR to NEXT loop to end when the value of D2 reaches 30
(when the FOR to NEXT loop has been executed 30 times).
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
M30 Steps Inst. Device
10 MOV K0 D0 10 LD M30
11 MOV K0
14 FOR K100
D0
M30
19 INC D0 14 FOR K100
19 LD M30
「
22 = D0 K30 BREAKP D1 P0 20 INC D0
22 LD= D0
36 NEXT K30
P0 25 BREAKP D1
40 P0
36 NEXT
40 P0

REMARK
(1) The value 71 is stored at D1 as the remaining number of repetitions when the BREAK instruction
is executed.

II - 161
 8. Function Instructions
WAND,WANDP,DAND,DANDP

{ WAND,WANDP,DAND,DANDP … Logical products with 16-bit and 32-bit data

(Device at storage destination: Independent type)
Compatible
Usable instruction: WAND
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.

[Execution indicates the signs WAND/DAND

[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
Command
WAND, DAND S1 S2 D

Command
WANDP, DANDP P S1 S2 D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S1 Data from which logical product will be determined,
S2 or number of devices storing such data
BIN 16/32 bits
Number of devices where logical product operation
D
results will be stored

Functions
WAND (1) A logical product operation is conducted for each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated
at "S1" and the 16-bit data of the device designated at "S2", and the results are stored in the
device designated at "D".

16 Bit

Before execution S1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
AND
Before execution S2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

After execution D 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

(2) In the case of bit devices, digits above the number designated are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 162
8. Function Instructions
WAND,WANDP,DAND,DANDP

DAND (1) Conducts a logical product operation on each bit of the 32-bit data for the device designated by
"S1" and the 32-bit data for the device designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".

32 Bit
S1+1 S1

Before execution S1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
S2+1 AND S2

Before execution S2 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
D+1 D

After execution D 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

(2) In the case of bit devices, digits other than the number designated are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 163
 8. Function Instructions
WAND,WANDP,DAND,DANDP

{ WAND,WANDP,DAND,DANDP … Logical products with 16-bit and 32-bit data

(Device at storage destination: Shared type)
Compatible
Usable instruction: DAND
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

[Execution indicates the signs WAND/DAND

[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
Command
WAND, DAND S D

Command
WANDP, DANDP P S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Data from which logical product will be determined,
BIN 16/32 bits
D or number of devices storing such data

Functions
WAND (1) A logical product operation is conducted for each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated
at "D" and the 16-bit data of the device designated at "S", and the results are stored in the
device designated at "D".

16 Bit

Before execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
AND

Before execution S 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

After execution D 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

(2) In the case of bit devices, digits other than the number designated are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 164
 8. Function Instructions
WAND,WANDP,DAND,DANDP

DAND (1) Conducts a logical product operation on each bit of the 32-bit data for the device designated by
"D" and the 32-bit data for the device designated by "S", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".

32 Bit
D+1 D

Before execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
S+1 AND S

Before execution S 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
D+1 D

After execution D 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

(2) In the case of bit devices, digits other than the number designated are processed as 0 in the
operation.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the WAND(P) or DAND(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program masks the digit in the 10s place of the 4-digit BCD value at D10 (second
digit from the end) to 0 when XA is ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
XA Steps Inst. Device
0 WANDP H0FF0F D10 0 LD X0A
1 WANDP H0FF0F
4 END
3 D10
4 END

D10 BCD1234 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
AND
HFF0F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

D10 BCD1204 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

II - 165
8. Function Instructions
WAND,WANDP,DAND,DANDP

(2) The following program performs a logical product operation on the data from X10 to X1B and the
data at D33 when XA is ON, and outputs the results to D50.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
XA Steps Inst. Device
0 WAND K3X10 D33 D50 0 LD XA
1 WAND K3X10
5 END
D33
D50
5 END
X1B･･････X18X17･･･････X14X13･･･････X10
X1B to X10 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Seen as "0" AND
D33 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

D50 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

(3) The following program performs a logical product operation on the data at D99 and D100, and
the 24-bit data between X30 and X47 when X8 is ON, and stores the results at D99 and D100.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X8 Steps Inst. Device
0 DANDP D99 K6X30 0 LD X8
1 DANDP D99
5 END
K6X30
5 END
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b3 b2 b1 b0
D100,D99 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AND
X47X46 X33X32X31X30
X47 to X30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
Seen as 0
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b3 b2 b1 b0
D100,D99 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

II - 166
 8. Function Instructions
WOR,WORP,DOR,DORP

{ WOR,WORP,DOR,DORP … Logical sums of 16-bit and 32-bit data

(Device at storage destination: Independent type)
Compatible
Usable instruction: WOR
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.

[Execution indicates the signs WOR/DOR

[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
Command
WOR, DOR S1 S2 D

Command
WORP, DORP P S1 S2 D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S1 The data on which a logical sum operation will be
performed, or the number of the devices storing this
S2 data BIN 16/32 bits
Number of devices that will store the results of the logical
D
sum operation

Functions
WOR (1) Conducts a logical sum operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S1"
and the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".
16 Bit

Before execution S1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
OR
Before execution S2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

After execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 167
8. Function Instructions
WOR,WORP,DOR,DORP

DOR (1) Conducts a logical sum operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S1"
and the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".

32 Bit
S1+1 S1

Before execution S1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
S2+1 OR S2

Before execution S2 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
D+1 D

After execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 168
 8. Function Instructions
WOR,WORP,DOR,DORP

{ WOR,WORP,DOR,DORP … Logical sums of 16-bit and 32-bit data

(Device at storage destination: Shared type)
Compatible
Usable instruction: DOR
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs WOR/DOR

Symbol] Condition]
Command
WOR, DOR S D

Command
WORP, DORP P S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S The data on which a logical sum operation will be
performed, or the number of the devices storing BIN 16/32 bits
D this data

Functions
WOR (1) Conducts a logical sum operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated by "D"
and the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".
16 Bit

Before execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
OR
Before execution S 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

After execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 169
 8. Function Instructions
WOR,WORP,DOR,DORP

DOR (1) Conducts a logical sum operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device designated by "D"
and the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".

32 Bit
D+1 D

Before execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
OR
S+1 S

Before execution S 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

D+1 D

After execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the WOR(P) or DOR(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program performs a logical sum operation on the data at D10 and D20 when XA
goes ON, and stores the results at D10.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
XA Steps Inst. Device
0 WOR D10 D20 0 LD X0A
1 WOR D10
5 END
D20
5 END

D10 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
OR
D20 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

D10 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

(2) The following program performs a logical sum operation on the data from X10 to X1B, and the
data at D33, and outputs the result to D100 when XA is ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
XA Steps Inst. Device
0 WOR K3X10 D33 D100 0 LD XA
1 WOR K3X10
5 END
D33
D100
5 END

X1B･･････X18X17･･･････X14X13･･･････X10
X1B to X10 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Seen as 0 OR
D33 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

D100 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

II - 170
8. Function Instructions
WOR,WORP,DOR,DORP

(3) The following program performs a logical sum operation on the 32-bit data from X0 to X1F, and
on the hexadecimal value FF00FF00H when XB goes ON, and stores the results at R66 and
R67.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
XB Steps Inst. Device
0 DMOVP H0FF00FF00 D66 0 LD X8
1 DMOVP H0FF00FF00
DORP K8X0 D66
D66
8 END 5 DORP K8X0
D66
8 END

II - 171
 8. Function Instructions
WXOR,WXORP,DXOR,DXORP

{ WXOR,WXORP,DXOR,DXORP … 16-bit and 32-bit exclusive OR operations

(Device at storage destination: Independent type)
Compatible
Usable instruction: WXOR
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
[Execution indicates the signs WXOR/DXOR
[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
Command
WXOR, DXOR S1 S2 D

Command
WXORP, DXORP P S1 S2 D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S1 Data on which exclusive OR operation will be
S2 performed, or number of devices storing such data
BIN 16/32 bits
Number of devices storing data to be EXCLUSIVE
D
ORed

Functions
WXOR (1) Conducts an exclusive OR operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated by
"S1" and the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".

16 Bit

Before execution S1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XOR
Before execution S2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

After execution D 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 172
8. Function Instructions
WXOR,WXORP,DXOR,DXORP

DXOR (1) Conducts an exclusive OR operation on each bit of the 32-bit data designated by "S1" and the
32-bit data designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device designated by "D".

32 Bit
S1+1 S1

Before execution S1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
S2+1 XOR S2

Before execution S2 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
D+1 D

After execution D 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 173
 8. Function Instructions
WXOR,WXORP,DXOR,DXORP

{ WXOR,WXORP,DXOR,DXORP … 16-bit and 32-bit exclusive OR operations

(Device at storage destination: Shared type)
Compatible
Usable instruction: DXOR
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

[Execution indicates the signs WXOR/DXOR

[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
Command
WXOR, DXOR S D

Command
WXORP, DXORP P S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Data on which exclusive OR operation will be
BIN 16/32 bits
D performed, or number of devices storing such data

Functions
WXOR (1) Conducts an exclusive OR operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated by
"D" and the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".

16 Bit

Before execution D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XOR
Before execution S 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

After execution D 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 174
 8. Function Instructions
WXOR,WXORP,DXOR,DXORP

DXOR (1) Conducts an exclusive OR operation on each bit of the 32-bit data designated by "D" and the
32-bit data designated by "S", and stores the results at the device designated by "D".

32 Bit
D+1 D

Before execution D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
S+1 XOR S

Before execution S 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

D+1 D

After execution D 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the WXOR(P) or DXOR(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program performs an exclusive OR operation on the data at D10 and D20 when
XA is ON, and stores the result at D10.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
XA Steps Inst. Device
0 WXOR D10 D20 0 LD X0A
1 WXOR D10
5 END
D20
5 END

D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XOR
D20 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

D10 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0

(2) The following program conducts an exclusive OR operation on the data from X10 to X1B and the
data at D33 when XA is ON, and outputs the result to D100.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
XA Steps Inst. Device
0 WXOR K3X10 D33 D100 0 LD XA
1 WXOR K3X10
5 END
D33
D100
5 END

X1B･･････X18X17･･･････X14X13･･･････X10
X1B to X10 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Seen as "0" XOR
D33 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

D100 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

II - 175
8. Function Instructions
WXOR,WXORP,DXOR,DXORP

(3) The following program compares the bit pattern of the 32-bit data from X20 to X3F with the bit
pattern of the data at D9 and D10 when X6 is ON, and stores the number of differing bits at
D16.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X6 Steps Inst. Device
0 DXORP K8X20 D9 0 LD X6
1 DXORP K8X20
DSUMP D9 D16
D9
8 END 5 DSUMP D9
D16
8 END

II - 176
 8. Function Instructions
WXNR,WXNRP,DXNR,DXNRP

{ WXNR,WXNRP,DXNR,DXNRP … 16-bit and 32-bit data non-exclusive logical sum operations

(Device at storage destination: Independent type)
Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "6.2 Instruction Tables" for correspondence.
: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as a constant at the same time.

[Execution indicates the signs WXNR/DXNR

[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
Command
WXNR, DXNR S1 S2 D

Command
WXNRP, DXNRP P S1 S2 D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S1 Data on which non-exclusive logical sum operation
will be performed, or number of devices where such
S2 data is being stored BIN 16/32 bits
Number of devices that will store results of the
D
non-exclusive logical sum operation

Functions
WXNR (1) Conducts a non-exclusive logical sum operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device
designated by "S1" and the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results
at the device designated by "D".

16 Bit

Before execution S1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XNR
Before execution S2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

After execution D 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 177
8. Function Instructions
WXNR,WXNRP,DXNR,DXNRP

DXNR (1) Conducts a non-exclusive logical sum operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device
designated by "S1" and the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results
at the device designated by "D".
32 Bit
S1+1 S1

Before execution S1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
S2+1 XNR S2

Before execution S2 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

D+1 D

After execution D 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 178
 8. Function Instructions
WXNR,WXNRP,DXNR,DXNRP

{ WXNR,WXNRP,DXNR,DXNRP … 16-bit and 32-bit data non-exclusive logical sum operations

(Device at storage destination: Shared type)
Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Data Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "6.2 Instruction Tables" for correspondence.

[Execution indicates the signs WXNR/DXNR

[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
Command
WXNR,DXNR S D

Command
WXNRP,DXNRP P S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Data on which non-exclusive logical sum operation
will be performed, or number of devices where BIN 16/32 bits
D such data is being stored
Functions
WXNR (1) Conducts a non-exclusive logical sum operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device
designated by "D" and the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at
the device designated by "D".
16 Bit

Before execution D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XNR
Before execution S 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

After execution D 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

DXNR (1) Conducts a non-exclusive logical sum operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device
designated by "D" and the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at
the device designated by "D".
32 Bit
D+1 D

Before execution D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
S+1 XNR S

Before execution S 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
D+1 D

After execution D 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 179
 8. Function Instructions
WXNR,WXNRP,DXNR,DXNRP

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the WXNR(P) or DXNR(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program performs a non-exclusive OR operation on the data at D10 and D20
when XA is ON, and stores the result at D10.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
XA Steps Inst. Device
0 WXNR D10 D20 0 LD X0A
1 WXNR D10
5 END
D20
5 END

D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XNR
D20 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

D10 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1

(2) The following program conducts a non-exclusive OR operation on the data from X10 to X1B and
the data at D33 when XA is ON, and outputs the result to D100.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
XA Steps Inst. Device
0 WXNR K3X10 D33 D100 0 LD XA
1 WXNR K3X10
5 END
D33
D100
5 END

X1B･･････X18X17･･･････X14X13･･･････X10
X1B to X10 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Seen as "0" XNR
D33 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

D100 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

(3) The following program compares the bit patterns of the 32-bit data located from X20 to X3F with
the bit patterns of the data at D16 and D17 when X6 is ON, and stores the same number of bits
at D18.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X6 Steps Inst. Device
0 DXNRP K8X20 D16 0 LD X6
1 DXNRP K8X20
DSUMP D16 D18
D16
8 END 5 DSUMP D16
D18
8 END

II - 180
 8. Function Instructions
ROR,RORP,RCR,RCRP

{ ROR,RORP,RCR,RCRP … Right rotation of 16-bit data

Compatible
Usable instruction: ROR, RCR
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

[Execution indicates the signs ROR/RCR

[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
Command
ROR, RCR D n

Command
RORP, RCRP P D n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D Initial number of devices to perform rotation
BIN 16 bits
n Number of rotations (0 to 15)
Functions
ROR (1) Rotates 16-bit data of the device designated by "D", not including the carry flag, n-bits to the
right. The carry flag is ON or OFF depending on the status prior to the execution of the ROR
instruction.
Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D
n-bit rotation
(2) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as
follows:
• When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit rotation was executed.
• When n is 17 or above, the value of D becomes indefinite.
RCR (1) Rotates 16-bit data of the device designated by "D", including carry flag, n bits to the right. The
carry flag is ON or OFF depending on the status prior to the execution of the ROR instruction.
Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D
n-bit rotation
(2) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as
follows:
• When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit rotation was executed.
• When n is 17 or above, the value of D becomes indefinite.
Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the ROR(P) or RCR(P) instructions.

II - 181
 8. Function Instructions
ROR,RORP,RCR,RCRP

Program Example
(1) The following program rotates the contents of D0, though not including the carry flag, 3 bits to
the right when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device
0 ROR D0 K3 0 LD XC
1 ROR D10
4 END
K3
4 END

Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Contents of b2 through Contents of b15 through Contents of b3 Contents of b2

b0 prior to execution b4 prior to execution prior to execution prior to execution

(2) The following program rotates the contents of D0, including the carry flag, 3 bits to the right
when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device
0 RCRP D0 K3 0 LD XC
1 RCRP D10
4 END
K3
4 END

Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 *

Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D0 1 1 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Contents of b1 and b0 Contents of b15 through Contents of b3 Contents of b2

prior to execution b4 prior to execution prior to execution prior to execution
Contents of carry flag SM12

* The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of RCR.

II - 182
 8. Function Instructions
ROL,ROLP,RCL,RCLP

{ ROL,ROLP,RCL,RCLP … Left rotation of 16-bit data

Compatible
Usable instruction: ROL, RCL
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

[Execution indicates the signs ROL/RCL

[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
Command
ROL, RCL D n

Command
ROLP, RCLP P D n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D Initial number of devices to perform rotation
BIN 16 bits
n Number of rotations (0 to 15)

Functions
ROL (1) Rotates the 16-bit data of the device designated at "D", not including the carry flag, n-bits to the
left. The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of ROL
instruction.
Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D

n-bit rotation

(2) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as

follows:
• When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit rotation was executed.
• When n is 17 or above, the value of D becomes indefinite.
RCL (1) Rotates the 16-bit data of the device designated by D , including the carry flag, n-bits to the left.
The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of RCL
instruction.
Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D

n-bit rotation

(2) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as

follows:
• When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit rotation was executed.
• When n is 17 or above, the value of D becomes indefinite.

II - 183
 8. Function Instructions
ROL,ROLP,RCL,RCLP

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the ROL(P) or RCL(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program rotates the contents of D0, not including the carry flag, 3 bits to the left
when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device
0 ROL D0 K3 0 LD XC
1 ROL D0
4 END
K3
4 END

Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D0

Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 D0

Contents of b13 Contents of b12 Contents of b11 to b0 Contents of b15 to b13

prior to execution prior to execution prior to execution prior to execution

(2) The following program rotates the contents of D0, including the carry flag, 3 bits to the left when
XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device
0 RCLP D0 K3 0 LD XC
1 RCLP D0
4 END
K3
4 END

Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
* 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D0

Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 1 1 D0

Contents of b13 Contents of b12 Contents of b11 to b0 Contents of b15 and

prior to execution prior to execution prior to execution b14 prior to execution
Content of carry flag SM12

*The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of RCL.

II - 184
 8. Function Instructions
DROR,DRORP,DRCR,DRCRP

{ DROR,DRORP,DRCR,DRCRP … Right rotation of 32-bit data

Compatible
Usable instruction: DROR, DRCR
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs DROR/DRCR

Symbol] Condition]
Command
DROR, DRCR D n

Command
DRORP, DRCRP P D n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D First device number of devices to perform rotation BIN 32 bits
Number of rotations (0 to 31)
n BIN 32 bits
2 words (32 bits) are used for a word device.

Functions
DROR (1) The 32-bit data of the device designated at "D", not including the carry flag, is rotated n-bits to
the right.
The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the DROR
instruction.
D+1 D
Carry flag
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 ·· · ·· b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 ····· b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

n-bit rotation

(2) Specify any of 0 to 31 as n. If the value specified as n is 32 or greater, the values of D+1 and D
become indefinite.

DRCR (1) Rotates 32-bit data, including carry flag, at device designated by D n bits to the right.
The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the DRCR
instruction.
D+1 D
Carry flag
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 ·· · ·· b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 ····· b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

n-bit rotation

II - 185
 8. Function Instructions
DROR,DRORP,DRCR,DRCRP

(2) Specify any of 0 to 31 as n. If the value specified as n is 32 or greater, the values of D+1 and D
become indefinite.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no errors associated with DROR(P) or DRCR(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program rotates the contents of D0 and D1, not including the carry flag, 4 bits to
the right when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device
0 DROR D0 D10 0 LD XC
1 DROR D0
4 END
D10
4 END

Carry flag
b31 ····· b28 b27 ·· · ·b24
· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ·· · ·· b0 (SM12)

D0,D1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Number of rotations D11,D10 4

Carry flag
b31 ····· b28 b27 ·· · ·b24
· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ·· · ·· b0 (SM12)

D0,D1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

Contents of b3 through b0 Contents of b31 through b4

prior to execution prior to execution Contents of b3 prior to
execution

(2) The following program rotates the contents of D0 and D1, including the carry flag, 4 bits to the
right when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device
0 DRCRP D0 K4 0 LD XC
1 DRCRP D10
4 END
K4
4 END

Carry flag

b31 ·· · ·· b28 b27 ·· · ·b24

· b23·· · · b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ·· · ·· b0 (SM12)

D0,D1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 *

Carry flag
b31 ·· · ·· b28 b27 ·· · ·b24
· b23·· · · b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ·· · ·· b0 (SM12)

D0,D1 1 1 1 * 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

Contents of b2
Contents of b31 through b4 prior to execution
through b0 prior to Contents of b3 prior
execution Contents of carry flag SM12 prior to execution to execution

* The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the DRCR instruction.

II - 186
 8. Function Instructions
DROL,DROLP,DRCL,DRCLP

{ DROL,DROLP,DRCL,DRCLP … Left rotation of 32-bit data

Compatible
Usable instruction: DROL, DRCL
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

[Execution indicates the signs DROL/DRCL

[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
Command
DROL, DRCL D n

Command
DROLP, DRCLP P D n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D First device number of devices to perform rotation BIN 32 bits
Number of rotations (0 to 31)
n BIN 32 bits
2 words (32 bits) are used for a word device.
Functions
DROL (1) The 32-bit data of the device designated at "D", not including the carry flag, is rotated n-bits to
the left. The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the
DROL instruction.
Carry flag D+1 D
(SM12) b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 ·····b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 ····· b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

n-bit rotation
(2) Specify any of 0 to 31 as n. If the value specified as n is 32 or greater, the values of D+1 and D
become indefinite.

DRCL (1) Rotates 32-bit data, including carry flag, at device designated by D n bits to the left. The carry
flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the DRCL instruction.
Carry flag D+1 D
(SM12) b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 ·····b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 ····· b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

n-bit rotation
(2) Specify any of 0 to 31 as n. If the value specified as n is 32 or greater, the values of D+1 and D
become indefinite.

II - 187
 8. Function Instructions
DROL,DROLP,DRCL,DRCLP

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the DROL(P) or DRCL(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program rotates the contents of D0 and D1, not including the carry flag, 4 bits to
the left when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device
0 DROL D0 D10 0 LD XC
1 DROL D0
4 END
D10
4 END

Carry flag
(SM12) b31 ·· · ·· b28 b27 ·····b24 b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ·· · ·· b4 b3 ·· · ·· b0
0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 D0,D1

Number of rotations D11,D10 4

Carry flag
(SM12) b31 ·· · ·· b28 b27 ·····b24 b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ·· · ·· b4 b3 ·· · ·· b0
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D0,D1

Contents of b27 to b0 Contents of b31 to b28

Contents of b28 prior to execution
prior to execution prior to execution

(2) The following program rotates the contents of D0 and D1, including the carry flag, 4 bits to the
left when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device
0 DRCLP D0 K4 0 LD XC
1 DRCLP D10
4 END
K4
4 END

Carry flag
(SM12) b31 ·· · ·· b28 b27 ·· · ·b24
· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ·· · ·· b4 b3 ·· · ·· b0
* 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 D0,D1

Carry flag
(SM12) b31 ·· · ·· b28 b27 ·· · ·b24
· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ·· · ·· b4 b3 ·· · ·· b0
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D0,D1

Contents of b27 to b0 Contents of b31 to b29

Contents of b28 prior to execution prior to execution
prior to execution
Contents of carry flag SM12
prior to execution

* The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the DRCL instruction.

II - 188
 8. Function Instructions
SFR,SFRP,SFL,SFLP

{ SFR,SFRP,SFL,SFLP … n-bit shift to right or left of 16-bit data

Compatible
Usable instruction: SFR, SFL
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs SFR/SFL

Symbol] Condition]
Command
SFR, SFL D n

Command
SFLP, SFLP P D n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
First device number of devices where shift data is
D
being stored BIN 16 bits
n Number of shifts (0 to 15)

Functions
SFR (1) Causes a shift to the right by n bits of the 16-bit data from the device designated at "D".

b15 b14 b13 b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

D 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

When n=6 Carry flag

(SM12)
b15 b14 b13 b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

Becomes 0

(2) A total of n bits from the upper level become 0.

(3) A shift by the data of the specified digit is conducted when a bit device has been designated at
"D".
[See Program Example (1)]

(4) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as

follows:
• When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit shifting was executed.
• When n is 17, the value of D becomes indefinite.

II - 189
 8. Function Instructions
SFR,SFRP,SFL,SFLP

SFL (1) Shifts 16-bit data at device designated by "D" n-bits to the left.

b15 b14 b13 b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D
Carry flag
When n=8
(SM12)
b15 b14 b13 b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D

Becomes 0
(2) The bits starting at n-bits from lowest bit become 0.

(3) A shift by the data of the specified digit is conducted when a bit device has been designated at
"D".
[See Program Example (1)]

(4) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as

follows:
• When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit shifting was executed.
• When n is 17, the value of D becomes indefinite.
Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the SFR(P) or SFL(P) instructions.
Program Example
(1) The following program shifts the contents of Y10 to Y1B to the right by the number of bits
designated by D0 when X20 goes ON.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X20 Steps Inst. Device
0 SFR K3Y10 D0 0 LD X20
1 SFR K3Y10
4 END
D0
4 END

Y1B‥‥‥Y18Y17‥‥‥ Y14Y13‥‥‥ Y10

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

D0 4
Carry flag
Y1B‥‥‥Y18Y17‥‥‥ Y14Y13‥‥‥ Y10 (SM12)

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Becomes 0

II - 190
8. Function Instructions
SFR,SFRP,SFL,SFLP

(2) The following program shifts the contents of X10 to X17 3 bits to the left when X1C is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X1C Steps Inst. Device
0 SFLP K2Y10 K3 0 LD XC
1 SFLP K2Y10
4 END
K3
4 END

Y17‥‥‥Y14 Y13‥‥‥ Y10

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

Carry flag
(SM12) Y17‥‥‥Y14 Y13‥‥‥ Y10
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

Becomes 0

II - 191
 8. Function Instructions
DSFR,DSFRP,DSFL,DSFLP

{ DSFR,DSFRP,DSFL,DSFLP … Right/Left shift of word device in batch

Compatible
Usable instruction: DSFR, DSFL
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
D
n

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs DSFR/DSFL

Symbol] Condition]
Command
DSFR, DSFL D n

Command
DSFLP, DSFLP P D n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
D First device number of devices to shift
BIN 16 bits
n Number of devices where shift will be conducted

Functions
DSFR (1) Shifts data n points from device designated by "D" 1 word to the right.

n
D+(n-1) D+(n-2) D+(n-3) D+2 D+1 D
555 212 325 100 50 40

D+(n-1) D+(n-2) D+(n-3) D+(n-4) D+1 D

0 555 212 325 100 50
Becomes 0

(2) Device designated by "D"+(n-1) becomes 0.

II - 192
 8. Function Instructions
DSFR,DSFRP,DSFL,DSFLP

DSFL (1) Shifts data n points from device designated by "D" 1 word to the left.

n
D+(n-1) D+(n-2) D+(n-3) D+2 D+1 D
555 120 325 100 50 40

D+(n-1) D+(n-2) D+3 D+2 D+1 D

120 325 100 50 40 0
Becomes 0

(2) Device designated by "D" becomes 0.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• A part of range of the device n-points from the "D" device exceeds the relevant device.
(Error code: 82)

Program Example
(1) The following program shifts the contents of D683 to D689 to the right when XB is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XB Steps Inst. Device
0 DSFR D683 K7 0 LD XB
1 DSFR D683
4 END
K7
4 END

Designation range for the DSFR instruction

D689 D688 D687 D686 D685 D684 D683

-100 503 600 -336 3802 -32765 5003

D689 D688 D687 D686 D685 D684 D683

0 -100 503 600 -336 3802 -32765

Becomes 0

II - 193
8. Function Instructions
DSFR,DSFRP,DSFL,DSFLP

(2) The following program shifts the contents of D683 to D689 to the left when XB is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XB Steps Inst. Device
0 DSFLP D683 K7 0 LD XB
1 DSFLP D683
4 END
K7
4 END

Designation range for DSFLP instruction

D689 D688 D687 D686 D685 D684 D683

-100 503 600 -336 3802 -32765 5003

D689 D688 D687 D686 D685 D684 D683

503 600 -336 3802 -32765 5003 0

Becomes 0

II - 194
 8. Function Instructions
SER,SERP,DSER,DSERP

{ SER,SERP,DSER,DSERP … 16-bit and 32-bit data searches

Compatible
Usable instruction: SER
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D
n

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S1
S2
D
n

[Instruction [Execution indicates the signs SER/DSER

Symbol] Condition]

SER, DSER S1 S2 D n

SERP, D n
P S1 S2
DSERP

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
First device number of the devices where search data is
S1
being stored
First number of the device where data which is an object of search is being
S2
stored. Word
First device number of devices which will store search
D
results
n Number of searches

II - 195
 8. Function Instructions
SER,SERP,DSER,DSERP

Functions
SER (1) Takes the 16-bit data of the device designated at "S1" as the entry code to search for n number
of blocks from the 16-bit data from the device designated at "S2".
The number of matches with the entry code is stored at the device designated by "D"+1, and
the relative value of the number of points that the device where the first match was found is
from S2 is stored at the device designated by "D".

Search data 123

S1 123 10
S2 Matching
First number of Search results
S2+1 500 data
searched D Position of match
S2+2 123
Search range D+1 Number of matches
(n blocks)
-123
S2+(n-2) 20
S2+(n-1) 123
123

(2) No processing is conducted if n is 0 or a negative value.

(3) If no matches are found in the search, the devices designated at "D" and "D" +1 become "0".

DSER (1) Takes the 32-bit data of the device designated at "S1+1", "S1" as the entry code to search for n
number of blocks (for 2 x n points) in 32-bit unit from the device designated at "S2"
The number of matches with the entry code is stored at the device designated by "D"+1, and
the relative value of the number of points that the device where the first match was found is
from S2 is stored at the device designated by "D".

Search data
5678901
S1+1,S1 5678901
S2+1,S2 5678901
First number of Search results
S2+3,S2+2 123456
searched Search range D Position of match
S2+5,S2+4 -1
2xn
D+1 Number of matches

S2+(n-3),S2+(n-4) 5678901
Matching
S2+(n-1),S2+(n-2) 0 data
5678901

(2) No processing is conducted if n is 0 or a negative value.

(3) If no matches are found in the search, the devices designated at "D" and "D" +1 become "0".

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• When the area of n number of blocks from the device designated at "S2" does not exist.
(Error code: 82)

II - 196
 8. Function Instructions
SER,SERP,DSER,DSERP

Program Example
(1) The following program searches D100 to D105 for the contents of D0 when X20 is ON, and
stores the search results at D10 and D11.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X20 Steps Inst. Device
0 SERP D0 D100 D10 K6 0 LD X20
1 SERP D0
7 END
D100
D10
K6
7 END
Search data Searched data
D0 123 D100 500
D101 123 Search results
D102 300 D10 2 Position of match
D103 123 D11 2 Number of matches
D104 32000
D105 122

(2) The following program searches D100 to D111 for the contents of D11 and D10 when X20 is
ON, and stores the search results at D0 and D1.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X2 Steps Inst. Device
0 DSERP D10 D100 D0 0 LD X20
1 DSERP D10
7 END
D100
D0
K6
7 END
Search data Searched data
D11,D10 56789051 D101,D100 200000
D103,D102 56789051 Search results
D105,D104 56789051 D0 2 Position of match
D107,D106 -30000 D1 3 Number of matches
D109,D108 56789051
D111,D110 30000

II - 197
 8. Function Instructions
SUM,SUMP,DSUM,DSUMP

{ SUM,SUMP,DSUM,DSUMP … 16-bit and 32-bit data bit check

Compatible
Usable instruction: SUM
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

[Execution indicates the signs SUM/DSUM

[Instruction Symbol]
Condition]
SUM, DSUM S D

SUMP, DSUMP P S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
First device number of devices that will count total number
S
of bits that are at 1
BIN 16/32 bits
First device number of devices that will store total number
D
of bits

Functions
SUM (1) From the 16-bit data in the device designated by "S", stores the total number of bits that are at 1,
in the device designated by "D".

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

S 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

Total number with value of 1

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

Total number with value of 1 stored as BIN

(There are 8 instances in the example)

II - 198
 8. Function Instructions
SUM,SUMP,DSUM,DSUMP

DSUM (1) From the 32-bit data in the device designated by "S", stores the total number of bits that are at 1,
in the device designated by "D".

S+1 S
b31･･･b28 b27･･･ b24 b23･･･b20 b19･･･b16b15･･･b12b11････b8 b7 ･････ b4 b3･････b0
S 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
Total number with value of 1
D+1 D
b31･･･b28 b27･･･ b24 b23･･･b20 b19･･･b16b15･･･b12b11････b8 b7 ･････ b4 b3･････b0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Total number with value of 1 stored as BIN
(There are 16 instances in the example)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the SUM(P) or DSUM(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program stores the number of bits from X8 to X17 which are ON when X10 is ON
at D0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X10 Steps Inst. Device
0 SUM K4X8 D0 0 LD X10
1 SUM K4X8
5 END
D0
5 END

X17 X8
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

Stores the total number of bits at 1 in D0.

D0 7

(2) The following program stores the number of bits from D100 and D101 which are ON when X10
is ON at D0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X10 Steps Inst. Device
0 DSUMP D100 D0 0 LD X10
1 DSUMP D100
5 END
D0
5 END

b31･･･b28 b27･･･ b24 b23･･･b20 b19･･･b16b15･･･b12b11････b8 b7 ･････ b4 b3･････b0

D100,D101 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Stores the total number of bits at 1 in D0.

D1,D0 15

II - 199
 8. Function Instructions
SEG,SEGP

{ SEG,SEGP … 7-segment decode

Compatible
Usable instruction: SEG
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]

SEG SEG S D

SEGP SEGP S D

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
Device number of devices where decoded data is being
S
stored
BIN 16 bits
First device number of devices where decoding results are
D
stored

Functions
SEG (1) Decodes the data from 0 to F designated by the lower 4 bits of S to 7-segment display data, and
stores at D.
(2) If "D" is a bit device, indicates the first number of the devices storing the 7-segment display data;
if it is a word device, indicates the number of the device that is storing the data.
(3) Storage is done as follows for bit devices and word devices:
After execution
Before execution Y4F Y48
Bit device SEG K7 K2Y48 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

8 points
D8

b15 b8 b7 b0
Word device SEG K7 D8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

Upper 8 bits are Lower 8 bits used to store the

always 0 7-segment display data

(4) Refer to the next page for the 7-segment display.

II - 200
 8. Function Instructions
SEG,SEGP

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the SEG(P) instruction.

7-segment decode display

S D
Configuration of Display
Bit
Hex. 7 Segments B7B6B5B4B3B2B1B0 Data
Pattern

0 0000 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 0001 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

2 0010 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

3 0011 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

4 0100 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

5 0101 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1

6 0110 B0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

B5 B1
7 0111 B6
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

8 1000 B4 B2 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

9 1001 B3 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

A 1010 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

B 1011 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

C 1100 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

D 1101 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

E 1110 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

F 1111 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

First number of bit device

Lowest bit of word device

II - 201
 8. Function Instructions
SEG,SEGP

Program Example
(1) The following program converts the data from XC to XF when X0 is ON to 7-segment display
data and outputs it to Y38 to Y3F.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 Steps Inst. Device
0 SEG K1XC K2Y38 0 LD X0
1 SEG K1XC
4 END
K2Y38
4 END

II - 202
 8. Function Instructions
DECO,DECOP

{ DECO,DECOP … Decoding from 8 to 256 bits

Compatible
Usable instruction: DECO
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D
n

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D
n

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
Command
DECO DECO S D n

Command
DECOP DECOP S D n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Number of device where decoded data is stored BIN 16 bits
First device number of devices where decoding results are
D Device name
stored
n Valid bit length (1 to 8) BIN 16 bits

Functions
DECO (1) Decodes the lower n-bits of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at a location
2n-bits from the device designated by "D".

(2) The value of n can be designated between 1 and 8.

(3) No processing is conducted if n=0, and there are no changes in data for the device designated
at "D". When n is 9 or above, the device data specified by D becomes indefinite.

(4) The bit devices specified by D are treated as 1 bit, and the word devices specified by D are
treated as 16 bits.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• When the area of a part of 2n bit blocks from the device designated at D does not exist.
(Error code: 82)

II - 203
 8. Function Instructions
DECO,DECOP

Program Example
(1) The following program decodes 3 bits of R20 bit 0 to 3 when X20 turns ON and turns D100
corresponding bit to ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X20 Steps Inst. Device
0 DECO R20 D100 K3 0 LD X20
1 DECO R20
6 END
D200
K3
6 END

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

R20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

Seen as 0 When the data of bit 0 to 2 is 6 in binary.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

D100 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Does not change Among bit 0 to 7, only bit 6 turns ON.

Note 1) When R20 b0 to b2 is 0, D100 bit 0 turns ON.

Note 2) D100 data remains the same even when X20 turns OFF.

(2) The following program decodes the 3 bits from D10 bit 0 to 2 and stores the results at M10
when X20 is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X20 Steps Inst. Device
0 DECO D10 M10 K3 0 LD X20
1 DECO D10
6 END
M10
K3
6 END

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

When 6 has been
D10 0 1 1 0 designated from X0 to X2.

Seen as 0

M17 M10
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Decoding results

3
Does not change When valid bit 3 has been designated, occupies 8 (=2 ) points.

II - 204
 8. Function Instructions
ENCO,ENCOP

{ ENCO,ENCOP … Encoding from 256 to 8 bits

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D
n

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
Command
ENCO ENCO S D n

Command
ENCOP ENCOP S D n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Number of devices where encoded data is being stored
D Number of device where encoding results will be stored BIN 16 bits
n Valid bit length (1 to 8)

Functions
ENCO (1) 2n bit of the device specified by S is encoded and the result is stored in the lower n bit from the
device specified by D as encode data.

(2) The value of n can be designated between 1 and 8.

(3) When n=0, the device data specified by D does not change due to no operation. When n is 9 or
above, the device data specified by D becomes indefinite.

(4) As for the devices designated at D, bit devices are treated as 1 bit, and word devices as 16 bits.

(5) If more than 1 bit is at 1, processing will be conducted at the upper bit location.

(6) When the 2n bit blocks data is all 0, "0" is stored in D.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
• When the area of a part of 2n bit blocks from the device designated at S does not exist.
(Error code: 82)

II - 205
 8. Function Instructions
ENCO,ENCOP

Program Example
(1) The following program encodes the 3 bits from M10 when X20 is ON, and stores the results at
D8.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X20 Steps Inst. Device
0 ENCO M10 D8 K3 0 LD X20
1 ENCO M10
6 END
D8
K3
6 END

M17 M10
When valid bit 3 has been
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3
designated, occupies 8 (=2 )
points.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

D8 0 1 1 Encoding results

Not changed Counting from M10, the device which is ON

is stored as BIN data.

II - 206
 8. Function Instructions
S.AVE

{ S.AVE … Average value calculation

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
D
n
The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for
this instruction.

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
Command
S.AVE S.AVE S D n

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Head No. of the device whose average is calculated
D Device No. at the output destination BIN 16 bits
n Average value

Functions
S.AVE (1) The average of n points of devices counting from the device specified by S is calculated and
output to the device specified by D.
S
Average
S+1 calculation
S+2
n D

S+(n-2)
S+(n-1)

(2) The device specified by S is calculated with signs.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the S.AVE instruction.

II - 207
 8. Function Instructions
S.AVE

Program Example
(1) In this program the average of D882 to D888 is calculated when XB turns ON, and the result is
output to D0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XB Steps Inst. Device
0 S.AVE D882 D0 K7 0 LD XB
1 S.AVE D882
6 END
D0
K7
5 END
D882 123
Average
D883 10 value
D884 500
7 devices

D0 146
D885 123
D886 20
D887 123
D888 123
Note) Digits after the decimal point is truncated.

II - 208
 8. Function Instructions
S.STC,S.CLC

{ S.STC,S.CLC … Carry flag set/reset

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P

The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for
this instruction.
[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
Command
S.STC S.STC

Command
S.CLC S.CLC

Functions
S.STC (1) Set (turn ON) the carry flag contact (SM12).

S.CLC (1) Reset (turn OFF) the carry flag contact (SM12).

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the S.STC or S.CLC instructions.

II - 209
 8. Function Instructions
S.STC,S.CLC

Program Example
(1) In this program, D0 data is added to D2 data when M0 turns ON. The carry flag (SM12) is
turned ON if the result exceeds 32767, and turned OFF if 32767 or less.
[Ladder Mode]
M0 Add D2 to D0, and store the result in D1. (D2+D0→D1)
0 + D2 D0 D1
Turn M1 ON when:
5 > D2 D1 M1 (Summand)>(Addition result) or
(Augend)>(Added result)
> D0 D1
M1
12 S.STC Turn ON the carry flag when M1 turns ON
M1
17 S.CLC Turn OFF the carry flag when M1 turns OFF

22 END

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD M0
1 + D2
D0
D1
5 LD> D2
D1
8 OR> D0
D1
11 OUT M1
12 LD M1
13 S.STC
17 LDI M1
18 S.CLC
22 END

II - 210
 8. Function Instructions
LDBIT,ANDBIT,ORBIT

{ LDBIT,ANDBIT,ORBIT … Bit test with "A" contact handling

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
n
The compatible instruction mode is available for this instruction; however since this mode will be
discontinued in the future, replacing with the instruction having the same function is strongly
recommended.

Extended
Not available
instruction mode

！ CAUTION
Note that when a sequence program using these instructions is executed in the extended
instruction mode, unexpected operation would occur because the instructions will be
processed as ones having different operations.

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]

LDBIT <= S n

ANDBIT <= S n

ORBIT
<= S n

Above instructions can be replaced by applying word device bit S.n

designation to LD, AND, and OR instructions.

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Device No. to which bit test is performed
BIN 16 bits
n Bit to which bit test is performed

Functions
(1) Bit test for 16-bit device is executed with "A" contact handling.

(2) Results of bit test are as shown below.

Condition Result
Tested bit = 1 Continuity
Tested bit = 0 Non-continuity

II - 211
 8. Function Instructions
LDBIT,ANDBIT,ORBIT

Replaceable instructions
LDBIT, ANDBIT, and ORBIT instructions can be replaced by executing a word device bit
designation using LD, AND, OR instructions. (Refer to Program Example)

Instruction Example of replacement by word device bit designation

LDBIT (Example: LD<= D10 K3 → LD D10.3)
ANDBIT (Example: AND<= D10 K10 → AND D10.A)
ORBIT (Example: OR<= D10 HF → OR D10.F)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the LDBIT, ANDBIT, or ORBIT instructions.

Program Example
(1) Program to test D10 bit 3
(The 0th step and 4th step are the ladders having the same operations.)
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Y33 Steps Inst. Device
0 <= D10 K3 0 LD<= D10
Replaceable Y33 K3
D10.3
4 3 OUT Y33
4 LD D10.3

6 END 5 OUT Y33

6 END

(2) Program to test D10 bit 15

(The 0th step and 5th step are the ladders having the same operations.)
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Y33 Steps Inst. Device
M3
0 <= D10 K15 0 LD M3
Replaceable Y33 1 AND<= D10
M3 D10.F
5 K15
4 OUT Y33
7 END 5 LD M3
6 AND D10.F
7 OUT Y33
8 END

II - 212
8. Function Instructions
LDBIT,ANDBIT,ORBIT

(3) Program to tes D10 bit 15

(The 0th step and 7th step are the ladders having the same operations.)
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Y33 Steps Inst. Device
M3
0 <= D10 HF 0 LD M3
M8 1 LD<= D10
Replaceable HF
M3 D10.F Y33
4 OR M8
7
5 ANB
M8
6 OUT Y33

12 7 LD M3
END
8 LD D10.F
9 OR M8
10 ANB
11 OUT Y33
12 END

(4) Program to test D10 bit 10

(The 0th step and 6th step are the ladders having the same operations.)
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
Y33 Steps Inst. Device
M3 M8
0 0 LD M3
1 AND M8
Replaceable <= D10 K10 2 OR<= D10
M3 M8 Y33 K10
6 5 OUT Y33
D10.A 6 LD M3
7 AND M8
10 END 8 OR D10.A
9 OUT Y33
10 END

II - 213
 8. Function Instructions
LDBII,ANDBII,ORBII

{ LDBII,ANDBII,ORBII … Bit test with "B" contact handling

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable Devices Digit
Set
Bit Devices Word Devices Constant Pointer desig- Index
Data
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S
n
The compatible instruction mode is available for this instruction; however since this mode will be
discontinued in the future, replacing with the instruction having the same function is strongly
recommended.

Extended
Not available
instruction mode

！ CAUTION
Note that when a sequence program using these instructions is executed in the extended
instruction mode, unexpected operation would occur because the instructions will be
processed as ones having different operations.

[Instruction [Execution
Symbol] Condition]
LDBII <> S n

ANDBII <> S n

ORBII
<> S n

Above instructions can be replaced by applying word device bit S.n

designation to LDI, ANI, ORI instructions.

Set Data
Set Data Meaning Data Type
S Device No. to which bit test is performed
BIN 16 bits
n Bit to which bit test is performed

Functions
(1) Bit test for 16-bit device is executed with "B" contact handling.

(2) Results of bit test are as shown below.

Condition Result
Tested bit = 0 Continuity
Tested bit = 1 Non-continuity

II - 214
 8. Function Instructions
LDBII,ANDBII,ORBII

Replaceable instructions
LDBII, ANDBII, and ORBII instructions can be replaced by executing a word device bit designation
using LDI, ANI, and ORI instructions. (Refer to Program Example)

Instruction Example of replacement by word device bit designation

LDBII (Example: LD<> D10 K3 → LDI D10.3)
ANDBII (Example: AND<> D10 K10 → ANI D10.A)
ORBII (Example: OR<> D10 HF → ORI D10.F)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the LDBII, ANDBII, or ORBII instructions.

Program Example
(1) Program to test D10 3
(The 0th step and 4th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y33 Steps Inst. Device
0 <> D10 K3 0 LD<> D10
Replaceable Y33 K3
D10.3
4 3 OUT Y33
4 LDI D10.3

6 END 5 OUT Y33

6 END

(2) Program to test D10 bit 15

(The 0th step and 5th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y33 Steps Inst. Device
M3
0 <> D10 K15 0 LD M3
Replaceable Y33 1 AND<> D10
M3 D10.F
5 K15
4 OUT Y33
7 END 5 LD M3
6 ANI D10.F
7 OUT Y33
8 END

II - 215
8. Function Instructions
LDBII,ANDBII,ORBII

(3) Program to test D10 bit 15

(The 0th step and 7th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y33 Steps Inst. Device
M3
0 <> D10 HF 0 LD M3
M8 1 LD<> D10
Replaceable HF
M3 D10.F Y33
4 OR M8
7
5 ANB
M8
6 OUT Y33
7 LD M3
12 END
8 LDI D10.F
9 OR M8
10 ANB
11 OUT Y33
12 END

(4) Program to test D10 bit 10

(The 0th step and 6th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y33 Steps Inst. Device
M3 M8
0 0 LD M3
1 AND M8
Replaceable <> D10 K10 2 OR<> D10
M3 M8 Y33 K10
6 5 OUT Y33
D10.A 6 LD M3
7 AND M8
10 END 8 ORI D10.A
9 OUT Y33
10 END

II - 216
 9. Exclusive Instructions

9. Exclusive Instructions
PLC dedicated instruction is limited to its application for the processes which may be difficult to perform only
with basic instruction or function instruction.

PLC dedicated instructions include:

(1) ATC dedicated instruction (ATC)
With this instruction, ATC, such as magazine index control, tool change by arm, etc. is performed.
ATC dedicated instructions include:
• Tool No. search
• Tool change
• Tool table forward/reverse run
• Pointer (which displays magazine index position) forward/reverse run
• Tool data read/write, etc.

(2) Rotary body control instruction (ROT)

With this instruction, the rotary body's target position and rotation direction are determined, as well as the
function as a ring counter is realized.
This is used when calculating the rotation direction or number of index steps of the magazine and turret,
etc. based on the output data figured with tool No. search of ATC dedicated instruction, or used when
controlling the rotary body position.

II - 217
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.1 Outline of ATC Control

The ATC (Automatic Tool Change) can be controlled in the following two ways:

(1) Mechanical random control

With the information of magazine position from the machine, and T command, the control method
determines the direction of magazine rotation, number of steps, etc. for index of the magazine, according
to the given command.
Each tool and magazine tool pot (socket) have a one-on-one corresponding relation.
Usually, the "intermediate pot" that supports the transfer of the tool is provided between the spindle and
the magazine.
This control is possible by not using ATC instruction, but ROT instruction only.

(2) Memory random control

With the information of magazine rotation, or magazine position from the machine, the control method
controls tool No. stored in the memory. For index of the magazine, the direction of magazine rotation and
number of steps, etc., are determined by the given T command and tool No. stored in the memory.
Each tool and magazine tool pot (socket) does not always have a one-on-one corresponding relation.
Usually, the "intermediate pot" is not provided.

9.1.2 ATC Operation

The motions related to ATC operation can be largely divided into the following four motions:

(1) Index of magazine .......................................... (ATC-K1, K2, K5, K6, K7, K8)
(2) Tool change (arm, or the like is used) .............. (ATC-K3, K4)
(3) Transfer of tool to intermediate pot or arm ....... (Normal function instructions such as MOV, XCH are
used.)
(4) Others ............................................................... (ATC-K9, K10, K11)

9.1.3 Explanation of Terminology

(1) Pointer
This points out the position where the magazine is indexed. When a tool table in which tool No. are
previously recorded is used, the tool table does not rotate with rotation of the magazine and the pointer
serves as "ring counter" for control of magazine position.

(2) Fixed pointer method

This is the type with tool pots numbered and the relationship between tool pot and tool No. is fixed if the
magazine is rotated. When the tool table is rotated, fixed pointer does not functionally differ from variable
pointer method.

(3) Variable pointer method

This is the type with numbered fixed position on magazine and the relationship between magazine No.
and tool No. changes when the magazine rotates.

II - 218
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

7 One step in CW direction

4
CW
5

2
4 5

5 12 2
3 4
12
12 8 3 5
3 8
12 1 3
2 2
1
Pot No. Fixed pointer Relationship between
pot No. and tool No.
does not change.
Tool No.
4 One step in CW direction CW

4 2 4 6

3 3
9 5 2
12 2 12 2
1 1
12 8 3 5
Magazine No.
3 8
(fixed) Variable pointer Relationship between
pot No. and tool No.
changes.

9.1.4 Relationship between Tool Registration Screen and Magazines

T REGISTRATION

Magazine 1

Pot Tool No. -D

1 1
2 2
4 3 3
4 3 4 4
5 3
5 5
8 7 6 2
2 6 6
9 5 7 7
8 8
7 10 4 1 1 9 9
11 10 10
3
8 12 11 11
12 2 12
1 12 12
11
10 11 Pot No.

Tool No.

Magazine No. (floating pointer method, tool table

rotation method) or pot No. (Fixed pointer method)

When the floating pointer method or tool table rotation method is selected on the tool registration screen,
correspondence display between the magazines and tools changes each time the magazine rotates; when
the fixed pointer method is selected, it does not change.

II - 219
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.5 Use of ATC and ROT Instructions

The use order of the ATC and ROT instructions during the T command or tool change command is shown
below:

T command Tool No. search Matching place No.

ATC K1 Number of the matches Error process
Pointer or ring Tool No. logical search
counter value ATC K2

Fixed pointer method

Rotary body Turning direction Magazine Ring counter control
index turn
Number of
ROT K1 steps, etc. ROT K3
Variable pointer
method
Pointer forward run
/reverse run
ATC K5, K6

Tool table forward run

/reverse run
ATC K7, K8

Magazine stop Tool change

Tool change ATC K3
command
Arbitrary position tool change
ATC K4

The relationship between the tool number search instruction and rotary body indexing instruction when the
tool table rotation method or variable pointer method is used is explained below.

Tool table rotation method Variable pointer method

R10700 5 0 Current R10700 1 0

position
: 6 : 2 10
1 1
: 3 1 9
: 7
2 2 Target
: 8 : 4 8
2 position
: 5 3 Current
: 9 3 position
: 10 : 6 4
4 7
: 7 3
: 1 5
5 : 8
: 2 4 6
6 : 9 6
: 3 5
R10709 4 7 R10709 10 7
Current
position

Tool No. Pointer

II - 220
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(1) When indexing tool number 8 in the situation given in the previous page
(a) In the tool table rotation method, the tool number search instruction outputs 3.
(b) In the variable pointer method, the tool number search instruction outputs 7.
(2) The tool number search instruction output result is used by the rotary body indexing instruction to find the
rotation direction, the number of steps, etc.
(a) In the tool table rotation system, rotation direction CW and number of steps 3 are found from the
relationship between current value 0 (pointer 0) and tool number search output result 3.
(b) In the variable pointer method, rotation direction CW and number of steps 3 are found from the
relationship between current value 4 (pointer 4) and tool number search output result 7, as in (a)
above.
In the fixed pointer system, the pointer is fixed to 0 and the ring counter of 0 to n-1 (n is the number
of magazines) separate from the pointer is controlled. The counter value is used as the current
position.

9.1.6 Basic Format of ATC Exclusive Instruction

ACT
S.ATC Kn Rn Rm Mn

END signal ("1" for ERROR signal)

Tool number storage R (register) No.
(Number of tools in magazine is specified.)
Control data buffer R No.
(Control data buffer is specified.)
Type of instruction

Rn
Control data buffer
Rn+1 Buffer size differs depending on type of instruction.
Rn+2 For details, refer to the explanation of instructions.
Rn+3
:

II - 221
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.7 Instruction List

Instruction Description
S.ATC K1 Rn Rm Mn Tool No. search
S.ATC K2 Rn Rm Mn Tool No. logical AND search
S.ATC K3 Rn Rm Mn Tool change
S.ATC K4 Rn Rm Mn Arbitrary position tool change
S.ATC K5 Rn Rm Mn Pointer forward run
S.ATC K6 Rn Rm Mn Pointer reverse run
S.ATC K7 Rn Rm Mn Tool table forward run
S.ATC K8 Rn Rm Mn Tool table reverse run
S.ATC K9 Rn Rm Mn Tool data read
S.ATC K10 Rn Rm Mn Tool data write
S.ATC K11 Rn Rm Mn Automatic tool data write

9.1.8 Control Data Buffer Contents

Instruction Rn Rn+1 Rn+2

1 Tool No. search R No. to store search data R No. to which data output -
Tool No. logical AND Logical AND data
2 R No. to store search data R No. to which data output
search position R No.
Tool change
R No. to specify the
3 (Ex.: Spindle - -
position of tool change
Indexposition)
Arbitrary position tool R No. to specify the R No. to specify the tool to
4 -
change position of tool change be changed
5 Pointer forward run - - -
6 Pointer reverse run - - -
7 Tool table forward run - - -
8 Tool table reverse run - - -
R No. for magazine
9 Tool data read R No. to which data read -
position (to be read)
R No. for magazine R No. to which data written
10 Tool data write -
position (to be written)
Automatic tool data
11 R No. to store Initial data - -
write

II - 222
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.9 File Register (R Register) Assignment and Parameters

(1) Control parameter contents

R10600 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0: T4-digit
Max. number of standby 1: T8-digit
displayed: 4

0: Magazine starts from "1"

1: Magazine starts from "0"

Number of tools per magazine

0: Do not set arbitrarily
1: Set arbitrarily
For details on the control parameters, refer to "Examples of Tool Registration Screen".

(2) Arbitrary setting of number of tools per magazine

This function allows the number of tools per magazine to be set freely.

(a) Do not set arbitrarily

The number of magazine rows is set to the maximum three rows, and the number of tools that can
be registered is set to maximum 120 tools/magazine.
The magazine tool data assignment is fixed.

(b) To set arbitrarily

There is a maximum of five magazine rows, and the number of tools that can be registered is a total
of 360 tools for all magazines.
Set the number of tools per magazine in the "number of magazine designation" register.
(If there are any magazines not being used, set the designation register to 0.)

"Number of magazine designation" register

No. 1 magazine ... R10610
No. 2 magazine ... R10611
No. 3 magazine ... R10612
No. 4 magazine ... R10613
No. 5 magazine ... R10614

The magazine tool data is assigned for the set tools in order from No. 1 magazine based on the set
number of tools.

II - 223
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(3) File registers for ATC control

The file registers used with the ATC are as shown below.

Corresponding file (R) register

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine No.4 magazine No.5 magazine Remarks
(data type)
T4-digit/T8-digit
T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit
specifications
ATC control
R10600 ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ←
parameters
Number of
magazine R10610 ← R10611 ← R10612 ← R10613 ← R10614 ← Binary
designation
Pointer designation R10615 ← R10616 ← R10617 ← R10618 ← R10619 ← Binary

R10620 R10630 R10640 R10650 R10660

Spindle tool R10620 R10630 R10640 R10650 R10660 BCD
R10621 R10631 R10641 R10651 R10661
R10622 R10632 R10642 R10652 R10662
Standby 1 tool R10621 R10631 R10641 R10651 R10661 BCD
R10623 R10633 R10643 R10653 R10663
R10624 R10634 R10644 R10654 R10664
Standby 2 tool R10622 R10632 R10642 R10652 R10662 BCD
R10625 R10635 R10645 R10655 R10665
R10626 R10636 R10646 R10656 R10666
Standby 3 tool R10623 R10633 R10643 R10653 R10663 BCD
R10627 R10637 R10647 R10657 R10667
R10628 R10638 R10648 R10658 R10668
Standby 4 tool R10624 R10634 R10644 R10654 R10664 BCD
R10629 R10639 R10649 R10659 R10669
Spindle tool D R10670 ← R10675 ← R10680 ← R10685 ← R10690 ← Binary

Standby 1 tool D R10671 ← R10676 ← R10681 ← R10686 ← R10691 ← Binary

Standby 2 tool D R10672 ← R10677 ← R10682 ← R10687 ← R10692 ← Binary

Standby 3 tool D R10673 ← R10678 ← R10683 ← R10688 ← R10693 ← Binary

Standby 4 tool D R10674 ← R10679 ← R10684 ← R10689 ← R10694 ← Binary

AUX data R10604 ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ← Binary

• When not setting arbitrarily
Magazine tool data The number of magazine rows is set to the maximum three rows, and the number of tools that can be registered is
set to maximum 120 tools/magazine.
The magazine tool data assignment is fixed. Refer to (a) on the next page for details.
• When setting arbitrarily
There is a maximum of five magazine rows, and the number of tools that can be registered is a total of 360 tools for
Magazine tool data all magazines.
(auxiliary D) The assignment of the magazine tool data to each magazine varies between R10700 and R11779.
Refer to the assignment examples in (b) on the next page for details on the assignment method.

II - 224
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(a) Tool data assignment when not setting arbitrarily

There are up to three magazines, and up to 120 tools per magazine.
The tool data assignment is fixed between R10700 and R11779 as shown below.

Corresponding file (R) register

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine No.4 magazine No.5 magazine Remarks
(data type)
T4-digit/T8-digit
T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit
specifications
Pot 1 R10700 R11060 R11420
R10700 R11060 R11420 - - - - BCD
(MG1) R10701 R11061 R11421
Pot 2 R10702 R11062 R11422
R10701 R11061 R11421 - - - - BCD
(MG2) R10703 R11063 R11423
Pot 3 R10704 R11064 R11424
R10702 R11062 R11422 - - - - BCD
(MG3) R10705 R11065 R11425
Magazine
tool data

Pot 119 R10936 R11296 R11656

R10818 R11178 R11538 - - - - BCD
(MG119) R10937 R11297 R11657
Pot 120 R10938 R11298 R116568
R10819 R11179 R11539 - - - - BCD
(MG120) R10939 R11299 R11659
Pot 1 R10940 ← R11300 ← R11660 ← - - - - Binary

Pot 2 R10941 ← R11301 ← R11661 ← - - - - Binary

Magazine Pot 3 R10942 ← R11302 ← R11662 ← - - - - Binary

tool data
(auxiliary
D)

Pot 119 R11058 ← R11418 ← R11778 ← - - - - Binary

Pot 120 R11059 ← R11419 ← R11779 ← - - - - Binary

II - 225
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(b) Example of tool data assignment when setting arbitrarily

There are up to five magazines, and a total of 360 tools for all magazines.
The tool data assignment varies between R10700 and R11779.
The data is assigned to the tools starting from the No. 1 magazine based on the set number of tools.

(Example) Number of magazines : 5 magazines

Number of tools
No. 1 magazine : 100 tools
No. 2 to No. 5 magazines : 50 tools each

Corresponding file (R) register

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine No.4 magazine No.5 magazine Remarks
(data type)
T4-digit/T8-digit
T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit
specifications
Pot 1 R10700 R11000 R11150 R11300 R11450
R10700 R11000 R11150 R11300 R11450 BCD
(MG1) R10701 R11001 R11151 R11301 R11451
Pot 2 R10702 R11002 R11152 R11302 R11452
R10701 R11001 R11151 R11301 R11451 BCD
(MG2) R10703 R11003 R11153 R11303 R11453
Pot 3 R10704 R11004 R11154 R11304 R11454
R10702 R11002 R11152 R11302 R11452 BCD
(MG3) R10705 R11005 R11155 R11305 R11455

Magazine Pot 49 R10796 R11096 R11246 R11396 R11546

tool data (MG49) R10748 R11048 R11198 R11348 R11498 BCD
R10797 R11097 R11247 R11397 R11547
Pot 50 R10798 R11098 R11248 R11398 R11548
R10749 R11049 R11199 R11349 R11499 BCD
(MG50) R10799 R11099 R11249 R11399 R11549

Pot 99 R10896
R10798 - - - - - - - - BCD
(MG99) R10897
Pot 100 R10898
R10799 - - - - - - - - BCD
(MG100) R10899
Pot 1 R10900 ← R11100 ← R11250 ← R11400 ← R11550 ← Binary

Pot 2 R10901 ← R11101 ← R11251 ← R11401 ← R11551 ← Binary

Pot 3 R10902 ← R11102 ← R11252 ← R11402 ← R11552 ← Binary

Magazine Pot 49 R10948 ← R11148 ← R11298 ← R11448 ← R11598 ← Binary

tool data (MG49)
(auxiliary
Pot 50
D) R10949 ← R11149 ← R11299 ← R11449 ← R11599 ← Binary
(MG50)

Pot 99
R10998 ← - - - - - - - - Binary
(MG99)
Pot 120
R10999 ← - - - - - - - - Binary
(MG120)

II - 226
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.10 Details of Each Instruction

(1) Tool No. search

This instruction is used to search for tool No. stored in the magazine (tool data table).
When the instruction tool No. is found, number of searched data and its location are output. If two or
more tool No. are found, the location of tool No. nearest to the pointer is output.

ACT
S.ATC K1 R9800 R10610 M10

R No. to store search data

R9800 9830
R9801 9840
R No. to which data output

R9830 234 Search data (BCD)

Location is "3"
R9840 3
Number of search Output.... Based on the output result, the
2 data found: 2
(for error) rotation direction, the number of
steps, etc., are figured out by using
R10615 2 Pointer the ROT K1 instruction.

R10700 234(0) Tool data table head (fixed)

R10701 567(1)
: 100(2) There are two data "234", since location "3"
: 234(3) is nearest to pointer, "3" is output.

:
:
:
R10708 101(8)
R10709 102(9)

(Example for 10 magazines)

(Note 1) Pointer and location are counted up, like 0,1,2...9, in the tool data table, starting from the tool
data table head.
(Note 2) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".
Example: MOV K0 R10615

II - 227
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(2) Tool No. logical product (AND) search

Tool number AND search is the same as the tool number search instruction (ATC K1) in function: search
data and in-magazine tool number and AND data are ANDed together for a search.

ACT
S.ATC K2 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 9830 R No. to store search data

R9801 9840
R9802 9831 R No. to which data output
R No. to store logical product (AND) data

R9830 2000 Search data 2*** and F000 are ANDed together.
2000 is search data.
F000 Logical AND data * is any desired data.

Location of
R9840 3 searched data: 3
Number of Output --- Based on the output result, the rotation
R9841 3 searched data direction, the number of steps, etc.,
found (for error): 3
are figured by using the ROT K1
R10615 2 Pointer instruction.

R10700 2001(0) Tool data table head

R10701 1002(1)
: 3003(2) There are three data "2***" and the location of data
"2***" nearest to the pointer is "3".
: 2004(3)
: 1005(4)
: The in-magazine tool No. is ANDed with AND data F000 in
sequence. The result is compared with the search data.
: ( denotes AND.)
R10708 1009(8)
R10709 2010(9) Search data 2000 = 2001 F000
1002 F000
3003 F000
:
:

(Note 1) Pointer and location are counted up, like 0, 1, 2 .... 9, in the tool data table, starting from the tool
data table head.
(Note 2) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".
(Example) MOV K0 R10615

II - 228
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(3) Tool change

When a spindle tool and a magazine index tool are exchanged by the ATC arm, etc., the contents in the
memory (R register) must be updated correspondingly.

ACT
S.ATC K3 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 10620 R No. to specify the position of tool change

R9801

Tool data (tool to be chanegd, usually tool in spindle)

R10615 2 Pointer
R10620 1234
The content "1234" of R10620 (tool change position register
R10700 1000(0) No.) is replaced with the content "1002" of R10702 which
corresponds to the pointer value "2" of R10615 (pointer
R10701 1001(1) position register No.).
R10702 1002(2)
: 1003(3)
: :
: :
: :
: :
R10708 1008(8)
R10709 1009(9)

(Note) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".

(Example) MOV K0 R10615

II - 229
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(4) Arbitrary position tool change

In tool change, a spindle tool is usually exchanged with a magazine index tool. It may often occur,
however, that tool change must be performed at a station other than the usual tool change position (tool
change at spare tool change position, for example). This instruction is used in such cases.

ACT
S.ATC K4 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 10620 R No. to specify the position of tool change

(position of tool to be changed, tool in spindle in this example)
R9801 9840
R9802 R No. to specify the tool to be changed (arbitrary position)

R9840 5 Magazine No. to be changed

R10615 2 Pointer

R10620 1234 Tool data to be changed

R10700 1000(0) 9 8
R10701 1001(1) 10 9
R10702 1002(2) MG MG
: 1003(3) 1 0
: 1004(4) 2 1
: 1005(5) 3 2
: 1006 (6) 4 3
: 1007 (7) 5 4
R10708 1008(8) 6 5
R10709 1009(9) 7 6
8 7

For start of magazine from "0" position

For start of magazine from "1" position

(Note 1) Tool change position differs depending on whether magazine No. starts with "0" or "1".
However, the substantial consequence does not differ.
(Note 2) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".
(Example) MOV K0 R10615

II - 230
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(5) Pointer forward run

In the ATC control with variable pointer, pointer count is controlled so that it coincides with the actually
indexed magazine position when the magazine rotates in forward direction for index.

ACT
S.ATCK5 R10615 R10610 M10

R10615 1 2 Pointer is incremented.

When a magazine with 10 tools is used, for example, the control

sequence is as follows:
0, 1, 2, 3 ........ 9, 0, 1, 2, ........ 8, 9, 0, 1 ...

(Note 1) When this instruction is executed, the relationship between

magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the tool entry display,
changes accordingly.

(6) Pointer reverse run

In the ATC control with variable pointer, pointer count is controlled so that it coincides with actually
indexed magazine position when the magazine rotates in reverse direction for index.

ACT
S.ATC K6 R10615 R10610 M10

R10615 2 1 Pointer is decremented.

When a magazine with 10 tools is used, for example, the

control sequence is as follows:
2, 1, 0, 9, 8 ........ 2, 1, 0, 9, 8 ........ 1, 0, 9, 8 ...

(Note 1) When this instruction is executed, the relationship between

magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the tool entry display,
changes accordingly.

II - 231
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(7) Tool table forward run

The tool table rotates in forward direction in accordance with the magazine rotation.

ACT
S.ATC K7 R10610 R10610 M10

R10700 1000
R10701 1001
: :
: :
R10710 1010

(Note 1) In this control mode, pointer always indicates "0" (tool table head).
(Note 2) When this instruction is executed, the relationship between
magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the tool entry display
changes accordingly.

(8) Tool table reverse run

The tool table rotates in reverse direction in accordance with the magazine rotation.

ACT
S.ATC K8 R10610 R10610 M10

R10700 1000
R10701 1001
: :
: :
R10709 1009

(Note 1) In this control mode, pointer always indicates "0" (tool table head).
(Note 2) When this instruction is executed, the relationship between
magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the tool entry display
changes accordingly.

II - 232
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(9) Tool data read

This instruction is used to call a specific tool No. in the magazine.

ACT
S.ATC K9 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 9840 R No. to specify magazine No. to be read

R9801 9845
R9802 ---- R No. to specify position to which read data output

R9840 3 Magazine No. to be read

R9845 1004/1005 Read data

R10615 2 Pointer

R10700 1000(0) 9 8
R10701 1001(1) 10 9
R10702 1002(2) MG MG
: 1003(3) 1 0
: 1004(4) 2 1
: 3 2 Read out data differs depending on whether
1005(5)
magazine No. starts with "0" or "1".
: : (6) 4 3 However, the substantial consequence does not differ.
: : (7) 5 4
R10708 : (8) 6 5
R10709 1009(9) 7 6
8 7

For start of magazine from "0" position

For start of magazine from "1" position

(Note) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".

(Example) MOV K0 R10615

II - 233
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(10) Tool data write

Instead of setting tool No. through the setting and display unit, the tool No. is entered to each magazine
No. set through PLC program.

ACT
S.ATC K10 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 9840 R No. having magazine No. to which data is written

R9801 9845
R9802 ---- R No. where data to be written is stored

R9840 3 Magazine No. to which data is written

R9845 1234 Data to be written

R10615 2 Pointer

R10700 1000(0) 9 8
R10701 1001(1) 10 9
R10702 1002(2) MG MG
: 1003(3) 1 0
: (4) 2 1
Data "1234" is written to magazine No. 3 .
: (5) 3 2
: : (6) 4 3
: : (7) 5 4
R10708 1008(8) 6 5
R10709 1009(9) 7 6
8 7

Magazine starts from "0"

Magazine starts from "1"

(Note) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".

(Example) MOV K0 R10615

II - 234
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(11) Automatic tool data write

All tool Nos. are written (entered) in batch. This instruction is used for initialization, etc.
The data are written one after another for each tool, starting from the default value.

ACT
S.ATC K11 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 9840 R No. where default value is stored

R9801

R9840 1000 Default value

R10615 2 Pointer

R10700 1008(0) Tool data table head

R10701 1009(1)
R10702 1000(2) Tool data of the number of tools are written while
incrementing the default value one by one from the
: 1001(3)
spot indicated by the pointer.
: 1002(4)
: 1003(5)
: 1004(6)
: 1005(7)
R10708 1006(8)
R10709 1007(9)

(Note) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".

(Example) MOV K0 R10615

II - 235
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.11 Precautions for Using ATC Exclusive Instructions

(1) When tool data is rewritten by ATC or other than ATC instruction, tool registration screen display is not
updated. The following processing is required:
• Turn ON special relay SM64 by using the SET instruction.
(Program example)
ACT
PLS M10

M10
SET SM64

• SM64 processing is not required for ATC instructions ATC K5, K6 (forward run, reverse run of
pointer), ATC K7, K8 (forward run, reverse run of tool table).
• SM64 is set through the use of the user PLC and reset by controller.

(2) Method of tool registration prohibiting during magazine rotation

If tool data is set on the tool registration screen during magazine rotation, data may be set in erroneous
position. To prevent this error, a signal called "tool registration screen setting prohibited Y710" is
provided.
(Program example)
Y710

CW

CCW

• Y710 turns ON during magazine rotation.

• Setting of AUX data (R10604) is valid while Y710 is being ON.

9.1.12 Examples of Tool Registration Screen

Tool registration screen examples are given below. For operation, refer to the Operation Manual.

Comment display area

Spindle, standby tool No.

display area

Magazine tool No.

display area

II - 236
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(1) Comment display area

The display at the comment display area is created using the message creation function explained in the
"III Peripheral Development Environment".

(2) Spindle tool, standby tool display area

The number of display items can be changed according to the control parameter value.

Control parameter (R10600)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

00: Only spindle tool is displayed.

01: Spindle tool and standby 1 are displayed.
02: Spindle tool and standby 1 and 2 are displayed.
03: Spindle tool and standby 1 to 3 are displayed.
04: Spindle tool and standby 1 to 4 are displayed.
05 or more: No spindle tool or standby tool is displayed.
Hexadecimal expression

(3) Magazine tool No. display area

The number of displayed magazine tools and the magazine No. start value can be changed according to
the number-of-magazine parameter and control parameter values.

(a) Number of magazines

Number-of-magazine parameter (R10610) ･ Setting range
0 to 120: When not arbitrary setting the tools
0 to 360: When arbitrary setting the tools
(Note) If 0 is set, the magazine tool is not displayed. However, the magazine No. and magazine tool
number guide area is displayed.

(b) Magazine No. start value

Control parameter (R10600)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0: The magazine No. starts at 1.

1: The magazine No. starts at 0.

(Example) Magazine number display when the number of magazines is 12.

MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D

1 0
2 11 1 10
12 11

The magazine No. starts at 1 The magazine No. starts at 0

II - 237
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.13 Display of Spindle Tool and Standby Tool

The tool mounted on the spindle or the tool to be mounted next on the spindle (standby tool) and tool No. in
the magazine are set and displayed on the tool registration screen. However, the spindle and standby tool
Nos. can also be displayed on the position display screen and tool length measurement screen that are often
used. With this, the changes in the magazine pot and spindle tool No. according to the tool selection
command or tool change command can be confirmed.

(1) Position display screen

Spindle and
standby display

(2) Display tool selection parameter

A maximum of four standby tools can be displayed on the tool registration screen. The No. of the standby
tool and the title to be displayed on the monitor screen and setup screen, etc., are selected.

Display tool selection parameter (R10603)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Spare Selection of display tool

000000 : Spindle, standby 1
000001 : Spindle, standby 2
000010 : Spindle, standby 3
000011 : Spindle, standby 4
Others : Not display

Selection of display 1 : Display tool

0 : Do not display tool

II - 238
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.2 ROT Instructions

9.2 ROT Instructions

With this instruction, the rotary body's target position and rotation direction are determined, as well as the
function as a ring counter is realized.
This is used when calculating the rotation direction or number of index steps of the magazine and turret,
etc. based on the output data figured with tool No. search of ATC dedicated instruction, or used when
controlling the rotary body position.

9.2.1 Instruction List

Instruction Description
S.ROT K1 Rn Rm Mn Rotary body indexing
S.ROT K3 Rn Rm Mn Ring counter

(Note 1) Rot instructions are programmed with "S.ROT".

II - 239
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.2 ROT Instructions

(1) Rotary body indexing

Direction of rotation and number of steps of ATC magazine (or turret) are determined.

Rn Rp Parameter setting R No.

Rn+1 Current position R No.
Indirect designation
Rn+2 Target position R No.
Rn+3 Output R No.

ACT
S.ROT K1 Rn Rm Mm

0: Direction of rotation CW
Index
instruction 1: Direction of rotation CCW

(Note) CW or CCW output is controlled so that it takes a

short circuit regardless of parameter specification.
Number of rotary body indexing cycles
designating R No.
Control data buffer position designating R No.
Rp (parameter) contents
15 14 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

F E
(Spare)
0 : Rotary body starts from 1
Error output 1 : Rotary body starts from 0
0 : Normal completion
1 : Error completion 0 : Direction of rotation is determined for
4 3 shorter reach.
…
…

1 : Direction of rotation is not determined for

shorter reach.
0 , 0 : (Step No. +1) is counted.
0 , 1 : Step No. is counted.
1 , 0 : (Step No. –1) is counted.
When the current value is equal to the target value, -1 will appear.

(Note 1) The Index instruction is executed after setting R Nos. to Rn to Rn+3 and writing data in the file
registers (R) each corresponding to the R Nos. However, data setting to the parameter (Rp) is done
once before execution of the index instruction; this is to prevent the error code from being cleared.
(Note 2) The error code stored in bit F of the parameter (Rp) is not cleared even if the index instruction
activating signal (ACT) goes OFF.

II - 240
9. Exclusive Instructions
9.2 ROT Instructions

(a) Example of rotary body index by ROT K1 instruction

Conditions: (i) The number of rotary body index is 6.

(ii) The target position is set with the T command. The T command is set with the
parameters so that it outputs to the PLC with a binary. (Set base specification
parameter Tbin to 1.)

6
1 5
Target position

2 4
M
3

Current position

PLC

Index code 20 X30 Y10 CW

Index code 21 X31 PLC Y11 CCW
Index code 22 X32 processing
Index code 23 X33
Index code X34 R536 YC1E
strobe

CNC
Auxiliary function
completed (Fin)
T code data,
T command start

In the example of ladder circuit shown below, the rotation direction is determined by the T command
and current position data given by the machine, and the rotary body is rotated in that direction until
the target position reaches the current position. When indexing is completed, the auxiliary command
completion signal is turned ON.

II - 241
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.2 ROT Instructions

File register (R) map

ACT
S.ROT K1 Rn Rm Mm
T command R536 1 to 6 (Binary)
Top of control data buffer (from CNC)
0:CW R537 0
(R9800 in this example) 1:CCW
R No. to specify rotary body
index (R9811 in this example)

M1000
MOV R9810 R9800 R No. to store the parameter R9800 9810
MOV R9812 R9801 R No. to store the current position R9801 9812

MOV K536 R9802 R No. to store the target position R9802 536
MOV K9813 R9803 R No. to store the output position R9803 9813
MOV H8 R9810 Parameter is set.

MOV K6 R9811 Number of rotary body

X34 index are set.
PLS M100 R9810 8
Strobe rising signal created
M100
MOV K1X30 R9812 The current value is set at R9811 6
XC68 R9812CW or CCW is determined by
the ROT instruction. R9812 1 to 6
S.ROT K1 R9800 R9811 M200
M201 Error check When required R9813 0 to 3 (number
<= R9810 H0F of output steps)
XC68 M202 Stop signal created (Note 1)
= R536 R9812 (target value=current value)
XC68 M203
= K0 R9813 Stop signal created (Note 1)
XC68 M202 M200 Y10 (number of steps=0)

CW
(M203) M200 Y11
CCW
YC1E
Completion circuit Auxiliary function completed
M1000 M1000
On-signal after PLC1 scan
M1000

(Note 1) Either M202 or M203 can be used for a stop signal.

(Note 2) The devices (X, Y, and R) are used in this example for no special purpose. Use any device within
the available range.
(Note 3) If a number from 1 to 6 has not been specified for current position data (R9812) before the ROT
instruction is activated, an error will occur.
(Note 4) The control parameters (R9810) are specified as follows:
(1) Rotary body starts from 1
(2) Take a short cut.
(3) Calculate the number of steps.

II - 242
 9. Exclusive Instructions
9.2 ROT Instructions

(2) Ring counter (Up/down counter)

This instruction is used to control position of rotary body (or turret).

ACT
S.ROT K3 Rn Rm Mn
(Pulse coding)
Completion ("1" for error)
Ring counter instruction
R No. to specify rotary body index

Control buffer data position designating R No.

Rn Rp Parameter setting R No.

Rn+1 Counter setting R No. (File register o. which is the content in Rn+1 is
actual ring counter.)

The ring counter is a binary counter; it is used as an up/down counter of "start from 0" or "start from 1"
according to the parameter rotary body instruction.

15 - - - 3 2 1 0

F E
Rotary body selection
Error output 0 : Rotary body starts from 1
Instruction code: S.ROT Kn is not "1" or "3".
1 : Rotary body starts from 0

Up/down selection
0 : Up counter
1 : Down counter

(Note 1) The ring counter instruction is executed after setting R No. to Rn to Rn+1 and specifying data for
the parameter.
(Note 2) The error completion (Mm) of the ring counter instruction and the error output in bit F of the
parameter (Rp) are cleared when the activating signal (ACT) goes OFF. The activating signal
(ACT) of the ring counter instruction is generally pulsed. This makes it hard for the interface
diagnostic and ladder monitor programs to detect an error signal. For debugging, therefore, an
error hold circuit is provided after the ring count instruction to ease error detection.

II - 243
 10. PLC Help Function

10. PLC Help Function

To help the user PLC, an exclusive interface is provided between the user PLC and controller.
The function and interface are explained below.

PLC help function examples:

• Tool life management
• External search
• PLC axis control
• External machine coordinate system compensation
• Alarm message display
• Operator message display
• PLC switches
• Key operation by user PLC
• Load meter display
• User PLC version display

II - 244
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.1 Outline of Tool Life Management Function

• The tool status is monitored by counting the tool usage time and number of uses.
• When the tool being used reaches its life, the tool life over signal is output, and the tool No. displayed on the
LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA screen is highlighted.
• When the tool is commanded, an arbitrary tool is selected from the tool group.
(Only for tool life management II.)

[Cutting] [[Tool command]

Use time and The life is checked
number of uses when the tool is Tool life is over
are counted selected

[Preparation]
The life time [WARNING]
and number of Tool life over
life times are
set [Tool life management screen]
# No. is highlighted

Tool life register

(R register) User PLC

II - 245
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.2 Tool Life Management Methods

The following two management methods are available.

(1) Tool life management I (When Base common parameter "#1096 T-Ltyp" is set to 1.)
The use time or use count of the spindle tool specified from user PLC (R12200, R12201) is integrated
and the tool use state is monitored. Tool data corresponding to the spindle tool is also output. (R11824 to
R11847)

(2) Tool life management II (When Base common parameter "#1096 T-Ltyp" is set to 2.)
A function to select a spare tool has been added to the tool management I. The spare tool is selected
from the group by the spare tool selection processes executed by the NC when the tool is commanded,
etc. The tool data for that spare tool is output.
Tool data corresponding to the spindle tool specified from user PLC (R12200, R12201) is output (R11824
to R11847) and tool compensation corresponding to the spindle tool is made.

10.1.3 Procedure when tool command is executed

(1) Tool life management I

(a) When the tool command (T command) is commanded, the NC outputs the T code data (BCD) and
the tool strobe signal.
The T code data (BCD) is binary converted and then used.
(b) The NC checks the tool command, and executes the tool selection process if there is a need for life
management.
(c) The tool selection process outputs the tool data for the tool corresponding to the designated tool No.
(d) The user PLC decides whether or not the tool can be used according to the status in the output tool
data, and selects command tool or performs alarm processing.

(2) Tool life management II

(a) When the tool command (T command) is commanded, the NC outputs the T code data (BCD) and
the tool strobe signal.
The T code data (BCD) is binary converted and then used.
(b) The NC checks the tool command, and executes the spare tool selection process if there is a need
for life management.
(c) The spare tool selection process selects the spare tool corresponding to the specified No. (group
No., tool No.) and outputs the tool data of the spare tool.
(d) The user PLC decides whether or not the tool can be used according to the status in the output tool
data, and selects command tool or performs alarm processing.

(Note) If -1 is set in the group No. in the output tool data, the tool data is invalid. At the time, the
specified tool No. is output to the tool No. in the output tool data as it is.

<When tool command is executed>

Tool command (Rm) Spare tool selection Tool data (Rn)

(Tool No., group No.) function command

In tool life management I, Tool is selected according

tool No. is only specified to tool No. in tool data.
and spare tool is selected.

II - 246
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.4 Procedure when Spindle Tool is Changed

(1) When spindle tool is changed during the spindle tool change command (M06), etc., the user PLC
specifies the tool No. of the spindle tool (R12200 to R12201).
NC outputs the spindle tool data corresponding to the tool No. of the spindle tool every user PLC
main cycle (R11824 to R11847).
(2) NC integrates the use time or use count of the spindle tool based on the spindle tool data in the tool
data file.
In tool life management II, it also executes tool compensation corresponding to the spindle tool.

(Note) If -1 is set in the group No. in the output spindle tool data, the spindle tool data is invalid. At
the time, the specified tool No. (R12200 to R12201) is output to the tool No. in the output
spindle tool data as it is. NC does not integrate the usage time or usage count of the spindle
tool or make tool compensation.

<When tool is changed>

Spindle tool No.

(R11802-R11803)
When tool is changed, the spindle tool No. is set
in R12200, R12201. (User PLC)

Spindle tool No. NC Tool data file

(R12200 to R12201) (NC internal data)

Standby tool No.

(R12202 to R12203) When the spindle tool No. changes, the
controller assumes that the spindle tool is
changed, and searches the tool data file for
Spindle tool data the tool data of the new tool.
(R11824 to R11847) The controller executes life management and
tool compensation based on the tool data. It
also outputs the tool data to R11824 to
R11847 every user PLC main cycle.

II - 247
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.5 Tool Life Management II Method

(1) Tool command method

One of the following two can be selected by using a parameter for command tool No. (Rm contents) input
to the spare tool selection process in tool life management II:

(a) Group No. command method (When Base common parameter "#1104 T-Com2" is set to 0.)
The command tool No. (Rm contents) input to the spare tool selection process is handled as group
No. Spare tool is selected among the tools corresponding to the group No. in tool data.

(a) Tool No. command method (When BASE SPEC parameter "#1104 T-Com2" is set to 1.)
The command tool No. (Rm contents) input to the spare tool selection process is handled as a tool
No. The group No. containing the command tool No. is found and spare tool is selected among the
group.

(2) Spare tool selection method

One of the following two can be selected by using a parameter for the spare tool selection method of the
spare tool selection process in tool life management II:

(a) Selection in tool registration order (When Base common parameter "#1105 T-Sel2" is set to 0.)
This selects the tool from the tools in use in the same group, following the registration No. order.
If there are no "Tools in use", the tools are selected in order of "Tools not in use", "Normal life tools"
and "Abnormal tools", following the registration No. order.

(b) Life equality selection (When Base common parameter "#1105 T-Sel2" is set to 1.)
This selects the tool with the maximum remaining life from the tools in use and not in use in the
same group.
When several tools have the same remaining life, the tools are selected in order of registration No. If
there are no "Tools in use" or "Tools not in use", the tools are selected in order of "Tools not in use",
"Normal life tools" and "Abnormal tools", following the registration No. order.

10.1.6 Maximum Number of Registerable Tools

The maximum number of registerable tools is decided by the system's specifications.

II - 248
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.7 Tool Data

The tool data is tool management data such as the group No., tool No., and tool status.
Tool data name Explanation Data range
Group No. No. to manage tools of the same type (form 1 to 99999999
and dimensions) in a group is set.
The tools assigned the same group No. are
assumed to be spare tools.
Tool No. No. unique to each tool actually output 1 to 99999999
during tool command execution
Tool data flag Set the parameter for tool life management bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
method, length compensation method,
radius compensation method, etc. (1) (3) (2)

(1) Tool life management method 0-2

(2) Tool length compensation method
0-2
(3) Tool radius compensation method
0-2
Tool status The tool state is indicated. 0 to FF (H)
Auxiliary data May differ according to the machine tool 0 to 65535
builder specifications.
Tool life data Life time or life count for each tool is set. 0 to 4000 (minutes)
(If 0 is set, infinity is assumed to be 0 to 65000 (times)
specified.)
Tool usage data Usage time or usage count for each tool. 0 to 4000 (minutes)
(Refer to the following "Usage time, usage 0 to 65000 (times)
count" section for details on the count
method.)
Tool length The tool length compensation data is set Compensation No. 1 to 999 (Note)
compensation with the format designated with the tool data Direct offset amount ±99999.999
data flag. Addition offset amount ±99999.999
Tool radius The tool radius compensation data is set Compensation No. 1 to 999 (Note)
compensation with the format designated with the tool data Direct offset amount ±99999.999
data flag. Addition offset amount ±99999.999

(Note) The data range for the tool offset Nos. is decided by the specifications of the number of tool offset
sets.
Number of tool offset sets Data range
40 sets 1 to 40
200 sets 1 to 200
400 sets 1 to 400
999 sets 1 to 999

II - 249
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

(1) Tool data flag

Parameter Details Value Explanation
Usage time 0 Manages the cutting feed with the execution time.
Tool life
management Manages the number of times the tool becomes the spindle tool at tool
Mount count 1
method change, etc.
Work count 2 Manages with the number of times the cutting feed command is issued.
Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the compensation No.,
Compensation
0 and compensates by replacing the compensation No. commanded in the
number method
machining program with this value.
Tool length Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the addition
compensation Addition
compensation amount.
method compensation 1
Compensates by adding the amount to the compensation amount
Tool radius method
indicated by the compensation No. commanded in the machining program.
compensation
Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the direct compensation
method
Direct amount.
compensation 2 Compensates by replacing the amount to the compensation amount
method indicated by the compensation No. commanded in the machining program
with this value.

(2) Tool status

Details Value Explanation
Unused tool 0 Set to 0 when replacing the tool with a new tool.
Tool in use 1 This state is activated when cutting is actually started.
Normal life tool 2 This state is activated when the usage data exceeds the life data.
Error tool 1 3 This state is activated when the NC receives tool error 1 signal.
Error tool 2 4 This state is activated when the NC receives tool error 2 signal.
• Values 3 and 4 may differ according to the machine tool builder specifications.
• The unused tool and tool in use are usable spare tools.

(3) Tool life data, tool usage data

The setting range and unit differ according to the tool data flag's tool life management method.
Tool life management method Setting range Unit
0 : Usage time 0 to 4000 Minute
1 : Mount count 0 to 65000 Times
2 : Work count 0 to 65000 Times

(4) Tool length compensation data, tool radius compensation data

The tool corresponding to the spindle tool can be compensated with tool life management II.
The setting details and range differ according to the tool data flag's tool length compensation method and
tool radius compensation method.
Tool compensation data Setting details Setting range
0 : Compensation number method Compensation No. 1 to 999 (Note)
1 : Addition compensation method Compensation amount ±99999.999
2 : Direct compensation method Compensation amount ±99999.999

(Note) The data range for the tool offset Nos. is decided by the specifications of the number of tool offset
sets.
Number of tool offset sets Data range
40 sets 1 to 40
200 sets 1 to 200
400 sets 1 to 400
999 sets 1 to 999

II - 250
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.8 Usage Time, Work Count

The usage data is counted with the life system (usage time, work count, mount count) set for each tool.
Tool life management is executed even when the operation mode is MDI.

G00 G01 G00 G04 G01 G04 G04 G00

During cutting
feed During cutting feed

+1 count +1 count

• The usage time is the cumulative time during operation (during cutting feed) in the group 1 modal.
• The cut count is the number of times the state was changed to the group 1 modal (G01, G02, G03, G33).
Note that rapid traverse and cutting feed commands with no movement are not counted.
If a command other than a rapid traverse command is issued between the cutting feed commands, the
data will not be counted.
• The mount count is the number of times the tool became the spindle tool with tool change.
If the group 1 modal is not activated even once after becoming the spindle tool, the mounting will not be
counted.

The following cases are not counted even when tool life management is valid.
• When control parameter "tool management valid" is OFF
• When the usage data count valid signal is OFF
• When the life data setting value is 0
• When there are two or more tool statuses (normal life, abnormal tool 1, abnormal tool 2)
• During machine lock
• During miscellaneous function lock
• During dry run
• Single block
• During skip

II - 251
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.9 Tool Data Flow (R Register)

NC PLC

R536 T command data

T command
(BCD data)
R537

R11800
Group No.
R11801

R11802
Tool No. 1
R11803
When magazine is indexed according to
R11804 Tool data flag/status [DMOV] the read tool No. and new tool is mounted
Auxiliary data on the spindle, tool No. of the new tool is
R11805
set in R12200, R12201.
The NC searches for the tool data
R11806 Cumulative
indicated by the T command
data. usage time
R11807
The searched tool data is set in
R11800 to R11823. R11808
Service lifetime
R11809
Cumulative usage
R11810 count
R11811 Service life count

R11812 Cumulative
usage wear
R11813 amount
Status check, etc.
R11814 Service life wear
amount
R11815

R11816 Length compen-

sation data
R11817

R11818
Radius compen-
R11819 sation data

R11820
Length wear
R11821 amount

R11822
Radius wear
R11823 amount

II - 252
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

NC PLC
1

[DMOV]

Use as life management R12200 Spindle tool No.

and screen display data
R12201

R12202
Use as screen Standby tool Standby tool number is set.
display data. R12203 No.

R11824
Group No.
R11825

R11826
Tool No.
The tool data R11827
corresponding to the
spindle tool No. is R11828 Tool data flag/status
output.
R11829 Auxiliary data Status check, etc.

R11830 Cumulative
usage time
R11831

R11832
Service lifetime
R11833
Cumulative usage
R11834 count
R11835 Service life count

R11836 Cumulative
usage wear
R11837 amount

R11838 Service life wear

amount
R11839

R11840
Length compen-
R11841 sation data
(Note)
R11842 Note that the data handled in tool life management
Radius compen-
sation data except for tool data flag/status is binary, while the
R11843
data used in the ATC instruction, such as search
R11844 data and magazine tool No., is BCD.
Length wear
R11845 amount

R11846
Radius wear
R11847 amount

II - 253
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.10 User PLC processing

A PLC processing example when tool change is made by the T command is given below:

START

Spare tool data

already output?
NO
YES

Is life management The control method varies depending on

selected? NO whether or not life management is selected.

YES

Is tool available? The tool status and tool No. are checked to see if
NO the tool can be used.
YES
Index magazine according to tool Desired tool (magazine) is indexed.
No. in the read tool data.

Index up magazine according Desired tool (magazine) is indexed.

to the R536 contents.

Change tool (mount new tool on

spindle) Set the tool No. of the new tool mounted on the
Set the tool No. of the tool spindle in R12200, R12201.
mounted on the spindle R12200, Seeing a change in the R12200, R12201
R12201. contents, NC outputs the life management tool
data corresponding to the tool No. R11824 to
R11847 and starts life management at the same
time.

Turn on auxiliary function The completion signal when life

completion signal. management is selected is turned on after
the spindle tool No. is set in R12200,
R12201.
Error processing

II - 254
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.11 Interface with PLC

(1) NC → PLC
X (part system)
1st part 2nd part
Name Details
system system
Sent from the NC to the PLC when the tool life management
XC2B XD6B In tool life management
function is selected (when user parameter is ON).
Sent from the NC to the PLC when the usage data count value
XC2E XD6E Tool life over
exceeds the life data setting value.
Sent from the NC to the PLC when all tools in the tool group
XC2F XD6F Tool group life over
exceed the life. (Valid only in the tool life management II.)
Sent from the NC to the PLC when the miscellaneous function (M
XC60 XDA0 M function strobe 1
function) is executed.
Sent from the NC to the PLC when output of the spare tool's data
XC68 XDA8 T function strobe 1
is completed.

(2) PLC → NC
Y (axis)
1st part 2nd part
Name Details
system system
Y8A0 Y8A8 Auto machine lock 1st axis
Y8A1 Y8A9 Auto machine lock 2nd axis
Y8A2 Y8AA Auto machine lock 3rd axis
Y8A3 Y8AB Auto machine lock 4th axis Tool life management is not executed while these signals are
Y8A4 Y8AC Auto machine lock 5th axis received.
Y8A5 Y8AD Auto machine lock 6th axis
Y8A6 Y8AE Auto machine lock 7th axis
Y8A7 Y8AF Auto machine lock 8th axis

Y (part system)
1st part 2nd part
Name Details
system system
Tool life management is not executed while this signal is
YC12 YD52 Single block
received.
Tool life management is not executed while this signal is
YC15 YD55 Dry run
received.
Execution of the machining program waits until this signal is
YC1E YD5E M function finish 1
received.
Execution of the machining program waits until this signal is
YC5A YD9A Miscellaneous function lock
received.
YC88 YDC8 Tool alarm 1 The tool status is changed to 3 when the NC receives this signal.
YC89 YDC9 Tool alarm 2 The tool status is changed to 4 when the NC receives this signal.
The tool usage data is not counted when this signal is not being
YC8A YDCA Data count valid
received.
Tool life management is executed when NC receives this signal,
YC8B YDCB Tool life management input
and the output during tool life management is output to PLC.

II - 255
 10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

(3) R registers
R (part system)
1st part 2nd part
Name Details
system system
R504 R704
M code data 1 This No. is designated with the M command.
R505 R705
R536 R736
T code data 1 This No. is designated with the T command.
R537 R737
Group in tool life
R567 R767 This is the No. of the group for which life management is active.
management
R628 R828 This is the usage time and work count of the tool for which life
Tool life usage data
R629 R829 management is active.
Number of registerable tool
R630 R830 This is the number of tools for which life management is active.
life control tools
Tool life management data
R2588 R2788 This is the tool life data sort necessity flag.
sort
R2590 R2790 Tool group number
This is the tool group No. commanded with the T command.
R2591 R2791 designation

R (ATC, life management): Tool life management data (NC → PLC) standby tool data
1st part 2nd part
Name Details
system system
R11800 R11850 T life mgmt
This is the standby tool's group No.
R11801 R11851 Standby tool: Group No.
R11802 R11852
Standby tool: Tool No. This is the standby tool's tool No.
R11803 R11853
R11804 R11854 Standby tool: Flag/Status This is the standby tool's flag/status.
R11805 R11855 Standby tool: Auxiliary data This is the standby tool's auxiliary data.
R11806 R11856 Standby tool: Cumulative
This is the standby tool's usage time.
R11807 R11857 usage time
R11808 R11858 Standby tool: Service
This is the standby tool's service lifetime.
R11809 R11859 lifetime
R11810 R11860 Standby tool: Cumulative
This is the standby tool's work count time.
usage count
R11811 R11861 Standby tool: Service life
This is the standby tool's service life count.
count
R11812 R11862 Standby tool: Cumulative
This is the standby tool's usage wear amount.
R11813 R11863 usage wear amount
R11814 R11864 Standby tool: Service life
This is the standby tool's service life wear amount.
R11815 R11865 wear amount
R11816 R11866 Standby tool: Length
This is the spare tool's length compensation amount.
R11817 R11867 compensation amount
R11818 R11868 Standby tool: Radius
This is the standby tool's radius compensation amount.
R11819 R11869 compensation amount
R11820 R11870 Standby tool: Length wear
This is the standby tool's length wear amount.
R11821 R11871 amount
R11822 R11872 Standby tool: Radius wear
This is the standby tool's radius wear amount.
R11823 R11873 amount

II - 256
10. PLC Help Function
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

R (ATC, life management): Tool life management data (NC → PLC) Active spindle tool data
1st part 2nd part
Name Details
system system
R11824 R11874 T life mgmt
This is the active tool's group No.
R11825 R11875 Active tool: Group No.
R11826 R11876
Active tool: Tool No. This is the active tool's tool No.
R11827 R11877
R11828 R11878 Active tool: Flag/Status This is the active tool's flag/status.
R11829 R11879 Active tool: Auxiliary data This is the active tool's auxiliary data.
R11830 R11880 Active tool: Cumulative
This is the active tool's usage time.
R11831 R11881 usage time
R11832 R11882
Active tool: Service lifetime This is the active tool's service lifetime.
R11833 R11883
Active tool: Cumulative
R11834 R11884 This is the active tool's work count time.
usage count
Active tool: Service life
R11835 R11885 This is the active tool's service life count.
count
R11836 R11886 Active tool: Cumulative
This is the active tool's usage wear amount.
R11837 R11887 usage wear amount
R11838 R11888 Active tool: Service life
This is the active tool's service life wear amount.
R11839 R11889 wear amount
R11840 R11890 Active tool: Length
This is the active tool's length compensation amount.
R11841 R11891 compensation amount
R11842 R11892 Active tool: Radius
This is the active tool's radius compensation amount.
R11843 R11893 compensation amount
R11844 R11894 Active tool: Length wear
This is the active tool's length wear amount.
R11845 R11895 amount
R11846 R11896 Active tool: Radius wear
This is the active tool's radius wear amount.
R11847 R11897 amount

R (ATC, life management): Tool life management data (NC → PLC) Spindle/Standby tool Nos.
1st part 2nd part
Name Details
system system
R12200 R12210
T life mgmt Spindle tool No. This is the active spindle tool No.
R12201 R12211
R12202 R12212
T life mgmt Standby tool No. This is the standby tool No.
R12203 R12213

II - 257
 10. PLC Help Function
10.2 External Search

10.2 External Search

External search is a function that searches the machining program according to the machining program
storage device, program No., sequence No. and block No. designated from the user PLC.

10.2.1 Detailed Explanation

The flow of the external search execution process is given below.

(1) The user PLC sets the device, program No., sequence No. and block No.
(2) The user PLC sets the external search strobe signal ON.
(3) The NC searches for the target machining program from the designated device, program No., sequence
No. and block No.
(4) The NC sets the search results as the external search status.
(5) The NC turns the external search finished signal ON.
(6) The user PLC turns the external search strobe signal OFF.
(7) The NC turns the external search finished signal OFF.

Flow of external search process for 1st part system

NC User PLC

(4)
Set search results R500 External search status Refer to with error check, etc.

R2525 Device No. Set device No.

R2526 (1)
(1)
Program No. Set program No.
R2527
R2528
Sequence No. Set sequence No.
R2529
R2530
Block No. Set block No.
R2531

(3) Search process External search (2)

execution strobe signal ON

(5) (6)
External search External search
finished signal ON strobe signal OFF

(7)
External search
finished signal OFF

II - 258
 10. PLC Help Function
10.2 External Search

10.2.2 PLC → NC Interface Signal

Part system No.
Signal name 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part
system system system system
External search device No. R2525 R2725 R2925 R3125
External search program No. R2526 R2726 R2926 R3126
R2527 R2727 R2927 R3127
External search sequence No. R2528 R2728 R2928 R3128
R2529 R2729 R2929 R3129
External search block No. R2530 R2730 R2930 R3130
R2531 R2731 R2931 R3131
External search strobe YC1D YD5D YE9D YFDD

(1) External search device No.

The device storing the machining program to be searched is designated with a No.
When a front CF card is selected in 70 Series, either "2" or "4" can be selected.

Device number Device

0 Memory
1 HD (D drive)
2 IC card (Drive E)
3 Floppy disk (Drive A)
4 High-speed program server
5 Tape (RS232C)

(2) Program No.

Designate the No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary. 1 to 99999999 (8 digits)

(3) Sequence No.

Designate the sequence No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary. 1 to 99999 (5 digits)

(4) Block No.

Designate the block No. as a binary. 0 to 99999 (5 digits)

(5) External search strobe

The NC starts the external search at the rising edge of this signal.
The combinations of designation conditions and correspondence of the search blocks are shown below.
Under each condition, the search block + block with designated block No. are searched.

Condition
Search block
Program No. Sequence No.
Designated Designated Designated sequence No. for designated program
Designated Not designated (= 0) Head of designated program
Not designated (= 0) Designated Designated sequence No. in currently selected program
Not designated (= 0) Not designated (= 0) Error: 4 Refer to 10.2.5 External search status

II - 259
 10. PLC Help Function
10.2 External Search

10.2.3 NC → PLC Interface Signal

Part system No.
Signal name 2nd part 3rd part 4th part
1st part system
system system system
External search finished XC1D XD5D XE9D XFDD
External search status R500 R700 R900 R1100

(1) External search finished

This turns ON when the external search is finished. This also turns ON when an error occurs.
This signal turns OFF when the "External search strobe signal" is turned OFF from the user PLC.
(2) External search status
The status at the end of the external search is output.
Refer to "10.2.5 External search status".

10.2.4 Timing Chart

The timing chart for the external search is shown below.

External search strobe

(PLC NC)

Processing external search

(NC internal state)

External search finished signal

(NC PLC)

External search status

(NC PLC)

10.2.5 External Search Status

The correspondence of the external search status values and details output from the NC based on the
external search is shown below.
External search
Details Remedy
status value
0 Normally finished -
Operation search is being carried out Wait for other function's operation search
1
to finish before searching.
Search was attempted while the program Stop the program before searching
2
was running
A device that does not exist or which is Confirm the presence of the device, and
3
disabled was designated that the device is within the specifications
The program file is not designated Designate the program No. or sequence
4
No.
The block with the designated program
5 No., sequence No. or block No. was not -
found
The external search specifications are not Check the specifications
6
available

II - 260
 10. PLC Help Function
10.2 External Search

10.2.6 Precautions
Even if the external search strobe is already OFF when the NC finishes the external search, the external
search finished signal will turn ON for one cycle of the user PLC.

10.2.7 Usage Example

An example of the external search ladder for 1st part system is shown below.

External search start signal

M8000
PLS M8001 External search start pulse

External search start pulse

M8001
MOV D101 R2525 Set external search device No.

DMOV D102 R2526 Set external search program No.

DMOV D104 R2528 Set external search sequence No.

DMOV D106 R2530 Set external search block No.

Turn external search strobe signal

SET YC1D
ON
External search finished signal
XC0F
MOV R500 D108 Retrieve external search status

Turn external search strobe signal

RST YC1D
OFF

II - 261
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

10.3 PLC Axis Control

This function allows an independent axis to be controlled with commands from the user PLC, separately from
the NC control axis.

10.3.1 Specifications
Item Details
Number of control axes Max. :2 axes (700 Series), 6 axes (70 Series)
Simultaneous control The PLC control axis is controlled independently of the NC control axis.
axes Simultaneous start of multiple PLC axes is possible.
Command unit Least command increment (Note 1) 0.001mm (0.0001 inch)
0.0001mm (0.00001 inch)
0.00001mm (0.000001 inch)
0.000001mm (0.0000001 inch)
Feedrate 0 to 1000000 mm/min (0 to 100000 inch/min)
(The speed is fixed regardless of the unit system.)
Movement commands Incremental value commands from the current position.
Absolute value commands of the machine coordinate system.
0 to ±99999999 (Note 1)
Operation modes Rapid traverse, cutting feed
Jog feed (+), (-)
Reference position return feed (+), (-)
Handle feed
Backlash compensation Provided
Stroke end Not provided
Soft limit Provided
Rotation axis commands Provided
Absolute value commands ....... Rotation amount within one rotation.
(Rotates the remainder divided by
rotational axis division count.)
Incremental commands ............ Rotates the commanded rotation amount.
Inch/mm changeover Not provided
Command to match the feedback unit.
Position detector Encoder (absolute position detection also possible)

(Note 1) The following units are used for the input/output data in PLC axis control according to the parameter
"#1005 plcunit" setting.
Setting value Unit
B 0.001 mm (0.0001 inch)
C 0.0001 mm (0.00001 inch)
D 0.00001 mm (0.000001 inch)
E 0.000001 mm (0.0000001 inch)
The screen display changes as follows according to the parameter "#1003 iunit" setting.
Setting value Unit Display
B 0.001 mm (0.0001 inch) Displays up to three digits after the decimal point
C 0.0001 mm (0.00001 inch) Displays up to four digits after the decimal point
D 0.00001 mm (0.000001 inch) Displays up to five digits after the decimal point
E 0.000001 mm (0.0000001 inch) Displays up to six digits after the decimal point

(Note 2) The unit system is split into the display (iunit) and control data (plcunit), so when confirming the
effective value of the PLC axis control data on the screen, set the display unit (iunit) to the same unit
as the control data unit (plcunit).

II - 262
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

Other restrictions
(1) There is no mirror image, external deceleration or machine lock function.
(2) Rapid traverse override, cutting override and dry run control are not possible.
(3) Automatic operation start, automatic operation stop, reset and interlock NC controls are invalid for
PLC control axes.
The same control can be realized using an interface dedicated for PLC control axes.
(4) There is no dedicated emergency stop. The emergency stop is valid in the same manner as the NC
control axis.

10.3.2 Detailed explanation

The flow of the process during PLC axis control execution is shown below.
(1) The user PLC sets the control data in the R register.
(2) The user PLC sets the PLC axis control information address in the R register.
(3) The user PLC turns the PLC axis control valid signal ON.
(4) The NC executes PLC axis control based on the control data.

During PLC axis control, the status, alarm details, machine position and remaining distance are set in the R
register.

Flow of PLC axis control for 1st PLC axis in single mode

NC User PLC

Set PLC axis control

R440 R1n
information address
(2)

R1n+0 (Not used) Set control data (1)

R1n+1 Status

R1n+2 Alarm details

R1n+3 Control signal

R1n+4 (Not used) (Note)

R1n+5 Operation mode

R1n+6
Feed rate
R1n+7

R1n+8
Movement data
R1n+9

R1n+10
Machine position
R1n+11

R1n+12
Remaining distance
R1n+13

(4) Execution of PLC axis PLC axis control (3)

control and setting of valid signal ON
status during process, etc.

(Note) Refer to "(4) Axis specification" in "10.3.4 Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data" for the
explanation of unused register No. R1n+4.

II - 263
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

10.3.3 PLC Interface

The PLC and NC interface is carried out by turning ON the PLC axis control valid signal or the PLC axis
control buffering mode valid signal after the PLC sets the control information data in the R register.
The operation is executed in single mode if the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, executed in buffering
mode if the PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal is ON.
Single mode and buffering mode cannot be operated simultaneously. An alarm (command mode overlap)
occurs when the valid signal of either mode is turned ON while the other mode is operating. Note that the
alarm does not cancel the operation in the first active mode.

Refer to "10.3.8 Single Mode" and "10.3.9 Buffering Mode" for the details of each mode. For the details of
alarms, refer to "(2) Alarm Details" in "10.3.4 Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data".

(1) PLC axis control valid signal

The PLC axis control process is executed in single mode with the control information data while the PLC
axis control valid signal is ON.
The reset state is activated when the PLC axis control valid signal is turned OFF. In this case, the axis
control is reset only once; when the ON signal is turned OFF.

PLC axis No.

Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis
PLC axis control valid Y770 Y771 Y772 Y773 Y774 Y775

(2) PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal

When the PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal is ON, the PLC axis control is executed upon the
control information data in buffering mode.
If the PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal is turned OFF, the axis control is reset. In this case,
the axis control is reset only once; when the ON signal is turned OFF.

Signal name Common for all axes

PLC axis control
Y723
buffering mode valid

(3) PLC axis control information address

The PLC axis control information address stores head R registers of the control information for each PLC
axis.

PLC axis No.

Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis
PLC axis control
R440 R441 R442 R443 R444 R445
information address

(Note 1) The following R registers can be used.

R8300 to R9799 (Area backed up by battery)
R9800 to R9899 (Area not backed up by battery)
(Note 2) If the setting value of R register is out of range or odd number, the target PLC axis turns invalid.
(Note 3) In the following explanations, the R register Nos. stored in the PLC axis control information
address are indicated as R1n for the 1st axis, R2n for the 2nd axis, R3n for the 3rd axis, and
R4n for the 4th axis, R5n for the 5th axis, R6n for the 6th axis.

II - 264
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

(4) PLC axis control buffering mode information address

The PLC axis control buffering mode information address stores head R registers of the buffering mode
control information for each PLC axis. (Note 1)

Signal name Common for all axes

PLC axis control buffering
R448
mode information address

(Note 1) The following R registers can be used.

R8300 to R9799 (Area backed up by battery)
R9800 to R9899 (Area not backed up by battery)
(Note 2) If the setting value of R register is out of range or odd number, the target PLC axis turns invalid.
(Note 3) In the following explanations, the R register Nos. stored in the PLC axis control buffering mode
information address are indicated with Rn. The PLC axis control information data arrangement
follows the arrangement of "R1n" and others, which is referred in "(3) PLC axis control
information address".

(5) PLC axis control information data

The control information data is stored in the R register value indicated by the PLC axis control
information address and the subsequent register values before starting the PLC axis control process.
The control information data arrangement is shown below.

PLC axis No.

Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis
(Not used) R1n + 0 R2n + 0 R3n + 0 R4n + 0 R5n + 0 R6n + 0
Status R1n + 1 R2n + 1 R3n + 1 R4n + 1 R5n + 1 R6n + 1
Alarm details R1n + 2 R2n + 2 R3n + 2 R4n + 2 R5n + 2 R6n + 2
Control signal R1n + 3 R2n + 3 R3n + 3 R4n + 3 R5n + 3 R6n + 3
Axis specification (Note) R1n + 4 R2n + 4 R3n + 4 R4n + 4 R5n + 4 R6n + 4
Operation mode R1n + 5 R2n + 5 R3n + 5 R4n + 5 R5n + 5 R6n + 5
Feedrate R1n + 6 R2n + 6 R3n + 6 R4n + 6 R5n + 6 R6n + 6
R1n + 7 R2n + 7 R3n + 7 R4n + 7 R5n + 7 R6n + 7
Movement data R1n + 8 R2n + 8 R3n + 8 R4n + 8 R5n + 8 R6n + 8
R1n + 9 R2n + 9 R3n + 9 R4n + 9 R5n + 9 R6n + 9
Machine position R1n + 10 R2n + 10 R3n + 10 R4n + 10 R5n + 10 R6n + 10
R1n + 11 R2n + 11 R3n + 11 R4n + 11 R5n + 11 R6n + 11
Remaining distance R1n + 12 R2n + 12 R3n + 12 R4n + 12 R5n + 12 R6n + 12
R1n + 13 R2n + 13 R3n + 13 R4n + 13 R5n + 13 R6n + 13
(Note) Axis specification is valid only for buffering mode.

II - 265
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

10.3.4 Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data

(1) Status
The status is set by the NC to indicate the execution status of this function instruction and the status of
the axis being controlled.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R1n + 1
(1st axis)

bit 0: busy Command processing bit 8 : oper Option error

1: den Axis movement completed 9:
2: move Axis moving A:
3: SA Servo ready B:
4: svon Servo ON C:
5: ZP Reference position reached D:
6: IMP In in-position E : ALM2 Axis in control alarm
7: WAIT Axis movement wait F : ALM1 Control information data
designation alarm

bit 0: busy Command processing

This turns ON when the command is being processed.
The next command is not received while this bit is ON.
The next command to be issued is received while this bit is OFF.

bit 1: den Axis movement completed

This bit turns ON when the initialization and commanded movement are completed.
This bit stays OFF during movement, even when an interlock is applied.
This bit turns ON at reset or servo OFF, or when PLC axis control valid is "0".

bit 2: move Axis moving

This bit turns ON when the machine is moving, and turns OFF when the machine is stopped.

bit 3: SA Servo ready

This bit turns ON when the servo is ready.
It turns OFF during emergency stops and servo alarms.

bit 4: svon Servo ON

This bit turns OFF when a servo OFF signal is output.
It also turns OFF during emergency stops and servo alarms.
Machine movement is possible when this signal is ON.

bit5: ZP Reference position reached

This bit turns ON when the reference position is reached after completion of a reference position
return.
It turns OFF when the machine moves.

II - 266
10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

bit 6: IMP In in-position

This bit turns ON when the PLC axis is in the in-position state, and turns OFF when not in the
in-position state.

bit7: WAIT Axis movement wait

This bit turns ON in the buffering mode when the axis movement of the previous block has been
completed, and the machine is in a WAIT status. It turns OFF when the previous block movement is
completed and the movement of the next block begins.

bit 8: oper Option error

This bit turns ON when an attempt is made to execute PLC axis control when there is no PLC axis
control option.

bit E: ALM2 Axis in control alarm

This bit turns ON when an alarm occurs (such as a servo alarm) during execution of axis control.
Axis control cannot be executed while this bit is ON.
After the cause of the alarm has been removed, turn the bit OFF by outputting a reset signal, setting
PLC axis control valid signal to 0, or turning the power OFF then ON again.

(Note) When alarms occur during axis control, the same alarms appear in the screen as for NC
control axes. Set the PLC 1st axis to "1", and the PLC 2nd axis to "2".

Example: When a servo alarm occurs for the PLC 1st axis
S03 Servo alarm 52 1

PLC axis

bit F: ALM:1 Control information data designation alarm

This bit turns ON when the designated details of the control information data are illegal. When an
alarm occurs for the simultaneous operation of buffering mode and single mode, the mode
designated later is not executed and the mode designated first continues processing.
PLC axis control is not executed when any other alarm occurs. Turn the bit OFF by correcting the
data, outputting a reset signal, or setting PLC axis control valid signal to 0.

(Note) The status of the PLC axis, to which the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, is automatically
updated.

II - 267
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

(2) Alarm details

The alarm Nos. of status ALM1 and ALM2 are set.

F 8 7 0
R1n + 2
(1st axis) ALM1 Alarm No. ALM2 Alarm No.

The details of each alarm No. are shown below.

ALM1 (Control information data designation alarm)
Alarm No. Details
Control signal illegal
01
(A signal other than a registered control signal has been commanded.)
02 Axis No. illegal
03 Operation mode illegal (0 to 6)
04 Movement data range exceeded -99999999 to +99999999
05
06
07
Reference position return not complete (absolute value command not
10
possible)
11
12 Command modes overlap (Note 1)

ALM2 (Axis in control alarm)

Alarm No. Details
Servo alarm (Alarm No. is displayed in the PLC axis monitor screen.
0
Refer to the Drive Unit Maintenance Manual for details.)
1 Z-phase not passed
2 Soft limit (+)
3 Soft limit (-)

(Note 1) This alarm occurs before the simultaneous operation of single mode and buffering mode.
(Note 2) The alarm details of the PLC axis, to which the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, are
automatically updated.

II - 268
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

(3) Control Signals (PLC axis control information data)

Control signals such as start, interlock, reset, axis removal and axis removal 2 are designated for the
PLC axis.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R1n + 3
(1st axis)
bit 0: Start bit 8 : Absolute value command
1: Interlock 9 :
2: Reset A :
3: Servo OFF B :
4: Axis removal C :
5: Axis removal 2 D :
6: E :
7: F :
bit 0: Start
Starting begins at the rising edge (OFF -> ON) of the start signal, based on the control information
data.
The axis does not move during interlock, servo OFF, axis removal and axis removal 2.
Movement starts after interlock, servo OFF, axis removal and axis removal 2 are canceled.
Start is invalid during resetting.
bit 1: Interlock
The moving PLC axis executes a deceleration stop when the interlock signal turns ON.
The stopped PLC axis will resume movement when the interlock signal turns OFF (is canceled).
bit 2: Reset
The PLC axis is reset when the reset signal turns ON.
Moving PLC axes will execute a deceleration stop.
Commands and controls are invalid during resetting.
If the reset signal turns ON during an alarm occurrence, the alarm will be cleared.
bit 3: Servo OFF
The PLC axis will execute a deceleration stop and its servo will turn OFF when the servo OFF signal
turns ON.
Whether the PLC axis movement is compensated during servo OFF can be selected in the basic
specification parameter "#1064 svof".
A servo ON status will result when the power is turned ON.
bit4: Axis removal
The axis will execute a deceleration stop, and a servo OFF status will result, when the axis removal
signal turns ON.
A servo ON status will result and the stopped PLC axis will resume movement when the axis
removal signal turns OFF (is canceled).
Axis removal is validated when either this signal or machining parameter and axis parameter "#8201
Axis Removal" is validated.
The reference position return will become incomplete when the axis is removed. Therefore, a
dog-type reference position return must be completed again when starting with an absolute value
command.

II - 269
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

bit 5: Axis removal 2

The axis will execute a deceleration stop, and a servo OFF/ready OFF status will result, when the
axis removal 2 signal turns ON.
A servo ON/ready ON status will result for the stopped PLC axis when the axis removal 2 signal
turns OFF (is canceled).
A restart must be executed to start the movement again.
Position control cannot be carried out while the axis removal 2 signal is ON. However, position
detection is possible so the position will not be lost.
bit 8: Absolute value command
Turn this bit ON when the movement data is commanded in absolute values.
When this bit is OFF, the commands will be processed as incremental value commands.

(4) Axis specification

PLC axis No. is designated.

R1n+4 Axis specification

(1st axis)
0: 1st axis
1: 2nd axis
2: 3rd axis
3: 4th axis
4: 5th axis
5: 6th axis

Only buffering mode allows the axis specification upon this data.
Single mode, which provides the PLC axis control valid signal for each axis, does not allow the axis
specification upon this data.

(5) Operation Mode

The operation mode for the PLC axis is designated.
For example, in the handle mode, R1n+5=6 (DATA) is set.

R1n + 5 Operation mode

(1st axis)
(Numeric value data)
0: Rapid traverse (G0)
1: Cutting feed (G1)
2: Jog feed (+)
3: Jog feed (-)
4: Reference position return (+)
5: Reference position return (-)
6: Handle feed

The axis movement will not be affected by changing the operation mode, even while the axis is moving.
The new operation mode is validated at the next start.

II - 270
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

(6) Feedrate
When the operation mode is cutting feed or jog feed (operation mode, register = 1 to 3), the PLC axis
feedrate is designated with a binary code.

R1n + 6
Feedrate
R1n + 7
(1st axis)

Designation value : 1 to 1000000 mm/min. (0.1 to 100000 inch/min.)

(Note 1) The speed unit is fixed regardless of the unit system set with the command unit.
(Note 2) The feedrate designated in the parameters is used for the rapid traverse mode and reference
position return mode.
(Note 3) The feedrate can be changed during axis movement. In that case, change using a direct
feedrate data (R1n + 6, 7) is possible.

(7) Movement Data

When the operation mode is rapid traverse or cutting feed, the movement data is designated with a
binary code.

R1n + 8
Movement data
R1n + 9
(1st axis)

Designation value : 0 to ±99999999

(Note 1) Refer to the explanations in "10.3.1 Specifications" "#1003 iunit" and "#1005 plcunit" for details
on the unit.
(Note 2) The movement data is classified as follows by the absolute value command flag (bit 8) of the
command signal.
Absolute value command flag = 0: Incremental value from the current position
Absolute value command flag = 1: Absolute value of the machine coordinate system
(Note 3) If the movement amount is changed during axis movement, the new movement amount will be
validated at the next start.

II - 271
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

(8) Machine Position

The machine position output to the machine system is expressed. The machine position becomes the
Rfp (reference position) when the reference position is reached.

R1n + 10
Machine position (input unit)
R1n + 11
(1st axis)

(Note 1) Refer to the explanations in "10.3.1 Specifications" "#1003 iunit" and "#1005 plcunit" for details
on the unit.
(Note 2) The alarm details of the PLC axis, to which the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, are
automatically updated.

(9) Remaining Distance

The remaining distance of the movement data output to the machine system is expressed.

R1n + 12
Remaining distance (input unit)
R1n + 13
(1st axis)

(Note 1) Refer to the explanations in "10.3.1 Specifications" "#1003 iunit" and "#1005 plcunit" for details
on the unit.
(Note 2) The alarm details of the PLC axis, to which the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, are
automatically updated.

II - 272
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

10.3.5 Timing Chart

(1) For rapid traverse and cutting feed mode

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Speed

(2) For jog feed mode

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Speed

(Note) The axis moves by jog feed only during start ON.

II - 273
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

(3) For reference position return feed mode

(a) Dog-type reference position return

PLC axis control

valid signal
Start

busy
den

move

ZP

Speed (G1 mode)

(Note 1) The axis moves by reference position return feed only during start ON. Turn the start OFF after
confirming that the reference position has been reached.
(Note 2) The first reference position return after the power is turned ON is always dog-type. All returns
after that are high-speed reference position returns.

(b) High-speed reference position return

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

ZP

Speed
(G1 mode)

II - 274
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

(4) For handle feed mode

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Handle

Speed

(Note) Handle feed is possible only during start ON.

(5) When the interlock signal is ON (= 1)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

Interlock

busy
den

move

Speed

II - 275
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

(6) When the reset signal is ON (= 1)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

Reset

busy
den

move

Speed

(7) When the servo OFF signal is ON (= 1)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

Servo OFF

busy
den

move
svon

Speed

II - 276
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

(8) When the PLC axis control valid signal is OFF (= 0)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Speed

II - 277
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

10.3.6 Reference Position Return Near Point Detection

Set the near point dog signal of the PLC axis reference position return for the following devices in the PLC.

Device No. Signal name

Y718 *PCD1 PLC axis near point detect 1st axis
Y719 *PCD2 PLC axis near point detect 2nd axis
Y71A *PCD3 PLC axis near point detect 3rd axis
Y71B *PCD4 PLC axis near point detect 4th axis
Y71C *PCD5 PLC axis near point detect 5th axis
Y71D *PCD6 PLC axis near point detect 6th axis

(Note) The responsiveness when the dog signal is set in PLC middle-speed processing is worse than when
set in PLC high-speed processing.

10.3.7 Handle Feed Axis Selection

The axis is designated for the following devices when handle feed is carried out with a PLC axis.

Device No. Signal name

Y720 HS1P PLC axis 1st handle valid
Y721 HS2P PLC axis 2nd handle valid
Y722 HS3P PLC axis 3rd handle valid

When Y720, Y721, Y722 are ON, each handle changes to PLC axis dedication.
YC40 to YC44, YC47, YC48 to YC4C, YC4F, YC50 to YC54 and YC57 used with the normal control device
are used to select each handle axis.
PLC axes are counted as PLC such as first axis and second axis. Therefore, if you will operate the first
handle in the first axis of PLC, turn ON Y720, YC40 to YC44 and YC47.

(Note) The handle feed magnification is also used for NC control axes.

II - 278
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

10.3.8 Single Mode

In the single mode, the command to PLC axis (control information data) is set in one block. Only one
command is used for the PLC axis control.

10.3.9 Buffering Mode

In the buffering mode, the PLC axis command (control information data) is commanded to several blocks.
This enables smooth changeover of commands.
Axis specifications can be set to each control information data. Up to three axes can be controlled in
sequence. (Refer to "G1→ G1→ G0→ G1 (two axes)" in "(2)Timing Chart".)

(1) Control information data

R1n+

Control
information
data A

The control data for the buffering mode is set

in three blocks.
R1n+1 The contents of each control information data
have the same configuration as the normal
Control control information data.
information When executing, the axis is moved in the
data B order that each control information is started.
When the movement is completed, the
movement for the next block starts.
(If the start signals are turned ON
simultaneously, the blocks are executed in the
R1n+2 order of A, B and C.)

Control
information
data C

(Note) Only one set of the buffering mode can be commanded. If two or more sets are commanded
simultaneously, the sets commanded later will cause an alarm.

II - 279
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

(2) Timing chart

G1→ G1→ G0→ G1 (same axis)

PLC axis control

valid signal
Start

busy

A den

move

wait

Start

busy

B den

move

wait

Start

busy

C den

move

wait

Speed

(Note) Change and start the data after the busy signal turns OFF.
Starting while the busy signal is ON will be ignored.

II - 280
10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

G1→ G1→ G0→ G1 (two axes)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Axis
number 0 1

Start

busy
A
den

move

wait

Axis
number 0

Start

busy
B
den

move

wait

Axis
number 1

Start

busy
C
den

move

wait

1st axis speed

2nd axis speed

II - 281
 10. PLC Help Function
10.3 PLC Axis Control

10.3.10 PLC Axis Monitor

The PLC axis operation status can be confirmed by checking the PLC section on the servo monitor.

10.3.11 Absolute Position Detection

The absolute position of the PLC axis can be detected in the same manner as the NC control axis.
The initial setting operations are the same as the NC control axis. However, the following restrictions apply to
the absolute position detection with the PLC axis.
(1) Automatic initialization is not possible.
(2) The verify function cannot be used.
(3) The near zero-point signal cannot be output.

10.3.12 Usage Example

The following shows an example of the PLC axis control ladder for the 1st PLC axis in single mode.

PLC axis control start signal

M8000
PLS M8001 PLC axis control start pulse

PLC axis control start pulse

M8001

MOV K1 R9803 Set PLC axis control signal

MOV D102 R9805 Set PLC axis control operation mode

DMOV K60000 R9806 Set PLC axis control feedrate

DMOV D103 R9808 Set PLC axis control movement data

MOV K9800 R440 Set PLC axis control information address

SET Y770 Turn PLC axis control valid signal ON

PLC axis control valid signal

Y770
MOV R9801 K4M8008 Retrieve status from PLC axis control information
busy(bit0)
M8008

RST Y770 Turn PLC axis control valid signal OFF

MOV K0 R9803 Reset PLC axis control signal

RST M8000 Turn PLC axis control start signal OFF

Control data Setting value

Control signal Start
Operation mode D102 value
Feedrate 60 mm/min
Movement data D103 value (Value multiplied by plcunit unit.)

II - 282
 10. PLC Help Function
10.4 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation

10.4 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation

External machine coordinate system compensation is executed by setting compensation data (absolute
amount) in the PLC file register (R) for each axis.
Thus, the compensation timing is when PLC rewrites file register (R) compensation data. Necessary
condition, timing, etc., are set by user PLC.
The interface between user PLC and CNC is shown below.

File register Details File register Details

R5700, 5701 $1 compensation data 1st axis R5716, R5717 $2 compensation data 1st axis
R5702, 5703 $1 compensation data 2nd axis R5718, R5719 $2 compensation data 2nd axis
R5704, 5705 $1 compensation data 3rd axis R5720, R5721 -
R5706, 5707 $1 compensation data 4th axis R5722, R5723 -
R5708, 5709 - R5724, R5725 -
R5710, 5711 - R5726, R5727 -
R5712, 5713 - R5728, R5729 -
R5714, 5715 - R5730, R5731 -
(Note) File resisters for $1 are used for models with no part systems.

Data in file registers (R5700 to R5731) is not backed up. If it must be backed up, use back-up file registers
(R8300 to R9799).
(Note) The maximum delay to compensation is (one user PLC scan + 15ms). However, smoothing time
constant and servo follow delay are not contained.

II - 283
 10. PLC Help Function
10.5 Alarm Message Display

10.5 Alarm Message Display

The details of the alarms which occur during the sequence (user PLC) process can be displayed on the
setting and display unit.
There are two types of alarm message, which can be selected with a parameter (described later).
Format Alarm message
Max. number of messages 1024 messages
Max. data length 46 bytes per message
Number of
4 messages
Display messages
F type / R type
Interface
(classification No. designated)
Available language 8 languages
Store method User PLC attached data

10.5.1 Interface
The alarm message display interface is available in the two types: F type in which temporary memory F is
used for message display request and R type in which file register (R) is used for message display request.
Either type is selected by using a parameter.

(1) F type interface

This interface applies to 1024 points of temporary memory F0 to F1023.
If temporary memory F is used as the alarm interface, do not use it for another purpose.

1 F0
0 F1 0th message of message table is displayed (dn1).
1 F2 2nd message of message table is displayed (dn2).
1 F3 3rd message of message table is displayed (dn3).
0 F4 5th message of message table is displayed (dn4).
1 F5

1 F1023

The highest priority is assigned to the F0 signal. The message corresponding to Fn set to 1 is fetched
from the message table and displayed in order starting at F0. If no messages are prepared or Fm greater
than the number of prepared messages is set to 1, the message "USER PLC ERROR m" is displayed.

II - 284
 10. PLC Help Function
10.5 Alarm Message Display

(2) R type interface

This interface applies to file registers R2556 to R2559. The numeric value (binary) contained in each of
the R registers indicates the position of the message to be displayed in the message table.
The message is cleared by setting the R register to 0.

Message processing module

1 R2556 1st message of message table is displayed (dn1).

0 R2557 20th message of message table is displayed (dn2)
20 R2558 5th message of message table is displayed (dn3)
5 R2559

The messages are displayed starting at the message corresponding to R2556 from top to bottom.
Since message display is cleared by setting the R register to 0, No. 0 in the table message cannot be
used in the R type.
If greater value than the number of prepared messages, m is set in the R register, the message "USER
PLC ERROR m" is displayed.

(3) Alarm classification display (Only for Alarm message type)

Classification No. can be displayed following the message to be displayed regardless of the F or R type.
(dn1 to dn4 in the figure of (1) and (2))
For example, one typical alarm message is prepared and classification No. can be used to indicate the
alarm source or cause.

(Example) When spindle alarm occurs, the message "SPINDLE ALARM" is displayed and the alarm
source or cause is indicated by the classification No.

SPINDLE ALARM 5 (Note 2)

This varies depending on the

alarm cause or source.

For the classification No., the contents of each data register specified in alarm message preparation are
displayed. Data register D0 cannot be specified.

(Note 2) The display of the classification No. by cause is updated when an alarm message display
changes. It is not updated if only the contents (dn1 to dn4) of the specified data register (Dn1 to
Dn4) change. If the contents of the specified data register are 0, no classification Nos. are
displayed.

II - 285
 10. PLC Help Function
10.5 Alarm Message Display

10.5.2 Screen Display

Screen display depends on the message type as described below.

(1) Alarm message type

Message length is up to 46 characters.
Alarm messages corresponding to four classification Nos. can be displayed.
Example of setting and display unit display

A maximum of four messages

can be displayed at a time

Maximum of 46 Classificatin No.

characters (Specified data register contents)

10.5.3 Message creation

(1) Alarm message type
Create messages by using PLC development software (GX Developer).
According to the description format, set the number of characters for one message and the number of
messages to be prepared, then enter message data.
The maximum length of an alarm message is 46 characters.
A maximum of 1024 alarm messages can be prepared. For details, refer to "III PERIPHERAL
DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT".

II - 286
 10. PLC Help Function
10.5 Alarm Message Display

10.5.4 Parameters

(1) PLC alarm message selection parameter

[Bit selection parameter screen]

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

# (6450) Data ( 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0)

Use No. 6450. 0: PLC alarm message display in user PLC

The operation is as the following depending on the bit state of the bit selection #6450.

Bit 6 = 0
The PLC alarm message in the user PLC is displayed as usual.
Bit 6 = 1
Do not set this value, which clears the display of PLC alarm message.

(2) Language selection parameter

There are two methods for the message data language selection. Method 2 (Method linked with
language selection on the setting and display screen) is recommended although both methods are
available.

(Method 1) Specify with 3 bits of bit selection parameter #6453 bit 0 to 2. (Language selection method
using PLC alone)
(Method 2) Specify with display language selection parameter (Base specifications parameter #1043)
(Method linked with language selection on the setting and display screen)

Each method has a different storage method. Refer to "III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT
ENVIRONMENT 4.4 File Name" for details.
The parameter specifications where method 1 (Language selection method using PLC alone) is applied
is shown below.

[Bit selection parameter screen]

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

# (6453) Data ( 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0)

Use No. 6453. Message language selection code

Bit
No. Notes
2 1 0
0 0 0 The language 1 is displayed.
0 0 1 The language 2 is displayed.
0 1 0 The language 3 is displayed.
0 1 1 The language 4 is displayed.
#6453
1 0 0 The language 5 is displayed.
1 0 1 The language 6 is displayed.
1 1 0 The language 7 is displayed.
1 1 1 The language 8 is displayed.

II - 287
 10. PLC Help Function
10.5 Alarm Message Display

(3) F or R type selection parameter

Set the parameter on the bit selection screen of PLC parameter (setup para).
[Bit selection parameter screen]

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

# (6450) Data ( 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 1)
0: Alarm message invalid.
1: Alarm message valid.
Use No. 6450.
0: F type interface
1: R type interface

[Reference] #6450 corresponds to the high-order byte of the file register R7824.

II - 288
 10. PLC Help Function
10.6 Operator Message Display

10.6 Operator Message Display

When a condition to inform the operator of a message occurs, an operator message can be displayed
independently of an alarm message.
A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed for the operator message on the alarm diagnosis screen. One
operator message can be displayed at a time.

10.6.1 Interface
An operator message is displayed by setting the No. of the operator message table to be displayed in file
register R2560. It is cleared by setting R2560 to 0. Thus, No. 0 of the operator message table cannot be
displayed.
Display example

Message processing module

n R2560

Message table
0 AAA ..... A NNN… ……N dn
1 BBB ..... B
2 CCC..... C
: Class number
:
Max. of 60 characters
n NNN..... N
n+1 ABC ..... Z
n+2 A12 ...... B Contents of specified data register.
(Data register D0 cannot be used.)

Max. of 60 characters

As with alarm messages, the contents of the data register specified for the class No. display in operator
message preparation are also displayed when creating operator message.

(Note 1) The class No. display is updated when the contents of file register R2560 change. It is not updated
if only the contents of the specified data register (Dn) change.
To change the class No. display only, the contents of R2560 must be cleared to 0. If the contents of
the specified data register are 0, no class Nos. are displayed.

II - 289
 10. PLC Help Function
10.6 Operator Message Display

10.6.2 Operator Message Preparation

Create messages by using PLC development software (GX Developer).
According to the description format, set the number of characters for one message and the number of
messages to be prepared, then prepare message data.
The maximum length of an operator message is 60 characters. A maximum of 512 operator messages can
be prepared.
However, the number of operator messages may be limited depending on the available memory capacity.
For details, refer to the section "III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT".

10.6.3 Operator Message Display Validity Parameter

Set the parameter on the bit selection screen of PLC parameter (setup para).
[Bit selection parameter screen]

76543210 bit
#(6450) Data (00000000)

0 : Operator message display invalid.

Use No. 6450 1 : Operator message display valid.

[Reference] #6450 corresponds to the high-order byte of file register R2924.

II - 290
 10. PLC Help Function
10.7 PLC Switches

10.7 PLC Switches

Similar function to machine operation switches can be provided by using the controller setting and display
unit. The number of switch points is 32. The switches can be turned ON and OFF from the PLC Switch screen
or the user PLC. The switch names can be given as desired.

10.7.1 Explanation of Screen

The screen is explained below.

Corresponding to Corresponding to Y680

Y680, Y6C0

For the switch name, a

string of up to 14
characters (2-byte code
character requires
Switch state 2-character space) can be
ON: *, OFF: Nothing displayed.

Corresponding to Y68F, Y6CF

Corresponding to Y68F

Switch No. movement cursor

Switch ON/OFF menu

II - 291
 10. PLC Help Function
10.7 PLC Switches

10.7.2 Explanation of Operation

To turn ON or OFF a switch, press the "setting valid" key, move to arbitrary No. with the cursor of #No., then
press "ON" or "OFF" menu key.
Depending on the state of the switch, its input device X is turned ON or OFF and accordingly the switch mark
indicates the ON or OFF state.

To turn block start interlock ON

Move to "#4" with the

cursor keys

Press the switch ON menu

key.

To display the switch validity state, etc., the switch name can be highlighted. To do this, turn ON or OFF
output device Y corresponding to the switch name.
Reversing signal Y can reverse the switch ON/OFF states. When reversing signal Y is activated, the ON/OFF
state of the corresponding switch and device X is reversed.
The corresponding table of the switch No., input device X, highlight output device Y, and reversing signal Y is
listed below:

Switch Corresponding device Corresponding device

Switch No.
No. Input X Output Y Reverse Y Input X Output Y Reverse Y
#1 X680 Y680 Y6C0 #17 X690 Y690 Y6D0
#2 X681 Y681 Y6C1 #18 X691 Y691 Y6D1
#3 X682 Y682 Y6C2 #19 X692 Y692 Y6D2
#4 X683 Y683 Y6C3 #20 X693 Y693 Y6D3
#5 X684 Y684 Y6C4 #21 X694 Y694 Y6D4
#6 X685 Y685 Y6C5 #22 X695 Y695 Y6D5
#7 X686 Y686 Y6C6 #23 X696 Y696 Y6D6
#8 X687 Y687 Y6C7 #24 X697 Y697 Y6D7
#9 X688 Y688 Y6C8 #25 X698 Y698 Y6D8
#10 X689 Y689 Y6C9 #26 X699 Y699 Y6D9
#11 X68A Y68A Y6CA #27 X69A Y69A Y6DA
#12 X68B Y68B Y6CB #28 X69B Y69B Y6DB
#13 X68C Y68C Y6CC #29 X69C Y69C Y6DC
#14 X68D Y68D Y6CD #30 X69D Y69D Y6DD
#15 X68E Y68E Y6CE #31 X69E Y69E Y6DE
#16 X68F Y68F Y6CF #32 X69F Y69F Y6DF
(Note 1) Input devices X hold the state even if power is turned OFF.

II - 292
 10. PLC Help Function
10.7 PLC Switches

10.7.3 Signal Processing

Character
background color
changes.

Switch input signal Status display signal

X680 Y680
X680 1 Y680 1
X681 Y681
0 0
X681 Y681
X682 Y682
0 0
X682 Y682
X683 X9 Y683
1 1
X683 Y683
X8
• •

0
• •

Y684
Validity

External switch

• When setting is done on the PLC switch screen, the input device X corresponding to the specified switch
No. is turned ON or OFF to switch over the switch state.
• When reversing signal Y is turned ON from the user PLC, its corresponding input device X and the switch
state are reversed. Reversing signal Y is reset immediately after the CNC reverses the input device X and
the switch state. It is turned ON by one pulse (scan) only also in the user PLC. In either case, when output
device Y is set to ON based on the input device X state, the corresponding switch name is highlighted.

II - 293
 10. PLC Help Function
10.7 PLC Switches

The following shows an example of operation of reversing signal Y from the user PLC.
(1) Two-point switch
(Example) When two opposite switches, chip conveyer manual and chip conveyer automatic, are
provided;

X68 X68 Y68

E F E
Chip conveyor manual

SET M1
X68E X68F M1 Y6CE
X68E reversing signal

RST M1

X68F Y68F
X68E
Chip conveyor automatic

SET M2
X68E X68F M2 Y6CF
X68F reversing signal

RST M2
X68E X68F
RST M1

RST M2

II - 294
10. PLC Help Function
10.7 PLC Switches

Switch 15 ON Switch 16 ON Switch 15 ON

(a) Y68E, M1 turns ON when switch 15
(X68E) turns ON and switch 16 (X68F)
X68E (a) turns OFF. [Default state]
(c) (e)
(b)
(b) If switch 16 (X68F) is turned ON in state
(d)
X68F (a), Y68E turns OFF, Y6CE turns ON,
(g)
and M1 turns OFF.

Y68E (c) Y6CE has turned ON, so X68E is reversed

(OFF).

(d) Y6CE turns OFF, and Y68F and M2 turns

Y68F
ON from the X68E OFF and X68F ON
state.

M1
(e) If switch 15 (X68E) is turned ON in state
(d), Y68F turns OFF, Y6CF turns ON,
and M2 turns OFF.
M2
(f) (f) Y6CF has turned ON, so X68F is reversed
(OFF).
Y6CE
(g) Y6CF turns OFF, and Y68E and M1 turns
One scan width ON again from the X68F OFF and X68E
Y6CF ON state.

II - 295
 10. PLC Help Function
10.7 PLC Switches

(2) Three-point switch

(Example) When three opposite switches 17, 18, and 19 are provided;

X690 X691 X692 Y690

SET M3

X690 X691 X692 M3 Y6D0

X690 turns OFF when
Y6D0 turns ON.
X690 X691 X692
RST M3

X690 X691 X692 Y691

SET M4

X690 X691 X692 M4 Y6D1

X691 turns OFF when
Y6D1 turns ON.
X690 X691 X692
RST M4

X690 X691 X692 Y692

SET M5

X690 X691 X692 M5 Y6D2

X692 turns OFF when
X690 X691 X692
Y6D2 turns ON.
RST M5
X690 X691 X692
RST M3

RST M4

RST M5

II - 296
 10. PLC Help Function
10.7 PLC Switches

(3) External switch and PLC switch

(Example 1) When an external optional stop switch (X14) is provided;

X14 X683
SET M8

RST M9
X14 X683
SET M9

RST M8

X14 X683 M8
PLS M6

RST M8
X14 X683 M9
PLS M7

RST M9

M6 Y6C3

M7

X683 Y683

Under sequence control in the above example, the switch marks on the PLC switch screen can be
operated from both external and PLC switches.

(Example 2) When an external switch (XC) that inhibits a PLC switch handle interrupt is provided;

X684 XC Y684

X684 XC
PLS M10

M10 Y6C4

Under sequence control in the above example, when the external switch (XC) is ON, the PLC switch
for a handle interrupt cannot be turned ON.

10.7.4 Switch name preparation

Prepare PLC switch names by using PLC development software (GX Developer).
According to the description format, set the number of characters for one switch name and the number of
switch names to be prepared, then prepare switch name data. The maximum length of a switch name is 14
characters. A maximum of 32 switch names can be prepared.
For details, refer to the section "III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT".

II - 297
 10. PLC Help Function
10.8 Load Meter Display

10.8 Load Meter Display

The load meter can be displayed by setting a value in the designated file register (R) with the ladder program.
The spindle load, Z axis load, etc. characters and scale are created with comments in the PLC development
software (GX Developer) message function.
For details, refer to the section "III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT".

10.8.1 Interface
If Spindle/Standby is not displayed, two load meters are displayed using the four-line area for the
spindle/standby and load meter. If Spindle/Standby is displayed, one load meter is displayed using the
two-line area for the load meter.

Maximum value:

SP Load Gray section

100%
Red section

Z Load
60%

R2520 value is displayed with Bar graph is displayed

five digits (binary 0 to 32767) according to R2521 value

R2522 value is displayed with Bar graph is displayed

five digits (binary 0 to 32767) according to R2523 value

R2521,R2523 F E D C OA 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
contents
(a) Length of entire bar graph
(Maximum value: 30 (decimal))
(b) Length of gray section of bar
Load meter display processing
valid The difference of (a) and (b) is the length
of the red section

II - 298
 10. PLC Help Function
10.8 Load Meter Display

Display example of setting and display unit

II - 299
 10. PLC Help Function
10.8 Load Meter Display

When the detail of R377 is "0" (detailed explanation is given later), the name of load meter is displayed by
describing the following messages
Line Message Detail
1 ;M,2,0, spindle load $1 First Name (Max. 10 characters)
2 ;M,2,0, (Not used)
3 ;M,2,0,******% Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
4 ;M,2,0, (Not used) For 1st
part
5 ;M,2,0, Z-axis load $1 Second Name (Max. 10 characters)
system
6 ;M,2,0, (Not used)
7 ;M,2,0,******% Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
8 ;M,2,0, (Not used)

9 ;M,2,0, spindle load $2 First Name (Max. 10 characters)

10 ;M,2,0, (Not used)
11 ;M,2,0,******% Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
12 ;M,2,0, (Not used) For 2nd
part
13 ;M,2,0, Z-axis load $2 Second Name (Max. 10 characters)
system
14 ;M,2,0, (Not used)
15 ;M,2,0,******% Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
16 ;M,2,0, (Not used)

17 ;M,2,0, spindle load $3 First Name (Max. 10 characters)

18 ;M,2,0, (Not used)
19 ;M,2,0,******% Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
20 ;M,2,0, (Not used) For 3rd
part
21 ;M,2,0, Z-axis load $3 Second Name (Max. 10 characters)
system
22 ;M,2,0, (Not used)
23 ;M,2,0,******% Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
24 ;M,2,0, (Not used)

25 ;M,2,0, spindle load $4 First Name (Max. 10 characters)

26 ;M,2,0, (Not used)
27 ;M,2,0,******% Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
28 ;M,2,0, (Not used) For 4th
part
29 ;M,2,0, Z-axis load $4 Second Name (Max. 10 characters)
system
30 ;M,2,0, (Not used)
31 ;M,2,0,******% Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
32 ;M,2,0, (Not used)

(Note 1) Setting of the character string displayed on the right of numerical value:
Of the data set as character string, only four characters, or 7th to 10th characters, are displayed
on the screen.
The 1st to 6th characters will be ignored.
To have "%" displayed next to a numerical value, character string must be set as "******%". (This
will be the same even if the 1st to 6th characters are the characters other than "*".)

II - 300
10. PLC Help Function
10.8 Load Meter Display

(Note 2) Designation of the name of load meter

Depending on the detail of R377 (0 to 10), the name of load meter can be changed.
In the following case, when "2" is set to R377, "spindle load 3" and "Z-axis load 3" will be
displayed.

;M,2,0, spindle load 1

;M,2,0,
;M,2,0,******%
;M,2,0,
;M,2,0, Z-axis load 1
;M,2,0,
;M,2,0,******%
;M,2,0,
;M,2,1, spindle load 2
;M,2,1,
;M,2,1,******%
;M,2,1,
;M,2,1, Z-axis load 2
;M,2,1,
;M,2,1,******%
;M,2,1,
;M,2,2, spindle load 3
;M,2,2,
;M,2,2,******%
;M,2,2,
;M,2,2, Z-axis load 3
;M,2,2,
;M,2,2,******%
;M,2,2,

II - 301
 11. Appendix
11.1 Example of Faulty Circuit

11. Appendix

11.1 Example of Faulty Circuit

Wrong configurations of circuits are shown below. Correct the circuitry, if any.

Faulty circuit producing errors Correct circuit

(1) Circuit containing OR

(2) Rounding circuit

X1 Y10 X1 Y10

X2 Y11 X2 X3 X4
Necessity
X3 X4 X1 X2 Y11

X3 X4

Whether or not the Y10 condition includes X3,

X4 and X2 is unknown.
(3) Modification of loopback circuit

0 0

0 1

(4) Presence of a contact before RET, FEND,

or MCR circuit

RET RET

II - 302
III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT
 1. Outline

1. Outline
This CNC supports the user PLC development environment which uses the Mitsubishi integrated FA software
MELSOFT Series (GX Developer), which is the PLC development tool for the Mitsubishi PLC MELSEC
Series.
This manual explains user PLC development environment using GX Developer, mainly usage specific to
MITSUBISHI CNC.

III - 1
 1. Outline
1.1 Software Configuration

1.1 Software Configuration

PLC data integrated

conversion tool CNVM7 - (1)

Program check tool

CHKM7 - (2)

Data conversion software

package GX Converter - (3)
RS-232C (For MELSEC)
PLC onboard PLC development tool
or
GX Developer - (4)
QnA simulator Ethernet (For MELSEC)
IBM PC/AT *1
CNC controller Compatible PC
*1: IBM PC/AT compatible personal computer with Windows OS

(1) CNVM7 (PLC data integrated conversion tool)

This tool converts programs or contact and coil comment data developed for older models into
instructions and devices for arbitrary models, and outputs them with a ladder list format. By converting
the data converted with this tool using GX Converter, the sequence programs or contact and coil
comment data developed for older models can be used by the GX Developer for this CNC.

(2) CHKM7 (program check tool)

This tool checks whether the sequence program created with GX Developer is described in an instruction
format complying with the MITSUBISHI CNC specifications. Similar checks are carried out when writing
from the GX Developer or PLC onboard to the CNC controller.
This tool can be used to check the data before writing to the CNC controller. This is used to check the
sequence programs before writing them to the CNC controller with the IC Card.

(3) GX Converter (data conversion software package)

The GX Converter is a tool that carries out file conversion of GX Developer data files and the following:
GX Converter is an add-on tool of GX Developer and is started from the GX Developer menu.
• Ladder list files and comment text files output by the CLST6L
• Alarms and operator messages created by the text editor
• Data files of commercially available spreadsheet software, word processors and editors
This tool is a software package for various MELSEC support. GX Converter needs to be used with the
versions following GX Developer Version 3 (SW3D5C-GPPW). Refer to the enclosed Operating Manual
for function details.

(4) GX Developer (PLC development software package)

GX Developer is a programming software package (model name: SW8D5C-GPPW) designed for
Mitsubishi Electric's MELSEC series programmable logic controllers. By performing operations similar to
those of the MELSEC series, you can develop user PLC ladders for the MITSUBISHI CNC series. Note
that some functions specific to the "MELSEC series" may not be unavailable.
For MITSUBISHI CNC series sequence program development, we recommend you to use GX Developer
Version 4 (SW4D5C-GPPW) or later. For function details, refer to the Operating Manual supplied.

III - 2
 1. Outline
1.2 Operating Environment

1.2 Operating Environment

The tools that make up the development environment can be used with the personal computer that satisfies
the following operating environment of GX Developer.
The following are the specifications of the "GX Developer Version 8" operating environment. For the
specifications of different versions, check them in the respective Operating Manuals (startup).

Item Description
Computer unit PC-9800 Series *1, or personal computer running Windows
Performance CPU Refer to the following "Performance required for basic software and
Required personal computer"
memory
Hard disk area 150MB or more
Disk drive CD-ROM disk drive
3.5 inch floppy disk drive *2
Display 800 × 600 pixel or more resolution
Communication interface RS-232C port
Basic software *3 Microsoft Windows 95 operating system
Microsoft Windows 98 operating system
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition operating system
Microsoft WindowsNT Workstation 4.0 operating system
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system
Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition operating system

*1: The PC-9800 Series (excluding PC98-NX) is not compatible with Windows Me, Windows 2000
Professional, Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Edition.
*2: Required for GX Developer Version 6 or earlier (to provide protection by FLD).
*3: When the basic software of the language except for English, contact MITSUBISHI.

Performance required for basic software and personal computer

Performance required for personal computer
Basic software
CPU Required memory
Windows 95 (Service Pack 1 or higher) Pentium 133MHz or faster 32MB or more
Windows 98 Pentium 133MHz or faster 32MB or more
Windows Me Pentium 150MHz or faster 32MB or more
WindowsNT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or
Pentium 133MHz or faster 32MB or more
higher)
Windows 2000 Professional Pentium 133MHz or faster 64MB or more
"XP compatibility mode"
Windows XP Professional Pentium 300MHz or faster 128MB or more
and "Fast User
Switching" are not
Windows XP Home Edition supported. Pentium 300MHz or faster 128MB or more

III - 3
 2. GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC
2.1 Function Support Conditions (General Section)

2. GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC

The GX Developer functions explained here are those supported by this CNC in the "offline functions"
operated with the GX Developer independently, and the "online functions" carried out in connection with the
CNC controller.
Refer to the enclosed Operating Manual for function details.

2.1 Function Support Conditions (General Section)

The GX Developer outline functions supported by this CNC are listed below.
The mark indicates functions that can be used with this CNC. An r mark indicates that the function
cannot be used because it is related to "MELSEC Series" characteristic functions. The function details during
on-line are described in the next section.

List of general section functions (1) : Possible, : Limitedly possible, U : Not possible
Program type Support Remarks
Ladder
List
SFC U
MELSAP-L U
Function block U

Function Menu Sub menu Support Remarks

Project New project
Open project
Close project
Save
Save as
Delete project
Verify
Copy
Edit Data New
Copy
Delete
Rename
Change PLC type Fixed Q4A
Import file Import from GPPQ format file
Import from GPPA format file U
Import from FXGP(WIN) format file U
Import from FXGP(DOS) format file U
Import from TEXT ,CSV format file
Export file Export to GPPQ format files
Export to GPPA format files U
Export to FXGP(WIN) format file U
Export to FXGP(DOS) format file U
Export to TEXT ,CSV format file

III - 4
 2. GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC
2.1 Function Support Conditions (General Section)

List of general section functions (2) : Possible, : Limitedly possible, U : Not possible
Function Menu Sub menu Support Remarks
(Project) Macro Registration macros
Macro utilize
Delete macros
Macro reference path
Printer setup
Print
Start new GX Developer
session
Exit GX Developer
Edit Undo
Restore after ladder
conversion
Cut
Copy
Paste
Insert line
Delete line
Insert row
Delete row
Insert NOP batch
Delete NOP batch
Draw line
Delete line
Change TC setting
Read mode
Write mode
Ladder symbol Open contact
Close contact
Open branch
Close branch
Coil
Application instruction
Vertical line
Horizontal line
Delete vertical line
Delete horizontal line
Rising pulse
Falling pulse
When
Rising pulse open branch expanding
Falling pulse close branch PLC
Invert operation results instruction
mode
Convert operation results to rising pulse
Convert operation results to falling pulse
Documentation Comment
Statement
Note
Statement/Note block edit

III - 5
 2. GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC
2.1 Function Support Conditions (General Section)

List of general section functions (3) : Possible, : Limitedly possible, U : Not possible
Function Menu Sub menu Support Remarks
Find/Replace Find device
Find instruction
Find step no.
Find character string
Find contact or coil
Replace device
Replace instruction
Change open/close contact
Replace character string
Change module start address
Replace statement/note type
Cross reference list
List of used devices
Convert Convert
Convert (All programs being
edited)
Convert (Online change) U
View Comment
Statement
Note
Alias
Macro instruction format display
Comment format 4*8 characters
3*5 characters
Alias format display Replace device name and display
Arrange with device and display
Toolbar
Status bar
Zoom 50%
75%
100%
150%
Specify
Auto
Project data list
Instruction list
Set the contact 9 contacts
11 contacts
Elapsed time U
Online Refer to "List of on-line section Refer to "2.2 Function Support
functions" Conditions (Online Section)"
Diagnostics PLC diagnostics U
MELSECNET(II)/10/H
U
diagnostics
Ethernet diagnostics U
CC-Link/CC-Link/LT U
System monitor U
Online module change U

III - 6
 2. GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC
2.1 Function Support Conditions (General Section)

List of general section functions (4) : Possible, : Limitedly possible, U : Not possible
Function Menu Sub menu Support Remarks
Tools Check program
Merge data
Check parameter U
Transfer ROM Read U
Write U
Verify U
Write to file U
Delete unused comments
Clear all parameters U
IC memory card Read IC memory card U
Write IC memory card U
Read image data U
Write image data U
Start ladder logic test U
Set TEL data Connection U
Disconnection U
TEL data U
AT command U
Call book U
Intelligent function utility Utility list U
Customize keys
Change display color
Options Limited
partly
Create start-up setting file
Window Cascade
Tile vertically
Tile horizontally
Arrange icons
Close all windows
Help CPU error U
Special relay/register U
Key operation list
Product information
Connect to MELFANSweb

III - 7
 2. GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC
2.2 Function Support Conditions (Online Section)

2.2 Function Support Conditions (Online Section)

The GX Developer functions supported by this CNC are listed below.
The mark indicates functions that can be used currently with this CNC. An r mark indicates that the
function cannot be used because it is related to "MELSEC Series" characteristic functions.

List of online section functions (1) : Possible, : Limitedly possible, U : Not possible
Menu Sub menu Detailed function Support Remarks
Transfer PC side I/F
setup PLC side I/F Only for
QnACPU
Other station U
Network route U
Co-existence network route U
Read from Target memory
PLC Title
File selection
Device data U
Program U
Common U
Local U
Refresh view
Free space volume
Create title U
Write to PLC Target memory
Title
File selection
Device data U
Program U
Common U
Local U
Free space volume
Create title U
Verify with Target memory
PLC Title
File selection
Program U
Refresh view
Free space volume
Create title U
Write to PLC Write the program memory to
U
(Flash ROM) ROM
Write to PLC (Flash ROM) U
Delete PLC Target memory
data Title
File selection
Refresh view
Free space volume
Create title U
Change PLC
data U
attributes
PLC user Read PLC user data U
data Write PLC user data U
Delete PLC user data U

III - 8
 2. GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC
2.2 Function Support Conditions (Online Section)

List of online section functions (2) : Possible, : Limitedly possible, U : Not possible
Menu Sub menu Detailed function Support Remarks
Monitor Monitor mode/Start/Stop ON/OFF state
Scan time display
CPU state display
Monitor [Write mode] U
Start monitor [All windows]
Stop monitor [All windows]
Change current value monitor
[Decimal]
Change current value monitor
[Hexadecimal]
Local device monitor U
Device batch Device
Connect
Coil
Setting value
Current value
Monitor format : Bit & word
Monitor format : Bit
Monitor format : word
Display : 16bit integer
Display : 32bit integer
Display : Real number U
Display : ASCII character U
Value : DEC
Value : HEX
T/C set value Reference program
Device test
Entry data monitor Device
ON/OFF/Current
Setting value
Connect
Coil
Display : 16bit integer
Display : 32bit integer
Display : Real number U
Display : ASCII character U
Value : DEC
Value : HEX
T/C setting value, Local label
Reference program
Device test
Buffer memory batch U
Monitor condition setup Device
Step No.
Monitor stop condition setup Device
Step No.
Program monitor list U
Interrupt program monitor list U
Scan time measurement U
Entry ladder monitor
Delete all entry ladder

III - 9
 2. GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC
2.2 Function Support Conditions (Online Section)

List of online section functions (3) : Possible, : Limitedly possible, U : Not possible
Menu Sub menu Detailed function Support Remarks
Debug Device test FORCE ON
FORCE OFF
Toggle force
Device
Forced input output registration/
U
cancellation
Buffer memory U
Debug U
Skip execution U
Partial execution U
Step execution U
Trace Sampling trace Wizard setting/execution
Individual setting/execution
Trace data storage destination U Cannot
select
No. of traces Setting
range:
1 to 8192
Trigger position
Trace additional information U
Trace point setup Interval,
step No.
not
possible
Trigger point setup STRA
instruction,
step No.
not
possible
Device point setup Limit to
device
type/No. of
points
Trace operation
Trace status
Trace result
CSV file creation
Trace settings file operation
Trace settings PLC operation
Data retention at power OFF U
Remote PLC status
operation RUN
STOP
PAUSE U
Latch clear U
STEP-RUN U
Reset U
Operation during RUN U
Specify execution destination U

III - 10
2. GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC
2.2 Function Support Conditions (Online Section)

Menu Sub menu Detailed function Support Remarks

Keyword Register
setup
Delete
Disable
Clear PLC
U
memory
Format PLC Target memory
memory Format Type U
Arrange PLC
U
memory
Set time YY MM DD Hr. Min. Sec.
Day of week U
Specify execution destination U

III - 11
 3. Preparation
3.1 Installing the Tools

3. Preparation

3.1 Installing the Tools

In this CNC's PLC development environment, it is assumed that the various tools are used with an IBM
PC/AT compatible personal computer. Prepare each tool so that it is IBM PC/AT compatible personal
computer.
Refer to the enclosed Operating Manual (Startup) and Operating Manual for the setup and start procedures
of each tool.

3.2 Preparation for Serial (RS-232C) Communication

3.2.1 Connecting the Serial Cable
The serial port connected with the CNC controller differs depending on the model. Also, it may require a
special branch cable. Refer to the connection manual of that model.

Between the IBM PC/AT compatible personal computer that uses GX Developer and the CNC controller, use
an RS-232C serial cable equivalent to the one shown below in the RS-232C connection diagram.

[Note] The cables given in the connection diagrams of the GX Developer Operating Manual cannot be used.

Personal
NC side
computer side
(25-pin D-SUB)
(9-pin D-SUB)
Cable
Pin Pin
Signal name connection and Signal name
No. No.
signal direction
CD 8 1 DC
SD 2 2 RD
RD 3 3 SD
DR (DSR) 6 4 ER (DTR)
SG 7 5 SG
ER (DTR) 20 6 DR (DSR)
CS (CTS) 5 7 RS (RTS)
RS (RTS) 4 8 CS (CTS)
22 9 RI
* The above shows a general RS-CS method connection format.
* The pin Nos. of dotted lines are not used.

III - 12
 3. Preparation
3.2 Preparation for Serial (RS-232C) Communication

3.2.2 Setting the Connection Target

The connection target must be specified before performing online operations from GX Developer to the CNC
controller.
Perform the following operation with GX Developer to start the setting screen.
[Online]→[Connection Setup]
Set the following items only. Leave the other items unchanged from the initial values.

(1) Personal computer side

Interface : [Serial]
Serial port name : [COM1] or [COM2]
Baudrate : [19.2Kbps]

(2) PLC side

Interface : [CPU unit]

■SW7D5-GPPW setting screen

III - 13
 3. Preparation
3.3 Preparation for Ethernet Communication

3.3 Preparation for Ethernet Communication

Procedures for preparing for Ethernet communication is as follows. Refer to each respective instruction
manual for details.
(1) Confirm IP address of the CNC unit.
(2) Set IP address for the personal computer side.
(3) Connect the Ethernet cable.
(4) Set the connection target of GX Developer.

3.3.1 Confirming IP Address of the CNC Unit

Confirm the IP address set in the CNC unit. IP address is set in the parameters below.

Base common Item Details Setting

parameter example
#1926 Global IP address IP address of the CNC unit looking 192.168.200.1
from outside
#1927 Global Subnet mask Subnet mask of #1926 255.255.255.0

Example given here is the case where "192.168.200.1" is set as the initial value after SRAM clear.

3.3.2 Setting IP Address for the Personal Computer Side

For the personal computer for which GX Developer is available, IP address has to be set within the same
subnet mask as NC unit.
In the case of section 3.3.1, set the address other than "192.168.200.1", using from "192.168.200.0" to
"192.168.200.255".
Note that when other CNC and devices are connected on the same network, be careful not to duplicate the
address with other CNC and devices.

3.3.3 Connecting the Ethernet Cable

Connect the Ethernet cable to the connector LAN1 (or LAN) of the control unit below. If the connector is
already connected, connect the cable to the HUB of the connection target, etc.

700 Series 70 Series

Control unit Control unit
back side back side

LAN1

LAN

III - 14
 3. Preparation
3.3 Preparation for Ethernet Communication

3.3.4 Setting the Connection Target

The connection target must be specified before performing online operations from GX Developer to the CNC
controller.
The following two connection methods are supported when connecting with Ethernet. Use these accordingly.

• TCP protocol: Connection type used with typical networks. The communication amount is high so the
speed is not as fast, but the reliability is high. (A resend request is made when there is a
lapse in communication.)
• UDP protocol: Connection-less type suitable for closed networks such as small-scale LAN. The
reliability is not as high, but the speed is fast. (A resend request is not made when there
is a lapse in communication.)

Perform the following operation with GX Developer to start the setting screen.
[Online]→[Transfer Setup]
Set the following items in order. Leave the other items unchanged from the initial values.
Normally use connection setting example 1 (using TCP protocol) for setting.

Connection protocol Connection Connection Connection

setting example 1 setting example 2 setting example 3
Setting item
TCP UDP UDP
PC side I/F Interface Ethernet
Protocol TCP UDP None
PLC side I/F Interface Ethernet unit
Unit type name QJ71E71 AJ71QE71
Station No. 1
IP address Set CNC controller's IP address
Routing parameter conversion Automatic conversion method
method
Other station Interface Other station (same network)

■SW7D5-GPPW setting screen

III - 15
 4. Common Items
4.1 Precautions before Development

4. Common Items

4.1 Precautions Before Development

Pay careful attention to the following items before developing sequence programs using the GX Developer.

! CAUTION Always observe the following precautions during

work.

(1) PLC Type Selection

The PLC type must be set when newly creating programs, etc. Select the following CPU type when
requested to select the PLC type by the GX Developer. An error will occur during transfer of the
sequence program to the CNC controller if another PLC type is selected.

! CAUTION Select "Q4A" for CPU type.

(2) Device Setting

The number of device points must always be set when developing the sequence program for the CNC
controller. The sequence program will not be transferred to the CNC controller correctly if it is developed
with the setting values given later.

! CAUTION Always set the number of devices.

(3) PLC Instructions

MELSEC-specific PLC instructions cannot be used in the sequence program development for the CNC
controller. Only PLC instructions and formats in "II PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION" can be used.
The format, etc., are changed with some instructions. Refer to "Appendix 1.3 Instructions with Changed
Designation Format".

! CAUTION MELSEC-specific PLC instructions cannot be used.

(4) Saving the sequence program

The sequence program transferred from the GX Developer or PLC onboard to the CNC controller is
stored in the temporary memory. The temporary memory is erased when the power is turned OFF. (This
is because the sequence program stored in the internal flash ROM is validated when the power is turned
ON again.)
Thus, if the sequence program is to be held even when the power is turned ON again, always write it to
the internal flash ROM.

! CAUTION Sequence programs that are not saved in the internal

flash ROM are not held when the power is turned
OFF.

III - 16
 4. Common Items
4.2 NC-related Parameters

4.2 NC-related Parameters

Each model has bit selection parameters related to GX Developer. If an appropriate value is not set in the
parameters, an error will occur in communication with GX Developer.

(1) GX Developer serial communication enabled

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
# (6451) Data (0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0)

Use No. 6451. 0 : GPP communication disabled

1 : GPP communication enabled

[Reference] #6451 corresponds to the low side of the file register R7825.

Bit 5 = 0
The serial port is not used for communication with GX Developer.
(When the serial port is used for another function)

Bit 5 = 1
The serial port is used for communication with GX Developer.

III - 17
 4. Common Items
4.3 PLC Data Storage Areas

4.3 PLC Data Storage Areas

The M700 Series CNC stores the PLC data in the internal flash ROM (hereinafter, internal F-ROM).
The following shows the storage area structure.

Standard

Control information

Sequence program 256Kbyte

storage area

512Kbyte Control information

Storage area for

files other than
256Kbyte
sequence programs
Messages, device
comments, etc.

The PLC data transferred from GX Developer or PLC onboard is executed with the following path.

(1) At power ON
The data is transferred from the internal F-ROM to the PLC processor execution area via the temporary
memory D-RAM, and is then executed.

Temporary memory PLC processor

area D-RAM execution area

Internal PLC RUN

F-ROM

(2) During PLC development

The PLC data transferred from the GX Developer or PLC onboard is stored in the volatile RAM
(hereinafter, D-RAM) for the temporary memory. The sequence program is transferred to the PLC
processor execution area before PLC execution, and is then executed.
The D-RAM in the temporary memory is not held when the power is turned OFF. If the data needs to be
held even after the power is turned OFF, it must be stored in the internal F-ROM.

PLC onboard

Conversion

Temporary memory PLC processor

GX Developer area D-RAM execution area
Transfer
Manual save

Internal PLC RUN

F-ROM

III - 18
 4. Common Items
4.3 PLC Data Storage Areas

(3) Areas that can be selected on GX Developer

The following table indicates the storage areas that can be selected for the online functions of GX
Developer.
Selectable storage area
Function
[Target memory] Storage area (M700 Series)
Write to PLC, Delete PLC data, Internal RAM/device memory Temporary memory D-RAM
Format PLC memory
Read from PLC, Verify PLC Internal RAM/device memory Temporary memory D-RAM
IC memory card A (ROM) Internal F-ROM
Read from PLC IC memory card A (RAM) Execution area
(Checking the execution area size)

(4) Display of storage area on GX Developer

Any of the storage areas that can be selected for the online functions of GX Developer can be specified
as a [Target memory] item on the corresponding operation screen.
Also, pressing the [Title] button displays the comment of that storage area if PLC data exists. It is not
displayed if the storage memory is not fitted or the data does not exist.

The free space in the selected area will appear when the "Free space volume" button is pressed.
"Largest continuous volume" and "Total free space volume" have the following meanings.
"Largest continuous volume" : Free space in sequence program storage area
"Total free space volume" : Free space in sequence program storage area + other file storage
areas
"Total free space volume" - "Largest continuous volume":
Free space in file storage areas other than sequence program
storage area

III - 19
4. Common Items
4.3 PLC Data Storage Areas

The following table indicates the relationships between the [Target memory] items and storage areas.

Meaning in
Target memory Title indication Free area indication
M700 series
Largest continuous volume:
Free space in sequence
Internal RAM/device Temporary memory TEMPORARY STORAGE
program storage area
memory D-RAM AREA
Total free space volume:
Total free space
IC memory card A Execution area size
LAD.EXEC.SIZE AREA Not used (insignificant value)
(RAM) confirmation
Largest continuous volume:
Free space in sequence
IC memory card A
Internal F-ROM FLASH ROM AREA program storage area
(RAM)
Total free space volume:
Total free space
IC memory card B Not used
None
(RAM) (cannot be selected)
IC memory card B Not used
None
(RAM) (cannot be selected)

III - 20
 4. Common Items
4.4 File Name

4.4 File Name

The PLC related data, such as the sequence programs and message data, are controlled and stored with the
following categories in this CNC.
Therefore, they are also developed in the same categories.
! CAUTION
! If the data transferred does not follow the file name rule, the NC will mistake it for
another data, resulting in unexpected operation, e.g. sequence program erasure.

4.4.1 File Name Rule for Sequence Program, Parameter, and Device Comment

File name rule (Sequence program, parameter, device comment)

ｙｘｘｘｘｘｘｘ . Ｗｘｘ
Extensions (expresses file classification):
Automatically attached, depending on GX Developer or PLC
onboard

Arbitrary character string

Reserved character string or arbitrary character

When storing data with GX Developer or PLC onboard, the data type is identified with the file name. Up to
8 one-byte alphanumeric characters (excluding the extension), hyphen (-) and underline (_) can be used
to the file name. The extension is automatically attached and expresses classification of the file.
Note that the first character may be reserved for expressing the data type.

[Caution] Reserved file names

The file name is reserved on the NC side if the following head character is used.
• "Ｈ"
Do not use file name in combination with this head character.

List of sequence program, parameter, and device comment

Storage
Data class Data type File name Remarks
quantity
H + [Arbitrary character
High-speed process Execution type (scan) *1
string]. W P G
[Arbitrary character
Main process Execution type (scan) *1
Sequence string].WPG Total 32
1
program [Arbitrary character programs Execution type
Initialization process
string].WPG (initialization) *1
[Arbitrary character Execution type
Standby process
string].WPG (standby/low-speed) *1
PLC parameters
2 Parameter PARAM.WPA (fixed) 1 parameter
Network parameters
Common for all sequence
Common comment COMMENT.WCD (fixed)
Total 10 programs
3 Device comment
Comment for each [Arbitrary character comments For sequence programs
program string].WCD having same name
"Arbitrary character string" means a character string consisted of up to 8 one-byte alphanumeric characters, hyphen (-) and underline (_).
*1: The execution type is the sequence program operation type designated with the parameters.

III - 21
 4. Common Items
4.4 File Name

4.4.2 File Name Rule for Message Data

There are two methods for the message data language selection. Method 2 (Method linked with language
selection on the setting and display screen) is recommended although both methods are available.

(Method 1) Specify with 3 bits of bit selection parameter #6453 bit 0 to 2. (Language selection method
using PLC alone)
(Method 2) Specify with display language selection parameter. (Base specifications parameter #1043)
(Method linked with language selection on the setting and display screen)

File name rule (Message data)

(Method 1) M N X x x x x x . W P G
Arbitrary character string 6 characters
(1st character has to be other than number)
Number (1 digit)
Reserved character

(Method 2) M N N x x x x x . W P G
Arbitrary character string 5 characters
Number (2 digits)
Reserved character

Alphanumeric characters, hyphen (-) and underline (_) can be used for the arbitrary character string. The
extension is automatically attached and expresses classification of the file.
Note that the first character may be reserved for expressing the data type.

Specify which method is valid with the name of the message file to be stored.
If the file with condition 1 and 2 exist together, the method 1 will be valid.

(Condition 1) Method 1 is valid when the first two characters of the file name is "M + 1-digit number".
(Condition 2) Method 2 is valid when the first three characters of the file name is "M + 2-digit number"

(1) Method 1
Language is specified with bit 3 of the bit selection parameter #6453 bit 0 to 2, and the No. corresponds
to the No. used in message file name.
List of message file name (Method 1)
Data Bit selection Storage
parameter Data type File name Remarks
class #6453 bit0-2 quantity
0 1st language M1Xxxxxx.WPG
It is not possible to store
1 2nd language M2Xxxxxx.WPG
multiple files having the same
2 3rd language M3Xxxxxx.WPG
language Nos. even if their
Message 3 4th language M4Xxxxxx.WPG One for each
names are different.
(Method 1) 4 5th language M5Xxxxxx.WPG language A message confirming
5 6th language M6Xxxxxx.WPG overwriting the same language
6 7th language M7Xxxxxx.WPG No. is displayed.
7 8th language M8Xxxxxx.WPG

* "X xxxxx" part of a file name consists of up to 6 arbitrary alphanumerical characters including hyphen (-) and
underline (_). Note that however, the third character "X" has to be other than numerical character. (To avoid
confusion with method 2.)

III - 22
 4. Common Items
4.4 File Name

(2) Method 2
Language is specified with the language parameter #1043 on the setting and display screen, and the No.
corresponds to the 2-digit No. used in message file name.
When no corresponding message file for a certain language parameter is stored, an English language
display file (M00xxxxx.WPG) is referred to as an alternative file. Thus, message data file for the English
language display must be stored.

List of message file name (Method 2)

Language parameter
Data Storage
(Base specifications File name Remarks
class quantity
parameter #1043)
0 (English) [mandatory] M00xxxxx.WPG
1 (Japanese) M01xxxxx.WPG
11 (German) M11xxxxx.WPG
When no corresponding file for a certain
12 (French) M12xxxxx.WPG language parameter is stored, an English
13 (Italian) M13xxxxx.WPG language display file (M00xxxxx.WPG), if
14 (Spanish) M14xxxxx.WPG
One for each stored, is referred to as an alternative file.
Message 15 (Chinese -traditional-) M15xxxxx.WPG language
16 (Korean) M16xxxxx.WPG It is not possible to store multiple files having the
(Method 2) Total 8
17 (Portuguese) M17xxxxx.WPG same language Nos. even if their names
18 (Dutch) M18xxxxx.WPG languages ("xxxxx" part) are different. A message
confirming overwriting the same language No. is
19 (Swedish) M19xxxxx.WPG displayed.
20 (Hungarian) M20xxxxx.WPG
21 (Polish) M21xxxxx.WPG
22 (Chinese -simplified-) M22xxxxx.WPG
Other than above; If the message for a corresponding No. exists, it is displayed.
up to 99 If not, an English file (M00xxxxx.WPG) is displayed.
Other than above;
An English file (M00xxxxx.WPG) is displayed.
above 100

(3) Precautions
• Even if the file is made with the conventional specifications method 1, when the third character of the
file name is a numerical character, it may be identified as method 2 (language selection parameter.
(Example) "M1720V02.WPG", "M750MESS.WPG", "M65S-MES.WPG", etc.

• Files having the same No. and different arbitrary names are identified as the same files and will be
overwritten.
(Example) "M1TEST.WPG" and "M1JAPAN.WPG", "M00ENG01.WPG" and "M00ENG02.WPG", etc.

• Files having the same arbitrary name ("xxxxx" part) and different method types are not identified as the
same files and will not be overwritten. If method 1 and 2 exist together, method 1 will be valid.
(Example) "M1TEST.WPG" and "M01TEST.WPG", "M1JAPAN.WPG" and "M01JAPAN.WPG", etc.

• Files that are not applied to condition 1 and 2 are not identified as a message file. They are identified as
a sequence program (ladder), instead.
(Example) "M0TEST.WPG", "M9MESS.WPG", "M0-1TEST.WPG", "M-01JPN.WPG",
"MM00ENG.WPG", etc.

III - 23
 4. Common Items
4.5 Creating a Project

4.5 Creating a Project

GX Developer treats PLC related data such as sequence program and message data collectively as a
"project".
In this section, the method of creating a project is explained.

4.5.1 Project
Project is a collection of sequence program, device comment, PLC message data and parameters. Usually,
data is controlled by the project level per machine type or version.

Project

Sequence program

Sequence program

PLC message data

PLC message data

Device comment

Device comment

Parameter

Item Details
Sequence program Sequence program for MITSUBISHI CNC (User PLC)
PLC message data This defines PLC messages such as alarm message and PLC switch.
This is the comment for a sequence program device.
Device comment There are "common comment" which is common for a project and "comment
by program" which is particular for each program.
Parameter This sets the device range and execution order of the sequence program.

(1) One project per GX Developer

Only one project can be edited with a GX Developer. Therefore, if two or more projects are to be edited,
multiple GX Developers must be operated.

(2) Device comment

Comment Number to be
Details
type created
Common Common device comment for all the programs existed in the
1
comment project.
Same as the
Comment by Device comment set for each program. Always set the same name
number of
program as that of program.
programs

III - 24
 4. Common Items
4.5 Creating a Project

4.5.2 Operating Procedures

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.
[Project] → [New Project]
Set the PLC series, PLC type and project name required to create a new project with the screen below.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1) PLC series

Sets the series name of PLC (Programmable controller). Select "CNC(M6/M7)" or "QnACPU" here. Note
that selecting "CNC(M6/M7)" or "QnACPU" does not make a difference.
"CNC(M6/M7)" can be selected for GX Developer ver8.23Z or later version.

(2) PLC type

Set the PLC type. Set "Q4A" here.

(3) Program type / Label setting

Default values are set for these items. Refer to the enclosed Operating Manual for details.

(4) Project name / Title

Set drive/path+project name (8 or more characters can be set) with up to 154 one-byte alphanumerical
characters together. Title must be set with up to 32 one-byte characters.
Refer to the enclosed Operating Manual for details on the available characters.
When inputting/outputting built-in PLC editing function (PLC onboard function) and project data by turns,
consider the following restrictions and set.

PLC onboard Alphanumerical Alphanumerical Japanese Japanese Number of

function display input display input characters
18 (abbreviated
Project name
hereafter)
Title 32

III - 25
 4. Common Items
4.6 Setting the Parameters

4.6 Setting the Parameters

The GX Developer parameters must be set before the CNC controller sequence program can be developed
with GX Developer. The required parameter settings are shown below. Refer to the "II PROGRAMMING
EXPLANATION" for details on each setting item.
• Setting the number of device points
• Setting the number of common pointer points
• Setting the program execution order

4.6.1 Parameter Setting Screen

(1) Displaying the project data list and Parameter Setting screen
Open the "Project data list" window with the following operations. Double-click on "PLC parameter" to
open the parameter setting screen. The same operation can be completed by designating the data type
"Parameter" and data name "PLC parameter" from the tool bar.

Double-click on "PLC parameter" under [View] → [Project data list].

Tool bar

Project data list window

PLC parameter

(2) Displaying the Parameter Setting screen

If the characters on the tab are "red", the default values are set.

III - 26
 4. Common Items
4.6 Setting the Parameters

4.6.2 Setting the Number of Device Points

After creating the area (project) for controlling the sequence program, the number of devices used in that
project must be set first. This operation must be carried out each time a new project is created.

[Caution] An error will occur if the sequence program is downloaded to the CNC controller without
completing this operation.

Select the [Device] tab

Set the value for the number of device points on the following screen, and then click on [End].
Internal relay M : Change from [8K] to [10K]
Retentive timer ST : Change from [0K] to [64] ([NOTE] K is not added.)

Change 10K

Change 64

[Note] If a non-designated value is set, an error will occur when downloading to the CNC controller.

(1) When device setting value is illegal

If there is a problem with the device setting value, the following error dialog will appear when writing the
sequence programs to the CNC controller. Set the number of device points as explained above in this
case.

III - 27
 4. Common Items
4.6 Setting the Parameters

4.6.3 Setting the Number of Common Pointer Points

When creating the sequence programs with the multi-program method, the number of common pointers must
be set for each sequence program. This operation must be carried out each time a new project is created and
the parameter file is written to the CNC controller.

[Note] The default value will be used for the number of common pointer points if this operation is not
completed.

Select the [PLC System] tab

Set the "Common pointer No." value on the following screen, and then click on [End].

III - 28
 4. Common Items
4.6 Setting the Parameters

4.6.4 Setting the Program Execution Order

When creating the sequence programs with the multi-program method, the execution method and execution
order of each sequence program must be set. This operation is carried out before the sequence program is
executed with the CNC controller. The parameter file must be written to the CNC controller.

[Caution] If this operation is not completed when using the multi-program method, an error will occur when
RUN is executed in the sequence program.

Select the [Program] tab

Select the sequence program name to be registered for execution from the program list on the left of the
following screen, and then press the "Insert" button. Select the execution mode from the registration
program list on the right side. After registering all sequence programs to be executed, click on [End].

III - 29
 4. Common Items
4.6 Setting the Parameters

4.6.5 Writing and Reading Parameters to and from the CNC Controller
When creating the sequence programs with the multi-program method, the parameter file must be written to
the CNC controller. The parameter file can also be read from the CNC controller and used with GX
Developer.
The operation methods are the same as reading and writing the sequence programs.

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Online] → [Write to PLC]

On the following screen, choose the parameter [PLC/Network] file to be written from the [File selection] tab
and click [Execute].

[Note] As [Target memory], only [PLC RAM/Device memory] is valid.

Do not set the other tabs ([Device data], [Program], [Common], [Local]) than [File selection].

III - 30
 4. Common Items
4.7 Starting/Stopping the PLC of the CNC Controller

4.7 Starting/Stopping the PLC of the CNC Controller

Before writing a sequence program, you must stop the PLC of the CNC controller.

4.7.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Online] → [Remote operation] or Alt + 6

On the following screen, set "STOP" or "RUN" in the [PLC] part under [Operation] and click [Execute]. The
current status is displayed in [PLC status] under [Connection target information].

[Note] Operations other than RUN and STOP cannot be executed.

The operation is completed when the following dialog appears. Click [OK]. The status after completion
appears in [PLC status] on the remote operation screen displayed behind. If the status does not change,
check whether an alarm is displayed or not on the CNC controller side.

III - 31
 4. Common Items
4.8 Keyword Registration

4.8 Keyword Registration

Keyword is used to protect the sequence programs stored in CNC. Read and overwrite operations by GX
Developer or with the onboard PLC edit function are prohibited.

4.8.1 Data Protected by a Keyword

A keyword protects a whole range of data. The data to be protected includes all the PLC-related data stored
in the flash ROM in CNC (files of sequence programs, device comments, PLC messages and parameters).
Only the files with particular names can be free from the keyword protection.
The keyword is also set to the backup data that is output in the I/O operation: the backup data is kept
protected by the keyword after copied to other CNCs.

4.8.2 Operations Prohibited by a Keyword

The following two types of conditions can be selected at the keyword registration.
• Write protection: Writing and editing are restricted.
• Read/Write/Display protection: Writing, reading, verification and list display are restricted.
The operations, once prohibited at the keyword registration, cannot be executed by GX Developer or with the
onboard PLC edit function until the keyword is disabled.

4.8.3 Structure of the Keyword Function

The keyword is encoded and stored in the PLC data of CNC. GX Developer does not store the keyword in its
saved data after executing the keyword registration. The keyword is kept encoded when it is set to the
backup data output in the I/O operation.
Registering a keyword means to write a keyword into the stored data. Canceling a keyword means to delete a
keyword from the stored data. Disabling a keyword means to give the keyword information for verification to
request an access to the stored data.
(a) GX Developer can register, cancel and disable a keyword.
(b) The PLC onboard edit function can only be used to disable a keyword.

Ethernet

Personal
パソコン Register Cancel Disable ＣＮＣ
CNC
computer
(a) RS-232C PLCcontrol
PLC
(a)
GX-
GX Developer
F-ROM
F-
CF Card
ｷｰﾜｰﾄﾞ
Keyword
バック PLCPLCdata
Backup ｷｰﾜｰﾄﾞ
Keyword
Project data data ﾃﾞｰﾀ
ﾌﾟﾛｼﾞｪｸﾄﾃﾞｰﾀ アップ PLC
Ladders PLC data
・ラダー、コメント
Comments データ ﾃﾞｰﾀ
パラメータ
Parameters

Disable
((b) PLC
PLC onboard
オンボード
edit function
Copied to other CNCs 編集機能

III - 32
 4. Common Items
4.8 Keyword Registration

4.8.4 File Names Excluded from the Target of Keyword Protection

Only the files with particular names as follows can be free from the keyword protection.
• The file names that have the character "U$" in the "arbitrary character string" that is defined by the file
name rule.
The file name list is shown below.

Table 4.8.1 List of file names excluded from the target of keyword protection
File name Storage
Data class Data type
: 8 + 3(extension name) characters quantity
"U$" in the arbitrary character string
H + [Arbitrary character
High-speed process sets off the keyword protection
string(7)]. W P G
Ex) "HxxxxxU$.WPG”
Sequence Total 32
1 Main process "U$" in the arbitrary character string
program comments
Initialization process [Arbitrary character sets off the keyword protection
string(8)].WPG Ex) "U$xxxxxx.WPG"
Standby process
Ex) "xxxU$xxx.WPG"
PLC parameters
2 Parameter PARAM.WPA (fixed) 1 parameter
Network parameters
Common comment COMMENT.WCD (fixed)
Device "U$" in the arbitrary character string Total 10
3 Comment for each [Arbitrary character
comment sets off the keyword protection comments
program string].WCD
Ex) "U$xxxxxx.WCD"
Language selection M1xxxxxx.WPG "U$" in the arbitrary character string
method using PLC : sets off the keyword protection One for each
alone M8xxxxxx.WPG Ex) "MnxxxxU$.WPG" language
4 PLC message
Method linked with M00xxxxx.WPG "U$" in the arbitrary character string Total 8
language selection on : sets off the keyword protection languages
the screen) M99xxxxx.WPG Ex) "MnnU$xxx.WPG"
"Arbitrary character string" means a character string consisted of up to 8 one-byte alphanumeric characters, hyphen (-) and underline (_).

4.8.5 Compatibility and Precautions when Using the System with No Keyword Support
The data before the keyword registration is compatible with the old system. The data after the keyword
registration has the following limitations and precautions.

(1) The backup data after the keyword registration is not recognized as PLC data at the restoration to the old
system. An error occurs when the data is restored.

(2) If the PLC data stored in F-ROM has originally been created in the old system, the data needs to be
formatted before the first keyword registration.

(3) When a keyword has been registered, the data is secured in various ways. If the data is changed by any
editor and the like, neither the registered keyword can be disabled nor is the data recognized as PLC
data.

(4) If the registered keyword is forgotten, reformatting the data is the only way to recover the keyword.

(5) The following ways are available to undo a disabled keyword.

• Turning the CNC power OFF
• Terminating the GX Developer that disabled the keyword.
• Terminating the PLC onboard edit function that was used to disable the keyword.
• Enabling the keyword with the same PLC onboard edit function as was used to disable it.

III - 33
 4. Common Items
4.8 Keyword Registration

4.8.6 Registering a Keyword

The following shows how to register or change a keyword. Open the operation screen according to the
following procedure.
[Online] → [Keyword setup] → [Register]
Set the "Keyword" and "Registration condition" and then click [Execute] in the screen as follows.

(1)

(2)
(3)

(1) Input a keyword (6 numeric characters).

(2) Select the functions restricted by the keyword.
• Read/Write/Display protection: writing, reading, verification, deletion and list display are restricted.
• Write protection: writing is restricted.
(3) When the [Execute] button is clicked, the following dialog box appears. Input the same keyword
again.

[Note] Only "PLC RAM/Device memory" is available for "Target memory".

The keyword is directly written into CNC when the registration is executed. Further writing operation is
not needed.
If the PLC data stored in F-ROM has originally been created in the old system, the following error
message may appear. When the message appears, select [Online] - [Format PLC memory] to write
the sequence programs again before registering a keyword.

III - 34
 4. Common Items
4.8 Keyword Registration

4.8.7 Canceling the Keyword

The following shows how to cancel (delete) the registered keyword. Open the operation screen according to
the following procedure.
[Online] → [Keyword setup] → [Delete]
Set the "Keyword" and then click [Execute] in the following screen.

(1) (2)

(1) Input the currently registered keyword.

(2) After inputting the keyword, click [Execute].

(Note) Only "PLC RAM/Device memory" is available for "Target memory".

4.8.8 Disabling the Keyword

The following shows how to release the lock imposed by a keyword in order to allow access to the CNC on
which the keyword is registered. After a keyword has been released, there is free access to the CNC until GX
Developer is terminated. Open the operation screen according to the following procedure.
[Online] → [Keyword setup] → [Disable]
Set the "Keyword" and then click [Execute] in the following screen.

(2)

(1)

(1) Input the currently registered keyword.

(2) After inputting the keyword, click [Execute].

(Note) Only "PLC RAM/Device memory" is available for "Target memory".

Whether the keyword has been successfully disabled is not confirmed until the access is confirmed.
The following ways are available to cancel the "disabled" status of a keyword.
• Terminating GX Developer
• Closing the project that is currently opened in GX Developer

III - 35
 4. Common Items
4.8 Keyword Registration

4.8.9 Disabling the Keyword as Required when Accessing to CNC

The following screen appears and requires disabling the keyword when any access is attempted to CNC on
which the keyword was registered.

(2)

(1)

(1) Input the currently registered keyword.

(2) After inputting the keyword, click [Execute].

III - 36
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.1 Development Procedures

5. Sequence Program Development

The sequence program development procedures are explained in this section focusing on usage methods
unique to MITSUBISHI CNC.

5.1 Development Procedures

The following two methods can be used to develop the sequence program.
(1) Method to use sequence program developed with conventional MITSUBISHI CNC PLC programming
tool (PLC4B).
(2) Method to newly create sequence program with GX Developer.
Refer to the enclosed GX Developer Operating Manual for the method to newly create sequence program.

5.1.1 Method for Using Sequence Program Developed with PLC4B

IBM PC/AT compatible

personal computer
Creation
PLC4B/LIST4B
LIST4B output
ladder list
ZZZZ.TXT
Ladder list conversion
CNVM6

Ladder list
for this CNC
zzzz.TXT
List to sequence program
conversion GX Converter

Sequence program CNC controller

for this CNC
zzzz.WPG
Editing {transfer}
GX Developer

Device comment Message

for this CNC for this CNC
zzzz.WCD M1xxx.WPG

(1) Creation
The sequence program created for the old model is output in a list format.

(2) Conversion
The data is converted into a sequence program (list format) for this CNC using CNVM6 (PLC data
integrated conversion tool). Using GX Converter (data conversion software package), the list format
program is converted into the GX Developer data.

(3) Editing/transfer
The resultant program can be handled like a newly created sequence program.

III - 37
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller

5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller

The following section explains how to write sequence programs from GX Developer to the CNC controller
(especially the restrictions and CNC-specific operations.)

5.2.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Online] → [Write to PLC]

On the following screen, choose the sequence program file to be written from the [File selection] tab and click
[Execute].
You can command RUN/STOP of the PLC using [Remote operation] under [Related functions].

[Note] As [Target memory], only [PLC RAM/Device memory] is valid.

Do not set the other tabs ([Device data], [Program], [Common], [Local]) than [File selection].

5.2.2 Writing Operation

As soon as a ladder is written from GX Developer to the CNC controller, the CNC controller converts it into
the CNC-specific ladder machine code.
A conversion error occurs if any of the devices and instruction formats not supported by the CNC controller
side is used.
The writing will not stop even if a conversion error occurs. The instruction causing an error is converted into a
"NOP instruction" (no process instruction), and the sequence program is transferred up to the last step.

[Note] A ladder resulting in an error cannot be RUN for safety purposes.

III - 38
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller

5.2.3 Operations and Check Items at Conversion Error

(1) Operations at conversion error

The following dialog appears on the GX Developer screen when a conversion error occurs.

If you execute RUN the PLC as-is, an alarm occurs on the CNC side and the PLC does not RUN.

If the ladder file resulting in a conversion error is selected with the [File Selection] tab on the [Read from PLC]
screen, the file name and title will change and be displayed as shown below.
If this ladder file is read out to the GX Developer, it will be stored under the file name "ERRLAD-0".

(1) File name at error

ERRLAD-0 < -- LDTEST : Convert ERROR.
(2) Title statement including
(1) (2) transferred original file name

! CAUTION
! Do not read out a ladder file resulting in a conversion error to the GX Developer and use it.
It may contain unexpected data, and result in incorrect operations.

III - 39
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller

(2) How to confirm the conversion error step No.

The PLC verification function can be used to confirm the error step. For details of the PLC verification function,
refer to "5.4 Verifying the Sequence Programs".

Verify source: Select the ladder file (source file) on the GX Developer side
Verify dest.: Select the file resulting in an error "ERRLAD-0" on the CNC controller side

When PLC verification is executed, the mismatching details will appear as shown in the following example.
The NOP instruction section in the CNC controller side is the step with the conversion error. Double-click the
mismatch to display and to edit the corresponding part of the GX Developer side.
<Memory> indicates the GX Developer side, and <PLC> the CNC controller side.

GX Developer side CNC controller side

III - 40
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller

5.2.4 Operations and Check Items at the Other Errors

(1) Other errors
Some of the popular errors that would occur in writing sequence programs are given below.
Note that the description of the dialogue message is primarily provided for the MELSEC sequencer, and
the precise description of the error may not be available for the M700 CNC. The last 4 digits of display No.
are indicated in "Status".
For the other errors, refer to "8.1 List of Errors During GX Developer Online Operations".

Status Message Cause Remedy

Writing of data which Check the size of execution area.
exceeds the capacity of the The maximum number of steps (Refer to (2) of this section.)
4005 PLC was attempted. that can be executed with NC Reduce the number of steps for the
(Note 1)
Execute again within the has been exceeded. sequence program to be executed
capacity of the PLC. according to that value.
Cannot write because the
PLC is executing a RUN After stopping the PLC of the NC,
4010 command. Stop the PLC,
The PLC of the NC is running.
start execution again.
then execute again.
The applicable drive is not The specified target memory
4021 ready. Check the applicable does not exist or is not in a Change the target memory.
drive, then execute again. usable status.
Insufficient file capacity. An attempt was made to write
Examine the file structure so that the
4029 Execute again after deleting a file that exceeds the storage
data falls within the limited capacity.
unnecessary files. capacity.
The file is write protected. The specified target memory is
Specify "internal RAM" as the target
4052 Change the file attributes to a write-disabled device
memory.
enable writing to the file. (F-ROM).
A mismatch occurred
between the PLC and
peripheral parameters There is a problem in the Set the number of device points.
4065 Match the parameters device setting value. (Refer to section 4.6.)
between the PLC and
peripherals.
The program before Perform verification to identify the
A ladder instruction outside
4070 correction differs from the
the specification is included.
instruction that is the cause of the
registered program. problem. (Refer to section 5.2.3.)

III - 41
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller

(2) How to confirm the size of execution area

Confirm the size of execution area in the following manner when "error status (4005): Execution area
size over" (See (Note 1) in the list of errors above.) occurs. Refer to "PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION
2.6 PLC Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode" for details on execution area.

When [Target memory] "IC memory card A(RAM)" is selected with "Read from PLC" operation, the file
name and title are changed and displayed as follows.

(a) indicates the settings of target memory. (Regular reading from PLC is executed with "internal
RAM/device memory".)
(b) indicates the number of steps at execution when the title section is replaced.
An alphabet before the number of steps at execution represents the state of parameter designation.
I: Initial H: High speed M: Medium speed W: Wait
-: No parameters or parameters not stored.
(c) indicates the total number of steps at execution. (Total of "initial", "high speed", "medium speed" and
"wait to be executed.)
The denominator indicates the maximum size of the execution area.
When there is no parameter, the single program method is applied and "TOTAL" will not be
displayed.

(a)

(b)

(c)

In the screen example above, the sequence program size must be adjusted so that the total number of
steps at execution of (c) (43091) is smaller than the maximum size of the denominator's execution area
(43008).

III - 42
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.3 Reading the Sequence Program from the CNC Controller

5.3 Reading the Sequence Program from the CNC Controller

The following indicates how to read a sequence program from the CNC controller to GX Developer.

5.3.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Online] → [Read from PLC]

On the following screen, choose the sequence program file to be read from the [File selection] tab, and click
[Execute].

[Note] As [Target memory], the fitted memory is valid.

Do not set the other tabs ([Device data], [Program], [Common], [Local]) than [File selection].

If a sequence program file with the same name already exists in the GX Developer side, following dialogue
will appear.

[Note] Choosing [Yes (Y)] in the dialogue will overwrite the GX Developer side sequence program file.
The file before overwriting will be erased.
Confirm the file enough before choosing [Yes (Y)].

III - 43
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.3 Reading the Sequence Program from the CNC Controller

The [Read from PLC] screen can also be used as a CNC controller side file listing function. Move the scroll
bar of the [File selection] tab to the right to display the write date and size of each file. Click [Free space
volume] to display the free area of the target memory.

III - 44
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.4 Verifying the Sequence Programs

5.4 Verifying the Sequence Programs

The following indicates how to verify sequence program between the CNC controller and GX Developer.

5.4.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.
[Online] → [Verify with PLC]
On the following screen, choose the sequence program files to be verified from the [File selection] tab, and
click [Execute].
[Verify source] : GX Developer side, [Verify dest] : CNC side

[Note] As [Target memory], the fitted memory is valid.

Do not set the other tab ([Program], [Device data]) than [File selection].

If verification mismatches occur, the following mismatch screen appears. Double-click the mismatch to
display the corresponding part of the GX Developer side file.

GX Developer side CNC controller side

III - 45
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.5 Using Sequence Programs from Older Models

5.5 Using Sequence Programs from Older Models

The sequence program list converted with the PLC data integrated conversion tool (CNVM7) is converted into
GX Developer data with the following method. Use "GX Converter (data conversion software package)" for
conversion. GX Converter can be started from the GX Developer menu.

5.5.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start GX Converter (read).

[Project] → [Import file] → [Import to TEXT, CSV format file]

On the following screen, choose the file to be converted (LDTEST.TXT) and click [OK].

5.5.2 Conversion Format Setting

Set the conversion format on the following data conversion wizard screen.

(1) Data conversion wizard 1/4

Choose [Original Data Type]-[Delimited] and [Data Type]-[List], and click [Next>].

III - 46
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.5 Using Sequence Programs from Older Models

(2) Data conversion wizard 2/4

Choose [Delimiters]-[Tab] and click [Next>].

(3) Data conversion wizard 3/4

Choose to highlight the instruction column part in the [Data Preview] list and choose [Column Data
Format]-[Instruction].

(4) Data conversion wizard 3/4

Further, choose to highlight the argument column part in the [Data Preview] list and choose [Column
Data Format]-[I/O(Device)]. Click [Next>].

III - 47
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.5 Using Sequence Programs from Older Models

(5) Data conversion wizard 4/4

Set the program name used on GX Developer at [Data name] column and a sequence program
annotation at [Title] column, and click [Finish].

(6) Completion
The setting is complete when the following completed dialog appears after the converting dialog. Click
[OK].

III - 48
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.6 Monitoring the Sequence Program

5.6 Monitoring the Sequence Program

There are no MITSUBISHI CNC-specific operations to monitor a sequence program. Refer to the Operating
Manual for the operation methods. For usable functions, refer to "2.2 Function Support Conditions (Online
Section)". This section explains the operation procedure outline and precautions.

5.6.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start monitoring.

(1) Display the sequence program to be monitored and move to the circuit part to be monitored.

(2) Perform the following operation to start monitoring.

[Online] → [Monitor] → [Monitor mode] or F3

(3) Perform the following operation to stop monitoring.

[Online] → [Monitor] → [Stop monitor] or Alt + F3

[Caution] If the sequence program being RUN with CNC controller differs from the sequence program
displayed on GX Developer, monitoring will not result in an error but will appear to continue
normally.
Confirm that the sequence program on the CNC controller side and GX Developer are the
same before starting monitoring.

III - 49
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

Status of various devices that are used for the CNC controller external signals and for the user ladder can be
traced by using GX Developer. Trace result at an arbitrary point will be read out from CNC controller and
displayed on a screen or output in a CSV file format.

► Example of trace result display for bit devices

Current value of bit device per sampling point is displayed.

Bit device name Trace point position (Number of traces when trigger position is "0") Bit device current value

Example of bit device trace result display

► Example of trace result display for word devices

Current value of word device per sampling point is displayed.

Word device name Trace point position (Number of traces when trigger position is "0".) Word device current value

Example of word device trace result display

No. of traces, trace condition, trigger condition, and No. of traces after trigger can be set as trace setting.
Trace is executed when the trace condition is set.
After the trigger condition is set, execute "No. of traces after trigger" only and end sampling. Sampling the
status before and after the trigger is set is also possible.

Setting value for No. of traces

Setting value for
No. of traces after trigger

Bit device

Trace starts Trigger condition established End of trace

Specifications chart (Establishment of trigger condition to the end of sampling)

III - 50
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.1 Basic Operation

Use GX Developer for operation. Execute sampling trace function, following the procedures below.
(1) Carry out trace setting.

Setting item Setting details

No. of traces Set the number of traces to be saved. The latest data is saved for the number of
traces. If exceeds the number of traces, oldest data is erased in order.
No. of traces after Set the number of traces taken place after trigger has been established until
trigger sampling is completed.
Trace point Set the data trace timing. "Each scan" and "Detail" can be selected. "Detail"
enables the trace execution condition setting.
Trigger point Set the trigger timing. When trigger is established, status of trace device is taken
in. "At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer" and "Detail" can be
selected. "Detail" enables the trigger establishment condition setting.
Trace device Set the device for sampling.
(2) Write the trace settings into CNC controller.
(3) Execute tracing. CNC controller starts tracing the device. Tracing execution status can be checked with
GX Developer tracing status display or CNC special relay SM800 to SM805. Tracing will be continued
until the following conditions are set.
(a) Tracing is completed upon establishment of trigger.
(b) Stop tracing from GX Developer.
(c) Turn the CNC controller power OFF.
(d) PLC turns to STOP mode.
(4) Read trace data out from CNC controller.
(5) Display the result and output in a file format, if necessary.

Special relay
IBM PC/AT compatible CNC controller SM800 to SM805
personal computer (2) Write the setting (3) Display the
execution status
(1) Trace setting
Trace setting (3) Execute the trace

User ladder
GX Developer

(4) Read out the data

Trace data

(3) Data trace

(5) Save the result

(3) Display the

(5) Display the result
execution status

Sampling trace function basic operations (Image)

Trace result
file

III - 51
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.2 Basic Specifications

Basic specifications list
Item Specifications
No. of traces The number between 1 and 8192 can be set. Note that, however, the total trace data size has to be
smaller than 60kbyte.
Refer to *1 for trace data size calculation.
No. of traces after trigger Sets the number smaller than the No. of traces.
Trace point Each scan Traces per scan of the main process.
(Two types of setting – "Each Detail Word Applicable device: Refer to *2.
scan" and "Detail" – are (Refer to *4 device Setting condition: Sets the value to be used for judgement. When the
available.) for setting value becomes equal to the word device value, judgement will be
precaution.) effective and trigger is executed.
Bit device Applicable device: Refer to *2.
Setting condition: Sets ↑ or ↓. When the setting condition is satisfied,
trace is executed.
Trigger point At the time Executes trigger by GX Developer operations.
(Two types of setting – "At the of trigger
time of trigger operation from operation
GX Developer" and "Detail" from GX
are available.) Developer
Detail Word Applicable device: Refer to *2.
(Refer to *5 device Setting condition: Sets the value to be used for judgement. When the
for setting value becomes equal to the word device value, judgement will be
precaution.) effective and trigger is executed.
Bit device Applicable device: Refer to *2.
Setting condition: Sets ↑ or ↓. When the setting condition is satisfied,
trace is executed.
Trace device 50 points of word device, 50 points of bit device can be set. Note that, however, the total trace data
size has to be smaller than 60kbyte.
Refer to *1 for trace data size calculation.
Refer to *3 for applicable devices.
*1 Calculation of trace data size
Set the number of traces and the trace devices so that the trace data size is 60kbyte (61440 byte) or smaller.
Trace data size will be calculated as follows.

[Trace data size (byte)] = [Size required for one trace (byte)] x [Number of traces]

Size required for one trace is calculated from word device points and bit device points of the trace device and
the size required for one trace of each device.

Size required for one trace of each device

Trace device type Size (byte) required for one trace
Word device 2byte per 1 point
Bit device 2byte per 1 unit (1 unit = 16 points)
1 to 16 points → 1 unit → 2byte
17 to 32 points → 2 units → 4byte
33 to 48 points → 3 units → 6byte
49 to 50 points → 4 units → 8byte

Calculation example for trace data size is shown below.

Trace data size calculation example

Word device
No. Bit device points Trace points Trace data size Sampling
points
(1x2+2x2)x8192
1 16 points (1 unit) 2 points 8192 points Possible
= 49152 byte
(1x2+8x2)x1000
2 8 points (1 unit) 8 points 1000 points Possible
= 18000 byte
(4x2+50x2)x568
3 50 points (4 units) 50 points 568 points Possible
= 61344 byte
(4x2+50x2)x569
4 50 points (4 units) 50 points 569 points Not possible
= 61452 byte

III - 52
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

*2 Applicable devices with trace/trigger point details setting

Applicable device
Bit device: X, Y, M, L, F, SB, B, SM, T(contact), ST(contact), C(contact)
Word device: T(current value), ST(current value), C(current value), D, R, SW, SD, W
Following qualifications are available for the above devices.
• Bit device digit designation
• Word device bit designation

Process following an inapplicable device setting is as follows.

• If one or more applicable devices already exist, the setting of the inapplicable device will be ignored.
• If no applicable devices exist, error occurs when trace setting file is read upon trace execution.

*3 Applicable devices with device setting

Applicable device
Bit device: X, Y, M, L, F, SB, B, SM, T(contact), T(coil), ST(contact), ST(coil), C(contact), C(coil)
Word device: T(current value), ST(current value), C(current value), D, R, SW, SD, W
Following qualifications are available for the above devices.
• Bit device digit designation
• Word device bit designation

Process following an inapplicable device setting is as follows.

• If one or more applicable devices already exist, the setting of the inapplicable device will be ignored.
• If no applicable devices exist, error occurs when trace setting file is read upon trace execution.

*4 Precautions for trace point details setting

• When trace point is set only with "Step No.", the operation will be same as when trace point is set to "Each
scan".
• When trace point is set with AND condition of "Step No." and "Device", "Step No." setting will be ignored and
only "Device" setting will be effective.
• When only devices that are not corresponding with MITSUBISHI CNC are set for "Device", operation will be
same as when trace point is set to "Each scan".

Operations at the time of trace point details setting are as shown in the table below.

List of operations at trace point details setting

Setting ( → Yes → No)
Operations
Device Step No.
Valid setting available in device → Device
Valid setting not available in device → Each scan
Valid setting available in device → Device
Valid setting not available in device → Each scan
Each scan
Setting disabled (Error is displayed on GX Developer)

III - 53
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

*5 Precautions for trigger point details setting

• When trigger point is set only with "Step No.", the operation will be same as when trigger point is set to "At
the time of trigger operation from GX Developer".
• When trigger point is set with AND condition of "Step No." and "Device", "Step No." setting will be ignored
and only "Device" setting will be effective.
• When only devices that are not corresponding with MITSUBISHI CNC are set for "Device", operation will be
same as when trigger point is set to "At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer".

Operations at the time of trigger point details setting are as shown in the table below.

List of operations at trigger point details setting

Setting ( → Yes → No)
Operations
Device Step No.
Valid setting available in device → Device
Valid setting not available in device
→ At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer
Valid setting available in device → Device
Valid setting not available in device
→ At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer
At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer
Setting disabled (Error is displayed on GX Developer)

III - 54
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.3 Status of Special Relay during Sampling Trace

Status during sampling trace function being executed can be checked by the status of SM device 800 to 805.

Starts trace SM801 ON after

Trigger execution End of trace
Sampling trace registration trace started

SM800
(Sampling trace preparation)

SM801
(Sampling trace starts)

SM802
(In sampling trace execution)

SM803
(Sampling trace trigger)

SM804
(After sampling trigger)

SM805
(End of sampling trace)

*SM800 automatically turns ON when sampling trace preparation is done.

Device status when trace execution operation is carried out.

Trigger Trigger End of trace

execution Stop trace SM801 ON after
trace started execution

No. of traces Clear No. of traces No. of traces

after trigger after trigger

SM800
(Sampling trace preparation)

SM801
(Start sampling trace)

SM802
(In sampling trace execution)

SM803
(Sampling trace trigger)

SM804
(After sampling trigger)

SM805
(End of sampling trace)

Device status when trace stop operation is carried out

III - 55
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

Specifications for SM800 to SM805 is as shown below.

Specifications list for the devices that are related with sampling trace function
No. Name Details
OFF: Preparation not completed
SM800 Sampling trace preparation
ON: Preparation completed
OFF: Cancel
SM801 Starts sampling trace
ON: Start
OFF: Cancel
SM802 In sampling trace execution
ON: Start
OFF→ON
SM803 Sampling trace trigger
: Trigger execution
OFF: Not after trigger
SM804 After sampling trace trigger
ON: After trigger
OFF: Not completed
SM805 End of sampling trace
ON: Completed

5.7.4 Sampling Trace Operation Screen

In this section, outline of the operation procedures and precautions are explained, using the case where
wizard setting/execution is applied.
Individual setting/execution is also available. For available functions, refer to "2.2 Function Support
Conditions (Online Section)".
Refer to GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual (SW8D5C-GPPW-*) for basic operations.

III - 56
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.4.1 Sampling Trace Main Screen

Start the sampling trace main screen below by selecting [Online]→[Trace]→[Sampling trace]. All the
operations for sampling trace functions are carried out on this main screen.
(1)
(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) (6) (7)

Sampling trace main screen

(1) Set the sampling trace execution method. Select either "wizard setting/execution" method or "Individual
setting/execution" method. Necessary setting items are set in an order by using the wizard
setting/execution method.

(2) This is the menu when the wizard setting/execution method is applied. Sampling trace execution method
is valid when wizard setting/execution is applied. Click the button in the order of "Trace setting...", "Trace
execution..." and "Trace result...".

(3) This is the menu when the individual setting/execution method is applied. Sampling trace execution
method is valid when individual setting/execution is applied. Click the button in the order of "Trace
condition setting", "Trace data setting" and "Trace execution". Setting details are same as when wizard
setting/execution is applied.

(4) Display the details of setting for the trace currently valid.

(5) This is the menu for trace setting file operation. Saving of the currently valid trace settings in the local area
is possible, as well as reading and deleting of the saved file.

(6) This is the menu for trace setting PC operation. Currently valid trace settings can be written into CNC, and
also the trace settings currently set in CNC can be read out.

(7) The [Close] button closes the "Sampling trace" screen. Tracing will continue even if the screen is closed
during trace execution.

III - 57
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.4.2 Wizard Setting/Execution Screen

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the sampling trace.
[Online]→[Trace]→[Sampling trace]

(1) Select wizard setting/execution with radio button.

(2) Click in the following order and operate according to the wizard.
(2-1) [Trace setting] : Refer to 5.7.4.3 for details.
(2-2) [Trace execution] : Refer to 5.7.4.4 for details.
(2-3) [Trace result] : Refer to 5.7.4.5 for details.

(1) (2-1) (2-2) (2-3)

Explanation of wizard setting/execution

III - 58
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.4.3 Trace Setting

Start "Sampling trace setting wizard" screen by clicking [Trace setting].
Set the conditions and data required for sampling trace according to the wizard.

Screen transitions for trace setting is as shown below.

Press Trace data Trace Trace Trace Trace Trigger Device End of
[Trace storage execution count additional point point setting trace
setting] setting method setting informatio setting setting screen setting
button screen setting screen n setting screen screen
screen screen

Trace point Trigger point

Details setting details details
setting setting
screen screen

Details setting

When executed with the trace setting saved in CPU

Trace setting screen transitions at wizard setting/execution

(1) Trace data (setting/result) storage setting screen

"Target memory" and "File name" cannot be set. Click [Next >] and proceed to the trace execution
method setting screen.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard - Trace data (Setting + result) storage setting screen

[Note]
• Since "Target memory" is DRAM integrated in CNC controller, trace data (setting+result) will be deleted
when the power is turned OFF.
• Trace data (setting+result) that can be saved on CNC controller is only one. Trace data result is
overwritten every [Trace execution] execution.
• When file name is changed, the overwriting confirmation dialogue may not be dispalyed at PC write
operation.
• When file name has been changed, trace result may not be displayed with [Trace result]. Read the data
out from PLC, then click [Trace result] again.

III - 59
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

(2) Trace execution method setting screen

Select a trace execution method and click [Next >].
When "Execute trace after overwriting the current trace settings to the PLC" is selected:
Proceed to the trace count setting screen.
When "Execute trace for the settings written in PLC" is selected:
End "Sampling trace setting wizard" and return to the "Sampling trace" screen.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trace execution method setting screen

(3) Trace count setting screen

Set the number of traces and trigger position, click [Next >] and proceed to the trace additional
information setting screen.
Refer to "5.7.2 Basic Specifications" for details on trace count that can be set.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – No. of traces setting screen

III - 60
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

(4) Trace additional information setting screen

Only "Time" can add information. Put a check mark at "Time" to display time when the trace result is
shown. Click [Next >] and proceed to the trace point setting screen.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trace additional information setting screen

(5) Trace point setting screen

Select "Each scan" or "Detail" and click [Next >].
When "Each scan" is selected, proceed to the trigger point setting screen.
When "Detail" is selected, proceed to the trace point details setting screen. Set "Device" at [Trace point
setting].
• "Each scan": Trace is executed after scanning the main process.
• "Detail": Trace is executed when the device set with trace point setting satisfies its condition after
scanning the main process.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trace point setting screen

[Note]
Only "Each scan" and "Detail" are valid for trace point setting.
When "Interval" is set, the movement will be the same as when "Each scan" is set.

III - 61
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trace point setup – Details setting screen

[Note]
Only "Device" is valid for trace point setting.
Do not set "Step No.".
Refer to "5.7.2 Basic Specifications" for the devices that can be set.

III - 62
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

(6) Trigger point setting screen

Select "At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer" or "Detail" and click [Next >].
When "At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer" is selected, proceed to the device setting
screen.
When "Detail" is selected, set "Device" at [Trigger point setting].

"At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer":

When executing trace, carry out "Execute trigger" from the "Sampling trace setting wizard execution"
screen.
The data at the time of "Execute trigger" after scanning of the main process will be the start point (0
point).

"Detail":
Check trigger conditions after scanning of the main process. The data at the time of trigger condition
establishment will be the start point (0 point). (Refer to [II. PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION 2.4.1
Number and Types of Registerable Programs] for explanation of 'Main process'.)

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trigger point setting screen

[Note]
Only "At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer" and "Detail" are valid for trigger point setting.
When "At the time of STRA instruction execution" is set, operation will be the same as when "At the time
of trigger operation from GX Developer" is set.

III - 63
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trigger point setup – Details setting screen

[Note]
Only "Device" is available for trigger point "Details" setting.
Do not set "Step No.".
Refer to "5.7.2 Basic Specifications" for the devices that can be set.

(7) Device setting screen

Set the devices of which trace is executed and click [Next >].
After setting the device, click [Finish] and end the trace setting.
Refer to "5.7.2 Basic Specifications" for the devices that can be set.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trigger point setting – Device setting screen

III - 64
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.4.4 Trace Execution

Start the "Sampling trace setting wizard execution" screen below by clicking [Trace execution].
Carry out "Start trace", "Stop trace" and "Execute trigger".

At wizard setting/execution – Trace execution screen

(1) Starting trace

Select "Start trace" under [Trace operation] and click [Execute]. Trace begins.
Tracing progress can be checked at [Trace status].

Status of each device under tracing can be check with [Trace result].
Display the current status by clicking [Trace result] after closing the trace execution screen by clicking
[Close]. Tracing will continue even after [Close] is clicked.

Once [Close] is clicked and display the trace execution screen again, click [Trace execution]. Since
[Trace status] is hidden at this point, click [Start monitor].

[Note]
Once trace is resumed, trace data up to the previous time will be deleted.
If resuming trace after once executing trace, end trace in the following manner.
• After trigger execution, execute trace after trigger.
• Execute "Stop trace" at [Trace operation].
• CNC power is turned OFF.
• PLC status is turned to "STOP".

(2) Trigger execution

Trigger can be executed at an arbitrary timing. Select "Execute trigger" and click [Execute].

(3) Stopping trace

To stop tracing, select "Stop trace" and click [Execute].
To display the trace result before stop, click [Trace result] after pressing [Close].

[Note]
Once "Stop trace" is executed, trace cannot be resumed.
When the trace information before stop is required, save the data in CSV file with [Trace result].
If "Start trace" is executed before saving the data, the data before "Stop trace" will be deleted.

III - 65
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

(4) End of trace

When trace after trigger has been completed after trigger execution, "Finished" is displayed on [Trace
status], and then trace will be finished. Click [Close] upon completion of tracing and end the "Sampling
trace setting wizard execution" screen.

At wizard setting/execution – Trace execution screen – Trace status display at trace "Finished"

(5) Trace status display

When trace status is being monitored, the button displays [Suspend monitor]. To stop monitoring, click
the button. When not monitoring, the button displays [Start monitor]. To start monitoring, click the button.

[Trace] within [Trace status] includes the following four display items.
• Executing: Trace is being executed.
• Suspend: Trace has been stopped.
• Execution failed: Trace is not executed.
• Finished: Trace has been completed.

III - 66
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.4.5 Trace Result

Start the "Trace result" screen below by clicking [Trace result].
Trace result of bit device is chronologically shown in the upper section and word device in the lower section.
Trace result can be saved in the CSV file format. Trace result can be displayed even during trace execution.

ON/OFF status of bit device is

displayed per trace count

Value of word device is displayed per

trace count

At wizard setting/execution – Trace result screen

"Count": Counts are displayed. (Trigger execution point is set as start point or 0 point)
"Time(sec.)": Time is displayed. (Head of trace data is set as standard or 0.000 sec.)
If trace interval exceeds 65 seconds, correct time will not be displayed.
"Step","Program": Not displayed.

[Create CSV file]

The following screen is displayed by clicking [Create CSV file].

At wizard setting/execution – Trace result screen – Create CSV file

Save the trace result data following the procedures (1) to (4) below.
(1) Click [Browse] and select the storage destination.
(2) Input the file name.
(3) Select [Device storage method].
(Refer to the Operating Manual for details on [Device storage method].)
(4) Click [Execute].

[Note]
Trace result data is overwritten per each trace execution. Always save the necessary data in CSV file.

III - 67
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.5 Operation at Error

Error will occur under the following conditions. The following dialog will be displayed on the GX Developer
screen when parameter check during trace execution is carried out.

Error details
No. Error definition Remedies
No applicable device for sampling trace is set with Set the applicable device for sampling trace
1 device setting. with device setting.

Error dialogue

When sampling trace cannot be executed, check the following items.

• Check if CPU type is Q4ACPU.
• Check the trace execution status. (Trace execution command is not possible during tracing.)
• When trace execution method is set to "Execute trace for the settings written in PLC.", check if setting file is
saved in CNC.
• Check if devices on the program and that set by trace match.

III - 68
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.6 Operation Example

Example 1 Trigger judgment and trace result with device setting
[Setting details]
Trace setting details for example 1
Setting item Setting value Setting item Setting value
Target memory IC memory card A Trigger point setting ■ Device
File name MAIN Word device
Total number 10 Word device 1 = 11
■ Step
30
Number after trigger 4 Device setting ■ Bit device
Trace additional Time, step No. Device No.1
information Device No.2
Trace point setting Interval: 10msec ■ Word device
Word device 1

Medium speed ladder scan cycle

Device No.1

Device No.2

Word device 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Trigger

Trigger execution timing

(Scan when "word device 1=11" has been established.
Ignores step No. setting; only device setting will be
valid for trigger point.

Device status when sampling trace is executed at example 1

[Trace result]
Trace result display for example 1
← The scan in which trigger has been
Count -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 executed is regarded as count "0".
Trace data is retrieved when trigger
has been established. Thus, when
Device No.1 trigger establishment and trace
execution happen simultaneously,
count "0" and count "1" will be the
Device No.2 same data.
← "Interval" trace point setting is
ignored. Execute trace per scan.
Word device 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 12 13
← Word device is shown as numerical
value.

Time 0 0.007 0.014 0.021 0.028 0.035 0.042 0.042 0.049 0.056 ← Time is displayed as trace
additional information.

Step No - - - - - - - - - - ← Nothing is displayed as trace

additional information other than
time.
File name - - - - - - - - - -

III - 69
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

Example 2 Trace judgment and trace result with device setting

[Setting details]
Trace setting details for example 2
Setting item Setting value Setting item Setting value
Target memory IC memory card A Trigger point setting ■ At the time of STRA
File name MAIN instruction execution
Total number 6
Number after trigger 4 Device setting ■ Bit device
Trace additional information None Device No.1
Trace point setting ■ Device Device No.2
Bit device ■ Word device
Device No.1 ↑ Word device 1

Medium speed ladder scan cycle

Device No.1

Device No.2

Word device 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Trigger

Trigger execution
from GX Developer

Trigger input from GX Developer

Ignores "At the time of STRA instruction execution"

and "At the time of trigger operation from GX
Developer" will be valid for trigger point.
Device status when sampling trace is executed at example 1

[Trace result]
Trace result display for example 2
← The scan in which trigger has
Count -2 -1 0 1 2 3 been executed is regarded as
count "0".
Device No.1
← Trace is executed only for the
Device No.2
scan where device No.1 turns
Word device 1 2 4 7 8 10 12 ON from OFF.
Note that, however, the device
data for the scan when trigger
has been executed will be saved.

III - 70
 5. Sequence Program Development
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.7 Precautions
(1) Sampling can be executed for the other stations on network or with serial communication connection.
Note that, however, sampling is not possible from multiple areas at the same time.
(2) Since trace conditions and trace data that have been registered in CNC controller are saved in DRAM
area, when the CNC power is turned OFF, the data will be deleted.
(3) Sampling trace is executed by connecting CNC controller and GX Developer.
(4) Trace data within CNC is deleted during trace execution. So, please be aware that the data up to previous
time will be deleted.
(5) When trace is ended before reaching the set No. of traces, such as when trigger occurs as soon as trace
is started, the shortened data will not be displayed.

<Example>
Trigger occurred at 10th trace when No. of traces is set to 2000 and No. of traces after trigger is set to 1000.

No. of traces setting value=2000

10 times No. of times after trigger=1000

Bit device

Establishment of
Sampling starts trigger condition End of sampling

Trace result
Count -10 ••• 0 1 ••• 1000

Device No.1

Word device 1 9 10 11 12 13 14

(6) Descriptions about sampling trace in this manual are given under the assumption of GX Developer Ver.8
specifications.
Sampling trace setting wizard is not available for the version prior to GX Developer Ver.8.
Refer to the precautions for each setting item described in this manual and perform settings respectively.

(7) When the trace setting that is invalid with this CNC is performed, the setting is forcibly corrected to the
valid one within CNC controller. Refer to "5.7.4 Sampling Trace Operation Screen" for trace settings that
can be used.

(8) Status of SM800 to SM805 cannot be checked on CNC controller screen. Check the sampling trace status
with GX Developer.

III - 71
 6. PLC Message Development
6.1 Development Procedure

6. PLC Message Development

This chapter describes a procedure for developing PLC-related data such as alarm messages, operator
messages, and PLC switches.

6.1 Development Procedure

There are the following two methods as a general development procedure of message data.
Refer to the Operating Manual for details on newly creating a PLC message.

(1) Making conversion into GX Developer data using a general text editor or spreadsheet tool and data
conversion package.
(When there is a large volume of message data and you want to control them with a commercially
available tool, for example)

(2) Entering messages directly from GX Developer

(When there is a small volume of message data or when addition or correction is to be made, for
example)

IBM PC/AT compatible

personal computer
Creation
Spreadsheet tool
Text editor
Message
for this CNC
M1xxx.TXT
Conversion
GX Converter

Message CNC controller

for this CNC
M1xxx.WPG
Transfer (edit)
GX Developer

Device comment Sequence program

for this CNC for this CNC
zzzz.WCD zzzz.WPG

III - 72
 6. PLC Message Development
6.1 Development Procedure

6.1.1 Using a General Text Editor

(1) Creation
The message data is described using a general text editor. The description method and format will be
described later.

(2) Conversion
The conversion from text data to GX Developer data is carried out using the "GX Converter (data
conversion software package)".

(3) Transfer
With the GX Developer, the message data is handled as a sequence program interlinear comment, and
can also be edited.
The message data is transferred to the CNC controller using the GX Developer, in the same manner as
the sequence program.

6.1.2 Entering Messages Directly from GX Developer

(1) Creation
The message data is described directly from GX Developer. The message data is handled as a
sequence program interlinear comment by GX Developer. The description method and format will be
described later.

(2) Transfer
The message data is transferred from GX Developer to the CNC controller in the same manner as the
sequence program.

III - 73
 6. PLC Message Development
6.2 Message Data Description Method

6.2 Message Data Description Method

The message data can be described as text data by a general text editor and also by commercially available
spreadsheet software in addition to the direct input with GX Developer.

6.2.1 Description Format

The message data is described using the following description format.
The description format cannot be abbreviated. Comma(,) and [CR] must be described, even the message
character string is blank.

Message classification Description format

Alarm message ;A, index No., data register No., message character string [CR]
Operator message ;O, index No., data register No., message character string [CR]
PLC switch ;P, switch No., message character string [CR]
Comment message ;M, device, device No., message character string [CR]

Message classification : A one-byte alphabetic character expressing each message

code classification
Index No. : One-byte number (0 to No. of messages in the setting area - 1)
Switch No. : One-byte number (0 to No. of messages in the setting area - 1)
Data register No. : One-byte number
Device : One-byte number (1 or 2)
Device No. : One-byte number (0 to 10)
Message character : One-byte alphanumeric character, No. of characters in the setting
string area message length.
Semicolons, commas, spaces and tabs can also be used. Note that
the tab at the head of the message character string is ignored.
Semicolon( ; ) : Message data identification code
Comma( , ) : Separator between each description (a comma only is used to leave
a message character string blank)
[CR] : Line feed code, (CR/LF) or (LF).
Back slash (\) : Continue to next line. If the end of the description is a back slash,
continue to head character on next line.

[Note] Setting area

The setting area (each message's message length and message quantity declaration) used with
the old models is no longer required. The storage area in the CNC controller is always stored in
the most efficient state.
Even if the old setting area remains in the data, it will be ignored and will not result in an error.

III - 74
 6. PLC Message Development
6.2 Message Data Description Method

6.2.2 Description Method

The message data is described as text data by the following description format.

;#M700 Ladder ver1.0 ’04.03.03 --- Comment

NOPLF
；A,0,0,Emergency stop
;A,11,1,Spindle alarm
;
;
NOPLF --- Message area
; (Alarm messages)
;
NOPLF
;
;
NOPLF --- Page break code
;0,1,9000,MELDAS 600 LADDER Ver1.0
;0,20,9000,BND-400W000-A0 --- Message area
; (Operator messages)
;
NOPLF
;P,1,Program restart
;P,2,Automatic power OFF --- Message area
; (PLC switches)
;
NOPLF
;M,1,0,[ Spindle ]
;M,1,0,[ Standby 1 ] --- Message area
; (Comment)
;
END --- End code

(1) Comment
A line with a semicolon (;) followed by a sharp (#) at the head of the line are interpreted as comments.
; # comment character string [CR]

(2) Message area

Collect similar messages in a group and describe them. There is no description order in the respective
messages, but the latter description is validated if there are descriptions with the same factors (index No.,
etc.).

(3) Page break code

A page break code is described at one or more places approx. every 15 lines in the setting area and
message area. The message data may skip if there is no page break code.

(4) End code

An end code is described at the end of the description. Description after the end code are ignored.
An error will occur if there is no end code.

(5) Other descriptions

A description that does not have a semicolon (;) at the head will result in an error. A description with a
format other than the above will also result in an error.

III - 75
 6. PLC Message Development
6.2 Message Data Description Method

6.2.3 Precautions
No. of characters, quantity limitations, handling of information other than settings, handling of information
other than format are described below.

(1) Message data maximum value

The maximum value of the described messages is shown below.

Message classification Max. message length Max. No. of messages

Alarm messages 46 byte 1024
Operator messages 60 byte 512
PLC switches 14 byte 32
Comments 60 byte 100

When maximum number of characters is exceeded: An error will not occur, but the excessive characters
will not be displayed.
When maximum number of messages is exceeded: An error will occur when writing.

[Note] Two-byte data in the message character string is handled as two characters.

(2) When message cannot be described on one line

With GX Developer, up to 64 characters can be input on one line as an interlinear statement. However,
information other than the message character string (such as message classification code, index No.,
data register No., etc.), so a 60-character message character string cannot be described on one line.
A 60-character description is possible by splitting the message into two lines using a back slash (\) at the
end of the line.

;0,1,1000,Operator Message....0123456789012345678901234567890123456789

Section exceeding 64 characters, and

which cannot be described
;0,1,1000,
;Operator Message....0123456789012345678901234567890123456789

Description split into two lines using back slash

[Note] If the message is split into two lines, an asterisk (*) cannot be used as the head character of the
second line. Use another character, such as a space, in this case.

III - 76
 6. PLC Message Development
6.3 Converting Data into GX Developer Format

6.3 Converting Data into GX Developer Format

Convert the message data, which was described using a text editor or like, into GX Developer data in the
following method. Use "GX Converter (data conversion software package)" for conversion. GX Converter can
be started from the GX Developer menu.

6.3.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start GX Converter (read).

[Project] → [Import file] → [Import from TEXT ,CSV format file]

On the following screen, specify the file to be converted (M1TEST.TXT) and click [OK].

6.3.2 Conversion Format Setting

Set the conversion format on the following data conversion wizard screen.

(1) Data conversion wizard 1/4

Choose [Original Data Type]-[Fixed Width] and [Data Type]-[List], and click [Next>].

III - 77
 6. PLC Message Development
6.3 Converting Data into GX Developer Format

(2) Data conversion wizard 2/4

Just click [Next>].

(3) Data conversion wizard 3/4

Choose to highlight the instruction column part in the [Data Preview] list and choose [Column Data
Format]-[Instruction, Statement, Note]. Click [Next>].

(4) Data conversion wizard 4/4

Set the program name used on GX Developer in [Data name] and a data annotation in [Title], and click
[Finish]. The setting is complete when the completed dialog appears. Click [OK].

III - 78
 6. PLC Message Development
6.4 Entering/Editing Data using GX Developer

6.4 Entering/Editing Data using GX Developer

The message data in GX Developer are handled as the "integrated type interlinear statements" of a sequence
program. "Integrated type interlinear statements" are interlinear comments provided to assist the
understanding of the sequence program, and those transferred to the controller together with the sequence
program are called the "integrated type".
"Interlinear statements" can be displayed and edited using [Ladder] or [Instruction list].

6.4.1 Interlinear Statement Display using Circuit Display

(1) Display of project data list

Perform the following operation to display the "Project data list" window and double-click the file name to
display the edit screen. First, the normal ladder screen appears.

[View] → [Project data list], then double-click [File name you want to display].

(2) Display of message data

Perform the following operation to display the message data that are integrated type interlinear
statements.

[View] → [Statement]

III - 79
 6. PLC Message Development
6.4 Entering/Editing Data using GX Developer

6.4.2 Interlinear Statement Display using List Display

(1) Display of project data list

Perform the following operation to display the "Project data list" window and double-click the file name to
display the edit screen. First, the normal ladder screen appears.

[View] → [Project data list], then double-click [File name you want to display].

(2) Display of list data

Perform the following operation to display the list data. The list display also shows the message data that
are integrated type interlinear statements.

[View] → [Instruction list]

Perform the following operation to return to the circuit display.

[View] → [Ladder]

III - 80
 6. PLC Message Development
6.4 Entering/Editing Data using GX Developer

6.4.3 Editing of Integrated Type Interlinear Statements

(1) Circuit display

On the circuit display screen that shows the integrated type interlinear statements, double-clicking the
interlinear statement you want to edit displays the following dialog. Perform editing operation on the
dialog and click [OK] or press [Enter].

(2) List display

On the list display screen, double-clicking the interlinear statement you want to edit displays the following
dialog. Perform editing operation on the dialog and click [OK] or press [Enter].

(3) Entering new message data

• Displaying new edit screen

Perform the following operation to display the [New] dialog, and set the [Data name] and [Title]. After
setting, click [OK].

[Project] → [Edit Data] → [New]

• Changing to list display mode

Perform the following operation to display the list data.

[View] → [Instruction list]

• Entering message data

Press "Enter" on the "END" line, enter data as in the section "(2) List display", and then press "Enter"
on the next line and enter message data.

III - 81
 6. PLC Message Development
6.5 Writing to the CNC Controller

6.5 Writing to the CNC Controller

The following shows the method of transferring a message from the GX Developer to the CNC controller. The
transfer method is the same as the sequence program transfer method. Sequence program and message
data are distinguished by their file names only.

6.5.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation to display the "Write to PLC" screen, and select the file to be written.

[Online] → [Write to PLC]

The following example transfers a message first language file "M1TEST.GPG".

[Note] Restrictions for writing message data

Only one message data file can be stored in the same language. If message data in the same
language, but having a different file name, is overwritten, a dialog confirming overwrite will occur.

6.5.2 Writing Operation

When executing message write from GX developer, the data will be checked by the CNC controller.
A conversion error will occur if there is a description exceeding the specifications. An error mark will be added
to the description section in which the error occurred, and the data will be transferred to the last step.

;A,0,Alarm Message No.0. Message occuring error

;E,0,Alarm Message No.0. State with error mark added

Error mark (Alphabetic character E)

[Note] The message data file in which an error occurred cannot be displayed.

III - 82
 6. PLC Message Development
6.5 Writing to the CNC Controller

6.5.3 Operation at Write Error

The following dialog appears on the GX Developer screen when a conversion error occurs.

If the message file resulting in a conversion error is selected with the [File Selection] tab on the [Read from
PLC] screen, the file name and title will change and be displayed as shown below.
If this message file is read out to the GX Developer, it will be stored under the file name "ERRMES-0".

ERRMES-0 <-- M1TEST : Convert ERROR.

(1) (2)

(1) File name at error

(2) Title statement including transferred original file name

CAUTION
Do not read out a message file resulting in a conversion error to the GX Developer and use it.
It may contain unexpected data, and result in incorrect operations.

III - 83
 6. PLC Message Development
6.5 Writing to the CNC Controller

6.5.4 How to Confirm the Error Position

The error position can be confirmed with the PLC verification function. Refer to section "5.4 Verifying the
Sequence Program" for details on the PLC verification function.

Verify source : Select the message file transferred to the GX Developer

Verify dest. : Select the message file resulting in an error "ERRMES-0" on the CNC controller

When PLC verification is executed, the mismatching details will appear as shown in the following example.
The section with the error mark in the CNC controller side is the message description section with the check
error. Double-click the mismatch to display and to edit the corresponding part of the GX Developer side.
<Memory> indicates the GX Developer side, and <PLC> the CNC controller side.

GX Developer side CNC controller side

III - 84
 6. PLC Message Development
6.6 Reading and Verifying from the CNC Controller

6.6 Reading and Verifying from the CNC Controller

The following shows the method of reading and verifying a message from the CNC controller to the GX
Developer. The method of reading and verifying is the same as that of sequence program. Sequence
program and message data are distinguished by their file names only.

6.6.1 Menu Selection/Screen Operation

Refer to the following sections for operation methods.
For read : "5.3 Reading the Sequence Program from the CNC Controller"
For verification : "5.4 Verifying the Sequence Programs"

III - 85
 7. Device Comment Creation
7.1 Development Procedure

7. Device Comment Creation

There are no MITSUBISHI CNC-specific operations for device comments. Therefore, refer to the Operating
Manual for the development method. This section describes the device comment development procedure
outline and the development method using a general-purpose tool.

7.1 Development Procedure

There are the following two methods as a general development procedure of device comments.

(1) Indirect entry

In this method, device comments are converted into GX Developer data using a general text editor or
spreadsheet tool and data conversion package. Use this method when you want to divert the device
comments of the old model or when a device comment volume is large and you want to control them with
a commercially available tool, for example.

IBM PC/AT compatible

personal computer
Creation
Spreadsheet tool
Text editor

Device comment
for this CNC
zzzz.TXT
Conversion
GX Converter

Device comment CNC controller

for this CNC
zzzz.WCD
Editing
GX Developer

Sequence program
for this CNC
zzzz.WPG

(2) Direct entry

In this method, device comments are entered directly from GX Developer. Use this method when a
device comment volume is small or when addition or correction is to be made, for example.
There are the following three methods for direct entry from GX Developer. Refer to the Operating Manual
for details.
• Creating comments on the device comment edit screen
• Creating device comments after circuit creation during sequence program creation
• Making addition/correction to device comments in the created sequence program

III - 86
 7. Device Comment Creation
7.2 Description Method for Indirect Entry

7.2 Description Method for Indirect Entry

The following explains the description method for creating device comments using a spreadsheet tool or like.
The following example describes device comments using a spreadsheet tool.

Safety unit run Describe device, equipment

name and comment on the
Safety cover close
same line.
Operation ready complete
Oil pressure motor
Parts A ready complete

Device- Equipment Comment-

only name-only only
column column column

Column data format Explanation

Device (1) Describe a device.
• Conversion cannot be made if a device has not been described. Always
describe a device.
(2) A device is a required item. Describe it in one-byte code.
Comment (1) Describe a comment.
• It is not registered if the device part on the same row is blank or the
device is illegal.
(2) You can describe a comment of up to 32 characters.
Equipment name (1) Describe an equipment name.
• It is not registered if the device part on the same row is blank or the
device is illegal.
(2) You can describe an equipment name of up to 8 characters.

[Note] Describe data in any of the following combinations.

(1) Device, equipment name, comment
(2) Device, comment
(3) Device, equipment name

Save the above data in the CSV format. The following example shows the above data saved in the CSV
format.

X0, SAFETY, Safety unit run

X1, COVER, Safety cover close
X2, READY, Operation ready complete
X3, OIL-M, Oil pressure motor
X4, PARTS-A, Parts A ready complete

III - 87
 7. Device Comment Creation
7.3 Converting Comment Data into GX Developer Data

7.3 Converting Comment Data into GX Developer Data

Convert the comment data (CSV format), which was created using a spreadsheet tool or like, into GX
Developer data in the following method. Use "GX Converter (data conversion software package)" for
conversion. GX Converter can be started from the GX Developer menu.

7.3.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start GX Converter (read).

[Project] → [Import file] → [Import from TEXT ,CSV format file]

On the following screen, specify the file to be converted (cmnt_all.txt) and click [OK].

7.3.2 Conversion Format Setting

Set the conversion format on the following data conversion wizard screen.

(1) Data conversion wizard 1/4

Choose [Original Data Type]-[Delimited] and [Data Type]-[Comment], and click [Next>].

III - 88
 7. Device Comment Creation
7.3 Converting Comment Data into GX Developer Data

(2) Data conversion wizard 2/4

Choose [Delimiters]-[Tab] and click [Next>].

(3) Data conversion wizard 3/4

Make sure that the column parts in the [Data Preview] list are in order of [Device Number], [Label] and
[Comment], and click [Next>].

(4) Data conversion wizard 4/4

Choose [Data type]-[Common comment] or [Program comment], set the comment file name used on GX
Developer in [Data name] and a comment annotation in [Title], and click [Finish].

III - 89
 7. Device Comment Creation
7.3 Converting Comment Data into GX Developer Data

(5) Completion
The setting is complete when the following dialog appears. Click [OK].

(6) Error status

If an error occurred during conversion, its status and the line where it occurred are displayed.

III - 90
 8. Troubleshooting
8.1 List of Errors During GX Developer Online Operations

8. Troubleshooting

8.1 List of Errors During GX Developer Online Operations

If an error has occurred in GX Developer, the following dialog appears. The error message and error status
are displayed in the dialog.
Note that the display error messages are primarily for the MELSEC sequencer. Therefore, they are not
necessarily accurate for M700 CNC.
Error status is shown in the last 4 digits of the number displayed.

(1) Error message

(2) Error status

! CAUTION
! When an error occurred at GX Developer On-line function, the error message may not explain
exactly the state in the CNC side.
Always refer to the error list.

The following table indicates the causes and remedies of the errors that can occur during online operation
with the CNC. For other errors, refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual.

Status Message Cause Remedy

4002 The executed function is not An operation not supported by the Check the operation procedures.
supported. Please check the specifications was attempted.
manual and other documentation.
4005 Writing the data exceeding the Maximum number of steps that Check the size of execution area.
size of sequencer was attempted. can be executed with NC has (Refer to the section 5.2.4.)
Execute again within the range of been exceeded. Reduce the number of steps for
sequencer size. the relevant sequence program to
be executed with reference that
value.
4010 Cannot write because the PLC is The PLC of the NC is running. After stopping the PLC of the NC,
executing a RUN command. Stop start execution again.
the PLC, then execute again.
4021 The applicable drive is not ready. The specified target memory Change the target memory.
Check the applicable drive, then does not exist or is not in a usable
execute again. status.
4024 Application has turned unstable. The format does not allow the Reformat the PLC data storage
Restart keyword registration. area.
4029 Insufficient file capacity. Execute An attempt was made to write a Examine the file structure so that
again after deleting unnecessary file that exceeds the storage the data falls within the limited
files. capacity. capacity.
402b The file cannot be accessed. An attempt was made to write the After deleting the same type of file
Carry out formatting, then same type of file. from the NC side, start execution
execute again. again.
4031 The specified device No. exceeds The access request given is Check the number range of each
the permissible range. Specify a outside the accessible device device.
device No. that is within the range range.
set in the parameter.

III - 91
8. Troubleshooting
8.1 List of Errors During GX Developer Online Operations

Status Message Cause Remedy

4052 The file is write protected. The specified target memory is a Specify "internal RAM" as the
Change the file attributes to write-disabled device target memory.
enable writing to the file. (F-ROM).
4065 A mismatch occurred between the There is a problem in the device Set the number of device points.
PLC and peripheral parameters setting value. (Refer to section 4.6.)
Match the parameters between
the PLC and peripherals.
4070 The program before correction A ladder instruction outside the Perform verification to identify the
differs from the registered specification is included. instruction that is the cause of the
program. problem.
4080 Incorrect abnormal. When executing "Read from PLC" The sequence program or
or "Verify PLC" function: message data in the CNC
Data not included in the controller may be damaged.
specifications was found in the Delete the corresponding file and
designated file. start again, or initialize the PLC
data storage area. If the problem
cannot be resolved, contact the
Mitsubishi System Department.
When executing "Write to PLC": Edit the sequence program in the
Multiple END instructions were list mode to delete END
found in the designated instructions except only one at
sequence program file. the last line.
8008 An unusable port or IP address The Ethernet setting on the GX Check the Ethernet setting, or
was specified. Execute again Developer is incorrect. check the cable connection.
after checking the port/IP address
setting.
8201 Cannot communicate with the The serial communication cable is Check the serial port setting and
PLC. Execute again after faulty. cable connection.
checking the connections with the • Not connected
PLC. • DTR signal off
8301 Cannot communicate with the There was no response from the Check the following:
PLC. Execute again after NC connected with Ethernet. • CNC status
checking the connections with the • Cable connection
PLC. • Ethernet address setting
840b Cannot communicate with PLC There is no response from the Check the following.
for one of the following reasons. NC. • CNC side status
Communications timeout • The CNC has not started • Cable connection
Cable error properly. • Bit selection:
Specified baud rate not • The connection channel of the GPP communication valid
supported for connected PLC CNC side serial port is • Set the Ethernet address
Monitor condition set status is different.
read by device • The serial cable outside the
The project PLC and the specifications is used for
connected PLC are different. signal connection.
• An incorrect Ethernet address
is set on the NC side

[Note] Read "PLC" in the message as "CNC controller".

III - 92
 8. Troubleshooting
8.2 Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side

8.2 Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side

When an error occurs during starting or executing a sequence program, user PLC alarm status will be
entered. There are three methods of confirming alarm details.
• Method by using the "ALARM" screen on the CNC controller setting display unit.
• Method by using the "PLC DIAGNOSIS" screen of the internal PLC edit function.
• Method by using the GX Developer "PLC diagnostics" window.
In the GX Developer "PLC diagnostics" window, the same kind of information as displayed in the "ALARM"
screen of the CNC controller setting display unit is displayed in a simple manner. In addition, the ladder in
which error has occurred is displayed, as well.

8.2.1 Operating Procedures

With the GX Developer, follow the procedures given below to startup the "PLC diagnostics" window.
[Diagnostics] → [PLC diagnostics]
The following screen is displayed. Error information is indicated in the area (a) to (f).
(a) (b)

(e)

(c)
(g)

(f)
(d)

(a) PLC operation status display: RUN/STOP status of PLC is displayed.

(b) Rotary switch status display: The status of rotary switch "CS2" of the control unit is displayed.
(c) Error status display: "ERROR" section flickers in red when an error has occurred.
(d) Error information display: Error No. and error occurrence time are displayed.
• If there is no error, "No error" is displayed.
• Error No. is the upper 2 digits of the CNC side alarm sub status1.
• Further detail is available upon double-click. (Described later)
(e) Error message display: A brief message corresponding with the error No. is displayed.
• A character string with up to 16 alphabetical characters that shows the alarm details.
(f) Error jump button: Ladder in which error has occurred is displayed. (Described later)
(g) Error display, start monitor and stop monitor button: Monitoring error information is started/stopped.
[Note] All the buttons other than (a) to (g) and [CLOSE] do not have any significant meaning. Therefore,
do not touch them.

III - 93
 8. Troubleshooting
8.2 Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side

8.2.2 Details of Each Display

(1) Rotary switch status display (b)
The status of control unit rotary switch "CS2" is displayed.
"STOP" is displayed when "CS2" is set to "1", "RUN" is displayed for all the other settings.
"CS2" is usually set to "0". By setting to "1", PLC status can be compulsorily changed to STOP.
(2) Error status (c), error information (d), error message display (e)
The error occurred last after PLC RUN is displayed here. The display will not be changed until a new
error has occurred.
Error display will be cleared only when RUN is executed from PLC STOP.

8.2.3 Detailed Error Information Display

Detailed error information can be displayed in the "PLC diagnostics window" following the operating
procedures below.
Double-click "(d) error display list box" in the "PLC diagnostics window".
The "Error details" screen (see below) is displayed.
(1) When there is a cause in the sequence program:

(a)

(b)

(a) File name: The name of sequence program file in which error has occurred is displayed.
(b) Sequence step No.: The step No. for which an error occurred in (a) is displayed.

(2) When there is a cause in the parameter setting:

(a)
(b)

(a) Parameter No.: Illegal parameter No. is displayed.

1005: Common pointer No.
7000: Program setting
(b) File name: The name of parameter setting file relating with the error is displayed.

[Note] The displays other than (a) and (b) in (1) and (2) above have no significant meanings.
Also, depending on the error factors, (a) or (b) may not be displayed.

III - 94
 8. Troubleshooting
8.2 Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side

8.2.4 Display of the Error-generated Ladder

The ladder in which an error has occurred is displayed in the "PLC diagnostics" window. By following the
operations below, the error-generated ladder which exists in the project currently opened with the GX
Developer can be displayed in the edit mode.
Click "Error Jump" button (f) in the "PLC diagnostics" window.
The ladder of the file in which an error has occurred is displayed in the other window. Then the cursor
moves to the step where the error has occurred.

The following conditions are required to accurately display the error-generated ladder section.
• The file name and sequence program No. must be displayed in the "Error details" screen.
(In this case, no response or error dialog display will be given even if the button is clicked.)
• A project including the sequence program currently in operation in the CNC controller side must be
opened.
(Even when a project not in operation is opened, if the same program name already exists, a ladder
different from the actual error-generated ladder is displayed. So, be careful.)
• Depending on the type of error, sequence step No. does not show the error-generated ladder
accurately.

8.2.5 List of Corresponding PLC Alarms

The followings are the PLC alarms whose details and/or ladders in which an error has occurred are
displayed in the "PLC diagnostics" window. Refer to "Appendix 4．List of PLC Alarms" for further detailed
cause and remedy for each alarm.

III - 95
 8. Troubleshooting
8.2 Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side

NC side NC alarm display GX Developer PC diagnosis display

File name
Sub status

Step No.
Error Diagnosis display Error details
Message
1 2 code character string

U10 0x0010 - 0 PROG. TIME OVER - - Scan time error

0x0040 - 0 PLCSEL ERR - - Ladder selection parameter error
Illegal PLC 0x04xx STP 4 S/W INT. ERR Software instruction interruption error
(Use PLC 0x20xx STP 20 JUMP LABEL ERR Label branching error
0x21xx STP 21 DUP. LABEL(P) Label duplicate error
illegal) 0x22xx - 22 LOCAL LABEL OVER - Local label over
0x23xx - 23 LABEL PARA. ERR - - Global label boundary value error
0x24xx STP 24 RSV. LABEL ERR Reserved label error
0x25xx - 25 PRG. PARA. ERR - Program setting error
0x26xx - 26 MISSING RET INS. - RET instruction error
Program No. if
0x27xx - 27 LAD. CODE ERR - Ladder code error
the lower 16 0x28xx - 28 MISSING LAD(M) - - No main process ladder
0x29xx - 29 EXE. AREA OVER - Execution area over
bits are 0x30xx STP 30 FOR INS. OVER FOR instruction nesting over
displayed as 0x31xx STP 31 NEXT INS. ERR NEXT instruction error
0x32xx STP 32 BREAK INS. ERR BREAK instruction error
"xx" in NC 0x400* - 40 PLC SYSTEM DOWN - - PLC system error
alarm display Exceptional interruption (BCD instruction error)
0x80xx STP 80 EXC.INT(BCD)
has occurred.
sub status1. Exceptional interruption (BIN instruction error)
0x81xx STP 81 EXC.INT(BIN)
has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (bus error) has
0x82xx STP 82 EXC.INT(D-BUS)
Step No. if occurred.
Exceptional interruption (unpopulated instruction
"STP" in sub 0x83xx 83 EXC.INT(INST.)
error) has occurred.
status 2. Exceptional interruption (instruction format error)
0x84xx 84 EXC.INT(I-FMT)
has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (instruction bus error)
0x85xx 85 EXC.INT(I-BUS)
has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (CALL/RET instruction
0x86xx 86 EXC.INT(CALL)
error) has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (memory area error) has
0x87xx 87 EXC.INT(MEM.)
occurred.
Exceptional interruption (division-by-zero error)
0x88xx 88 EXC.INT(ZERO)
has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (Double exceptional
0x89xx 89 EXC.INT(DUP.)
generation error) has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (HALT instruction halt)
0x90xx 90 EXC.INT(HALT)
has occurred.

: Correct information is displayed : Information may not be accurate -: Not displayed

III - 96
 8. Troubleshooting
8.3 Initialization for PLC Data Storage Area

8.3 Initialization for PLC Data Storage Area

In the following cases, initialize the CNC controller's temporary memory area and start again.
The internal F-ROM is not initialized by this initialization operation. To hold the recovered state after the
power is turned OFF, it must be stored in the internal F-ROM.
• If an error occurs while writing to the CNC controller
• If the state cannot be recovered even after remedying the error
• To delete the stored data at once

8.3.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Online] → [Format PLC memory]

On the following screen, click [Execute].

[Note] As [Target memory], only "PLC RAM/Device memory" is valid.

The setting is not necessary for [Format Type].

The setting is completed when the following dialog appears. Click [OK]. All data stored in the temporary
memory have been deleted and initialized.

III - 97
 9. Procedures for Backing Up Data Such as Sequence Programs
9.1 Backup Target Data

9. Procedures for Backing Up Data Such as Sequence Programs

This section explains the methods for backing up the developed sequence programs and PLC related data in
a personal computer.

9.1 Backup Target Data

The following four types of data can be backed up.
Related data classification Remarks
1 Sequence program Sequence program code
2 Parameter Execution order setting information, etc.
3 Sequence program comment GX Developer comment data
Messages in 1st to 8th languages Message data such as alarm messages, operator messages
4
and PLC switches in each language

9.2 Backup Procedures

The data is backed up from the CNC controller's input/output screen.
Designate the transmission source information (CNC controller side) and transmission target information
(personal computer side) on the input/output screen. When transmission is started, the sequence programs,
etc., stored in the RAM will be backed up in the personal computer.
The input/output screen and operation procedures are shown below.

(a)
(b)

(c)

(d)
(e)
(f)

Refer to the instruction manual for the respective model for details on the input/output screen.

III - 98
 9. Procedures for Backing Up Data Such as Sequence Programs
9.2 Backup Procedures

(1) CNC controller settings

Set the "Device name", "Directory" and "File name" at "A: Device".

(a) Setting "Device name"

Select "Memory".
(b) Setting "Directory"
Input the character string "/LAD".
(c) Setting "File name"
"USERPLC.LAD" is automatically set when "Directory" is set.

(2) Personal computer settings (Setting "Device name", "Directory" and "File name")
Set the "Device name", "Directory" and "File name" at "B: Device".

(d) Setting "Device name"

Select "HD".
(e) Setting "Directory"
Input the character string "/".
(f) Setting "File name"
Set the name of the file to be stored. When omitted, "USERPLC.LAD" is assigned.

(3) Transmission
The backup process starts when the menu key "Send A→B" is pressed.

9.3 Restoring Backed Up Data

The data is restored following the backup operation in reverse (Set personal computer settings in "A: Device"
and the CNC controller settings in "B: Device".)
The PLC must be STOP before restoration can be started.

III - 99
IV EXPLANATION OF BUILT-IN EDITING FUNCTION
 1. Outline

1. Outline
This manual explains the MITSUBISHI CNC 700/70 Series PLC onboard function. (Operations related to the
PLC carried out with the CNC unit are collectively called as "onboard".)
Integration with the MELSEC Series PLC development tool (GX Developer) has been improved to enable
reading and writing of data saved in each unit.
700 Series onboard includes "Standard operation mode" and "Simple operation mode".
Standard operation mode: All the onboard functions are available.
Simple operation mode: Limited to the functions mainly related to ladder monitoring, which are designed
for routine maintenance operations.
Operation mode at the time of onboard startup can be switched between standard operation mode and
simple operation mode by changing bit selection parameter settings. Switching modes is also possible after
the onboard has been started.

IV - 1
 1. Outline

The onboard functions are listed below.

List of functions
700
Function Purpose of function 70
Std Sim
„ Circuit monitoring
Monitor start/stop This starts or stops the monitor.
Device registration monitor This monitors the circuit and the device registration
simultaneously.
Circuit registration monitor This monitors the circuit and the arbitrary registered circuit
simultaneously.
Registered circuit all delete This deletes all circuits registered with the circuit registration
monitor.
Device test This changes the device ON/OFF state, and changes the
device value.
Monitor stop condition setting This stops the monitor when the set device or step No.
conditions are established.
Current value monitor This changes the circuit monitor device current value
changeover (10/16) between the decimal and hexadecimal display.
„ Circuit editing
Edit mode changeover This edits the circuit.
Line insert This inserts a line at the cursor position.
Line delete This deletes the line at the cursor position.
Copy & Paste This copies and pastes the circuit in the designated range.
Statement edit This edits the statements.
Note edit This edits the notes.
Comment edit This edits the comments.
PLC message edit This edits the PLC message.
Conversion This converts the circuit.
Undo This undoes the last edit operation.
„ Circuit search
Simple search This executes a simple search of contact, coil and device.
This returns to the start.
Contact coil search This searches the contact coils.
Device search This searches the devices.
Instruction search This searches the instructions.
Step No. search This searches the step Nos.
Character string search This searches the character strings.
AB contact change This changes the circuit's contact between A and B.
Device replace This replaces the devices.
TC setting value change This changes the timer and counter setting values in a batch.

IV - 2
1. Outline

700
Function Purpose of function 70
Std Sim
„ Circuit display
Comment display This sets whether to display a comment.
Program changeover This changes the PLC program in circuit display. (Device
comment tracking)
Data changeover This changes the PLC data to be edited.
Circuit display This sets the circuit display size and the maximum number
of contacts on one circuit line.
Zoom display This switches the circuit display size.
Compact (64%) [Displays 11 contacts in 640x480 full
screen] (70 Series: Reduction)
Reduction (80%) [Displays 9 contacts in 640x480 full
screen] (70 Series: Standard)
Standard (100%) [Displays 9 contacts in 800x600 full
screen] (70 Series: Expansion)
Expansion (120%) [Displays 11 contacts in 1024x768 full
screen]
Zoom cursor This enlarges the cursor display area at the Compact display
(70 Series: Reduction).
Comment ON/OFF This changes ON/OFF of the display for the contents set
with "Comment display".
Comment line designation This specifies the number of lines for the device comment
display between 1 to 4.
Current value monitor line This specifies whether to display the current value at
delete monitoring.
„ Tool
Contact coil usage list This displays the device's step No. and usage state.
Device usage list This displays the usage list in a batch for each device type.
Program check This checks the sequence program (ladder).
„ PLC data setting
Add This adds PLC data to the onboard editing area.
Delete This deletes PLC data from the onboard editing area.
Name change This changes the name of the PLC in the onboard editing
area.
Initial setting This initializes the data in the onboard editing area.
„ Device operation
Device batch monitor This monitors the devices in a batch.
Device registration monitor This monitors registered devices on a dedicated screen.
Sampling trace This executes sampling trace.
„ Parameters
Program setting This determines the sequence program (ladder) execution
order.
Common pointer setting This displays the common pointer head P No.

IV - 3
1. Outline

700
Function Purpose of function 70
Std Sim
„ NC file operation
File list This displays a list of the stored files. (execution step size is
displayed)
Open This displays the PLC data in the temporary memory at the
onboard editing area.
Manually executed; the menu is selected when needed
Automatically executed at power ON; no menu exists
Save This saves the PLC data edited on the onboard in the
temporary memory.
Manually executed; the menu is selected when needed
(execution step size is displayed)
Automatically executed at conversion; no menu exists.
Verify This verifies the PLC program in the onboard editing area
with the PLC data in the temporary memory.
ROM-Write This saves the PLC data in the temporary memory to the
ROM.
Delete This deletes the PLC data from the temporary memory.
Format This formats the temporary memory.
PLC RUN/STOP This runs or stops the PLC.
PLC VERSION UP This writes the ladders files in the external device into the
NC's temporary memory and ROM.
Disable keyword This releases the keyword that has been set to the PLC data
in NC.
„ External file operations
Open project This displays the PLC data in a project at the onboard.
Save project This saves the PLC data edited on the onboard in a project.
Delete project This deletes a project from the external device.
Verify project This verifies the PLC data edited on the onboard with the
PLC data in a project.
„ Environment setting
Operation mode changeover This changes modes between simple operation mode and
standard operation mode.
NC file operation setting This sets the settings relating to the NC file operation.
„ Diagnosis
PLC diagnosis This displays the error occurred during sequence program
(ladder) execution.
„ Menu change
Switch standard/simple menu This switches between standard and simple operation
key mode.

IV - 4
 1. Outline

Corresponding table for the files handled/not handled in simple operation mode, standard operation mode
and 70 Series is shown below.
Standard operation mode Simple operation mode 70 Series
Handling Display Edit Handling Display Edit Handling Display Edit
Sequence program
(Ladder)
PLC message data
Parameter
(Note2) (Note2) (Note2) (Note2) (Note2) (Note2)
Device comment
(Note1)
(Note 1) Alphanumerical characters only
(Note 2) The available parameters are restricted to those for the program settings and the like.

IV - 5
 2. Starting and Ending Onboard
2.1 Starting

2. Starting and Ending Onboard

2.1 Starting
Onboard starts up when F0 key is pressed on the NC.
In 700 Series, operation mode (Standard operation mode / Simple operation mode) at the time of startup can
be determined by bit1 of the bit selection #6451.

76543210 Bit
#(6451) Data ( 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 )

0: Startup with standard operation mode

Use #6451 1: Startup with simple operation mode

700
70
2.1.1 Startup with Standard Operation Mode Standard Simple

Initial screen

(1) State at Initial Startup

The state of the menu buttons on the main screen are as follows at the very initial startup of the onboard.

Menu button State

FILE This can be pressed at any time.
NC FILE This can be pressed at any time.
EXTERNAL FILE This can be pressed at any time.
LADDER This cannot be pressed until the program data is opened in the
onboard editing area.
DEVICE This cannot be pressed until the program data is opened in the
onboard editing area.
PARAM. This cannot be pressed until the parameter data is opened in the
onboard editing area.
DIAGNOS. This can be pressed at any time.
ENVIRON. SETTING This can be pressed at any time.
HELP This can be pressed at any time.
END This can be pressed at any time.

IV - 6
 2. Starting and Ending Onboard
2.1 Starting

(2) PLC data previously opened on the onboard

(a) PLC data on the onboard editing area
PLC data which was previously opened on the onboard will not be retained.
Open the program data from NC FILE or EXTERNAL FILE again.
(b) Connected NC
At the initial start-up, the onboard has to be connected to the same NC as the setting and display
device screen side. Connected NC is displayed in the lower right corner of all the screens.
700
2.1.2 Startup with Simple Operation Mode 70
Standard Simple
Initial screen

When starting up the onboard, all the files except for PLC message data (sequence program, parameter,
and device comment) will be read out from NC temporary memory and the sequence program will be
automatically displayed on the ladder monitor screen.

NC
When onboard
Temporary Simple Onboard
operation mode Sequence program is
Sequence program is active displayed on ladder
Parameter
monitor screen
Device comment

Parameter
PLC message Device comment

• When the number of stored sequence programs is one, that sequence program is displayed on the
ladder monitor.
• When the number of stored sequence program is two or more, the upper level program determined by
the parameter setting is displayed on the ladder monitor screen.
• When the device comment storage destination is specified with the standard operation mode
environment setting menu key, device comment is read out from the specified storage area.

IV - 7
 2. Starting and Ending Onboard
2.1 Starting

2.1.3 70 Series Startup 700

70
Standard Simple

Initial screen

When starting up the onboard, all the files except for PLC message data (sequence program, parameter,
and device comment) will be read out from NC temporary memory and the sequence program will be
automatically displayed on the ladder monitor screen.

NC
When onboard
Temporary 70 Series is Onboard
active Sequence program is
Sequence program
displayed on ladder
Parameter
monitor screen
Device comment

Parameter
PLC message Device comment

• When the number of stored sequence programs is one, that sequence program is displayed on the
ladder monitor.
• When the number of stored sequence program is two or more, the upper level program determined by
the parameter setting is displayed on the ladder monitor screen.
• If no sequence program can be read, the MAIN screen appears.

IV - 8
 2. Starting and Ending Onboard
2.2 Ending

700
2.2 Ending Standard Simple
70

In 700 Series, onboard ends when the END menu key on the MAIN screen is pressed.
If there is any editing data which has not been saved in the temporary memory or external device when
ending, the "END CONFIRMATION" popup screen will open.
In 70 Series, onboard ends when the CNC power is turned OFF.

„ When there is editing data which has not been saved

"END CONFIRMATION" popup screen (In 700 Series)

Menu corresponding to
the popup screen

This cancels the ending process.

This ends the onboard. Any editing data which has not been saved will be lost.

(Note 1) If NC is shut down (power turned OFF) without executing ROM-Write (700 Series/ 70 Series)
The data in the onboard editing area and the data in the NC's temporary memory will be lost when
the NC power is turned OFF. Always save this data on a ROM using ROM-Write.
(Note 2) If onboard is not ended with END menu (700 Series)
The data opened in the onboard editing area will be discarded.
If the program data is under the NC automatic update mode (LADDER screen's background color is
white), the data up to the "converted" circuit will be saved in the NC's temporary data. (However, if it
is not written to the ROM it will be lost when the NC power is turned OFF.)
If the program data is under the local editing mode (LADDER screen's background color is light
blue), the data including the "converted" circuit will be lost. (The last "save" state will be retained.)

IV - 9
 2. Starting and Ending Onboard
2.3 Switching from Simple Operation Mode to Standard Operation Mode

2.3 Switching from Simple Operation Mode to Standard Operation Mode

700
70
Standard Simple

(1) Switching method

When "MAIN" → "SWITCH STANDARD MENU KEY" menu key is pressed, the following confirmation
message will be displayed.

It switches to the standard operation menu key. Is it good? YES/NO

When switching from simple operation mode to standard operation mode, PLC data in the onboard editing
area will be held as it is.
Simple operation mode Standard operation mode

Parameter Parameter
(*)

Program Device Program Device

AAA Comment(*) AAA comment

(*) Change not possible with simple (Switch with the data opened.)
operation mode

IV - 10
 2. Starting and Ending Onboard
2.4 Switching from Standard Operation Mode to Simple Operation Mode

2.4 Switching from Standard Operation Mode to Simple Operation Mode

700
70
Standard Simple

When switching from standard operation mode to simple operation mode, the state will be where the onboard
is turned OFF and ON again. All the PLC data in the onboard editing area will be discarded and automatically
reloaded from the NC temporary memory area.

Standard operation mode Simple operation mode

Parameter Parameter

Program Device Program Device

AAA comment AAA comment

(State at the time of onboard startup)

(1) Switching method

When "SWITCH SIMPLE MENU KEY" menu key is pressed, the following "END CONFIRMATION" popup
screen will be displayed.

"END CONFIRMATION" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

This cancels the ending process.

This ends the onboard. Restart the onboard with the simple operation mode menu
key. Any editing data which has not been saved will be lost.

IV - 11
 3. Screens
3.1 Screen Resolution

3. Screens
700
70
Standard Simple
3.1 Screen Resolution VGA only
The setting and display unit's screen resolution differs according to the NC model. Onboard is compatible
with the following two screen resolutions. This manual uses the VGA (640 x 480 pixel) screen display as an
example.
(1) VGA (640 × 480 pixels)
(2) XGA (1024 × 768 pixels)
(Note 1) 70 Series onboard is compatible with VGA only.

700
70
3.2 Types Standard Simple

The following three types of screens are displayed with the onboard.
Full screen This screen uses the full screen area.
Split screen This screen splits the full screen into two areas and displays.
Popup screen This screen is displayed over the full screen display or split screen.
70 Series have two display types; "window type" and "bar type".

700
3.3 Full Screen Display Standard Simple
70

The full screen display ("LADDER" screen) is shown below.

In 700 Series
Cursor display
Title display

Scroll bar
The position
changes according
to the screen
movement.

Message display

Connected NC
confirmation
warning display

Connected NC name

Menu horizontal
movement enabled
status display

Menu hierarchical movement enabled status display

IV - 12
 3. Screens
3.3 Full Screen Display

In 70 Series
Cursor display
Title display

Scroll bar
The position
changes according
to the screen
movement.

Message display

Connected NC
confirmation
warning display

Connected NC name

Menu horizontal
movement enabled
status display

Menu hierarchical movement enabled status display

(1) Title display

The currently displayed screen's menu hierarchy, program name, function mode (WRITE, MONITOR,
etc.), editing mode (OVR.WRITE, INSERT), and total number of steps are displayed.
Refer to "3.9 Screen Title Display" for details.

(2) Scroll bar

This displays the position of the entire program.
(Note 1) In 700 Series, if the model is not provided with a pointing device such as a mouse or touch
panel, the screen cannot be moved with the scroll bar. (Refer to (3) Moving the screen.)
(Note 2) 70 Series cannot move the screen with the scroll bar, even if any pointing device is provided.

(3) Screen movement

The screen can be moved with the following methods.
• Move the cursor with the arrow keys. (Move further at the top or bottom of the screen.)
• Move in page units with the page keys and .
(Note) If there is an unconverted circuit on the "LADDER" screen, the movement range may be limited.

IV - 13
 3. Screens
3.3 Full Screen Display

(4) Cursor display on the screen

The cursor displayed on the screen changes according to the function mode and writing mode state.
Cursor
Function mode Writing mode
700 Series 70 Series
WRITE OVR. WRITE Blue Blue
Not filled in Not filled in
INSERT Purple Purple
Upper left Upper left
corner is filled in corner is filled in
MONITOR Blue Red
START/STOP MONITOR Filled in Not filled in

(5) Message display, progress display

Warning messages are displayed. ("WRITE RADDER TO ROM", etc.)
In 70 Series, a process progress (progress bar) is additionally displayed.

(6) Connected NC confirmation warning display

When the NC connected at the setting display unit screen side and the NC connected with the onboard
differ, the warning is displayed. However, currently this display is not available.

(7) Connected NC name display

The number of the NC to which the onboard is currently connected is displayed.
Connected NC name display Connected NC
M01 Connected with machine No. 1 NC
M02 Connected with machine No. 2 NC
: :

(8) Menu hierarchical movement enabled status display, menu horizontal movement enabled status
display
"Menu hierarchical movement enabled status display" is displayed when switching to the menu in the
upward hierarchy is possible with menu key. If this movement is not possible, this will not be
displayed.
"Menu horizontal movement enabled status display" is displayed when switching menus within the same
hierarchy or switching to the menu on the second page with menu key. If these movements are not
possible, this will not be displayed.

IV - 14
 3. Screens
3.4 Color-coded Display of "LADDER" Screen

3.4 Color-coded Display of "LADDER" Screen

The "LADDER" screen (screen on which ladder circuit is displayed) is color-coded into two types and
displayed.
700
70
Standard Simple
(1) NC automatic update mode
When the circuit is converted, the circuits of the program in the onboard editing area are converted, and the
program with the same name in the NC temporary memory is rewritten.
Background
Mode Display conditions
color
NC automatic update mode White • When displaying the circuits for
a program for which OPEN ,
SAVE has been executed
from the "NC FILE" menu.

700
70
(2) Local editing mode Standard Simple

When the circuit is converted, only the program in the onboard editing area is rewritten.
Background
Mode Display conditions
color
Local editing mode Light blue • When displaying the circuits for
a program for which
OPEN PROJECT ,
SAVE PROJECT has been
executed from the "EXTERNAL
FILE" menu.
• When displaying the circuits for
a program for which the data
has been added or the data
name has been changed with
FILE on the "MAIN" menu.
• When displaying the circuits for
a program newly created with
INITIAL SETTING from the
"FILE" menu.

IV - 15
 3. Screens
3.5 Split Display

3.5 Split Display 700

70
Standard Simple
The split display ("LADDER MONITOR" screen) is shown below.
(The screen is an example of 700 Series)
Cursor display
Title display

Split screen
display

Close split screen Connected NC name

(1) Title display

The currently displayed screen's menu hierarchy, program name, function mode (WRITE, MONITOR,
etc.), editing mode (OVR.WRITE, INSERT), and total number of steps are displayed.
Refer to "3.9 Screen Title Display" for details.

(2) Cursor movement between split screens

Use "MOVEMENT ON SPLIT SCREEN" menu key to switch cursor between two split screens.
When the screen is not split, menu key is masked.
"#" key can also be used for switching cursor.

(3) Screen movement

The operation is the same as for the full screen display. Note that only the screen in which the cursor is
displayed can be moved. In simple operation mode, when jumping to the other screen, split display will
be cleared.

(4) Screen cursor display and message display

These displays are the same as the full screen.

(5) Split screen menu key

When " " menu key is pressed, the split screen is closed.

IV - 16
 3. Screens
3.6 Popup Screen

3.6 Popup Screen 700

70
Standard Simple
The popup screen ("SELECT PROJECT" screen) is shown below.
(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Popup screen

Menu keys change according to the popup screen

(1) Menus corresponding to popup screen

When a popup screen appears, menu keys corresponding to each item on the popup screen will appear.
The popup screen can be operated with these menu keys.
Refer to "3.11 Basic Screen Operations" for details.

(2) Closing the popup screen

Press the key to close the popup screen.

IV - 17
 3. Screens
3.7 Confirmation Popup Screen

3.7 Confirmation Popup Screen 700

70
Standard Simple

This popup screen opens to reconfirm the execution of operations or to confirm writing of data during PLC
RUN.

(Example) "END CONFIRMATION" popup screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

700
70
3.8 Error Display Popup Screen Standard Simple

This popup screen opens to reconfirm the execution of operations or to confirm writing of data during PLC
RUN.

(Example) "ERROR" popup screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Menus corresponding to
popup screen

IV - 18
 3. Screens
3.9 Screen Title Display

3.9 Screen Title Display 700

70
Standard Simple

Menu hierarchy display Program name Mode 1 Mode 2 Total steps

(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

(1) Menu hierarchy display

The hierarchy of the currently displayed menu is displayed. The levels are delimited with "/".
(Example) For "EDIT" menu: "Main/circuit/edit"

(2) Program name

The name of the program currently targeted for editing and monitoring with onboard is displayed.

(3) Mode 1 display

The edit mode and monitor mode are indicated. The cursor display changes according to the mode
status.
Mode 1 Status
WRITE Indicates circuit editing.
MONITOR Indicates monitoring is active.
STOP MONITOR Indicates monitoring is stopped.

(4) Mode 2 display

OVR.WRITE/INSERT are indicated for the WRITE mode, and the PLC RUN/STOP are indicated during
MONITOR and MONITOR STOP. The cursor display changes according to OVR.WRITE and INSERT.
Mode 2 Status
OVR. WRITE The circuit can be edited with overwriting.
INSERT The circuit can be edited with insertion.
RUN The PLC is running.
STOP The PLC is stopped.

(5) Total number of steps

The total number of steps in the program targeted for editing is displayed.

700
70
3.10 Menu Key Display Standard Simple

The menu keys displayed at the bottom of the screen change according to the configuration given in "5.2
Menu Key". When a mouse or touch panel is used, pressing of the menu button can be confirmed by the
instant denting and highlighting of the button. (The button is not highlighted in 70 Series.)
The menu keys, which allow the usage of INPUT key when entered, are enhanced (by the black border).

(Note) If a popup screen is displayed, the menu keys will change according to each item on the popup
screen.

IV - 19
 3. Screens
3.11 Basic Screen Operations

3.11 Basic Screen Operations 700

70
Standard Simple

The basic screen operations used commonly for each screen are explained in this section.

(1) Selection of items on screen

The input and selection items on the screen can be selected with the following two methods.

[Method 1] Selection of items with TAB keys ( →| , |← )

When the TAB key is pressed, the active window will move in order of the items which must be input
or selected. If the key is pressed when the active window is at the last item, it will return to the head
item. The selected item is highlighted in light purple.

(Example) For "COMMENT DISPLAY" screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

(1) When →| is pressed, the selection items (light

(2) purple items) will move in the forward order 1 to 4.
(3) When |← is pressed, the selection items (light
purple items) will move in the reverse order 4 to 1.
(4)

[Method 2] Selection of items with menu keys (Direct selection of selection items)
When the menu button with the same name as the item displayed on the screen is pressed, the item
can be selected. Once the button is pressed, the item name is displayed in "light purple' and the data
can be set.

(Example) For "PROGRAM CHANGE" screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Press

IV - 20
 3. Screens
3.11 Basic Screen Operations

(2) Pressing buttons in screen (700 Series only)

The buttons on the screen can be operated with the following two methods.

[Method 1] Select button with TAB key and then press INPUT key.

(Example) Operation using same menu as button on "COMMENT DISPLAY" screen.

Select the SET button with the

TAB key, and then press the
INPUT key.

(Supplement) If operations are possible with the touch panel, the buttons on the screen can be directly
pressed.

[Method 2] Press the menu key with the same name as the button.

(Example) Operation using same menu as button on "PROGRAM CHANGE" screen.

IV - 21
 3. Screens
3.11 Basic Screen Operations

(3) Setting characters (values)

Characters (values) can be set in the items with a white box. The input methods are explained below.
(a) Select the item to be input. Refer to (1) for details.
(b) Input the data.
(Example) To input X80 on the "CROSS REF. LIST" screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

(4) Setting unique selection items

Only one data item is selected from two or more data items. The highlighted data is the currently selected
item. There are two methods to change the selection.
[Method 1] When the menu key with the same name as the item is pressed, the selection data will move
in the right direction. If the currently selected item is at the far right, the selection data will
return to the head.
[Method 2] After selecting the item with the TAB key, change the data with the ← and → keys.

(Example) To select ZOOM DISPLAY on the "LADDER DISPLAY" screen (The screen is an example of
700 Series)

[Method 1]

The selected data changes in sequence as

the ZOOM DISPLAY menu key is
pressed.

[Method 2] ← Moves in the left direction.

→ Moves in the right direction.

IV - 22
 3. Screens
3.11 Basic Screen Operations

(5) Setting the list selection items

Data can be selected from a list. When the menu key with the same name as the item name is pressed,
or when an item is selected with a TAB key, a list will appear. The data at the very top is selected
(highlighted) first, and the selected data can be changed with the ↑ and ↓ arrow keys.
Press the INPUT key to set the selection.

(Example) When "EXE. ORDER" is selected on the "PROGRAM SETTING" screen (The screen is an
example of 700 Series)

Select the data with the ↑ and ↓ arrow keys.

Set the selection with the INPUT key.

(6) Items with validity setting (700 Series only)

The validity of each item can be set with the following two methods.

[Method 1] When the menu key with the same name as the item is pressed, the status will alternate
between valid (with check mark) and invalid (no check mark).
[Method 2] When the SP key is pressed after selecting the item with the TAB key, the validity status
will alternate.

(Example) For "COMMENT DISPLAY" screen

[Method 1]
Press COMMENT menu key.

[Method 2]
After selecting item with TAB key,
press SP key.

IV - 23
 3. Screens
3.11 Basic Screen Operations

(7) Selecting tree-structure data

Tree-structure data is configured of data and a directory. The data and directories are shown below.

Indicates valid data

- Directory 1
<Moving the data and directory>
† Data 1 • The data will move by one item according to the direction of the
† Data 2 pressed arrow key ↑ , ↓ , ← or → .
:
† Data 3 <Setting the data validity>
The following two methods of operations are available.
+ Directory 2
• Move the cursor to the data to be set, and press SP .
(The validity will change with each press.)
- Directory 3 • Move the cursor to the data to be set, and press the
"SELECT/CANCEL" menu key.
† Data 4 (The validity will change with each press.)
<Directory + and - >
• If the + key is pressed in the → state, the data in the
directory will appear.
• If the - key is pressed in the ← state, the data in the
directory will be hidden.

(Example) NC file operation - "OPEN" screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

IV - 24
 3. Screens
3.12 Language

3.12 Language 700

70
Standard Simple

3.12.1 Screen Display Language

The language used for the buttons, items and error messages on the onboard can be changed with the NC's
language parameter.
If the language parameter value is not for the valid language, the language will be handled as English
characters.

3.12.2 Comment (Statement, Note, Comment, Device Name) Language

The fonts used to display comments (STATE, NOTE, COMMENT, ALIAS) can be changed with the language
parameter setting. If the language parameter value is not for the valid language, the language will be handled
as English characters.

IV - 25
 4. PLC Data
4.1 PLC Data Storage Area

700
4. PLC Data Standard Simple
70

4.1 PLC Data Storage Area

The PLC data is stored in the following areas of the NC.

Storage area Application

Temporary memory area This area stores the data when executing the PLC. It can be edited with
onboard and GX Developer. The data in this area is lost when the NC
power is turned OFF.
ROM area This area stores the PLC data.
The data in this area is not lost even when the NC power is turned OFF.
(Note) The data in the temporary memory is lost when the NC power is
turned OFF, so always save the data in the ROM area.
Onboard editing area This area is used to edit and monitor the PLC data with the onboard.
When editing or monitoring, open the PLC data in the temporary memory
into the onboard editing area.
External device PLC data can be read from the external device to the onboard editing
area. The GX Developer project data can be read.

PLC data storage area configuration drawing - Standard operation mode -

Automatic Manual
External device

Save project Open project

NC
Convert
ROM-Write
ROM area or save Onboard
Temporary
memory area editing area
Copy when
power is Open
turned ON

Ladder execution Edit and monitor

PLC data storage area configuration drawing - Simple operation mode -

Automatic Manual

NC
Auto
ROM-Write
ROM area Temporary saving Onboard
memory area editing area
Copy when Auto
power is readout
turned ON

Ladder execution Edit and monitor

IV - 26
 4. PLC Data
4.1 PLC Data Storage Area

PLC data storage area configuration drawing - 70 Series -

External device (CF)

Save project Open project

Automatic Manual

NC
Auto
ROM-Write
ROM area Temporary saving Onboard
memory area editing area
Copy when Auto
power is readout
turned ON

Ladder execution Edit and monitor

IV - 27
 4. PLC Data
4.2 Type of Data

4.2 Type of Data

Onboard can handle the same type of PLC data (programs, device comments, parameters) as GX
Developer.
(Note 1) The following GX Developer data cannot be used with onboard.
• Parameter's network parameter data
• Device memory data
• Device default value data

List of data handled by onboard

Data type Data name Application
Program The data name is configured of up to The user PLC, statements and notes can be stored.
eight arbitrary one-byte uppercase The PLC messages (alarm, operator, PLC switch,
alphanumeric characters *1 comment) can be stored with a reserved name.
(Note) A reserved name is used only
when storing the PLC message.
* Refer to 2.
Device The data name is configured of up to Comments (comment, device name) can be stored.
comment eight arbitrary one-byte uppercase (Note 1)
alphanumeric characters. With the onboard, the device name is only
displayed and cannot be edited.
(Note 2)
Data name "COMMENT" is the reserved name for
a common comment and cannot be changed. The
common comment "COMMENT" will be displayed
even when the other device comment data is
designated if no comment is defined for the data.
Parameter Fixed name "param" The program setting parameters can be stored.

*1: Symbols and spaces cannot be used in the data name.

*2: When storing PLC message data, the following reserved names are used. Reserved name specifications
differ depending on the language specification method. Refer to "III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT
ENVIRONMENT 4.4.2 File name rule for message data" for details.

(Method 1)
Specify with 3 bits of bit selection parameter #6453 bit 0 to 2. (Language selection method using PLC alone)
Data type Data name Details of data
Program M1xxxxxx PLC message of the 1st language
:
M7xxxxxx PLC message of the 7th language
M8xxxxxx PLC message of the 8th language

(Method 2)
Specify with display language selection parameter. (Base specifications parameter #1043)
(Method linked with language selection on the setting and display screen）
Data type Data name Details of data
Program M00xxxxx Language para 0 (English) PLC message
M01xxxxx Language para 1 (Japanese) PLC message
:
M22xxxxx Language para 22 (Chinese -simplified-) PLC message

IV - 28
 4. PLC Data
4.2 Type of Data

Example: PLC data on "FILE" screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Type : Program
Data name : MAIN

Type : Device comment

Data name : COMMENT

Type : Parameter
Data name : Param

4.2.1 Program Data

The following details can be saved in the data created as program data.
Saved details Outline
Program (ladder) circuit Program (ladder) circuit is the data used to edit and monitor the user PLC
with a circuit diagram consisting of .
Statement A statement is character string data added to each program (ladder) circuit
block to make it easy to understand the flow of the entire program.
Statements include integrated statements that can be stored in the NC,
and peripheral statements that cannot be stored in the NC. (Refer to *1)
Note A note is character string data added to each coil and function instruction in
the program (ladder circuit) to make it easy to understand the flow of the
entire program in the same manner as statements. Notes include
integrated notes that can be stored in the NC, and peripheral notes that
cannot be stored in the NC. (Refer to *1)

*1: Integrated statements and notes, peripheral statements and notes

Integrated type The integrated types can be saved in the NC. Note that the program data
takes up a large memory when stored in the NC.
Peripheral types The peripheral types are deleted when saved in the NC, and cannot be
saved.
Thus, when using peripheral statements or notes, they must be controlled
with GX Developer projects.

For PLC messages and special programs

Saved details Outline
Alarm messages These are PLC alarm message character strings displayed on the NC.
Operator messages These are PLC operator message character strings displayed on the NC.
PLC switches These are character strings for the PLC switch names.
Comment messages These are PLC comment character strings displayed on the NC.

IV - 29
 4. PLC Data
4.2 Type of Data

4.2.2 Device Comment Data

The following can be saved in data created as device comments.
Saved details Outline
Comment This is character string data added to each device. The program is easier
to understand when meanings are assigned to the devices.
Device name This character string is displayed instead of the device name, and makes it
easier to see the devices.
(Note that the device name cannot be edited with the onboard, so this is
used only for display.)

4.2.3 Parameter Data

The following can be saved in data created as parameters.
Saved details Outline
Program settings The program (ladder) execution order can be defined when using
multi-programs.

IV - 30
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.1 Basic Operation Keys

5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

700
70
Standard Simple
5.1 Basic Operation Keys
The keys used with onboard are shown below.

Key Explanation
F0 This opens the onboard screen.
A to Z , 0 to 9 These are alphanumeric keys, etc., used to input arbitrary data.
This key deletes the last character input before it is set.
DELETE
This key deletes one circuit during ladder circuit editing.
This key deletes the input character string before it is set (cancels the
C•B
input).
INPUT This key is used to set and select the input data.
This key changes between the circuit overwrite and insert modes.
INSERT In 70 Series, this key changes between the data overwrite and insert
modes.
← → These keys are used to move the cursor to up, down, left and right, and to
↑ ↓
select items.
This key moves the items on the screen in the forward order.
→| This key moves the instruction circuit in the forward order during ladder
circuit editing.
This key moves the items on the screen in the reverse order.
|← This key moves the instruction circuit in the reverse order during ladder
circuit editing.
This switches the cursor between screens when device registration
#
monitor or circuit registration monitor is displayed in split screen.
This switches ON and OFF of device comment display on the circuit
EOB ( ; )
screen.
This returns the menu of one level up in hierarchy.
or ESC When a popup screen is displayed, this closes the popup screen.
This changes the menu in the same hierarchy.
This moves the page forward in a page unit.
This moves the page backward in a page unit.

SP (Space) This switches valid/invalid of the check box .

Ctrl+Z This cancels the last edit operation and returns to the previous state with
the edit ladder mode.
<,> When <,> key does not exist on keyboard depending on the machine type,
menu buttons on the "ENTER SYMBOL" screen, "FIND" screen, and
"FIND INSTRUCTION" screen can be used to input.

*: Key allocations may differ depending on the machine type.

IV - 31
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

5.2 Menu Keys

5.2.1 Menu Keys in Standard Operation Mode and Simple Operation Mode

Menu keys in standard operation mode : Entire onboard function can be used.
Menu keys in simple operation mode : User-friendly configuration, limiting the functions strictly to
maintenance purposes.

5.2.2 Menu Key Hierarchies and Movement 700

70
Standard Simple
5.2.2.1 Menu keys in standard operation mode
The menu for standard operation mode is configured of the following four hierarchies.

Moves to downward hierarchy

Corresponding
menu Moves to upward hierarchy

Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3 Hierarchy 4

MAIN NC FILE
EXTERNAL FILE

Movement in same hierarchy

LADDER EDIT LADDER SYMBOL 1
LADDER SYMBOL 2
COPY/INSERT
MONITOR
FIND, REPLACE
VIEW, TOOLS
DEVICE DEVICE BATCH
ENTRY DEVICE
SAMPLING TRACE
PARAM

700
70
Standard Simple
5.2.2.2 Menu keys in simple operation mode
The menu for simple operation mode is configured of the following three hierarchies.
Moves to downward hierarchy
Corresponding
menu
Moves to upward hierarchy

Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3

MAIN NC FILE
Switch pages
LADDER MONITOR 1st page
2nd page
LADDER EDIT LADDER SYMBOL 1
Movement within the same hierarchy
LADDER SYMBOL 2
COPY/INSERT

IV - 32
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

5.2.2.3 Menu Keys in 70 Series 700

70
Standard Simple

The menu for 70 Series is configured of the following three hierarchies.

Moves to downward hierarchy
Corresponding
menu
Moves to upward hierarchy

Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3

MAIN NC FILE
Switch pages
LADDER MONITOR 1st page
2nd page

LADDER EDIT 1st page LADDER SYMBOL 1

Movement within the same hierarchy
2nd page LADDER SYMBOL 2
COPY/INSERT

IV - 33
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

5.2.3 Details of Menu Keys

700
70
5.2.3.1 Menu keys in standard operation mode Standard Simple
(1) "MAIN" menu keys

FILE This opens the "FILE" popup screen.

NC FILE This changes to the "NC FILE" menu key.
EXTERNAL FILE This changes to the "EXTERNAL FILE" menu key.
LADDER This changes to the "LADDER" menu key.
When no program is opened in the onboard editing area, this
button will be invalid (displayed in gray).
DEVICE This changes to the "DEVICE" menu key.
PARAM. This changes to the "PARAM." menu key.
DIAGNOS. This changes to the "DIAGNOS." menu key.
ENVIRON. SETTING This changes to the "ENVIRON. SETTING" menu key.
HELP This opens the "HELP" screen.
END This ends the onboard.

(2) "LADDER" menu keys

EDIT This changes to the "EDIT" menu key.

MONITOR This changes to the "MONITOR" menu key.
(Note) Only the program in the NC's temporary memory can be
monitored. Thus, the "monitor" menu for the circuit with
light blue background turns gray and the circuit cannot be
monitored.
FIND, REPLACE This changes to the "FIND, REPLACE" menu key.
VIEW, TOOLS This changes to the "VIEW, TOOLS" menu key.
PLC DIAGNOSIS This opens the "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.

(2-1) "EDIT" menu keys

LADDER SYMBOL 1 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 1" menu key.
LADDER SYMBOL 2 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu key.
COPY/INSERT This changes to the "COPY/INSERT" menu key.
EDIT LADDER This changes the mode to the EDIT LADDER mode.
MODE
EDIT COMMENT This changes the mode to the EDIT COMMENT mode.
MODE
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited. The
converted ladder will be updated to the temporary memory in the
NC automatic update mode.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.

IV - 34
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

(2-2) "COPY/INSERT" menu keys

MARK The start point and end point are designated to select the circuit
group.
COPY This copies the circuit in the designated range.
PASTE This pastes the copied circuit.
INSERT LINE This inserts a line at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
DELETE LINE This deletes the line at the cursor position in the "LADDER"
screen.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.
DATA CHANGE This opens the "DATA CHANGE" popup screen.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited. The
converted ladder will be updated to the temporary memory in the
NC automatic update mode.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.

(2-2-1) "LADDER SYMBOL 1", "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu keys

Ladder symbols other During edit mode

than the following
This opens the "INPUT" popup screen.
During monitor mode
This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
- (Cross bar) This writes a "cross bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER"
screen.
| (Vertical bar) This writes a "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER"
screen.
| (Vertical bar) This deletes the "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER"
DELETE screen.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited. The
converted ladder will be updated to the temporary memory in the NC
automatic update mode.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.

IV - 35
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

(2-3) "MONITOR" menu keys

(When cursor is placed on the "LADDER" screen)

(When cursor is placed on the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen)

(When cursor is placed on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.)

START/STOP MONITOR This starts or stops the monitor.

ENTRY DEVICE This splits the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen or cancels the split display.
ENTRY LADDER This splits the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen or cancels the split
MONITOR display.
REGISTER MONITOR This registers the circuit on the cursor position in the entry ladder monitor.
DEVICE TEST This opens the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen.
MONITOR STOP This opens the "MONITOR STOP CONDITI." popup screen.
CONDITI.
CHANGE MONITOR This changes displays of the current value for the device on the ladder
DEC/HEX monitor between decimal and hexadecimal.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
MOVEMENT ON SPLIT This moves the cursor between "LADDER" screen and "ENTRY
SCREEN
DEVICE"/"ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen on the split screen.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
FIND This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
ENTRY LADDER ALL This deletes all the circuits registered in the entry ladder monitor.
DEL.
DIVISION RATIO This changes the ratio of the split screen.
CHANGE
16 BIT/32 BIT This displays when the cursor is on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR"
screen.
This changes between word and W word of the word device registered in
the ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR.
* "MONITOR" menu can be used only in the circuit (program) whose background color is white.
When the circuit's (program's) background color is light blue, the same hierarchial movement to the
"MONITOR" menu will be skipped.

(2-4) "FIND, REPLACE" menu keys

FIND CONTACT OR This opens the "FIND CONTACT OR COIL" popup screen.
COIL
FIND DEVICE This opens the "FIND DEVICE" popup screen.
FIND INST This opens the "FIND INST" popup screen.
FIND STEP NO. This opens the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
FIND STRING This opens the "FIND STRING" popup screen.
CHANGE AB This opens the "CHANGE AB CONTACT" popup screen.
CONTACT
REPLACE DEVICE This opens "REPLACE DEVICE" popup screen.
CHANGE T/C This opens the "CHANGE T/C SETTING" popup screen.
SETTING
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
* "CHANGE AB CONTACT", "REPLACE DEVICE", and "CHANGE T/C SETTING" menus can be used
only in the circuit (program) whose background color is light blue.

IV - 36
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

(2-5) "VIEW, TOOLS" menu keys

DATA CHANGE This opens the "DATA CHANGE" popup screen.

COMMENT DISPLAY This opens the "COMMENT DISPLAY" popup screen.
LADDER DISPLAY This opens the "LADDER DISPLAY" popup screen.
CROSS REF. LIST This opens the "CROSS REF. LIST" popup screen.
LIST OF USED This opens the "LIST OF USED DEVICES" popup screen.
DEVICES
CHECK PROGRAM This opens the "CHECK PROGRAM" popup screen.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.

(3) "DEVICE" menu keys

DEVICE BATCH This opens the "DEVICE BATCH" screen.

ENTRY DEVICE This opens the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen.
SAMPLING TRACE This opens the "SAMPLING TRACE" screen.

(4) "PARAM." menu keys

PROGRAM This opens the "PROGRAM SETTING" popup screen.

SETTING
COMMON POINTER This opens the "COMMON POINTER SETTING" popup screen.
SETTING

(5) "NC FILE" menu keys

OPEN This opens the "OPEN" popup screen.

SAVE This opens the "SAVE" popup screen.
VERIFY This opens the "VERIFY" popup screen.
ROM WRITE This opens the "ROM WRITE" popup screen.
DELETE This opens the "DELETE" popup screen.
FORMAT This opens the "FORMAT" popup screen.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
PLC VERSION UP This opens the "PLC VERSION UP" popup screen.
KEYWORD This opens the "KEYWORD" screen.

IV - 37
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

(6) "EXTERNAL FILE" menu keys

OPEN PROJECT This opens the "OPEN PROJECT" popup screen.

SAVE PROJECT This opens the "SAVE PROJECT" popup screen.
DELETE PROJECT This opens the "DELETE PROJECT" popup screen.
VERIFY PROJECT This opens the "VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen.

(7) "DIAGNOSIS" menu keys

PLC DIAGNOSIS This opens the "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen.

(8) "ENVIRON. SETTING" menu keys

CONNECT NC This opens the "CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen.

SETTING
NC FILE SETTING This opens the "NC FILE SETTING" popup screen.
SWITCH SIMPLE This changes the display to the simple menu key.
MENU KEY

700
5.2.3.2 Menu keys in simple operation mode 70
Standard Simple
(1) "MAIN" menu keys

NC FILE This changes to the "NC FILE" menu key.

LADDER MONITOR This changes to the "LADDER MONITOR" menu key. (*1)
LADDER EDIT This changes to the "LADDER EDIT" menu key. (*1)
COMMENT DISPLAY This opens the "COMMENT DISPLAY" popup screen. (*1)
DEVICE BATCH This opens the "DEVICE BATCH" screen. (*1)
PARAM. This changes to the "PARAM." menu key.
PLC DIAGNOSIS This opens the "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen.
SWITCH STANDARD This changes the display to the standard menu key.
MENU KEY
HELP This opens the "HELP" screen.
END This ends the onboard.
*1: When no program is opened in the onboard editing area, this button will be invalid (displayed in
gray).

IV - 38
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

(2) "NC FILE" menu keys

ROM WRITE This opens the "ROM WRITE" popup screen.

PLC VERSION UP This opens the "PLC VERSION UP" popup screen.
EXECUTE STEP This opens the "EXECUTE STEP" popup screen.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
KEYWORD This opens the "KEYWORD" screen.

(3) "LADDER MONITOR" menu keys

(When cursor is placed on the "LADDER" screen.)

(When cursor is placed on the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen.)

(When the cursor is placed on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.)

START/STOP This starts or stops the monitor.

MONITOR
ENTRY DEVICE This splits the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen or cancels the split display.
ENTRY LADDER This splits the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen or cancels the split
MONITOR display.
REGISTER This registers the circuit on the cursor position in the entry ladder monitor.
MONITOR
DEVICE TEST This opens the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen.
FIND This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
FIND STEP NO. This opens the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
COMMENT ON/OFF This changes ON/OFF of the comment display.
MOVEMENT ON This moves the cursor between "LADDER" screen and "ENTRY
SPLIT SCREEN DEVICE"/"ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen on the split screen.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
DATA CHANGE This opens the "DATA CHANGE" popup screen.
CHANGE MONITOR This changes displays of the current value for the device on the ladder
DEC/HEX monitor between decimal and hexadecimal.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
ENTRY LADDER ALL This deletes all the circuits registered in the entry ladder monitor.
DEL.
DIVISION RATIO This changes the ratio of the split screen.
CHANGE
16 BIT/32 BIT This displays when the cursor is on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR"
screen.
This changes between word and W word of the word device registered in
the ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR.

IV - 39
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

(4) "LADDER EDIT" menu keys

LADDER SYMBOL 1 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 1" menu key.
LADDER SYMBOL 2 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu key.
COPY/INSERT This changes to the " COPY/INSERT " menu key.
OVR.WRITE/INSERT This changes overwrite/insert.
DATA CHANGE This opens the "DATA CHANGE" popup screen.
FIND This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
FIND STEP NO. This opens the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
COMMENT ON/OFF This changes ON/OFF of the comment display.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.

(4-1) "LADDER SYMBOL 1", "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu keys

Ladder symbols other During edit mode

than the following
This opens the "INPUT" popup screen.
During monitor mode
This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
- (Cross bar) This writes a "cross bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER"
screen.
| (Vertical bar) This writes a "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER"
screen.
| (Vertical bar) This deletes the "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the
DELETE "LADDER" screen.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.

(4-2) "COPY/INSERT" menu keys

MARK The start point and end point are designated to select the circuit
group.
COPY This copies the circuit in the designated range.
PASTE This pastes the copied circuit.
INSERT LINE This inserts a line at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
DELETE LINE This deletes the line at the cursor position in the "LADDER"
screen.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.
DATA CHANGE This opens the "DATA CHANGE" popup screen.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.

(5) "PARAM." menu keys

PROGRAM This opens the "PROGRAM SETTING" popup screen.

SETTING

IV - 40
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

5.2.3.3 Menu Keys in 70 Series 700

70
Standard Simple
(1) "MAIN" menu keys

NC FILE This changes to the "NC FILE" menu key.

EXT.FILE This changes to the "EXTERNAL FILE" menu key.
OPERATION
LADDER MONITOR This changes to the "LADDER MONITOR" menu key. (*1)
LADDER EDIT This changes to the "LADDER EDIT" menu key. (*1)
DEVICE This opens the "DEVICE BATCH" screen. (*1)
PARAM. This changes to the "PARAM." menu key. (*1)
PLC DIAGNOSIS This opens the "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen.
ENVIRON. SETTING This changes to the "ENVIRON. SETTING" menu key.
HELP This opens the "HELP" screen.
*1: When no program is opened in the onboard editing area, this button will be invalid (displayed in
gray).

(2) "NC FILE" menu keys

LIST This opens the "FILE SIZE DISPLAY" screen.

OPEN This opens the "OPEN" screen.
ROM WRITE This opens the "ROM WRITE" screen.
DELETE This opens the "DELETE" popup screen.
FORMAT This opens the "FORMAT" popup screen.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
KEYWORD This opens the "KEYWORD" screen.

(3) "EXTERNAL FILE" menu keys

EXT.->NC This opens the "EXT.->NC" screen.

NC->EXT. This opens the "NC->EXT." screen.
VERIFY EXT.FILE This opens the "VERIFY" screen.
DELETE EXT.FILE This opens the "DELETE" popup screen.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
KEYWORD This opens the "KEYWORD" screen.

IV - 41
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

(4) "LADDER MONITOR" menu keys

(When cursor is on the "LADDER" screen.)

(When cursor is on the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen.)

(When the cursor is on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.)

START/STOP This starts or stops the monitor.

MONITOR
ENTRY DEVICE This splits the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen or cancels the split display.
ENTRY LADDER This splits the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen or cancels the split
MONITOR display.
REGISTER This registers the circuit on the cursor position in the entry ladder monitor.
MONITOR
DEVICE TEST This opens the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen.
FIND This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
FIND STEP NO. This opens the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
COMMENT ON/OFF This changes ON/OFF of the comment display.
MOVEMENT ON This moves the cursor between "LADDER" screen and "ENTRY
SPLIT SCREEN DEVICE"/"ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen on the split screen.
PROGRAM This changes the programs in the circuit display.
CHANGE
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
ZOOM CURSOR This enlarges the cursor display area at the compact display.
CHANGE MONITOR This changes displays of the current value for the device on the ladder
DEC/HEX monitor between decimal and hexadecimal.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
ENTRY LADDER ALL This deletes all the circuits registered in the entry ladder monitor.
DEL.
DIVISION RATIO This changes the ratio of the split screen.
CHANGE
16 BIT/32 BIT This displays when the cursor is on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR"
screen.
This changes between word and W word of the word device registered in
the ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR.
DEC/HEX This switches the decimal/hexadecimal display.

IV - 42
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

(5) "LADDER EDIT" menu keys

LADDER SYMBOL 1 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 1" menu key.
LADDER SYMBOL 2 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu key.
COPY/INSERT This changes to the " COPY/INSERT " menu key.
FIND This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
FIND STEP NO. This opens the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
COMMENT ON/OFF This changes ON/OFF of the comment display.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
ZOOM CURSOR This enlarges the cursor display area at the compact display.
OVR.WRITE/INSERT This changes overwrite/insert.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
CANCEL EDIT This discards the unconverted circuit.
LADDER
PROGRAM This changes the programs in the circuit display.
CHANGE

(5-1) "LADDER SYMBOL 1", "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu keys

Ladder symbols other During edit mode

than the following
This opens the "INPUT" popup screen.
During monitor mode
This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
- (Cross bar) This writes a "cross bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER"
screen.
| (Vertical bar) This writes a "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER"
screen.
| (Vertical bar) This deletes the "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the
DELETE "LADDER" screen.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.

IV - 43
 5. Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)
5.2 Menu Keys

(5-2) "COPY/INSERT" menu keys

MARK The start point and end point are designated to select the circuit
group.
COPY This copies the circuit in the designated range.
PASTE This pastes the copied circuit.
INSERT LINE This inserts a line at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
DELETE LINE This deletes the line at the cursor position in the "LADDER"
screen.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.

(6) "DEVICE" menu keys

DEVICE BATCH This opens the "DEVICE BATCH" screen.

(7) "PARAM." menu keys

PROGRAM This opens the "PROGRAM SETTING" screen.

SETTING
COMMON POINTER This opens the "COMMON POINTER SETTING" screen.
SETTING

(8) "ENVIRON. SETTING" menu keys

LADDER DISPLAY This opens the "LADDER DISPLAY" screen.

COMMENT DISPLAY This opens the "COMMENT DISPLAY" screen.

IV - 44
 6. Environment Setting

700
6. Environment Setting Standard Simple
70

Various settings required when the onboard is used are explained below.

In 700 Series

In 70 Series

(1) "ENVIRON. SETTING" screen display

Select "MAIN" → ENVIRON. SETTING menu key. When selected, "ENVIRON. SETTING" screen will be

displayed in full size.

When using 700 Series, refer to "6.1 Setting the Connected NC Control Unit", "6.2 NC File Operation Setting"
and "6.3 Simple Operation Mode Menu Key Switchover".
When using 70 Series, refer to "6.4 Ladder Display Setting" and "6.5 Comment Display Setting".

IV - 45
 6. Environment Setting
6.1 Setting the Connected NC Control Unit

6.1 Setting the Connected NC Control Unit 700

70
Standard Simple

When NC display unit and NC control unit are connected in the proportion of one display unit to multiple NC
control units, the NC unit connected with onboard can be selected. (At the initial start-up of onboard, connect
to the same NC unit as HMI screen side.)
Connections of NC control unit can be changed on the "CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen.
When a connected NC (control unit) is switched to another, the following information will be discarded.
(Note) All the PLC data in the onboard editing area will be discarded. (Program data having unconverted
circuit will be discarded, as well.)

NC display unit
(Onboard)

M01 M02 M0n

NC control unit NC control unit NC control unit

IV - 46
 6. Environment Setting
6.1 Setting the Connected NC Control Unit

6.1.1 Arbitrary Switchover of Connected NC 700

70
Standard Simple

When multiple NC control units are connected, connection target can be switched freely.

"CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) "CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen display

Select "MAIN" → ENVIRON. SETTING → CONNECT NC SETTING menu key.
When selected, the "CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the
screen.
* When the popup screen is displayed, the name of the NC unit currently connected is shown. ("M01"
above)
* When connected NC is only one, "SET" menu button will be displayed in gray and disabled.

(2) Switchover of connected NC (control unit)

(a) Select CONNECT NC menu key and specify the name of the NC unit to be connected.
* NC unit name can be selected from the pull-down list.
(b) Select the SET menu key. When selected, "CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen will be closed,
and NC control unit connection switchover will be carried out.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key. Connection switchover will not be carried out.

6.1.2 Information to be updated at connection switchover

When the NC control unit connection destination is changed, the followings on the onboard will be updated.
• According to the NC language parameter, language used for the screen menu display, button and error
message will be changed.
• Font used for the comment (statement, note, comment, device name) display will be the one
corresponding to the language parameter.
• Alarm on NC side (ROM-Write incomplete) is displayed. (Changes to the status of connected NC)
• Password setting state on the "maintenance" screen of HMI screen (Changes to the status of
connected NC)
• PLC RUN/STOP status (Changes to the status of connected NC)
• Connected NC's warning display
• Connected NC's NC name ("M01", etc.)
• Onboard editing area will turn to the (no data) state where PLC data is cleared.

IV - 47
 6. Environment Setting
6.2 NC File Operation Setting

700
6.2 NC File Operation Setting Standard Simple
70

Settings related to NC file operation are explained below.

6.2.1 Setting the Storage Destination of Device Comment

When saving into NC temporary memory is not possible due to excessive device comment size, HD and IC
memory card can be specified and used as a virtual NC area.

<Application example 1>

NC temporary memory serves as the device comment storage destination. (Normal application)
• With NC file operation, save the parameter and program into NC temporary memory and ROM area.
• For saving into HD and IC memory card, external file operation is applied.

NC Onboard
Temporary editing area
ROM write memory area Save to NC
ROM area

Parameter Parameter Parameter

program program
Open from NC program
Copy at
power ON
Save to Device
Parameter external file
HD/ comment
program
IC memory card
Open from
Device external file
comment

<Application example 2>

Device comment storage destination is specified.
• When saving to the NC with NC file operation, parameter and program will be saved into NC
temporary memory, and device comment will be saved into any specified folder.
• When opening from NC with NC file operation, parameter and program will be opened from NC
temporary memory, and device comment will be opened from any specified folder.
• *When deleting NC data with NC file operation, delete the NC temporary memory for parameter and
program, and the data in specified folder for device comment.
• *When formatting NC temporary memory, the device comment in specified folder will not be deleted.

Temporary Onboard
NC memory area
ROM area editing area
ROM write Save to NC
Parameter Parameter
program Parameter
program
Copy at program
power ON

Device
Specified folder comment
HD/
IC memory card
Device Open from NC
comment

IV - 48
 6. Environment Setting
6.2 NC File Operation Setting

"NC FILE SETTING" popup screen

Menus corresponding to
popup screen

(1) "NC FILE SETTING" popup screen display

Select "MAIN" → "ENVIRON. SETTING" screen, then NC FILE SETTING menu key.
When selected, the "NC FILE SETTING" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.

(2) Setting the device comment storage destination

(a) Select the DEV. COM. STORAGE DEST. menu key.
(b) Press the SET menu key. When pressed, the "NC FILE SETTING" popup screen will close.

* Device comment storage destination set once will be held even after terminating the onboard.
When the onboard is started up again, the device comment storage destination is shown in the
same state as it was set last.

700
70
6.3 Simple Operation Mode Menu Key Switchover Standard Simple

Change to the simple operation mode menu key.

Refer to "2.4 Switching from Standard Operation Mode to Simple Operation Mode" for details.

IV - 49
 6. Environment Setting
6.4 Ladder Display Setting

6.4 Ladder Display Setting 700

70
Standard Simple
Ladder display settings are specified on this screen.

6.4.1 Maximum Number of Contacts

The maximum number of contacts is specified. 11 contacts display and 9 contacts display are available.

6.4.2 Zoom Display

The ladder display size is changed.
REDUCTION Enables the ladder display with 11 contacts.
STANDARD Enables the ladder display with 9 contacts.
EXPANSION Cannot display the whole circuit.
For details, refer to "8.4.4 Setting the Circuit Display Scale".

6.4.3 Current Monitor Value Display

The current monitor value display is set.
Setting "None" deletes the line for the current value display.
This helps to increase the density of the ladder display.

IV - 50
 6. Environment Setting
6.5 Comment Display Setting

6.5 Comment Display Setting 700

70
Standard Simple
Comment display settings are specified.

6.5.1 Comment Line

The number of lines is specified to display a device comment.
The characters out of the specified number of lines by this setting are not displayed.

6.5.2 Various Displays

The comment display, statement display, note display and device name display are set valid/invalid.
Refer to "8.4.2 Comment Display" for details.

IV - 51
 6. Environment Setting
6.5 Comment Display Setting

6.5.3 Common Comment File

Settings for the common comment are specified. Two methods are available to specify a common comment
file.
• COMMENT (GX Developer compatible) method
This method is compatible with GX Developer. The "COMMENT" file, which is common for all the
programs, and each comment file, which has the same name as each program file name, are used
accordingly to the program displayed.
• Common comment file designation method
A comment file is designated to be common for each program. This method is used to designate a
comment file for each language.

(1) Setting the COMMENT (GX Developer compatible) method

(a) Select "MAIN" → ENVIRON. SETTING → COMMENT DISPLAY → COMMON COMMENT
menu key.
(b) Select "COMMENT (GX Developer COMPATIBLE)" with the COMMON COMMENT menu or the
cursor key.

(2) Setting the common comment file designation method

(a) Select "MAIN" → ENVIRON. SETTING → COMMENT DISPLAY → COMMON COMMENT
menu key.
(b) Select "DESIGNATE OTHER COMMENT FILES" with the COMMON COMMENT menu or the
cursor key.
(c) Select the SELECT FILE menu. "SELECT FILE" field is focused.
(d) Select any file with "↑" or "↓" key, and set the file by pressing the SELECT FILE menu or the
INPUT key.

IV - 52
 7. Basic Operations
7.1 Basic Operations 1 (Steps for Creating a Program for the First Time)

700
7. Basic Operations Standard Simple
70

7.1 Basic Operations 1 (Steps for Creating a Program for the First Time)
The steps (newly creating -> starting the ladder -> saving -> ending) for creating a program for the first time
are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

Newly create project data in MAIN/ FILE

the onboard
INITIAL Parameters and the program MAIN are
created

Create a circuit program

MAIN/ LADDER Program is created

MAIN/LADDER

Save the program and

parameters in the NC's MAIN/ NC FILE
temporary memory
MAIN/NC FILE FORMAT NC's temporary memory is formatted

SAVE

Run the PLC MAIN/NC FILE PLC RUN/STOP Run the PLC

Read the program and

MAIN/NC FILE PLC RUN/STOP Stop the PLC
parameters saved in the
NC's temporary memory into
the NC's ROM ROM WRITE When ending, write the data in the
temporary memory into the ROM so
that the data is not lost even when the
power is turned OFF
Save the created program in
an external file MAIN/ EXTERNAL FILE

MAIN/EXTERNAL FILE
SAVE PROJECT

EXTERNAL SAVE
PROJECT

End onboard
Designate the drive and path for saving
MAIN/ END
Finished

IV - 53
 7. Basic Operations
7.2 Basic Operations 2 (Creating, Monitoring and Testing Programs)

7.2 Basic Operations 2 (Creating, Monitoring and Testing Programs)

700
70
Standard Simple
The steps for creating, monitoring and testing the program are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start
Standard Simple
operation mode operation mode

Newly create project data on Refer to basic operation 1.

the onboard.

Create the ladder program. MAIN/ LADDER LADDER EDIT

EDIT
When no program exists in NC
MAIN/LADDER
temporary memory, local editing
mode (background color is light
blue) is applied.

MAIN/LADDER/EDIT EDIT LADDER MODE Creates a program.

<Sample data>
M0

P4002|-|/|----[INC D0]-|

CONVERT LADDER CONVERT LADDER Edited circuit data is confirmed

by conversion operation.

Save program and parameter Refer to basic operation 1.

in NC temporary memory.

Monitor the ladder. MAIN/ LADDER LADDER MONITOR

When a program exists in NC
MAIN/LADDER MONITOR temporary memory, NC auto
update mode (background color
is white) is applied.

MAIN/LADDER/ When running PLC with

MONITOR START/STOP MONITOR START/STOP MONITOR
<Sample data>, value of D0
will be incremented.

Test the device. MAIN/LADDER/MONITOR DEVICE TEST DEVICE TEST Reverse ON/OFF of M0 forcibly.

Go to save
operation

IV - 54
 7. Basic Operations
7.3 Basic Operations 3 (Correcting Programs Stored in NC)

7.3 Basic Operations 3 (Correcting Programs Stored in NC) 700

70
Standard Simple

The steps for correcting the programs stored in the NC's temporary memory are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

Open the program and MAIN/ NC FILE

parameters in the temporary
memory in the onboard MAIN/NC FILE OPEN Open the data in the NC's temporary
memory

Change the circuit program MAIN/ LADDER When there is a program in the NC's
temporary memory, the local editing
mode (white background) is activated

MAIN/LADDER EDIT
Stop the PLC to change the program
MAIN/LADDER/EDIT PLC RUN/STOP

EDIT LADDER MODE Change the program

CONVERT LADDER When converted, the data in the NC's

temporary memory is also changed

Go to monitor
operations

IV - 55
 7. Basic Operations
7.4 Basic Operations 4 (Creating Multiple Programs with Multi-program Method)

7.4 Basic Operations 4 (Creating Multiple Programs with Multi-program Method)

700
70
Standard Simple

The steps for splitting the program and creating several programs are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

Add the circuit program data MAIN/ FILE

in the onboard
DATA NEW Create the 2nd to 4th circuit programs

<Sample data>
Data name Header statement
MAIN Machine A
INIT Initial
LOW Communication
process
TAIKI Error process

Set the parameters MAIN/ PARAM.

MAIN/PARAM. PROGRAM SETTING Set the circuit program execution type

<Sample data>

Program name Execution type

MAIN Scan
INIT Initial
LOW Low-speed
TAIKI Standby

Change the circuit program MAIN/ LADDER

to be edited
MAIN/LADDER VIEW, TOOLS

MAIN/LADDER/VIEW, TOOLS
PROGRAM CHANGE Create each program while changing
the program to be edited.

Go to monitor
operations

IV - 56
 7. Basic Operations
7.5 Basic Operations 5 (Creating Device Comments)

7.5 Basic Operations 5 (Creating Device Comments) 700

70
Standard Simple
The steps for creating a program device comment are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

Create the comment data in

MAIN/ FILE
the onboard
Set a data type comment, and create
DATA NEW the device comment MAIN

Create a circuit program Refer to Basic operations 1

Set the device comment data

to be displayed in the circuit MAIN/ LADDER
program
MAIN/LADDER VIEW, TOOLS

MAIN/LADDER/ VIEW, TOOLS

PROGRAM CHANGE Set the device comment to be edited as
MAIN

Create the comment data for MAIN/LADDER EDIT

the circuit program device
Save the data in the NC's MAIN/LADDER/EDIT
temporary memory EDIT COMMENT MODE Create a comment for the device at the
cursor position in the circuit program

Change the comment MAIN/LADDER VIEW, TOOLS

display ON or OFF state
MAIN/LADDER/VIEW, TOOLS
COMMENT DISPLAY Change the comment display ON or
OFF state

Go to save
operations

IV - 57
 7. Basic Operations
7.6 Basic Operations 6 (Upgrading the Program Version)

700
7.6 Basic Operations 6 (Upgrading the Program Version) Standard Simple
70

The steps for upgrading the program saved in the NC ROM to the version of the program in the IC card are
given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

(Program design)

Create and test the program Set the file version, etc., in the header
with GX Developer or
onboard

Write the program file to be This operation cannot be completed

upgraded into the IC card with onboard. Use Windows Explorer,
etc.

(Maintenance)
The data saved in the NC ROM is read
out to the NC's temporary memory
Turn the NC power ON

Upgrade the ROM contents MAIN/ NC FILE

to the version of the data in
the IC card
MAIN/NC FILE PLC VERSION UP The programs in the NC ROM and IC
card are both displayed
The data can be upgraded to only one
version

Go to monitor
operations

IV - 58
 7. Basic Operations
7.7 Basic Operations 7 (Loading Programs Created with GX Developer)

7.7 Basic Operations 7 (Loading Programs Created with GX Developer)

700
70
Standard Simple

The steps for loading and adjusting ladders creating with GX Developer are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

Create a program with GX

Developer

Syntax check tool Correct instructions that cannot be

used with NC

Save the program in IC card Write project data created with GX

using GX developer developer into IC card

Open the program in IC card MAIN/ EXTERNAL FILE

with onboard
MAIN/EXTERNAL FILE
OPEN PROJECT Open IC card data

Save the program and

parameters in NC's Refer to Basic operations 1
temporary memory

Go to monitor
operations

IV - 59
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8. Circuit Operations
The PLC data read out onto the onboard editing area can be edited and monitored with circuit operations.
The saving area and editing area are split, so before editing (including monitoring), open the PLC data in the
temporary memory in the onboard editing area.

(Note) The circuit menu cannot be selected if even one program is not opened in the onboard editing area.
(When moving in the same hierarchical menu, the operation will be skipped.)

700
70
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder) Standard Simple

The continuity state of contacts and coils can be monitored while displaying the PLC circuits.

(Note 1) Open the PLC data in the temporary memory in the onboard editing area before starting monitoring.
(Note 2) Circuits (programs) in the local editing mode (light blue background) cannot be monitored.
(The circuit menu "MONITOR" and "MONITOR" menu will all be displayed in gray and disabled.
Movement in the same hierarchy to the "MONITOR" menu will also be skipped.)
Monitor the data with a circuit (program) opened from the NC's temporary memory.

"LADDER" screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Indicates monitoring is active

Cursor

(1) Circuit display

During monitoring, the contact and coil ON/OFF state and the device's current value are displayed.
These will change according to the PLC operation sate.
The circuit ON/OFF state is shown in the following manner.

OFF *1
ON *1

*1: and can be used only for comparative instruction, which is equivalent to the contact and
SET, RST, PLS, PLF, SFT and MC, which is equivalent to coils.

IV - 60
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

(2) Searching for circuits

Move the cursor to the circuit to be searched and press the INPUT key or the circuit symbol menu
key. A popup screen for searching will open.
Refer to "8.3.1 Searching for Ladder (Simple search)" for details.

(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

When circuit symbol menu
(Example : -| |- ) is pressed

When INPUT key is pressed.

(3) Finding a step No.

When numerical key or FIND STEP NO. menu key is pressed, "Find step No." popup screen will
open.
Refer to "8.3 Searching and Replacing" for details.

"Find step No." popup screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

8.1.1 Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to the circuit display on the "LADDER DISPLAY" screen.

• One circuit block must be created with 24 or less lines. An error will occur if there are more than 24 lines.
• The maximum number of contacts in one circuit line can be changed with the "LADDER DISPLAY" setting.
• The number of characters displayed in the comment is shown below.
Number of characters displayed on circuit screen
COMMENT All characters are displayed with 8 characters on 4 lines
STATE
NOTE The set characters are all displayed
ALIAS

IV - 61
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8.1.2 Starting and Stopping Monitoring 700

70
Standard Simple

The monitor start and stop state can be changed.

(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Function mode display

"START/STOP MONITOR" menu keys

(1) Setting the monitor start/stop state

Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER MONITOR
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER MONITOR
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER MONITOR

; then, press the START/STOP MONITOR menu key to change the monitor start and stop state. The
monitor status can be checked with the function mode display.
When MONITOR menu key is pressed in the ladder entry mode or comment input mode, the state will
change to the monitor state upon changing the menu keys.

IV - 62
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8.1.3 Device Registration Monitor (Split Screens) 700

70
Standard Simple

When ENTRY DEVICE is pressed, the screen is split, and the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen opens.
The circuit monitor can be displayed and the device registration can be monitored simultaneously.

(Note) When switching from the NC automatic update mode (white background color) circuit (program) to a
local editing mode (light blue background) circuit (program), monitoring of the device registration on
the split screen will end. Monitor the device registration for the circuit (program) opened from the NC's
temporary memory.

(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

"LADDER" screen

"ENTRY DEVICE
MONITOR" screen

(1) "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen display

Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER MONITOR
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER MONITOR
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER MONITOR
; then, press the ENTRY DEVICE menu key to change the ON/OFF status of the "ENTRY DEVICE
MONITOR" screen display.
When menu key is pressed on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen, "ENTRY DEVICE
MONITOR" screen will be closed.

* Menus are different between "LADDER" screen (upper part) and "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen
(lower part).

(2) Moving the cursor

Use the MOVEMENT ON SPLIT SCREEN menu key to move the cursor on the screen between
"LADDER" screen and "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen. When the screen is not split, the menu key
is masked. The # key can be used as well for this operation.

IV - 63
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

(3) Registering devices

Devices on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" can be registered in the following two methods.
• Register by using the "REGISTER MONITOR" button on the "LADDER" screen. (Registration is
possible only when the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen is displayed. When only the "LADDER"
screen is displayed, ENTRY LADDER MONITOR is executed.)
• Register directly from the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.
(a) When registering by using the "REGISTER MONITOR" button on the "LADDER" screen.
(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

(ii) Select the device you

want to register

(iii) Press the "REGISTER

MONITOR" button
(i) Display the entry
device monitor

(i) Press the ENTRY DEVICE button and the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen is split and
displayed.
* When the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen is not displayed, "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR"
screen will be displayed. So, always display the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen.
(ii) Align the cursor with the circuit of the device to be registered from the "LADDER" screen (upper
half of the screen).
(iii) Press the REGISTER MONITOR button.
(iv) Press the REGISTER MONITOR and the device at the cursor position on "LADDER" will be
registered in the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen (lower side of the split screen).
(A blank is searched from the row on the left side on the "DEVICE ENTRY" screen, and the
device is registered in the first blank found.)

(b) When registering by using the REGISTER MONITOR button on the "LADDER" screen.
(i) Move the cursor to the row of "DEVICE" on the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen.
(ii) Switch to the input mode by using alphanumeric character or INPUT key.
(iii) Enter the device name and press the INPUT key.

(Note) Timer and counter's setting value display shows the program setting value to be edited.

IV - 64
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

(4) Deleting devices

(a) Move the cursor to the line where the device to delete exists on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR"
screen.
(b) Press the DELETE key.

(5) Switching between 16 bit and 32 bit for the device registered on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR".
*Only word device can be changed.
(a) Move the cursor to the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" side.
(b) Press the 16BIT/32BIT button. (For 32 bit, "(D)" is displayed next to the device name. For 16 bits,
"(D)" is not displayed.)

(6) Switching between decimal and hexadecimal for the device registered on the "ENTRY DEVICE
MONITOR".
(a) Move the cursor to the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" side.
(b) Press the DEC/HEX button.
*Only word device can be changed. (Bit device will not be changed.)
*Current value display on the "LADDER" screen is not changed. (Change with the menus on the
"LADDER" screen.)

(7) Close the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen. (The "LADDER" screen will appear on the full screen.)
Press the menu key while the cursor is located on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen side.

IV - 65
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8.1.4 Ladder Entry Monitor (Split Screens) 700

70
Standard Simple

When ENTRY LADDER MONITOR is pressed, the screen is split, and the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR"
screen opens. The circuit monitor can be displayed and the randomly registered circuits can be monitored
simultaneously.

(Note) When switching from the NC automatic update mode (white background color) circuit (program) to a
local editing mode (light blue background) circuit (program), monitoring of the circuit registration on
the split screen will end. Monitor the circuit registration for the circuit (program) opened from the NC's
temporary memory.

(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

"LADDER"
screen
Cursor

"ENTRY
LADDER
MONITOR"
screen

"ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" keys

The name and number of steps for the

program whose ladder has been registered.

(1) "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen display

Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER MONITOR
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER MONITOR
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER MONITOR
; then, press the ENTRY LADDER MONITOR menu key to change the ON/OFF status of the "ENTRY
LADDER MONITOR" screen display.
The cursor position ("LADDER" screen or "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen) changes the menu
display.
When menu key is pressed on the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen, "ENTRY LADDER
MONITOR" screen will be closed.

(2) Starting and stopping monitoring

Press the START/STOP MONITOR menu key.

IV - 66
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8.1.5 Registering the Monitor 700

70
Standard Simple

Ladder registration with "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" or device registration with "ENTRY DEVICE
MONITOR" can be possible.
"ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" and "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" will be as shown below depending on the
screen display status.

Screen display status "REGISTER MONITOR" button Registration operation

"LADDER" screen "REGISTER MONITOR" button The ladder specified with the
on the LADDER screen "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" is
registered.
"LADDER" screen "REGISTER MONITOR" button Execution is not possible.
on each search screen.
Split display of "LADDER" "REGISTER MONITOR" button The ladder specified with the
screen and "ENTRY LADDER on the LADDER screen and "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" is
MONITOR" screen each search screen. registered.
Split display of "LADDER" "REGISTER MONITOR" button The device specified with the
screen and "DEVICE on the LADDER screen and "DEVICE REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION MONITOR" each search screen. MONITOR" is registered.
screen

(1) Ladder registration with "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR"

(a) Move the cursor in the "LADDER" screen to the circuit block you wish to register.
(b) Press the REGISTER MONITOR menu key. The circuit block at the cursor position is registered on
the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen.

*The circuit block that you want to register can be searched and selected.
Press the REGISTER MONITOR menu key on the "FIND CONTACT OR COIL", "FIND DEVICE", "FIND
INSTRUCTION", "FIND STEP NO." and "FIND STRING" popup screen for registration.

(2) Device registration with "DEVICE REGISTRATION MONITOR"

(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

(ii) Select the device you

want to register

(iii) Press the "REGISTER

MONITOR" button
(i) Display the entry
device monitor

IV - 67
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

(a) Press the ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR button to split and display the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR"
screen.
*When the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen is not displayed, "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen
will be displayed. So, always display the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.
(b) Point the cursor to the device circuit to be registered from the "LADDER" screen (upper part of a split
screen).
(c) Press the REGISTER MONITOR button.
(d) When the REGISTER MONITOR button is pressed, the device on the cursor position in "LADDER" is
displayed in the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen (lower part of a split screen).

*Press the REGISTER MONITOR menu key on the "FIND CONTACT OR COIL", "FIND DEVICE", "FIND
INSTRUCTION", "FIND STEP NO." and "FIND STRING" popup screen for device registration.

(Note that, however, this is only possible only when the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" split screen is
displayed.)
700
8.1.6 Testing the Devices Standard Simple
70

The NC bit devices can be turned ON and OFF forcibly, and the word device's current value can be changed.

In 700 Series
"DEVICE TEST" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Testing the bit devices

(a) Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER MONITOR
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER MONITOR
; then, DEVICE TEST menu key.
When selected, the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen will appear at the middle of the screen.
(b) Select the BIT DEVICE menu key, and input the device.
* When "DEVICE TEST" is selected while bit device exists on the cursor position, the device at the
cursor position is displayed in "BIT DEVICE".
(c) To turn ON forcibly, select the FORCE ON menu key.
(d) To turn OFF forcibly, select the FORCE OFF menu key.
(e) To toggle between forced ON and OFF, select the TOGGLE FORCE menu key.
* When device test is executed, performance history is displayed in "BIT DEVICE".

IV - 68
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

(2) Testing the word devices

(a) LADDER MONITOR
Standard operation mode: "MAIN"
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER MONITOR

; then, DEVICE TEST menu key.

When selected, the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen will appear at the middle of the screen.
(b) Select the DISPLAY menu key, and set the device's display format.
(c) Select the VALUE menu key, and set whether the device setting value is a decimal or
hexadecimal.
(d) Select the WORD DEVICE menu key, and input the device.
* When "DEVICE TEST" is selected while word device exists on the cursor position, the device at
the cursor position is displayed in "WORD DEVICE". When multiple devices exist on the cursor
position, they are displayed in the combo box; word device can be selected from there.
(e) Select the SETTING VALUE menu key, and input the value to set in the device.
(f) Select the SET menu key, and change the word device's current value.
* When device test is executed, performance history is displayed in "WORD DEVICE".

In 70 Series

"DEVICE TEST" BIT DEVICE screen

"DEVICE TEST" WORD DEVICE screen

(1) Testing the bit devices

(a) Select "MAIN" RADDER MONITOR then, DEVICE TEST menu key.
When "DEVICE TEST" is selected while bit device exists on the cursor position, the bit device
screen where the device at the cursor position was displayed is displayed.
(b) Select the BIT DEVICE menu key, and input the device.
(c) To turn ON forcibly, select the FORCE ON menu key.
(d) To turn OFF forcibly, select the FORCE OFF menu key.
(e) To toggle between forced ON and OFF, select the TOGGLE FORCE menu key.
(Note 1) When WORD DEVICE menu key is pressed, the screen changes to the WORD DEVICE
screen.

IV - 69
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

(2) Testing the word devices

(a) Select "MAIN" RADDER MONITOR then, DEVICE TEST menu key.
When "DEVICE TEST" is selected while word device exists on the cursor position, the word device
screen where the device at the cursor position was displayed is displayed.
(b) Select the DISPLAY menu key, and set the device's display format.
(c) Select the VALUE menu key, and set whether the device setting value is a decimal or
hexadecimal.
(d) Select the WORD DEVICE menu key, and input the device.
(e) Select the SETTING VALUE menu key, and input the value to set in the device.
(f) Select the SET menu key, and change the word device's current value.
(Note 1) When BIT DEVICE menu key is pressed, the screen changes to the BIT DEVICE screen.

700
8.1.7 Changing the Current Value Monitor 70
Standard Simple

The current value displayed while monitoring the "LADDER" screen can be changed from decimal to
hexadecimal and vice versa.

(Note) This function is valid only during monitoring.

(1) Changing the value

Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER MONITOR
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER MONITOR
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER MONITOR

; then, CHANGE MONITOR DEC/HEX (10/16) menu key.

IV - 70
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8.1.8 Movement on Split Screen 700

70
Standard Simple
Cursor is moved between split screens.

(1) Moving the cursor

Use the MOVEMENT ON SPLIT SCREEN menu key to move the cursor on the screen between
"LADDER" screen and "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen, "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen.
When the screen is not split, the menu key is masked. The # key can be used as well for this
operation.
When the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen is displayed in 100%, and the cursor is moved to the
"LADDER" screen side, the split ratio will be changed to 50%, and the cursor stays on the "LADDER"
screen side.

700
70
8.1.9 Searching Standard Simple

Refer to "8.3 Searching and Replacing" for details.

700
8.1.10 Deleting All the Entry Ladders 70
Standard Simple
All the circuit registered with "ENTRY LADDER" function is deleted.

(1) Deleting all the entry ladders

Select the ENTRY LADDER ALL DEL. menu key.
When executed, the following confirmation message appears.
"Deleting all the registered ladder. OK? YES/NO"

8.1.11 Changing the Split Ratio 700

70
Standard Simple

The split ratio to display "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen and "LADDER" screen is changed.
When "DIVISION RATIO CHANGE" menu key is pressed, the split ratio changes to "25%" → "50%" → "75%"
→ "100%" → "25%".
The default split ratio is 50%.
The split ratio set once will be held until ending the onboard.

(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

25% 50% 75% 100%

IV - 71
 8. Circuit Operations
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8.1.12 Setting the Monitor Stop Conditions 700

70
Standard Simple
The conditions for stopping the "LADDER" screen monitor can be set.

Displays the validity of stop conditions

"Monitor stop condition"

popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Setting the monitor stop conditions for the device

(a) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER MONITOR
; then, select the MONITOR STOP CONDITI. menu key. When selected, "Monitor stop condition"
popup screen will appear at the middle of the screen.
(b) Select the SELECT menu key, and select the word device or bit device.
(c) Select the DEVICE menu key, and input the device.
(d) Select the CONDI.1 , CONDI.2 , CONDI.3 menu keys, and set the stop conditions.
(Only condition 1 is set for the bit device.)
(e) Select the REGISTER menu key, and register the stop conditions. When registered, the "Monitor
stop condition" popup screen will automatically close.

(2) Canceling the monitor stop condition settings

(a) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER MONITOR
; then, select the MONITOR STOP CONDITI. menu key. When selected, the "Monitor stop
condition" popup screen will appear at the middle of the screen.
(b) The monitor stop condition validity is displayed as follows when the monitor stop conditions are set.

Status Display
No monitor stop conditions Only screen title
Monitor stop conditions set Screen title (Monitor stop condition setting has been registered)

(c) Select the CANCEL menu key. The monitor stop condition setting display will disappear.

(3) When monitor stop conditions are established

(a) A popup screen indicating "The monitor condition has been established" will appear.
(b) This popup screen will close when the INPUT key is pressed.

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 72
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

8.2 Editing
The PLC data circuit opened on the onboard editing area can be written, inserted and deleted.
During standard operation mode, PLC data must be retrieved from the NC or external device and opened in
the onboard editing area to edit the data.
The range of editable PLC data in the simple operation mode is more and 70 Series limited than that of the
standard operation mode.
Editable PLC data in each mode is shown below.

700 Series
70 Series
Standard operation mode Simple operation mode
Sequence program
(Ladder)
PLC message data

Device comment
(Alphanumerical characters only)
Statement
(Alphanumerical characters only)
Note
(Alphanumerical characters only)

(Note 1) After editing the data, save it in the NC or external device. If not saved, the edited details will be lost.
(Note 2) If the password has not been released, the CONVERT LADDER button will appear in gray and
will be disabled.

IV - 73
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

8.2.1 Changing to Circuit Editable Screen 700

70
Standard Simple

(1) Changing to the circuit editable mode

Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT EDIT LADDER MODE
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT
to change the state to the circuit editable state. The current mode can be checked at the title bar.

(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Program display Function mode display Write mode display

Cursor

In standard operation mode, when the "EDIT" button under "LADDER" menu is pressed while the
MONITOR mode is currently selected, the mode will be automatically changed to the EDIT LADDER
MODE.
Before EDIT button in the ladder menu is After EDIT button in the ladder menu is pressed
pressed
MONITOR Changed to EDIT LADDER MODE.
MONITOR STOP Changed to EDIT LADDER MODE.
EDIT LADDER MODE (OVR.WRITE/INSERT) Not changed (stays in EDIT LADDER MODE.)
EDIT COMMENT MODE Not changed (stays in EDIT COMMENT MODE.)

(2) Moving the cursor

The cursor on the screen can be moved with the up, down, left and right arrow keys.
The cursor can also be moved in circuit units (ignoring cross bars) by pressing the |← and →| keys.

(3) Moving the screen

If the cursor is moved when it is at the top or bottom of the screen, the screen will follow the cursor and
move.
To move the screen in page units, press the and keys.

IV - 74
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

8.2.2 Restrictions

The restrictions which apply for editing circuits on the "LADDER DISPLAY" screen are shown below.
• Up to 24 lines can be edited in one circuit block.
• Up to 24 lines in one block and up to 48 lines in total can be edited.
• The maximum number of contacts in one circuit line can be changed with the "LADDER DISPLAY"
setting.
• The master control (MC) symbol cannot be edited. The MC symbol is displayed during circuit monitoring.
(The MC symbol does not appear during circuit editing.)
• If a series circuit exceeding the maximum number of contacts is created in one line, the line will
automatically return and move to the next line. The return symbol is created with K0 to K99. The OUT (→)
and IN (>-) return symbol No. always have to be the same.
• Another circuit cannot be inserted between the OUT (→) line and IN (>-) line of the return line.
• When writing the circuit, the return symbol is assigned with a serial number even if it is not in the same
circuit block. Note that in the circuit block read out with the read function, the return number is assigned in
order from No. 0.

• If the contact and coil to be overwritten extends over several contacts, the circuit cannot be edited with
the write (overwrite) mode.
(Example)
X0 X1
Y10

An instruction that uses multiple contacts such as "-[ = D0 D1 ]-" at this position cannot
be overwritten with the overwrite mode. (This is because the next instruction will also be
overwritten.)

To make the above type of revision, insert "-[ = D0 D1 ]-" beforehand with the write (insertion) mode,
and then delete "LD X0" with the DELETE key.

• If a return results from the insertion of a contact in the first row of the circuit, the contact cannot be
inserted.
(Example)
X0 X1 X2 X3 X0A
Y10

A contact or row cannot be inserted at the first row of the circuit.

(Insertion is possible if the second and following rows are empty and a return
will not result from the insertion.)

IV - 75
8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

• Insertion of the circuit symbol is processed by right alignment and row insertion, so there may be causes
when the symbol cannot be inserted because of the circuit shape.
(Example)
X0 (a) If the following conditions are
established when inserting the circuit
(c)
symbol at position (a), the message "Editing
position is incorrect" will result, and the
X1 X2 X3
(a) circuit will not be inserted.
(b) There is no space between (a) and (b)
Insertion into row (c) is not possible
Cursor position

(Note) The position (b) is the closest position to the cursor position among the branch symbols and the
coil-equivalent instructions.
• If one circuit block has two or more lines, and the instruction does not fit on one line, return the instruction
before inputting it.
• Create the number of steps for one circuit block within approx. 4k steps. The NOP instruction in the circuit
block is also included in the number of steps. The NOP instruction between circuit blocks is irrelevant.
• If there is an unconverted circuit, the screen movement range may be limited.

IV - 76
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

8.2.3 Inputting a Circuit 700

70
Standard Simple
A circuit can be written in or inserted.

(Note 1) The MITSUBISHI CNC compatible instructions (instructions usable only with MITSUBISHI CNC)
are also checked when the circuit is input.

(1) Switching between circuit overwrite and insertion

The circuit can be edited by overwriting or by inserting.
Change between these methods with the INSERT key in standard operation mode, with the
OVR.WRITE/INSERT menu key in simple operation mode. The overwrite and insertion state can be
confirmed with "Mode 2" or cursor shape on the title bar.

(2) Inputting circuits (excluding cross bars, vertical bars and labels)
(a) Move the cursor to the position to input the circuit.
(b)
Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT

; then, select the LADDER SYMBOL 1 or LADDER SYMBOL 2 menu key. When selected, the
"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen will appear.
* In 700 Series, the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen appears as shown below so that it does not
overlap the cursor line on the LADDER DISPLAY screen.
When cursor in LADDER screen is on upper half of screen Displayed on lower part of screen
When cursor in LADDER screen is on lower half of screen Displayed on upper part of screen
In 70 Series, the popup screen appears at the bottom of the circuit screen.

Circuit symbol 1 menus

Circuit symbol 2 menus

* These menus are shown in 700 Series. Some menus appear different in 70 Series.
* Some of the instructions in circuit symbol 2 are available only in the instruction extension mode.
* Instruction extension mode is set with bit selection 6452:BIT1.

(c) Input the instruction on the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen.

(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Circuit symbol selected with menu key Input instruction (device) * Refer to circuit input patterns.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

The < and > keys may not exist on the keyboard for some machine types. Use "<",">" menu
button instead when inputting an instruction that includes "<",">".

(d) Select the OK menu key to set the input circuit.

IV - 77
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

(3) Circuit input patterns

The basic input patterns for inputting circuits are shown below.

• Inputting contact instructions

(Example) For
Circuit symbol Instruction
-| |- Device name (Example) X0

• Inputting coil instructions

(Example) For
Circuit symbol Instruction
-< >-| Device name (Example) Y0

• Inputting timer and counter coil instructions

(Example) For * [SP] indicates a space code
Circuit symbol Instruction
-< >-| Device [SP] device (Example) T0 K10

(Example) For * [SP] indicates a space code

Circuit symbol Instruction
-< >-| Instruction [SP] device [SP] device (Example) H T0 K10

• Inputting function instructions

(Example) For * [SP] indicates a space code
Circuit symbol Instruction
-[ ]- Instruction [SP] device [SP] device (Example) MOV K0 R0

• Inputting labels
(Example) For P4002
Circuit symbol Instruction
(Empty) Device (Example) P4002

(4) Inputting vertical bars and cross bars

(a) Move the cursor to the input position.
(b) Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT

; then, select the LADDER SYMBOL 1 and | menu keys.

LADDER SYMBOL 1 menus

(c) A vertical bar or cross bar is input at the cursor position.

(5) Deleting a circuit

(a) Move the cursor to the position to delete.
(b) Select the DELETE key. The circuit at the cursor position will be deleted.

IV - 78
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

(6) Deleting a vertical bar

(a) Move the cursor to the upper right of the vertical bar to be deleted.
(b) Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT

; then, select the LADDER SYMBOL 2 → | DELETE menu keys.

LADDER SYMBOL 2 menus

(c) The vertical bar at the lower left of the cursor will be deleted.

(7) Inputting a label

(a) Move the cursor to the position to input, and press the INPUT key.
(b) Input the label No. in the instruction field of the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen.
(The circuit symbol does not need to be input.)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

The < and > keys may not exist on the keyboard for some machine types. Use "<",">" menu
button instead when inputting an instruction that includes "<",">".

(c) Select the OK menu key and set the input circuit.

(8) Displaying the revised circuit block

The circuit revised with edited operations is displayed as a circuit block unit with a gray background.

Circuit block
being revised

IV - 79
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

(9) Inputting circuits with list format

A list instruction character string can be directly input and edited. (Normally, the circuits should be input
with the method given in (2) Circuit symbols.)
(a) Move the cursor to the position to input the circuit.
(b) When the INPUT key is pressed, the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen (with blank circuit
symbol) will appear.
(c) Input the list instruction character string.
(Example) For Use a space code to delimit the instructions and devices

The < and > keys may not exist on the keyboard for some machine types. Use "<",">" menu
button instead when inputting an instruction that includes "<",">".

(d) Select the OK menu key, and set the input circuit.

IV - 80
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

8.2.4 Inserting a Line 700

70
Standard Simple
A new line can be inserted at the cursor position to create a circuit.

(1) Inserting a line

(a) Move the cursor to the position to insert the line.
(b) Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT

; then, select the COPY/INSERT and INSERT LINE menu key.

(c) A new line will be inserted above the cursor.

700
70
8.2.5 Deleting a Line Standard Simple
The line where the cursor is at can be deleted.

(1) Deleting a line

(a) Move the cursor to the position to delete.
(b) Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT

; then, select the COPY/INSERT and DELETE LINE menu key.

(c) The line where the cursor is will be deleted.

700
70
8.2.6 Designating the Range Standard Simple

The range can be designated as a circuit block unit or as a circuit unit.

(1) Designating the range for a circuit unit

(a) Move the cursor to the left end of the circuit to be designated.
(b) Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT

; then, select the COPY/INSERT and MARK menu key.

(c) Next, move the cursor to the right end of the range to be designated. The background of the
selected range will change to blue.
Start point (left end) End point (right end)

IV - 81
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

(2) Designating the range for a circuit block unit

(a) Move the cursor to the left end (position where label No. and step No. are displayed) of the circuit
block to be designated.
(b) Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT

; then, select the COPY/INSERT and MARK menu key.

(c) Move the cursor up and down, and move to the circuit block to be designated. The background of
the selected range will change to blue.

Start point End point

(Note 1) In the NC automatic update mode (LADDER screen background is white), batch delete and copy
& paste cannot be carried out on a circuit which has been designated.

(3) Canceling the range designation

(a) When the background of the selected range is blue,
Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT

; then, select the COPY/INSERT and MARK menu key again.

(b) The background of the selected range will return to the original color.

700
8.2.7 Deleting in a Batch Standard Simple
70

The circuits can be deleted in a batch.

(1) Deleting in a batch

(a) Refer to "8.2.6 Designating the Range", and designate the circuit range to delete.
(b) Press the DELETE key. The circuits in the designated range will all be deleted.

*When the range is the circuit block unit, conversion is also executed automatically.

(Note 1) When the background color of LADDER screen is white (auto renewal mode), a batch deletion in the
circuit block unit is not possible. (An error message appears.)

IV - 82
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

700
8.2.8 Copy & Paste Standard Simple
70

The circuits can be copied and pasted at another position or in another program.

(1) Copying
(a) Refer to "8.2.6 Designating the Range", and designate the range of circuits to be copied.
(b) Press the COPY menu key.
* If necessary memory could not be secured in the copied circuit, the error is displayed and the
selected area to be copied is cleared. The error message "it is over the circuit size which can be
copied" is displayed.

(Note 1) When a background color of LADDER screen is white (auto renewal mode), copy & paste in the
circuit block unit is not possible. (An error message appears.)

(2) Pasting
(a) Move the cursor to the position to paste into.
* The PASTE key is displayed in gray until a circuit is copied.
* To paste to another program, change to that program.

(b) Press the PASTE menu key.

The paste operations differs according to the overwrite and insertion modes.

IV - 83
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

8.2.9 Converting a Program 700

70
Standard Simple
The program conversion operation differs according to the mode.
• NC automatic update mode
• Local editing mode

(1) Conversion operation for NC automatic update mode (LADDER screen background color is white)
(700 Series/ 70 Series)
The background color is white if the program was opened from the temporary memory into the onboard
editing area using "NC FILE", or when a "LADDER" for a program temporarily saved from the onboard
editing area is displayed. After this type of program is converted, the circuit will automatically be saved in
the program with the same name in the temporary memory.

(Note 1) Only the program currently being edited is updated.

(Note 2) The temporary memory is lost when the NC power is turned OFF. Refer to "12.4 Writing the
Temporary Memory's PLC Data to the ROM", and always save the data on the ROM. (The
message "ROM-Write incomplete" appears in the message area until the data is saved in the
ROM.)
(Note 3) If the password has not been released, the CONVERT LADDER button will appear in gray
and will be disabled.
(Note 4) Up to 512 steps can be converted at once.
(Note 5) When PLC is in RUN, a message appears to confirm whether to stop PLC to execute the
operation.
When PLC is not stopped, programs will not be automatically written into the temporary memory.
(An error message appears.)
After the conversion has been successfully completed, a message confirming whether to have
PLC returned to the RUN state is displayed.
(Note that, however, if the conversion is executed during PLC STOP, this message will not be
displayed.)
(Note 6) The circuit cannot be converted if it exceeds the temporary memory's capacity.) (An error will
appear.)

Converting the NC automatic update mode (LADDER screen background is white) screen

(2) Conversion operation for local editing mode (LADDER screen background is light blue) (700
Series)
The background color is light blue if the program was opened from an external device, or if a program to
which data was added, the data name was changed or the program was initially set with the "11. FILE"
operations is displayed on the "LADDER" screen. If this program is converted, only the program in the
onboard editing area will be converted. (The program will not be automatically written into the temporary
memory.)
To save the program in the temporary memory, save it with the "NC FILE" operations.

(Note 1) The program is not saved in the temporary memory after conversion.

IV - 84
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

Converting the local editing mode (LADDER screen background is light blue) screen

(3) Conversion method

Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT

; then, select the CONVERT LADDER menu key, or

Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT

Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT

; then, select LADDER SYMBOL 1 and the CONVERT LADDER menu key.
LADDER SYMBOL 2
COPY/INSERT

* The circuit block being edited will be converted. (The gray background will change to white when the
data is correctly converted.)
* It may take slightly longer when saving to the temporary memory.

IV - 85
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

8.2.10 Editing a Statement 700

70
Standard Simple
Statements can be added to the program displayed on the "LADDER" screen.
A statement is character string data added to each circuit block to make it easy to understand the flow of the
entire program.

(Note 1) If a user PLC containing an integrated statement is saved in the NC, a large user PLC memory will
be required.
(Note 2) Only alphanumeric characters can be input on the onboard.

Comment type Display Edit Input character range Storage destination data type
Statement { { 64 one-byte alphanumeric characters Program

• Example of interlinear integrated statement display

(1) Displaying a statement

To display a statement, validate the statement display as explained in "8.4.2 Comment Display".

(2) Switching between integrated statement and peripheral statement.

Statements include integrated types and peripheral types. The integrated type and peripheral type is
switched with the head character.
Head character is * (asterisk) Peripheral statement
Head character is not an * (asterisk) Integrated statement

An example of inputting the peripheral statement is shown below.

; (semicolon) * (asterisk) Statement

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen

(3) Inputting an interlinear statement

(a) Press "MAIN" → LADDER → EDIT and EDIT LADDER MODE menu key, and activate the
circuit input mode.
(b) Press the INSERT key, and activate the insertion mode.
(c) Move the cursor on the "LADDER" screen to the left end of the position to input.

Designate the left end.

IV - 86
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

(d) Press the INPUT key, and the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen will appear.
(e) Input the statement on the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen. Add a ; (semicolon) at the head when
inputting.
; (semicolon) Statement

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen

(f) After setting the input, press the INPUT key or OK menu key. The statement will appear
between the cursor lines.
(g) Select the CONVERT LADDER menu to complete the editing.

(4) Inputting a P statement

(a) Press "MAIN" → LADDER → EDIT and EDIT LADDER MODE menu key, and activate the
circuit input mode.
(b) Move the cursor on the "LADDER" screen to the P label to be input, and then press the INPUT
key. The "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen will appear.
(c) Input a statement on the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen. Input the label, semicolon (;) and then
statement.
; (semicolon) Statement

(d) After setting the input, press the INPUT key or OK menu key. The P label statement will
appear.
(e) Select the "CONVERT LADDER" menu to complete the editing.

700
70
Standard Simple
8.2.11 Editing a Note
Notes can be added to the program displayed on the "LADDER" screen.
A note, just like a statement, is character string data added to each coil and function instruction to make it
easy to understand the flow of the entire program.

(Note 1) If a user PLC containing an integrated note is saved in the NC, a large user PLC memory will be
required.
(Note 2) Only alphanumeric characters can be input on the onboard.

Comment type Display Edit Input character range Storage destination data type
Note 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters Program

• Example of integrated note display

IV - 87
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

(1) Displaying a note

To display a note, validate the note display as explained in "8.4.2 Comment display".

(2) Switching between integrated note and peripheral note.

Notes include integrated types and peripheral types. The integrated type and peripheral type is switched
with the head character.

Head character is * (asterisk) Peripheral note

Head character is not an * (asterisk) Integrated note

An example of inputting the peripheral note is shown below.

; (semicolon) * (asterisk) Note

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen

(3) Inputting a note

(a) Press "MAIN" → LADDER → EDIT and EDIT LADDER MODE menu key, and activate the
circuit edit mode.
(b) Move the cursor on the "LADDER" screen to the position of the coil or function instruction to be input,
and press the INPUT key. The "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen will appear.
(c) Input a note on the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen. Add a ; (semicolon) following the instruction
when inputting.
; (semicolon) Note

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen

(d) After setting the input, press the INPUT key or OK menu key. The note will appear at the
coil or function instruction at the cursor position.
(e) Select the CONVERT LADDER menu to complete the editing.

IV - 88
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

8.2.12 Editing a Comment 700

70
Standard Simple

Comments can be added to each device. The program is easier to understand when meanings are assigned
to the devices. Refer to "4.2 Types of Data" for details on the data.
The validity of comment display and editing, the input character range, types of data that can be saved, and a
display example are given below.

(Note 1) Only alphanumeric characters can be input on the onboard.

Comment type Display Edit Input character range Storage destination data type
Comment 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters Device comment

• Example of comment display

(1) Designating the device comment data containing comment to edit

The comment is stored in the device comment data file. Refer to "7.4.1 Changing Data (Program, Device
Comment)", before editing, and designate the device comment data.

(2) Displaying a comment

To display a comment, validate the comment display as explained in "8.4.2 Comment Display".

(3) Editing a comment

(a) Press "MAIN" → LADDER → EDIT and EDIT COMMENT MODE menu key. The line
spacing on the "LADDER" screen will increase so that comments can be input.
(b) Move the cursor to the instruction for which a comment is to be input, and press the INPUT key.
The popup screen for editing the comment will appear.
(c) Input a comment on the "COMMENT INPUT" popup screen.
(d) After setting the input, press the INPUT key or OK menu key. The comment will appear at
the selected circuit.
(e) If there are multiple devices in the instruction, the process will shift to the input of the comment for
the next device.

(Example) To add a comment to the X0 device on the "LADDER" screen

Device name Device comment data name

"COMMENT INPUT" popup screen

IV - 89
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

8.2.13 Editing a PLC Message 700

70
Standard Simple

The PLC messages (alarm messages, operator messages, PLC switches, comments) can be edited. These
messages are created as programs with reserved names (example: M1xxxxx). The user PLCs, statements
and notes cannot be written into this program.
Characters other than the alphanumeric character (Roman figure (ex. ) etc.) can be edited by inputting the
character-code.

(1) PLC message data description format

The PLC message data is created using the interlinear integrated statement editing function.

Return page code

File comment

Alarm
message

Operator
message

PLC switch

Comment
message

End code

• Alarm, operator, PLC switch and comment messages

Details Each message is described. One message is described on a line.
Description Alarm message
format ;A, "Index No. ", "data register No. ", "message character string"
(Example) ;A,0,0,Emergency stop
;A,11,1,Spindle alarm
Operator message
;O, "Index No. ", "data register No. ", "message character string"
(Example) ;O,1,9000,MELDAS 700 PLC
;O,20,9000,PLC version
PLC switch
;P, "Switch No. ", "message character string"
(Example) ;P,1,AUTO RESTART
;P,2,BLOCK DELETE
Comment message
;M, "Index No. ", "device No. ", "message character string"
(Example) ;M,1,0,[SP LOAD]
;M,1,0,[ Z LOAD]

IV - 90
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

• File comment
Details The integrated statement which starts with a character other than A, O, P or M
can be used as a file comment.
Description format ;"File comment"
(Example) ;# M7 PLC message

• Return page code

Details This is the circuit function instruction NOPLF instruction. This is created as a
circuit instruction instead of a statement.
(Note) One or more return page codes is created every 15 lines of setting areas
or messages.
(The message data could be skipped if a return code is not described.)

• End code
Details This is the circuit END instruction, and is normally created automatically.

• Range of each message data input characters

Message type code A: Alarm message, O: Operator message, P: PLC switch, M: Comment
message
Index No. One-byte numbers (0 to number of messages in setting area -1)
Switch No. One-byte numbers (0 to number of messages in setting area -1)
Data register No. One-byte numbers
Device One-byte number (1 or 2)
Device No. One-byte numbers (0 to 10)
Message character string Alphanumeric character or other characters (Input by character-code
(Unicode))
(Note) To display characters other than the alphanumeric character, the
correspondence language should be able to be displayed.
; (semicolon) Statement input code
, (comma) Described element delimiter (only commas can be used to set a blank in
the message character string)

• Maximum value of each message data

Message type Maximum message length Maximum number
Alarm message 32 Byte 1024 messages
Operator message 60 Byte 512 messages
PLC switch 14 Byte 32 messages
Comment messages 60 Byte 100 messages

IV - 91
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

(2) Designating the PLC message to edit

Refer to "8.4.1 Changing Data (Program, Device Comment)" for designating the PLC message.

(3) Displaying the PLC message

When the PLC message is set to be edited, the message editing screen is displayed as follows. No
setting is needed to validate the display of statements or comments.

(4) Inputting one-byte alphanumeric characters in the PLC message

(a) Move the cursor to the message to edit, and press the INPUT key. The "ENTER SYMBOL" popup
screen, as shown below, appears for editing the message.
(b) Move the cursor to any position and input characters in the "DEVICE/INST" field on the "ENTER
SYMBOL" popup screen.
(c) After confirming the input characters, press the INPUT key or the OK menu key. The edited
message is displayed in the circuit.

IV - 92
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

(d) Select the CONVERT LADDER menu key to complete the editing.

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen dedicated to messages

„In 700 Series

„In 70 Series

(5) Using character codes to input characters in the PLC message

(a) Move the cursor to the message to edit, and press the INPUT key. The "ENTER SYMBOL" popup
screen, as shown below, appears for editing the message.
(b) Move the cursor to any position in the "DEVICE/INST" field on the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen.
Then the right-bottom field in the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen displays the character code of the
character at the cursor.
(c)Click the CHAR. CODE INPUT menu key and input a character code in the "STR. CODE" ("CHAR.
CODE") entry field. The character corresponding to the entered character code is displayed.
Pressing the ↑ / ↓ keys and page up/down keys can change the character code.
(d) Click the CHAR. SET menu key. The cursor position in the "DEVICE/INST." field displays the
character as set in the "STR. CODE" ("CHAR. CODE") field. When canceling the input with character
code, click the DEVICE/INST. menu key to move the cursor back to the "DEVICE/INST." field.
(e) After confirming the input characters, press the INPUT key or OK menu key. The edited
message is displayed in the circuit.
(f) Select the CONVERT LADDER menu key to complete the editing.

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen dedicated to messages

„In 700 Series

„In 70 Series

IV - 93
 8. Circuit Operations
8.2 Editing

8.2.14 Undoing the Last Editing Operation 700

70
Standard Simple

Cancels the last editing operation with circuit input mode and restores the previous state.
Undo operation is possible for only one most recent edit.
Menu is masked when undo operation is not possible.

(1) Procedures for undo operation

There are two ways of undo operations.
(a) Method with menu key selection:
Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
LADDER EDIT COPY/INSERT - or -
70 Series: "MAIN" LADDER EDIT LADDER SIMBOL 1
Select
LADDER SIMBOL 2
COPY/INSERT

and then UNDO menu key.

(b) Press Ctrl, then Z key.

(2) Restorable edits and unrestorable editing

Restorable editing:
• Editing contacts/coils/lines etc. (add • change • delete)
• Editing statement/note
• Line insertion • line deletion
• Pasting in one circuit unit
Unrestorable editing:
• When a circuit is changed, the state prior to the change cannot be restored.
• When an unconverted circuit is discarded, the state prior to discarding cannot be restored.
• Editing with replacement, change of AB contacts or TC setting value
• Editing device comment with comment input mode
• Editing in a split display of a circuit
When pasted in a circuit block unit, the state prior to pasting cannot be restored.

IV - 94
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

8.3 Searching and Replacing

Contacts, coils, instructions, step Nos. and character strings can be searched for while editing and monitoring
circuits. In addition, AB contacts can be changed, and devices, etc., can be replaced.
This search function is also used when selecting the circuit to register with the circuit register monitor.

(Note) If a circuit block is being edited in the editing mode, the following confirmation popup screen will
appear.
"Unconverted circuit found. Okay to abort unconverted circuit?"
If YES is selected, the unconverted circuit will be aborted.
If NO is selected, the search will not be executed. (The unconverted circuit will remain.)

700
8.3.1 Searching for Ladder (Simple search) Standard Simple
70

Move the cursor to the circuit to be searched and press the "INPUT" key, alphanumerical key, or ladder
symbol menu key, and then popup screen for searching will appear.
(1) Displaying "FIND" screen

In 700 Series
"FIND" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

In 70 Series
"FIND" screen

(a) When pressing "INPUT", LADDER SYMBOL menu and alphabetical key on the LADDER MONITOR
screen, "FIND" popup screen will appear.
• When "INPUT" is pressed while device exists on cursor position, the device on the cursor position is
displayed.
• When LADDER SYMBOL menu is pressed, ladder symbol is displayed on the ladder symbol
section.
• When alphabetical key is pressed, the pressed character is displayed and the instruction or device to
be consecutively searched can be entered.
The < and > keys may not exist on the keyboard for some machine types. Use "<",">" menu
button instead when inputting an instruction that includes "<",">".
(b) With the simple operation mode, execute the following menu key operation to open the "FIND" popup
screen.
• "MAIN" → "LADDER MONITOR" "FIND"
• "MAIN" → "LADDER EIDIT" "FIND"

IV - 95
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

(2) Search direction and types

Menu item Search direction and type
FIND TOP TO This searches the designated device or instruction from the top of program.
BOTTOM When "INPUT" is pressed as soon as the popup screen is opened, search
begins from the top, as well.
FIND CURSOR TO This searches the designated device or instruction downward from the cursor
BOT. position.
FIND CURSOR TO This searches the designated device or instruction upward from the cursor
TOP position.
FIND CONTACT This searches the designated device contact instruction from the top of
program. Ignore the status of "LADDER SYMBOL" at this time.
(Example: When contact is searched in the "-()- M0" state, error will not occur
and instead the contact of M0 will be searched.)
FIND COIL This searches the designated device coil instruction from the top of program.
Ignore the status of "LADDER SYMBOL" at this time.

(3) Consecutive searching method

Once the search using menu key or "INPUT" is started, the menu key of selected search type turns to
"FIND NEXT". When "FIND NEXT" menu key or "INPUT" is pressed, search continues consecutively.
When multiple programs are opened, a program is searched to the end. Then, the next program will be
searched consecutively.

(4) Consecutive searching of multiple programs

When multiple programs are opened, program search is performed to the end of a program, and then
continued on to the next program in response to the following message.
When searched object was found in the first program:
"Find completed. Find another program. YES/NO"
When searched object was not found in the first program:
"The find target could not be found. Find another program. YES/NO"
(Message will not appear after the second program.)
(Search continues by simply pressing "INPUT" as the message focus is on "Yes")

If "Yes" is selected, the next program will be searched consecutively. When all the programs have been
searched, "Find is complete" will appear.
If "No" is selected, search will be ended.

(Example)
Find another
program?
Yes/No
Search ends Search begins

Program Program Program Program

(5) Ladder monitor registration method

Circuit block on the cursor position of the "LADDER" screen can be registered in the "ENTRY LADDER"
screen.
Refer to "8.1.4 Ladder Entry Monitor (Split Screens)" for details.

IV - 96
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

(6) Device monitor registration method

Devices can be registered when "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen (lower part of screen) is displayed
in a split screen format.
Refer to "8.1.3 (3)(a) when registering by using the "REGISTER MONITOR" button on the "LADDER"
screen for details.

(7) Returning to the start (70 Series)

Returns to the step from which the search started.

700
70
8.3.2 Searching for Step No. (Simple search) Standard Simple

(1) Displaying "FIND STEP NO." screen

(a) When number key is pressed in the LADDER EDIT screen or LADDER MONITOR screen, "FIND
STEP NO." popup screen will appear.
(b) With the simple operation mode and 70 Series, execute the following menu key operation to open the
"FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
• "MAIN" → LADDER MONITOR FIND STEP NO. .
• "MAIN" → LADDER EDIT FIND STEP NO. .
* When numerical key is pressed while cursor is located on the ENTRY LADDER MONITOR (split
screen) side, circuit "FIND" popup screen will appear.

"FIND STEP NO." popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(2) Search methods

Input the step No. to be searched and press FIND menu key or INPUT key. Then, the specified
step No. will be searched.

IV - 97
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

8.3.3 Searching for Contacts and Coils 700

70
Standard Simple

Contact or coil devices can be searched from the circuits on the "LADDER" screen.
Also, in the same manner as the simple search, multiple programs can be searched consecutively.

"FIND CONTACT OR COIL" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → FIND, REPLACE and FIND CONTACTOR COIL menu key.
When selected, the "FIND CONTACT OR COIL" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the
screen.
(b) Select the DEVICE menu key, and input the device.
* The device to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Select contact or coil with the TARGET menu key. (Contact is selected as a default.)
(d) Press the FIND menu key.
* Search is always carried out downward from the head of the circuit.
(e) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.

(2) Registering monitor

Registering the ladder specified with the entry ladder monitor or the device specified with the device
registration monitor can be executed. Refer to "8.1.5 Registering the Monitor" for details.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 98
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

8.3.4 Searching for Device 700

70
Standard Simple
A device can be searched from the circuits on the "LADDER" screen.
"FIND DEVICE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → FIND, REPLACE and FIND DEVICE menu key.
When selected, the "FIND DEVICE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the DEVICE menu key, and input the device.
* The device to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Designate the search direction with the FIND DIRECTI. menu key. (As a default, the devices are
searched downward from the head.)
(d) Designate the search options with the FIND OPTION menu key. (No default setting.)
(e) Press the FIND NEXT menu key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) If the FIND NEXT menu key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current position.

(2) Registering monitor

Registering the ladder specified with the entry ladder monitor or the device specified with the device
registration monitor can be executed. Refer to "8.1.5 Registering the Monitor" for details.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(4) Consecutive searching of multiple programs

Refer to "8.3.1 Searching for Ladder (Simple search)" for details.

* Changing the search target program (ladder)

The program to be searched can be changed.
Refer to "8.4.1 Changing Data (Program, Device Comment)" for details on the operation methods.

IV - 99
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

8.3.5 Instruction Search 700

70
Standard Simple
Instructions can be searched from the ladder on the "LADDER" screen.

"FIND INSTRUCTION" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(Supplement)
The < and > keys may not exist on the keyboard for some machine types. Use "<",">" menu button
instead when inputting an instruction that includes "<",">".
(1) Search methods
(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → FIND, REPLACE and FIND INST. menu key.
When selected, the "FIND INSTRUCTION" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the
screen.
(b) Select the LADDER SYMBOL menu key, and select the circuit symbol from the list.
This can be omitted for a function instruction such as MOV.
(c) Input the search instruction with the FIND INST. menu key.
* The instruction to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input instruction can be
selected from the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(d) Designate the search direction with the FIND DIRECTI. menu key. (As a default, the devices are
searched downward from the head.)
(e) Press the FIND NEXT menu key or INPUT key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) If the FIND NEXT menu key or INPUT key is pressed again, the search will continue from the
current position.
(2) Registering monitor
Registering the ladder specified with the entry ladder monitor or the device specified with the device
registration monitor can be executed. Refer to "8.1.5 Registering the Monitor" for details.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.
(4) Consecutive searching of multiple programs
Refer to "8.3.1 Searching for Ladder (Sample search)" for details.
* Changing the search target program (ladder)
The program to be searched can be changed.
Refer to "8.4.1 Changing Data (Program, Device Comment)" for details on the operation methods.

IV - 100
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

8.3.6 Step No. Search 700

70
Standard Simple

A circuit with a designated step No. can be searched from the circuits on the "LADDER" screen.
"FIND STEP NO." popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search method

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → FIND, REPLACE and STEP NO. menu key.
When selected, the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the STEP NO. menu key, and set the step No.
* The step No. to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input step No. can be selected
from the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Press the FIND menu key.
(d) The circuit with the designated step No. will appear, and the popup screen will close.

(2) Registering monitor

Registering the ladder specified with the entry ladder monitor or the device specified with the device
registration monitor can be executed. Refer to "8.1.5 Registering the Monitor" for details.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 101
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

8.3.7 Character String Search 700

70
Standard Simple

A designated character string can be searched from the circuit statements and notes on the "LADDER"
screen.
"FIND STRING" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → FIND, REPLACE and FIND STRING menu key.
When selected, the "FIND STRING" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the STRING menu key, and set the character string.
* The character string to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input character string can
be selected from the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Designate the search direction with the FIND DIRECTI. menu key. (As a default, the devices are
searched downward from the head.)
(d) Press the FIND NEXT menu key.
(e) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(f) If the FIND NEXT menu key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current position.

(2) Registering monitor

Registering the ladder specified with the entry ladder monitor or the device specified with the device
registration monitor can be executed. Refer to "8.1.5 Registering the Monitor" for details.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(4) Consecutive searching of multiple programs

Refer to "8.3.1 Searching for Ladder (Simple search)" for details.

* Changing the search target program (ladder)

The program to be searched can be changed.
Refer to "8.4.1 Changing Data (Program, Device Comment)" for details on the operation methods.

IV - 102
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

8.3.8 Changing the AB Contacts 700

70
Standard Simple

The A contact for a designated device in the circuits on the "LADDER" screen can be changed to a B contact
and vice versa.
"CHANGE AB CONTACT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → FIND, REPLACE and CHANGE AB CONTACT menu key.
When selected, the "CHANGE AB CONTACT" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the
screen.
(b) Select the DEVICE menu key, and set the device.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Designate the search direction with the FIND DIRECTI. menu key. (As a default, the devices are
searched downward from the head.)
(d) Press the FIND NEXT menu key.
(e) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(f) If the FIND NEXT menu key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current position.

(2) Changing the AB contact

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → FIND, REPLACE and CHANGE AB CONTACT menu key.
When selected, the "CHANGE AB CONTACT" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the
screen.
(b) Select the DEVICE menu key, and set the device.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Designate the search direction with the FIND DIRECTI. menu key. (As a default, the devices are
searched downward from the head.)
(d) Press the FIND NEXT menu key.
(e) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(f) Press the REPLACE key to replace the device.
(g) After replacing, the device search will continue, and the cursor will move accordingly.

IV - 103
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

(h) All devices can be replaced in a batch when the REPLACE ALL menu key is selected.
(Supplement) Device designation
Extensions and bit No. modifiers can be designated when designating the device, but index
modifiers cannot be designated.
• Example of device designation
X0Z3 cannot be designated (Cannot be designated because this is an index modifier)
• The A contact and B contact in the following instructions can be changed.
A contact : LD,AND,OR,LDP,ANDP,ORP,EGP
B contact : LDI,ANI,ORI,LDF,ANDF,ORF,EGF

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

* Changing the search target program (ladder)

The program to be searched can be changed.
Refer to "8.4.1 Changing Data (Program, Device Comment)" for details on the operation methods.

700
8.3.9 Replacing Devices Standard Simple
70

Devices and character string constants, etc., on the "LADDER" screen can be replaced.

"REPLACE DEVICE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → FIND, REPLACE and REPLACE DEVICE menu key.
When selected, the "REPLACE DEVICE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the OLD DEVICE menu key, and set the device to be replaced.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Select the NEW DEVICE menu key, and set the new device.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(d) Designate the search direction with the FIND DIRECTI. menu key. (As a default, the devices are
searched downward from the head.)
(e) Press the FIND NEXT menu key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) If the FIND NEXT menu key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current position.

IV - 104
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

(2) Replacement methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → FIND, REPLACE and REPLACE DEVICE menu key.
When selected, the "REPLACE DEVICE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the OLD DEVICE menu key, and set the device.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Select the NEW DEVICE menu key, and set the device.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(d) Designate the search direction with the FIND DIRECTI. menu key. (As a default, the devices are
searched downward from the head.)
(e) Press the FIND NEXT menu key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) Press the REPLACE key to replace the device.
(h) After replacing, the device search will continue, and the cursor will move accordingly.
(i) All devices can be replaced in a batch when the REPLACE ALL menu key is selected.
(Supplement)
• Device designation
The following devices can be replaced.
• Word devices to word devices
• Bit devices to bit devices
Note that digits, indexes and indirect modifiers cannot be replaced.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

* Changing the search target program (ladder)

The program to be searched can be changed.
Refer to "8.4.1 Changing Data (Program, Device Comment)" for details on the operation methods.
* When all replace is executed, the following progress bar will appear.

IV - 105
 8. Circuit Operations
8.3 Searching and Replacing

8.3.10 Changing the T/C Setting Value 700

70
Standard Simple

The timer and counter setting values used in the program displayed on the "LADDER" screen can be listed,
and the setting values can be changed in a batch.

"T/C SETTING CHANGE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the timer and counter device list

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → FIND, REPLACE and T/C SETTING CHANGE menu key.
When selected, the "T/C SETTING CHANGE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the
screen.
(b) Select the DEVICE menu key, and input the timer or counter device.
* The timer or counter device can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Select the DISPLAY VALUE menu key. When selected, the list of timer or counter devices will
appear.

(2) Changing the timer and counter setting value

(a) List the timer or counter devices.
(b) Select the LIST menu key, move the cursor to the "AFTER" column of the device for which the
setting value is to be changed, and then press the INPUT key. The cursor can be moved with
the "up, down, left, right" arrow keys.
(c) Input the new setting value. (Example: To change the value to 10, input "K10".)
(d) Select the CHANGE menu. The setting will be changed, and the "T/C SETTING CHANGE" popup
screen will automatically close.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 106
 8. Circuit Operations
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

The program data and device comment data to be edited can be changed, and the comments can be
displayed and set.

8.4.1 Changing Data (Program, Device Comment) 700

70
Standard Simple
8.4.1.1 Data Changeover
When reading out multiple program data and device comment data, the data to be displayed, edited and
monitored can be changed.

(Note 1) If the data is changed to a circuit (program) for the local editing mode (LADDER screen background
is light blue), monitoring on the "LADDER" screen will be disabled.
(The LADDER menu MONITOR and MONITOR menu will all be displayed in gray and
disabled. Circuit monitoring and device registration monitoring on the LADDER screen will also
be disabled.)

"DATA CHANGE" popup screen

Menus corresponding to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "DATA CHANGE" popup screen

(a) Standard operation mode:
• "MAIN" → LADDER → VIEW, TOOLS DATA CHANGE - or -
• "MAIN" → LADDER → EDIT → COPY/INSERT DATA CHANGE
(b) Simple operation mode:
• "MAIN" → LADDER MONITOR DATA CHANGE - or -
• "MAIN" → LADDER EDIT DATA CHANGE
When selected, the "DATA CHANGE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen
and will show the program and the device comment being edited.

(2) Changing the program data

(a) Select the TARGET DEVICE PROGRAM menu key, and designate the data to change.
(b) Select the DATA CHANGE menu key. When selected, the ladder circuit displayed on all screens
will change to the designated program.

(3) Changing the device comment

(a) Select the TARGET DEVICE COMMENT menu key, and designate the data to change.
(b) Select the DATA CHANGE menu key. When selected and a comment is displayed, the details of
the comment will change to the comment for the designated data.

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 107
 8. Circuit Operations
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

8.4.1.2 Program Changeover 700

70
Standard Simple

The programs in the circuit display can be changed.

(1) Changing the displayed programs

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER MONITOR PROGRAM CHANGE - or -
"MAIN" → LADDER EDIT PROGRAM CHANGE menu.
When the menu key is pressed, the screen shows the list of the programs that have been read.
(b) Select the program with the arrow keys or page up/down key. The selected program is displayed by
pressing the INPUT key.

IV - 108
 8. Circuit Operations
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

8.4.2 Comment Display 700

70
Standard Simple

The validity of the comment display, statement display, note display and device name display can be set.
In 70 Series, these display settings are in "ENVIRON. SETTING" screen. Refer to "6.5 Comment Display
Setting".

(Note 1) If an incompatible language is designated for the comment, it will not be displayed correctly.

"COMMENT DISPLAY" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying a comment, statement, note or device name

* The method for displaying a comment is given as an example below.
(a)
Standard operation mode: "MAIN" LADDER VIEW, TOOLS COMMENT DISPLAY menu key
Select Simple operation mode: "MAIN"
COMMENT DISPLAY menu key
When selected, the "COMMENT DISPLAY" popup menu will appear at the lower center of the
screen.
(b) Select the COMMENT DISPLAY menu key.
A check mark will appear at "COMMENT".
(c) When the COMMENT DISPLAY menu key is selected again, the check mark will be removed.
(d) Press the "SET" menu key. The "COMMENT DISPLAY" popup menu will close, and the comment
display setting will change.
* Comment display set once will be held even after terminating the onboard.
When the onboard is started up again, the comment display is shown in the same state as it was
set last.

IV - 109
 8. Circuit Operations
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

(2) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

Examples of displaying various comments are given below.

• Example of displaying comment, statement and note

Statement Note

Comment Comment

• Example of displaying device name (The device name appears at the device name display.)

(3) Comment ON/OFF by "EOB(;)"

Comment can be switched ON or OFF by using "EOB(;)".
Refer to "8.4.3 Comment ON/OFF" for details.

IV - 110
 8. Circuit Operations
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

8.4.3 Comment ON/OFF 700

70
Standard Simple

Comment set with circuit's "COMMENT DISPLAY" can be switched ON or OFF.

(1) Switching by key

Comment can be switched ON or OFF by using "EOB(;)".

(2) Switching by menu key (Simple operation mode and 70 Series)

• "MAIN" → LADDER MONITOR COMMENT ON/OFF - or -
• "MAIN" → LADDER EDIT COMMENT ON/OFF

When comment display is switched ON while "COMMENT DISPLAY" box is unchecked, comment,
statement and note will be checked.

(Example) "COMMENT ON/OFF" button operations when "COMMENT DISPLAY" is set as shown below.
(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Comment display ON/OFF switch

IV - 111
 8. Circuit Operations
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

8.4.4 Setting the Circuit Display Scale 700

70
Standard Simple

(1) Switching by menu key

The circuit's display scale can be switched by using ZOOM DISPLAY menu key.
(a) With standard operation mode
• "MAIN" → LADDER → VIEW, TOOLS LADDER DISPLAY ZOOM DISPLAY
(b) With simple operation mode and 70 Series
• "MAIN" → LADDER MONITOR ZOOM DISPLAY - or -
• "MAIN" → LADDER EDIT ZOOM DISPLAY

By pressing the menu key, the scale changes in 3 stages: "Reduction" → "Standard" → "Expansion" →
"Reduction"
In 70 Series, "ENVIRON. SETTING" screen has the same setting menu. Refer to "6.4.2 Zoom Display".

(Note1) The setting of circuit's expanded/reduced display and maximum number of contacts will be held
even after terminating the onboard.
(When the onboard is started up again, the circuit will be displayed with the same settingas as
before.)

In 700 Series
Reduced display

Standard display

Expanded display

IV - 112
 8. Circuit Operations
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

In 70 Series

<9 contacts display>

Reduced display

Standard display

Expanded display

<11 contacts display>

Reduced display

Standard display

Expanded display

(Note 1) The ZOOM CURSOR menu focuses on the cursor display area in reduced display and enlarges the
area to the standard size.

IV - 113
 8. Circuit Operations
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

(2) Specifying the maximum number of contacts

In 700 Series, maximum number of contacts are determined by the resolution of the display unit.
Maximum number of contacts will be changed from "LADDER DISPLAY" menu in the standard operation
mode.
In the standard operation mode, select "MAIN" → LADDER → VIEW, TOOLS
LADDER DISPLAY NUMBER OF CONTACT menu key to switch display size.
In 70 Series, the maximum number of contacts is changed in "ENVIRON. SETTING" screen. Refer to
"6.4.1 Maximum Number of Contacts" for details.

When screen resolution is VGA (640x480) (9 contacts)

9 contacts + 1 coil

When screen resolution is XGA (1024x768) (11 contacts)

11 contacts + 1 coil

(3) Displaying the circuit with horizontal scroll

There may be cases when the entire width of the circuit is not displayed because of the screen resolution,
maximum number of contacts or the expansion/reduction display state. In this case, a scroll bar will
appear at the bottom of the circuit screen. When the cursor is move to the left or right end of the circuit,
the screen will follow the movement and display the hidden circuit. In 70 Series, the scroll bar is not
displayed.

Cases in which horizontal scroll appears

Maximum
Screen Reduced Standard Expanded
number of
resolution display display display
contacts
VGA(640x480) 11 contacts Horizontal scroll Horizontal scroll Horizontal scroll
(700 Series) appears appears appears
9 contacts Entire circuit can Horizontal scroll Horizontal scroll
be displayed appears appears
VGA(640x480) 11 contacts Entire circuit can Horizontal scroll Horizontal scroll
(70 Series) be displayed appears appears
9 contacts Entire circuit can Entire circuit can Horizontal scroll
be displayed be displayed appears
XGA(1024x768) 11 contacts Entire circuit can Entire circuit can Horizontal scroll
be displayed be displayed appears
9 contacts Entire circuit can Entire circuit can Horizontal scroll
be displayed be displayed appears

(Supplement)
The reduced circuit display can also be changed with the "DISPLAY EXPANSION REDUCTION" menu
key on the EDIT menu.
The display scale is switched in the order of "Reduction" → "Standard" → "Expansion" → "Reduction" by
pressing.

IV - 114
 9. Other Functions
9.1 Contact Coil Usage List

9. Other Functions
With the contact coil usage list function, step, instruction and position in which specified device is used can be
displayed in a list.
With the device usage list function, device usage state in a program can be displayed per specified device.
By specifying device, the circuit sign, number of device usages in program and error state can be displayed.
Logical errors and input mistakes in the program can be checked with the program check function.

700
9.1 Contact Coil Usage List Standard Simple
70

The steps, instructions and position in which the designated device is used can be listed in the contact coil
usage list.
(Note 1) Cannot jump to the device usage list executed before program change.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the usage list

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → VIEW, TOOLS and CROSS REF. LIST menu key.
When selected, the "CROSS REF. LIST" popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.
(b) Select the DEVICE menu key, and designate the device.
* The device to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Press the PROGRAM menu key to select the area to be searched.
If "ALL PROGRAMS" is selected, all the programs opened in the onboard editing area is subject to
search.
(d) Select the FIND OPTION menu key, and designate the search option. (No default setting.)
(e) Select the EXECUT menu key. The usage list of designated devices will appear.
(2) Jumping to the usage position
(a) Display the usage list as explained above.
(b) Select the LIST menu key, and select the position in the list to jump to.
(c) Press the JUMP menu key.
The circuit of the position designated in the list will appear at the head of the "LADDER" screen.
(3) Closing the popup screen
Press the menu key.
* The device usage list is held even if the popup window is closed. When the "CROSS REF. LIST"
screen is displayed again, the previous list details will appear. (The list is cleared when onboard is
ended.)

IV - 115
 9. Other Functions
9.2 List of Used Devices

9.2 List of Used Devices 700

70
Standard Simple

The usage state of devices in the program can be displayed for each designated device with the list of used
devices. The circuit symbols, usage quantity and presence of errors can be displayed by designating the
device.
"LIST OF USED DEVICE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the list of used devices

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → VIEW, TOOLS and LIST OF USED DEVICE menu key.
When selected, the "LIST OF USED DEVICE" popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.
(b) Select the DEVICE menu key, and designate the device.
* The device to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Select the EXECUTE menu key. The usage list of designated devices will appear.

(2) Changing the displayed list page

(a) Display the list of used devices as explained above.
(b) Select the LIST menu key.
(c) Change the display in page units by pressing the and keys.
* Note that the range that can be moved with page changeover is limited to 512 devices. To move
more, use "Changing the device display range" explained below.

IV - 116
 9. Other Functions
9.2 List of Used Devices

(3) Changing the device display range

(a) The range of devices that can be displayed in the list is a unit of 128 devices.
(b) To move the display range upward, select the DISPLAY RANGE UP menu key.
(c) To move the display range downward, select the DISPLAY RANGE DOWN menu key.
* The relationship between the list's display page change and device display range change is shown
below.

Example) In the case of M device

M0 to M127 Movable range when

Movable range when the

DISPLAY RANGE UP/DOWN and are used.
M128 to M255
keys are used.
M256 to M383

M384 to M511

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 117
 9. Other Functions
9.3 Program Check

9.3 Program Check 700

70
Standard Simple

Logical errors and input mistakes in the program can be checked with the program check function.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Checking a program (ladder circuit)

(a) Select "MAIN" → LADDER → VIEW, TOOLS and PROGRAM CHECK menu key.
When selected, the "PROGRAM CHECK" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the
screen.
(b) Press the CHECK PROGRAM menu key to select the area to be checked.
If current program is selected, only the program which is currently subject to edit is checked.
If all the programs are selected, all the programs opened in the onboard editing area is subject to
check.
(c) Select the menu key corresponding to the search option ( INST. CHECK , DOUBLE COIL CHECK ,
CONSIST. CHECK , LADDER CHECK , DEVICE CHECK ), and set the option validity.
(d) Select the EXECUTE menu key. The results of the program check will appear under RESULT
LIST.
(2) Moving the RESULT LIST display up, down, left or right
(a) Execute the above program check.
(b) Select the RESULT LIST menu key.
(c) The listed display data can be moved in one line units with the ↑ and ↓ arrow keys.
(d) The listed display can be moved left and right with the ← and → arrow keys.
(e) The display can be moved up or down in page units with the and keys.
(3) Jumping to the error section in the check results.
(a) Execute the above program check.
(b) Select the LIST menu key, and select the section in the list to jump to.
(c) Press the JUMP menu key.
The circuit of the position designated in the list will appear at the head of the "LADDER" screen.

IV - 118
 9. Other Functions
9.3 Program Check

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.
* The check results list is held even if the popup window is closed. When the "PROGRAM CHECK"
screen is displayed again, the previous list details will appear. (The list is cleared when onboard is
ended.)

* A progress bar appears during program check as shown below.

IV - 119
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.1 Device Batch Monitor

10. Device Monitor Operations 700

70
Standard Simple
10.1 Device Batch Monitor
With device batch monitor, one type of device is designated, and the continuing devices can be monitored
with a list format.
(Note 1) If this screen is changed to another screen during monitoring, the monitoring operation will
automatically stop.
(Note 2) The device batch monitor can be used in the NC automatic update mode (white background) or
local editing mode (light blue background).
(Note 3) Number of device points when the monitor format is "bit & word" is displayed with 16 points.

"DEVICE BATCH" screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

(1) Displaying the "DEVICE BATCH" screen

Standard operation mode: "MAIN" DEVICE DEVICE BATCH MONITOR menu key
Select Simple operation mode and 70 Series: "MAIN"
DEVICE BATCH MONITOR menu key
When selected, the "DEVICE BATCH" screen will appear on the full screen.
(2) Starting device batch monitoring
(a) Select the DEVICE menu key, and designate the head device to be monitored.
* The device to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from
the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(b) Select the FORMAT menu key, and set the monitor format.
(c) Select the DISPLAY menu key, and set the display format.
(d) Select the VALUE menu key, and set decimal or hexadecimal.
(e) Select the START MONITOR menu key. When selected, monitoring of the devices designated in
the list will start.
(3) Moving the list monitor data
(a) Start the device list monitoring.
(b) Select the LIST menu key.
(c) The listed display data can be moved in one line units with the ↑ and ↓ arrow keys.
(d) The display can be moved up or down in page units with the and keys.
(Note) If the data is moved to a device number not included in the specifications, insignificant data
may be displayed.

IV - 120
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.1 Device Batch Monitor

(4) Stopping the monitor

Select the STOP MONITOR menu key. If there is a registered device, monitoring of the device will
stop.

(5) Testing the device

Select the DEVICE TEST menu key. When selected, the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen will appear.
Refer to section "8.1.6 Testing the Devices" for details on the device test operations.

(6) Run and stop the PLC

Select the PLC RUN/STOP menu key. When selected, the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen will open.
Refer to "13.7 Controlling PLC RUN/STOP" for details on the PLC RUN/STOP operations.

(7) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 121
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.2 Device Registration Monitor

700
10.2 Device Registration Monitor Standard Simple
70

Devices at a separated position in the circuit or different types of devices can be monitored simultaneously on
one screen.
(Note 1) If this screen is changed to another screen during monitoring, the monitoring operation will
automatically stop.
(Note 2) The device registration monitor can be used in the NC automatic update mode (white background)
or local editing mode (light blue background).

"ENTRY DEVICE" screen

IV - 122
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.2 Device Registration Monitor

(1) Displaying the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen

Select "MAIN" → DEVICE and ENTRY DEVICE menu key. The "ENTRY DEVICE" screen will
appear on the full screen.

(2) Registering a device

(a) Move the cursor to the row of "device" on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.
(b) Enter the input mode with alphabet or INPUT key.
(c) Enter the device name and press the INPUT key.

(3) Deleting a device

(a) Select the LIST menu key, and move the cursor to the device to be deleted.
(b) Select the DEVICE DELETION menu key. When selected, the device at the cursor position in the
list will be deleted.

(4) Deleting all devices

(a) Select the DELETE ALL DEVICES menu key.
(b) A confirmation popup screen will open. To delete all devices, press the INPUT key.
(c) All devices displayed in the list will be deleted.

(5) Starting the monitor

Select the START MONITOR menu key. If devices are registered in the list, monitoring of the listed
devices will start. (The device contact and data state are read out from the NC and displayed.)

(6) Stopping the monitor

Select the STOP MONITOR menu key. Monitoring of the registered devices in the list will stop.

(7) Testing the device

Select the DEVICE TEST menu key. When selected, the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen will appear.
Refer to section "8.1.6 Testing the Devices" for details on the device test operations.

(8) Run and stop the PLC

Select the PLC RUN/STOP menu key. When selected, the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen will open.
Refer to "13.7 Controlling PLC RUN/STOP" for details on the PLC RUN/STOP operations.

(9) Switching 16bit/32bit of registration device

*Only the word device can be changed.
Press the "16 BIT/32 BIT" button.

(10) Switching decimal/hexadecimal of registration device

*Only the word device can be changed.
Press the DEC/HEX button.

(11) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 123
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

700
10.3 Sampling Trace Standard Simple
70

With the sampling trace function, the PLC device (bit device and word device) signals can be traced (data
collection) and its result will be displayed in chronological order so that the operator can check and analyze
the signal status.

Trace conditions (Data collection conditions)

Trace execution

Trace result

IV - 124
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

Details
Trace No. of traces The number between 1 and 8192 can be set. Note that, however, the
condition (Number of times total trace data size has to be smaller than 60kbyte.
(Data when data is Refer to *1 for trace data size calculation.
collection collected)
condition) No. of traces after Sets the number smaller than the No. of traces.
trigger
Trace point High-speed Trace is executed at every scan of PLC high-speed
(Timing for Each scan processing .
collecting data) *Up to 8 points of bit devices can be set for the trace
data.
Main Trace is executed at every scan of PLC main processing.
Each scan
Trace data Trace is executed when the device set at the trace data
change at every scan of main processing is changed. (When
changed from OFF->ON,ON->OFF for bit device; When
the value is changed for word device.)
Device Trace is executed when the device setting condition at
designation the time of device specification on the "TRACE POINT
SETUP" screen has been established at every scan of
the main processing. Refer to *2 for the settable devices.
Trigger point Screen input Trigger is executed by pressing the "EXECUTE
(Point where TRIGGER" button on the "EXECUTE TRIGGER" screen.
trigger condition Device Trigger is executed by either one of the following two
has been designation methods.
established.) • Trigger is executed by pressing the "EXECUTE
TRIGGER" button on the "EXECUTE TRIGGER" screen.
• Trigger is executed when the device setting condition at
the time of device specification on the "TRIGGER POINT
SETUP" screen has been established.
Refer to *2 for the settable devices.
Trace additional Time (displayed in the unit of hour, minute and second): Step No. and
information program name cannot be added.
Trace data Bit device • 50 points of word device and 50 points of bit device can be set. Note
(Collected Word device that, however, trace data size has to be 60kbyte or less in total. Refer to
data) *1 for calculation of trace data size. Refer to *3 for the settable devices.
Trace Start trace Trace (data collection) is started by pressing the "START TRACE" button
execution on the "TRACE EXECUTION" screen.
Stop trace Trace (data collection) is stopped by pressing the "STOP TRACE" button
on the "TRACE EXECUTION" screen.

IV - 125
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

Details
Trace result Trace result The data on the number of traces (or the number of counts until trace is
display display screen stopped) is display on the "TRACE RESULT" screen.
Trace result Trace results are output to an external device in the CSV file format.
output
File Input Trace file in the external device (trace condition and trace result) is input.
input/output (The trace file is included in the GX-Developer project.)
Refer to *4 for the file compatibility with the GX-Developer.
Output Trace file in the external device (trace condition and trace result) is
output. (The trace file is included in the GX-Developer project.)
Refer to *4 for the file compatibility with the GX-Developer.
Delete Trace file in the external device (trace condition and trace result) is
deleted. (The trace file is included in the GX-Developer project.)

*1 Calculation of trace data size

Set the number of traces and the trace devices so that the trace data size is 60kbyte (61440 byte) or
smaller.
Trace data size will be calculated as follows.

[Trace data size (byte)] = [Size required for one trace (byte)] x [Number of traces]

Size required for one trace is calculated from word device points and bit device points of the trace device
and the size required for one trace of each device.

Trace device type Size (byte) required for one trace

Word device 2byte per 1 point
Bit device 2byte per 1 unit (1 unit = 16 points)
1 to 16 points → 1 unit → 2byte
17 to 32 points → 2 units → 4byte
33 to 48 points → 3 units → 6byte
49 to 50 points → 4 units → 8byte

Trace data size calculation example

No. Bit device points Word device points Trace points Trace data size Trace execution
1 16 points (1 unit) 2 points 8192 points (1x2+2x2)x8192 Possible
= 49152 byte
2 8 points (1 unit) 8 points 1000 points (1x2+8x2)x1000 Possible
= 18000 byte
3 50 points (4 units) 50 points 568 points (4x2+50x2)x568 Possible
= 61344 byte
4 50 points (4 units) 50 points 569 points (4x2+50x2)x569 Not possible
= 61452 byte

IV - 126
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

*2 Applicable devices with trace/trigger point details setting

Applicable devices with trace/trigger point details setting

Bit device: X, Y, M, L, F, SB, B, SM, T(contact), ST(contact), C(contact)
Word device: T(current value), ST(current value), C(current value), D, R, SW, SD, W
Following qualifications are available for the above devices.
• Bit device digit designation
• Word device bit designation

Process following an inapplicable device setting is as follows.

• If one or more applicable devices already exist, the setting of the inapplicable device will be ignored.
• If no applicable devices exist, error occurs when trace setting file is read upon trace execution.

*3 Applicable devices with device setting

Applicable devices with device setting

Bit device: X, Y, M, L, F, SB, B, SM T(contact), T(coil), ST(contact), ST(coil), C(contact), C(coil)
Word device: T(current value), ST(current value), C(current value), D, R, SW, SD, W
Following qualifications are available for the above devices.
• Bit device digit designation
• Word device bit designation

Process following an inapplicable device setting is as follows.

• If one or more applicable devices already exist, the setting of the inapplicable device will be ignored.
• If no applicable devices exist, error occurs when trace setting file is read upon trace execution.

*4 File compatibility of the trace file

Trace file

When trace condition

Input for the GX-Developer's Output
Onboard trace file is supported GX-Developer
by the MITSUBISHI
CNC

When trace condition

Input for the GX-Developer's Output
trace file is not
supported by the
MITSUBISHI CNC.
Input
Trace file output with
the onboard. Input

Output

Note 1) Deleting of trace file is possible only for the trace file output with the onboard.

*5 Trace file written into the NC using the GX-Developer

The trace file written into the NC with the GX-Developer is upper-compatible with the onboard trace file
and can be read.

IV - 127
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.1 MAIN Screen

Sampling trace function is executed with this screen. Trace condition setting, trace execution, trace result
display and file operations (READ FILE, WRITE FILE, DELETE FILE) can be performed.
(Note 1) The following operations cannot be performed during trace. (An error message appears.)
• Trace condition setting ("TRACE COUNT SETUP", "TRACE POINT SETUP", "TRIGGER POINT
SETUP", "TRACE DATA SETUP")
• Reading and writing of the trace file in the file operation (Deleting of file is possible.)
(Note 2) Maximum size of trace data that can be registered is 60kbyte in total. If exceeded, an error
message appears when the "TRACE EXECUTION" button is pressed. Refer to *1 in "10.3 " for
calculation of trace data.

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

The flow chart of sampling trace operation is shown below.

(a) Set the number of traces.

(b) Set the trace point (timing where trace data is collected).

(c) Set the trigger (condition) to be the start position (0 point)

at the time of trace execution.

(d) Set the data (bit device, word device) to be traced.

(e) Execute the trace.

Wait until trigger is executed and trace is completed.
:
Display the trace result.

IV - 128
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(1) Displaying the "SAMPLING TRACE" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → "DEVICE" → SAMPLING TRACE menu key. When selected, the "SAMPLING TRACE"
screen will appear on the full screen.

(2) Trace count setting

(a) Select the TRACE COUNT SETUP menu key. When selected, the "TRACE COUNT SETUP" popup
screen will appear. (Refer to "10.3.2 Trace Count Setting" for details.)

(3) Trace point setting

(a) Select the TRACE POINT SETUP menu key. When selected, the "TRACE POINT SETUP" popup
screen will appear. (Refer to "10.3.3 Trace Point Setting" for details.)

IV - 129
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(4) Trigger point setting

(a) Select the TRIGGER POINT SETUP menu key. When selected, the "TRIGGER POINT SETUP" popup
screen will appear. (Refer to "10.3.4 Trigger Point Setting" for details.)

(5) Trace data setting

(a) Select the TRACE DATA SETUP menu key. When selected, the "TRACE DATA SETUP" popup screen
will appear. (Refer to "10.3.5 Trace Data Setting" for details.)

IV - 130
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(6) Trace execution

(a) Select the TRACE EXECUTION menu key. When selected, the "TRACE EXECUTION" popup screen will
appear. (Refer to "10.3.6 Trace Execution" for details.)

(7) Trace result display

(a) Select the TRACE RESULT menu key in the "TRACE EXECUTION" screen. When selected, the
"TRACE RESULT" popup screen will appear. (Refer to "10.3.7 Trace Result Display" for details.)

(8) Trace condition setting display

Outline of trace condition is displayed in the main screen of "SAMPLING TRACE".
Number of traces Total number Total number of traces is shown.
Number after Number of traces after trigger is shown.
trigger
Trace point setting - Trace point (timing for collecting trace data) setting method is
shown.
Trigger point setting - Setting method for the start point (0 point) trigger at the
execution of trace.
Trace data setting - Setting status for bit device and word device is shown.

(9) File operation (input, output, delete)

(a) Select "FILE OPERATION" → READ FILE , WRITE FILE , DELETE FILE menu key. When selected,
a popup screen will appear.
Refer to the following sections for details.
"10.3.9 File Input", "10.3.10 File Output", "10.3.11 Deleting File"

(10) Return to the higher hierarchy of the menu

(a) Press the menu key.

IV - 131
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.2 Trace Count Setting

Number of traces (data collection) and number after trigger can be set.
Total number Set the number of traces in the range from 1 to 8192.
(Default: 1024)
Number after trigger Set the number of traces after the trigger establishment.
(Default: 512) The setting value should be less than the total number.
(Note 1) The setting of "NO. OF TRACES", etc. will not be valid until the "SETTING" menu key is pressed.
(Note 2) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 3) Setting is not possible during trace. (An error message appears.)

(1) Displaying the "TRACE COUNT SETUP" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE → TRACE COUNT SETUP menu. When
selected, the "TRACE COUNT SETUP" popup screen will appear.

(2) Setting the total number

(a) Select the TOTAL menu key.
(b) Press the ↑ / ↓ key and specify whether to select the number of times from the list or to directly input.
When selecting from the list, the following settings are available.
"1024 times, 2048 times, 3072 times, 4096 times, 5120 times, 6144 times, 7168 times, 8192 times"

(3) Setting the number after trigger

(a) Select the AFTER TRIGGER menu key.
(b) Press the ↑ / ↓ key and specify whether to select the number of times from the list or to directly input.
When selecting from the list, the following settings are available.
"0 time, 1024 times, 2048 times, 3072 times, 4096 times, 5120 times, 6144 times, 7168 times, 8192
times"

(4) Establishment of trace count setting

(a) Select the SETTING menu key. When selected, the "TRACE COUNT SETUP" screen is closed and the
changes will be validated.
*An error occurs if the number of traces is not correctly set. (The "TRACE COUNT SETUP" screen will not
be closed.)

(5) Invalidate the changes and close the popup screen.

(a) Press the menu key.
*The changed settings will be invalid.

IV - 132
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.3 Trace Point Setting

Trace point (timing of collecting trace data) can be set.
Trace point can be specified with the method described below.
Every main scan Trace data is collected every time after main scan is executed.
(Default)
Every high speed Trace data is collected every time after PLC high speed processing scan is
scan executed.
*Up to 8 points of bit device can be set for the trace data.
Trace data Trace data is collected when the device status set in the trace data setting at every
change scan of main processing is changed. When multiple devices are set in the trace
data setting, trace data is collected even one of the devices is changed.
*Up to 8 points of bit device and 2 points of word device can be set for the
trace data.
Device Trace data is collected when the device setting condition registered in the device
designation specification area has been established at every scan of main processing.
*8 points of bit device and 2 points of word device can be specified.
Trace point condition at the time of device designation is as follows.

Condition Establishment condition

Bit device ↑*1 When a bit device has changed from OFF to ON.
setting ↓ When a bit device has changed from ON to OFF.
ON When a bit device is ON.
OFF When a bit device is OFF.
Word device = *1 When equal to the value
setting <> When differed from the value
< When smaller than the value
> When greater than the value
<= When equal to the value or less
>= When equal to the value or more
Mask After masking (AND) the traced device value with the mask value,
establishment condition is checked.
Example)
Device D100
Current value 12A5(Hexadecimal)
Trace condition =
Trace condition value 1200(Hexadecimal)
Trace condition mask FF00 (Hexadecimal)
(1) Mask the trace point data.
12A5 & FF00 = 1200
(2) Check the trace condition.
Equal (=) to the value?
1200 = 1200
∴Condition established

Device setting AND *1 All the conditions set with bit device and word device have been
condition established.
OR Any one of the conditions set with bit device and word device has been
established.
*The value for the word device setting is displayed in decimal and hexadecimal.
*1 is the default condition.

IV - 133
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(Note 1) The setting of "TRACE POINT SETUP" etc. will not be valid until the "SETTING" menu key is pressed
(Note 2) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 3) Setting is not possible during trace. (An error message appears.)

(1) Displaying the "TRACE POINT SETUP" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE → TRACE POINT SETUP menu. When selected,
the "TRACE POINT SETUP" popup screen will appear.

(2) Setting the trace point

(a) Select the TRACE POINT SETUP menu key.
(b) Press the ↑ / ↓ key and select a setting method from the list.

(3) Setting the bit device

*This is the trace point setting and set only when "SPECIFIED DEVICES" is selected.
(a) Select the BIT DEVICE SETUP menu key. When selected, the cursor is displayed in the table for bit
device specification.
(b) Move the cursor to the bit device section and specify the device.
*Press the INPUT key after the device entry, and then "↑" is set automatically in the "CONDI." area.
*When the cursor is moved to another cell by using an arrow key, "↑" is set automatically in the "CONDI."
area.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.

(c) Select the SELECT CONDI. menu. When selected, the following conditions are changed in turns.

↑ Condition is established when a device has changed from OFF to ON.

↓ Condition is established when a device has changed from ON to OFF.
ON Condition is established when a device is ON.
OFF Condition is established when a device is OFF.

IV - 134
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(4) Setting the word device

*This is the trace point setting and set only when "SPECIFIED DEVICES" is selected.
(a) Select the WORD DEVICE SETUP menu key. When selected, the cursor is moved to the table for word
device specification.
(b) Move the cursor to the word device section and specify the device. Press the INPUT key or key so
that the cursor is moved automatically to the "CONDI." section and "=" is set as the condition.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.
(c) Select the SELECT CONDI. menu. When selected, the following conditions are changed in turns.

= Condition is established when a device is equal to the value.

<> Condition is established when a device is differed from the value.
< Condition is established when a device is smaller than the value.
> Condition is established when a device is greater than the value.
<= Condition is established when a device is equal to the device or less.
>= Condition is established when a device is equal to the device or more

(d) Press the VALUE menu.

(e) Directly input the word device establishment condition. Press the INPUT key or key to determine
the entry.
*Decimal numbers are used in the initial setting. Enter the data in decimal.
(f) Mask data is input in hexadecimal. Mask data is used as shown below.
((Device current value) &(Mask data))[Setting condition] (Setting value)

Example) Condition establishment judgment in the following case.

Device D100

Current value 12A5 (Hexadecimal)

Setting condition =

Setting value 1200 (Hexadecimal)

Mask FF00 (Hexadecimal)

((Device current value) & (Mask data)) <Setting condition> (Setting value)

( (12A5) & (FF00) ) = (1200)

(1) Mask the current value.

12A5 & FF00 = 1200

(2) Check the trace condition.

Equal (=) to the value?

1200 = 1200

∴Condition established

IV - 135
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(5) Deleting the bit device and word device

(a) Move the cursor to the device to be deleted from the table.
(b) Press the DELETE key to delete the device.
*Note that, however, deletion will not be valid until the SETTING menu key is pressed.

(6) Device setting condition

(a) The condition of combinations of bit device and word device is set.
AND condition Trace (data collection) is executed when the condition of all the
devices registered with bit device and word device has been
established.
OR condition Trace (data collection) is executed when the condition of any one of
the devices registered with bit device and word device has been
established.

(7) Determination of settings

(a) Select the SETTING menu key. When selected, the "TRACE POINT SETUP" screen is closed and the
changes will be validated.
*An error occurs if the trace point is not correctly set. (The "TRACE POINT SETUP" screen will not be
closed.)
*An error occurs if the trace point setting is "SPECIFIED DEVICES" and the device specification has not
been made. (The "TRACE POINT SETUP" screen will not be closed.)

(8) Invalidate the changes and close the popup screen.

(a) Press the menu key.
*The changed settings will be invalid.

IV - 136
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.4 Trigger Point Setting

The trigger (condition) that can be the origin (0 point) at the time of trigger execution can be set.
Trigger point is specified in the following methods.

Screen input Trigger is set with "EXECUTE TRIGGER" on the "TRACE EXECUTION"
(Default) screen.
Device The following two conditions must be satisfied for trigger setting:
designation 1) The "EXECUTE TRIGGER" button in the "TRACE EXECUTION" screen
is pressed
2) The setting condition of the device registered in the device specification
area is established
*8 points of bit device and 2 points of word device can be specified.
The following trace point conditions can be set at the time of device specification.

Condition Establishment condition

Bit device ↑*1 When a bit device has changed from OFF to ON.
setting ↓ When a bit device has changed from ON to OFF.
ON When a bit device is ON.
OFF When a bit device is OFF.
Word device = *1 When equal to the value
setting <> When differed from the value
< When smaller than the value
> When greater than the value
<= When equal to the value or less
>= When equal to the value or more
Mask After masking (AND) the traced device value with the mask value,
establishment condition is checked.
Example)
Device D100
Current value 12A5(Hexadecimal)
Trace condition =
Trace condition value 1200(Hexadecimal)
Trace condition mask FF00 (Hexadecimal)
(1) Mask the trace point data.
12A5 & FF00 = 1200
(2) Check the trace condition.
Equal (=) to the value?
1200 = 1200
∴Condition established
Device setting AND *1 All the conditions set with bit device and word device have been
condition established.
OR Any one of the conditions set with bit device and word device has
been established.
* Word device setting value can be displayed both in decimal and hexadecimal.
*1 is the default condition.
(Note 1) The setting of "TRIGGER POINT SETUP", etc. will not be valid until the "SETTING" menu key is
pressed.
(Note 2) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 3) Setting is not possible during trace. (An error message appears.)

IV - 137
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(1) Displaying the "TRIGGER POINT SETUP" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE → TRIGGER POINT SETUP menu. When
selected, the "TRIGGER POINT SETUP" popup screen will appear.

(2) Setting the trigger point

(a) Select the TRIGGER POINT SETUP menu key.
(b) Press the ↑ / ↓ key and select a setting method.

(3) Setting the bit device

*This is the trigger point setting and set only when "SPECIFIED DEVICES" is selected.
(a) Select the BIT DEVICE SETUP menu key. When selected, the cursor is displayed in the table for bit
device specification.
(b) Move the cursor to the bit device section and specify the device.
* Press the INPUT key after the device entry, and the "↑" is set automatically in the "CONDI." area.
*When the cursor is moved to another cell by using an arrow key, "↑" is set automatically in the
"CONDI." area.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.
(c) Select the SELECT CONDI. menu. When selected, the following conditions are changed in turns.
↑ Condition is established when a device has changed from OFF to ON.
↓ Condition is established when a device has changed from ON to OFF.
ON Condition is established when a device is ON.
OFF Condition is established when a device is OFF.

IV - 138
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(4) Setting the word device

* This is the trigger point setting and set only when "SPECIFIED DEVICES" is selected.
(a) Select the WORD DEVICE SETUP menu key. When selected, the cursor is displayed in the table for
word device specification.
(b) Move the cursor to the word device section and specify the device.
Press the INPUT key or → key so that the cursor is moved automatically to the "CONDI."
section and "=" is set as the condition.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.

(c) Select the SELECT CONDI. menu. When selected, the following conditions are changed in turns.
= Condition is established when a device is equal to the value.
<> Condition is established when a device is differed from the value.
< Condition is established when a device is smaller than the value.
> Condition is established when a device is greater than the value.
<= Condition is established when a device is equal to the device or
less.
>= Condition is established when a device is equal to the device or
more

(d) Select the VALUE menu.

(e) Directly input the word device establishment condition. Press the INPUT key or → key to
determine the entry.
*Decimal numbers are used in the initial setting. Enter the data in decimal.
(f) Mask data is input in hexadecimal. Mask data is used as shown below.
((Device value) AND (Mask data)) <Setting condition> (Setting value)
Example) Condition establishment judgment in the following case.

Device D100

Current value 12A5 (Hexadecimal)

Setting condition =

Setting value 1200 (Hexadecimal)

Mask FF00 (Hexadecimal)

((Device current value) & (Mask data)) <Setting condition> (Setting value)

( (12A5) & (FF00) ) = (1200)

(1) Mask the current value.

12A5 & FF00 = 1200

(2) Check the trace condition.

Equal (=) to the value?

1200 = 1200

∴Condition established

IV - 139
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(5) Deleting the bit device and word device

(a) Move the cursor to the device to be deleted from the table.

(b) Press the DELETE key to delete the device.

*Note that, however, deletion will not be valid until the SETTING menu key is pressed.

(6) Device setting condition

(a) The condition of combinations of bit device and word device is set.
AND condition Trace (data collection) is executed when the condition of all the
devices registered with bit device and word device has been
established.
OR condition Trace (data collection) is executed when the condition of any one of
the devices registered with bit device and word device has been
established.
(7) Establishment of setting
(a) Select the SETTING menu key. When selected, the "TRIGGER POINT SETUP" screen is closed and
the changes will be validated.
*An error occurs if the trigger point is not correctly set. (The "TRIGGER OPINT SETUP" screen will not
be closed.)

(8) Invalidate the changes and close the popup screen.

(a) Press the menu key.
*The changed settings will be invalid.

IV - 140
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.5 Trace Data Setting

Devices (bit device, word device) to which trace is executed can be set.
Bit device Up to 50 devices can be registered.
(Note 1) When trace point is set in "every high speed scan",
valid bit device is limited to 8 points or less.
(Note 2) When trace point is set in "TRACE DATA CHANGE",
valid bit device is limited to 8 points or less.
Word device Up to 50 devices can be registered.
(Note 1) When trace point is set in " TRACE DATA CHANGE ",
valid word device is limited to 2 points or less.
Time addition (Time is added to The time of trace point can be displayed on the "time" field on
the result information) the trace result display screen.
(Note) Note that if time addition is carried out, the size of
traceable data is smaller than usual.

(Note 1) Changes will not be valid until the SETTING menu key is pressed.
(Note 2) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 3) Setting is not possible during trace. (An error message appears.)

(1) Displaying the "TRACE DATA SETUP" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE → TRACE DATA SETUP menu. When selected,
the "TRACE DATA SETUP" popup screen will appear.

IV - 141
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(2) Setting the bit device

(a) Select the BIT DEVICE menu key. When selected, the cursor moves to the table.
(b) Move the cursor and decide where to input the device.
(c) Directly enter the bit device name into the device section.
(d) After device name was entered, press the INPUT key or ↑ / ↓ key to determine the input.
*When T,ST and C devices are set, "COIL" is automatically set in the type section. If wish to change
the type to "CONTACT", move the cursor to "COIL" and select the SELECT TYPE menu key.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.

(3) Setting the word device

(a) Select the WORD DEVICE menu key. When selected, the cursor moves to the table.
(b) Move the cursor and decide where to input the device.
(c) Directly enter the word device name into the device section.
(d) After device name was entered, press the INPUT key or ↑ / ↓ key to determine the input.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.

(4) Deleting the device in the table

(a) Move the cursor to the device to be deleted in the table.
(b) Press the DELETE key to delete the device.
*Deletion will not be valid until the SETTING menu key is pressed.

(5) Scrolling the table

(a) The cursor on the table can be moved to the top or bottom and then scrolled to the next line. Or, the
Page UP/DOWN key can be used to scroll in one unit size.
(6) Addition of time (time is added to the result information) is carried out.
(a) Press the "ADD TIME" button. When pressed, time addition check mark is put. (If pressed once again,
the check mark is removed.)
*Changes will not be valid until the SETTING menu key is pressed.

(7) Determination of settings

(a) Select the SETTING menu key. When selected, the "TRACE DATA SETUP" screen is closed and
the changes will be valid.
*When trace data is not correctly set, an error occurs. (The "TRACE DATA SETUP" screen will not be
closed.)

(8) Invalidate the changes and close the popup screen.

(a) Press the menu key.
*The changed settings will be invalid.

IV - 142
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.6 Trace execution

Trace start/stop and trigger execution are carried out.
Starting trace Trace is started upon automatically writing the trace condition set on the
onboard into the NC control unit.
Stopping trace Trace is stopped.
Compulsory trigger Trigger can be compulsorily executed from the screen.
execution Even when the trigger point setting is "SPECIFIED DEVICES", trigger can
be compulsorily executed.
Monitor start/stop Trace status monitor start/stop is carried out.
When the "trace execution" screen is closed during trace, monitor display is
automatically stopped. If you wish to display again, press the "monitor start"
button again.
Trace result display The "TRACE RESULT" screen is displayed.
(Note 1) If trace has been started already, an error occurs and trace will not be started.
(Note 2) If PLC is STOP, an error occurs and trace will not be started.
(Note 3) If trace condition (trace count, trace data) is not set correctly, trace will not be started. (An error
message appears.)
(Note 4) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 5) When trigger has not been executed and the trace count has been exceeded, trace data will be
erased from the oldest one in order.
(Note 6) When trace point is set as "every high speed scan", number of points that is valid with trace data is
limited to 8 or less bit device points. (if more than 8 points of device are set, only 8 points from the
head can be target.)
(Note 7) If the trace point is "device change", valid number of points for trace data is limited to bit device 8
points or less, word device for 2 or less

IV - 143
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(1) Displaying the "TRACE EXECUTION" screen

(a) Select "MAINT" → DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE の TRACE EXECUTION menu. When selected,
the "TRACE EXECUTION" popup screen will appear.
(2) Starting trace
(a) Select the START TRACE menu key.
When selected, execution status is displayed in "TRACE STATUS".
(3) Stopping trace
(a) Select the STOP TRACE menu key.
Trace is stopped.
(4) Executing trace
(a) Select the EXECUTE TRIGGER menu key.
*Compulsory trigger is executed from the screen.
(5) Monitor start/stop
(a) Select the START MONITOR / SUSPEND MONITOR menu key.
Display of trace status is started or sopped.
(6) Displaying trace result
(a) Select the TRACE RESULT menu key. When selected, the "TRACE EXECUTION" screen is closed and
the "TRACE RESULT" screen is displayed. (Refer to "10.3.7 Trace Result Display" for details.)
(7) Trace status display
When trace status is being monitored, the button displays [Suspend monitor]. To stop monitoring, click the
button. When not monitoring, the button displays [Start monitor]. To start monitoring, click the button.
[Trace] within [Trace status] includes the following four display items.
• Executing: Trace is being executed.
• Suspended: Trace has been stopped.
• Execution failed: Trace is not executed.
• Finished: Trace has been completed.
(8) Close the popup screen.
(a) Press the CLOSE menu key or the menu key.
When the screen is closed, trace status monitoring is stopped.

IV - 144
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.7 Trace Result Display

After trace execution, the collected trace result can be displayed in chronological order. Also, the output
result can be output to an external device in the CSV file format.

Bit device Device display The bit device (contact/coil) trace result is displayed on the upper part of
area a screen.
Variation of device is displayed chronologically, regarding the trigger
position as the base point (0).
COUNT Trace count at the cursor position in the bit device display section is
displayed.
TIME Trace time (hour, min., sec.) at the cursor position in the bit device
display section is displayed.
DISP. UNITS Display scale (display trace count) can be changed within the following
range.
10 (default), 20, 50, 100
Word Device display The word device (current value) is displayed on the lower part of a
device area screen.
Variation of value is displayed chronologically, regarding the trigger
position as the base point (0).
COUNT Trace count at the cursor position in the word device display section is
indicated.
TIME Trace time (hour, min., sec.) at the cursor position in the word device
display section is indicated.
DISP. UNITS 16-bit in decimal (Default)
16-bit in hexadecimal
32-bit in decimal
32-bit in hexadecimal
Note) In order to realize a 32-bit display, upper/lower level devices must
be set in the trace data.

IV - 145
10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

Common DEVICE Move the cursor between bit device display area and word device
CHANGE display area. On the screen where the cursor exists, the details of result
can be scrolled.
DISP. UNITS Change the display unit of the screen at the cursor position in the bit
device or word device display area.
ADJUST Adjust the display position of one screen (ex. Word device display area)
POSITION based on the cursor position of the screen where the cursor exists (ex.
Bit device display area).
LINE CHANGE Move the device at the cursor position in the bit device or word device
(UP) display area upward.
LINE CHANGE Move the device at the cursor position in the bit device or word device
(DOWN) display area downward.
PAGE LEFT Move the display position to one screen page left from the screen at the
FEED cursor position in the bit device or word device display area.
PAGE RIGHT Move the display position to one screen page right from the screen at the
FEED cursor position in the bit device or word device display area.
LEFT SCROLL Move the display result of the screen at the cursor position in the bit
device or word device display area to the left for one trace amount.
RIGHT Move the display result of the screen at the cursor position in the bit
SCROLL device or word device display area to the right for one trace amount.
CREATE CSV The trace result can be output to an external file in the CSV format.
FILE
(Note 1) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.

IV - 146
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(1) Displaying the "TRACE RESULT" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE → TRACE RESULT menu. When selected, the
"TRACE RESULT" popup screen will appear.

(2) Switching cursor between bit device and word device

(a) Press the DEVICE CHANGE menu. When the DEVICE CHANGE menu is pressed, the cursor on the
screen moves in turn between bit device section and word device section.

(3) Move the result in the bit device section and word device section vertically.
(a) Move the cursor to a desired screen with the DEVICE CHANGE menu.
(b)Move the cursor up and down with the ↑ / ↓ key. The screen is scrolled up/down according to the
cursor movement.
(c) Press the PAGE UP / PAGE DOWN key to move one page up/down.

(4) Move the result in the bit device section and word device section horizontally.
(a) Move the cursor to a desired screen with the DEVICE CHANGE menu.
(b) Move the cursor right and left with the ← / → key. The screen is shifted to the right/left according to
the cursor movement.
(c) Press the PAGE LEFT FEED / PAGE RIGHT FEED menu to move one page to the right/left.

(5) Move the result of bit device and word device for the amount of one trace data.
(a) Move the cursor to a desired screen with the DEVICE CHANGE menu.
(b) Press the LEFT SCROLL / RIGHT SCROLL menu.

(6) Switching the display unit

(a) Move the cursor to a desired screen with the DEVICE CHANGE menu.
(b) Press the DISP.UNITS menu. Display unit is changed in turn.

IV - 147
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(7) Align the bit device display position with the word device display position.
(a) Select the DEVICE CHANGE menu. When selected, the bit device display position and the word device
display position can be aligned based on the cursor position in the currently selected table.

Data at the cursor position is displayed.

(8) Switch orders of devices in the list

(a) Move the cursor to a desired screen with the DEVICE CHANGE menu.
(b) Place the cursor at the device position to which you wish to move.
(c) Press the LINE CHANGE (UP) menu key to move one line up; press the LINE CHANGE (DOWN) menu
key to move one line down.

(9) Output the trace result to an external device in the CSV format.
(a) Select the CREATE CSV FILE menu. When selected, the "CREATE CSV FILE" popup screen will
appear. Refer to "10.3.8 Creating CSV File" for details.

(10) Close the "TRACE RESULT" screen.

(a) Select the CLOSE menu key or the menu key. When selected, the "TRACE RESULT" popup
screen will appear.

IV - 148
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.8 Creating CSV File

Trace result can be output to an external device (IC card, etc.) in the CSV format.

(1) Displaying the "CREATE CSV FILE" screen

(a) Select "MAIN"→ DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE → TRACE RESULT → CREATE CSV FILE menu.
When selected, the "CREATE CSV FILE" popup screen will appear.

(2) Displaying the "BROWSE" screen

(a) Select "MAIN"→ DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE → TRACE RESULT → CREATE CSV FILE →
BROWSE menu. When selected, the "BROWSE" popup screen will appear.
* If no path is set, set the route of the drive which runs the onboard as the path.
* When the "BROWSE" screen is displayed for the first time after starting the onboard, the same path as
that of the external project will be the default path. Once a path has been set on the "BROWSE" screen,
the set path will be the default path.

IV - 149
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(3) Specifying the CSV file output destination

(a) Select the BROWSE menu. When selected, the "BROWSE" popup screen will appear and the path and
file of the output destination can be specified.
(b) The drive and path of the output destination is selected on the "BROWSE" popup screen.
(c) File name is directly input by selecting the FILE menu on the "BROWSE" popup screen.
*Characters that can be used for a file name are as follows.
Item Restrictions on input characters
File name 8 one-byte alphanumerical characters only. (Two-byte characters are
prohibited.) (Signs and space codes cannot be used.)

(d) Select the SETTING menu on the "BROWSE" popup screen. When selected, the specified drive/path
and file name are verified and the "BROWSE" popup screen is closed.
* When the CANCEL menu or the menu is selected on the "BROWSE" popup screen, the
specified drive/path and file name will be disabled.
* When the set file name is illegal, an error appears. (The "BROWSE" screen will not be closed at this
time.)
(4) Specifying the device storage method
(a) When outputting in CSV, data alignment (vertical or horizontal) can be specified.
(b) Press the "DEVICE STORAGE METHOD" menu. When selected, vertical or horizontal way of device
storage method can be changed.
(5) Creating the CVS file
(a) Select the EXECUTE menu. When selected, the trace result data is created in the CSV file format with the
specified drive/path and file name.
When successfully created, the following popup screen is displayed.

*When a file already exists under the same name, a message confirming the overwriting of this file appears.
If selected "Yes", overwriting is executed.

IV - 150
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.9 File Input

Trace data created with the GX-Developer on the external device can be read into the onboard.

NC (Onboard) External device

GX-Developer project
Onboard Input Onboard
Trace file
Trace file

Input data Trace condition Trace count, trace point, trigger point, trace data, etc.
Trace result Trace data of bit device and word device
File format GX-Developer project's trace file or the trace file written with the onboard
Note) Trace file format is differed between GX-Developer and onboard.
(Note 1) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 2) Input/output of trace file is not possible during trace.
(Note 3) Trace file created with the GX-Developer cannot be read if the trace file includes the trace
conditions that are not supported by the MITSUBISHI CNC.

(1) Displaying the "SAMPLING FILE (WRITE FILE)" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE → WRITE FILE menu. When selected, the
"SAMPLING TRACE (WRITE FILE)" popup screen will appear.

(2) Inputting the sampling trace file

(a) Select the SELECT PROJECT menu and select the project to which sampling trace data is read. Refer
to "10.3.12 Selecting Project" for details.
If a project has been opened already by the external file operation "OPEN PROJECT" or "SAVE
PROJECT", that project will serve as the default project.
(b) Select the TRACE FILE NAME menu. When selected, the cursor is move to the file name section.
(c) Press the ↑ / ↓ key and specify the sampling trace file name to be input.
(d) Select the EXECUTE menu. When selected, the specified sampling trace file is read into the onboard.
After reading, "SAMPLING TRACE (WRITE FILE)" screen is closed.
(3) Stop the file input and close the popup screen.
(a) Press the menu key. Writing of file will not be executed.

IV - 151
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.10 File Output

Trace data created with the onboard can be saved into the external device in the GX-Developer project
format.

NC (Onboard) External device

GX-Developer project

Onboard Onboard
Output
Trace file Trace file

Output data Trace condition Trace count, trace point, trigger point, trace data, etc.
Trace result Trace data of bit device and word device
File format Trace file that is unique to the onboard
(Note 1) Input/output o trace file is not possible during trace.
(Note 2) The trace file written with the onboard cannot be read with the GX-Developer.
(There is no compatibility)

(1) Displaying the "SAMPLING TRACE (WRITE FILE)" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE → WRITE FILE menu. When selected, the
"SAMPLING TRACE (READ FILE)" popup screen will appear.

IV - 152
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(2) Outputting the sampling trace file

(a) Select the SELECT PROJECT menu and specify the project to be output. Refer to "10.3.12 Selecting
Project" for details.
If a project has been opened already by the external file operation "OPEN PROJECT" or "SAVE
PROJECT", that project will serve as the default project.
(b) Select the TRACE FILE NAME menu. When selected, the cursor moves to the file name field.
(c) Press the ↑ / ↓ key to specify the file name of the sampling trace to be output.
(d) Select the TRACE TITLE menu to directly input the title.
(e) Select the "EXECUTE" menu. When selected, output is executed with the specified project or trace file
name. When output is done, the "SAMPLING TRACE (READ FILE)" screen is closed.
*If a trace file with the same name already exists in the output destination project, confirmation of
overwriting is prompted before execution.
(3) Stop the file output and close the popup screen.
(a) Press the menu key. Reading of file will not be executed.

IV - 153
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.11 Deleting File

Trace data file on the external device can be deleted.
External device
NC (Onboard)

GX-Developer project

Onboard
Onboard
Trace file
Trace file

Deletion data Trace condition Trace count, trace point, trigger point, trace data, etc.
Trace result Trace data of bit device and word device
File format Trace file output with the onboard
(Note 1) Only the trace file that has been output with the onboard can be deleted. Trace file created with
the GX-Developer cannot be deleted.

(1) Displaying the "SAMPLING TRACE (DELETE FILE)" screen

(a) Select "MAIN"→ DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE → DELETE FILE menu. When selected, the
"SAMPLING TRACE (DELETE FILE)" popup screen will appear.

(2) Deleting the sampling trace file

(a) Select the SELECT PROJECT menu to select the project from which the sampling data should be
deleted. Refer to "10.3.12 Selecting Project" for details.
If a project has been opened already by the external file operation "OPEN PROJECT" or "SAVE
PROJECT", that project will serve as the default project.

IV - 154
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

(b) Select the TRACE FILE NAME menu. When selected, the cursor is moved to the file name field.
(c) Press the ↑ / ↓ key and specify the sampling trace file name to be input.
(d) Select the EXECUTE menu. When selected, a screen confirming whether the specified sampling trace
file is OK to delete or not appears.

(e) If selected "YES" on the confirmation screen, deletion of trace file will be executed. If selected "NO",
deletion will not be executed. After the execution, the SAMPLING TRACE (DELETE FILE) screen will be
closed.

(3) Stop the file deletion and close the popup screen.
(a) Press the menu key. File deletion will not be executed.

IV - 155
 10. Device Monitor Operations
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.12 Selecting Project

A project for when the sampling trace file operation "READ FILE", "WRITE FILE", or "DELETE FILE" is
executed can be selected.

(1) Displaying the "SELECT PROJECT" screen

(a) This is displayed when "MAIN" → DEVICE → SAMPLING TRACE →
READ FILE / WRITE FILE / DELETE FILE → SELECT PROJECT menu is pressed.
*If no path is set, set the route of the drive which runs the onboard as the path.

(2) Selecting the project

(a) Select the DRIVE menu to specify the drive.

(b) Select the SELECT PROJECT → LIST menu to specify the project.
By selecting the DRIVE/PATH menu, a direct input is possible, as well, to specify the drive and path.
(c) Select the PROJECT NAME menu to specify the project name.
(d) Press the SELECT menu. When selected, the "SELECT PROJECT" screen will be closed.
*When the CANCEL menu is pressed, the "SELECT PROJECT" screen is closed without selecting a
project.
* An error message appears if the specified project name is illegal. (The "SELECT PROJECT" screen will
not be closed at this time.)

(3) Stop the file deletion and close the popup screen.
(a) Press the menu key. File deletion will not be executed.

IV - 156
 11. Setting the Parameters

11. Setting the Parameters

Parameters for controlling the PLC operation can be set.
These parameters are stored in the following data. Open the parameters onto the onboard with "OPEN"
before starting.

Data type Data name

Parameter param

The parameters which can be set are shown below.

Parameter Outline
PROGRAM SETTING The execution order for executing multiple PLCs on the NC is
designated.
COMMON POINTER SETTING The common pointer settings for the multi-program method are
displayed.

"PARAM." screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

(1) Displaying the "PARAM." screen

Select "MAIN" and PARAM. menu key. When selected, the "PARAM." screen will appear on the full
screen.

IV - 157
 11. Setting the Parameters
11.1 Setting the Program

11.1 Setting the Program 700

70
Standard Simple

The execution order for executing multiple PLCs on the NC can be designated.
The execution order is registered under "EXE.ORDER" on the "PROGRAM SETTING" popup screen.
Refer to "II PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION 2.4 Multi-program Method" for details on execution order.
Up to 20 programs can be registered.

(Note 1) Open the parameter data and program to be set on the onboard editing area.
(Note 2) Do not register programs with the same name in the "EXE. ORDER" list.

"PROGRAM SETTING" popup screen (In 700 Series)

High
↑
Execution order
↓
Low

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

"PROGRAM SETTING" screen (In 70 Series)

High
↑
Execution
order
↓
Low

(1) Displaying the "PROGRAM SETTING" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → PARAM. and PROGRAM SETTING menu key. When selected, the "PROGRAM
SETTING" popup screen will appear, and the program execution order will appear in the "EXE. ORDER"
list.

IV - 158
 11. Setting the Parameters
11.1 Setting the Program

(2) Designating the program execution order

(a) Press the EXE. ORDER menu key. Move the cursor on the list of "EXE. ORDER" to the row of
"PROGRAM NAME".
(b) Press the "Input" menu key at the position where you wish to register. When the "Input" key is
pressed, the list of program opened in the onboard edit area is displayed.
(c) Select a program name to set from the list of program and press the "Input" key.
(d) Move the cursor on the list of "EXE. ORDER" to the row of "EXECUTION TYPE".
(e) Press the INPUT key at the position where you wish to register. When the INPUT key is pressed,
the list of execution type (SCAN (default), WAIT, INITIAL, LOW-SPEED) is displayed.
(f) Select a type to set from the list of execution type and press the "Input" key.
(g) Repeat the operation (a) to (f) and set the execution order of a program.
(h) Press the "SETTING END" button when all settings are completed.
*The changed contents will be discarded if the SETTING END button is not pressed.
(i) When the SETTING END button is pressed, the following popup screen appears.
When YES is selected, the parameter will be stored in the NC's temporary memory.
When NO is selected, the parameter will not be stored in the NC's temporary memory. (Note
that the parameter in the onboard edit area has been changed.)

(3) Inserting a line

(a) Press the EXE. ORDER menu key. Move the cursor on the "EXE. ORDER" list to the line to insert.
(b) Press the INSERT LINE menu key. The line at the cursor position in the "EXE. ORDER" list moves
one step down, and then a blank line will be inserted.
*If the maximum number of registerable programs has already been registered, a line cannot be
inserted.
*The new settings will not be reflected in the parameter unless the SETTING END button is
pressed.

(4) Deleting a line

(a) Press the EXE. ORDER menu key. Move the cursor on the "EXE. ORDER" list to the line to delete.
(b) Press the DELETE LINE menu key. The contents of the line at the cursor position in the "EXE.
ORDER" list is deleted.
*The data below the cursor position will not be moved up to the deleted line.
*The new settings will not be reflected in the parameter unless the SETTING END button is
pressed.

(5) Displaying the execution order details

Select the EXE. ORDER menu key. The cursor can be moved up and down in the "EXE. ORDER" list
to confirm the details of numbers which are not displayed (No. 10 and following).

(6) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 159
 11. Setting the Parameters
11.2 Common Pointer Setting

11.2 Common Pointer Setting 700

70
Standard Simple

The head P No. of the common pointer (which is used to call the sub-routine programs from all the programs)
can be changed.
Refer to "II PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION 5.3.11 Pointer P" for details on the common pointer.

(Note 1) Set the common pointer within the range from P0 to P2047.
(Note 2) The head P No. of the common pointer is set to enable the program execution by the multi
program method.
(Note 3) When executing the program with the conventional independent program method, leave it as
blank and press the "SET" button.
(Note 4) When using the multi-program method, if the COMMON POINTER NO. setting area is blank (no
data is set), the default value, P1800 and after, will be applied as the common pointer.

"COMMON POINTER SETTING" popup screen

(In 700 Series)

Menus corresponding to
popup screen

"COMMON POINTER SETTING" screen (In 70 Series)

(1) Displaying the "COMMON POINTER SETTING" popup screen

Move to "MAIN" → "PARAMETER" screen, then select the COMMON POINTER SETTING menu key.
When selected, "COMMON POINTER NO." popup screen will appear and the common pointer head P
No. will be displayed.

(2) Setting the common pointer

(a) Press the COMMON POINTER No. menu key. Enter the common pointer head P No.
(b) Press the SET menu key.
(c) When the SET button is pressed, the following popup screen appears.
When YES is selected, the parameter will be stored in the NC's temporary memory.
When NO is selected, the parameter will not be stored in the NC's temporary memory.
(Note that the parameter in the onboard edit area has been changed.)

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 160
 12. File Operations

700
12. File Operations Standard Simple
70

In the onboard editing area, PLC data can be added, deleted and renamed, and also the initial settings can
be made.

(Note 1) The parameter data cannot be added, deleted or renamed.

"FILE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "FILE" popup screen.

Select "MAIN" and FILE menu key. When selected, the "FILE" popup screen will appear.

(2) Displaying the list data

(a) Select the LIST menu key.
(b) If there are many PLC data items which do not fit on one screen, move the cursor in the list to
display them all.

(Supplement)
If the DATA DELETE or DATA RENAME menu key is selected after selecting data from the list,
the data name selected in the list will be set as the data name (old data name) in the respective
popup screen.

IV - 161
 12. File Operations
12.1 Adding New Data

12.1 Adding New Data 700

70
Standard Simple
Open new data on the onboard editing area.

(Note 1) The newly added data should be saved with the operations given in "12.2 Saving PLC Data in
Temporary Memory". After that, the data can be automatically updated to the temporary memory
with the "circuit conversion" operation.
(Note 2) Program and device comment data can be created. Parameters cannot be newly created. When
creating program data for a PLC message, refer to "4.2 Types of Data" and set the designated data
name.
(Note 3) When there is no parameter data in the onboard editing area, default parameter data is created and
used.
(Note 4) When the same name data already exists, a popup screen confirming an overwrite appears.

"DATA NEW" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "DATA NEW" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → FILE and DATA NEW menu key. When selected, the "DATA NEW" popup
menu will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Adding data

(a) When the DATA NEW menu key is selected, the following "DATA NEW" popup screen will
appear.
(b) Select the DATA TYPE menu key, and designate the data type (program or comment).
(c) Select the DATA NAME menu key, and input the name of the data to be newly created.
(d) Select the "TITLE" menu key, and input the data title. (The title can be omitted.)

Item Limits to input characters

Data name 8 one-byte alphanumeric characters only (no full-byte characters)
Title 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters only (no full-byte characters)

(e) Select the OK menu. The "DATA NEW" popup menu will close, and the newly added PLC data
will appear in the data list on the "FILE" popup screen.

IV - 162
 12. File Operations
12.2 Deleting PLC Data

12.2 Deleting PLC Data 700

70
Standard Simple

PLC in the onboard editing area can be deleted. (The data in the temporary memory is not deleted.)

(Note 1) The program and device comment data can be deleted. Parameters cannot be deleted.

"DATA DELETE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "DATA DELETE" popup menu.

Select "MAIN" → FILE and DATA DELETE menu keys. When selected, the "DATA DELETE"
popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Deleting PLC data

(a) When the DATA DELETE menu key is selected, the following "DATA DELETE" popup screen will
appear.
(b) Select the DATA TYPE menu key, and designate the data type (program or comment).
(c) Select the DELETE DATA NAME menu key, and select the name of the data to be deleted. Select
the data name from the list of data currently in the onboard editing area.
(d) Select the OK menu. The "DATA DELETE" popup menu will close, and the designated data will
be deleted from the data list on the "FILE" popup screen.

IV - 163
 12. File Operations
12.3 Renaming the PLC Data

12.3 Renaming the PLC Data 700

70
Standard Simple

The PLC data in the onboard editing area can be renamed.

(Note 1) After renaming the data, save it once with the operations explained in "12. 2 Saving PLC Data in
Temporary Memory". After that, the data can be automatically updated to the temporary memory
with the "circuit conversion" operation.
(Note 2) Program and device comment data can be renamed. Parameters cannot be renamed.
(Note 3) The name cannot be changed to an existing name. Delete the existing name before designating it
as a new name.
" DATA RENAME " popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "DATA RENAME" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → FILE and DATA RENAME menu key. When selected, the "DATA RENAME"
popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Renaming the data

(a) When the DATA RENAME menu key is selected, the following "DATA RENAME" popup screen
will appear.
(b) Select the DATA TYPE menu key, and designate the data type (program or comment).
(c) Select the OLD NAME menu key, and designate the old data name. Designate the old data name
from the list of data currently in the onboard editing area.
(d) Select the NEW NAME menu key, and designate the new data name.
(e) Select the TITLE menu key, and input the new data title. (The title can be omitted.)
Item Limits to input characters
New data name 8 one-byte alphanumeric characters only (no full-byte characters)
Title 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters only (no full-byte characters)
*"COMMENT" cannot be used for the device comment's data name.

(f) Select the OK menu. The "DATA RENAME" popup window will close, and the designated data
name will be changed in the data list on the "FILE" popup screen.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 164
 12. File Operations
12.4 Initialization

12.4 Initialization 700

70
Standard Simple

Initialize the onboard editing area.

When initialization is completed, the following PLC data will be created in the onboard editing area.

Data type Data name Details

PROGRAM MAIN User PLC (ladder) program containing only END instruction is created.
PARAM. PC parameters PC parameter data set to the default value (program settings are not
(for Japanese) registered) is created.
* The device comment data is not created.

(Note 1) This function is an initial setting carried out to create new PLC (ladders) with the onboard.
(Note 2) The data created with initialization is located in the onboard editing area.
(Note 3) After creating the data with initialization, save it once with the operations explained in "12. 2 Saving
PLC Data in Temporary Memory". After that, the data can be automatically updated to the
temporary memory with the "circuit conversion" operation.

"INITIAL" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "INITIAL" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → FILE and INITIAL menu keys. When selected, the "INITIAL" popup screen will
appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Initialization
(a) Confirm the displayed message.
(b) Select the YES menu key to initialize.
Select the NO menu key to cancel the initialization.
* The popup window automatically closes when the YES or NO menu key is pressed.
(c) If YES is selected and initialization is completed, the data created with initialization will appear in
the list on the "FILE" screen.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 165
 13. NC File Operations

13. NC File Operations

The NC PLC can be RUN or STOP, the PLC data in the temporary memory can be read, written or verified,
and the data can be written to the ROM.
Note that functions involving ladder editing or rewriting cannot be used unless the password is completed.
(The buttons corresponding to the function are displayed in gray and are disabled.)
Input the password on the NC "MAINTE" screen to release the password.
700 Series
Function Outline 70 Series
Standard Simple
OPEN The PLC data is opened from the temporary memory. *1
SAVE The edited PLC data is saved in the temporary memory. *2 *2
The PLC program in the onboard editing area is verified
VERIFY
with the PLC program in the temporary memory.
The PLC data in the temporary memory is written to the
ROM WRITE
ROM.
DELETE The PLC data in the temporary memory is deleted.
FORMAT The temporary memory is formatted.
PLC RUN/STOP The PLC RUN/STOP state can be controlled.
The temporary memory and ROM ladder versions are
PROGRAM UPDATE
upgraded.
LIST The list of file size is displayed.
*1 Automatically executed at startup. Not exist in the menu.
*2 Automatically executed at conversion. Not exist in the menu.

"NC FILE" popup screen

(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

(1) Displaying the "NC FILE" screen

Select "MAIN" and the NC FILE menu key. When selected, the "NC FILE" screen will appear on
the full screen.

(2) Operation during NC communication

A progress bar appears and shows "Reading..." while data is being exchanged between the onboard
and NC.

IV - 166
 13. NC File Operations
13.1 Opening PLC Data from the Temporary Memory

13.1 Opening PLC Data from the Temporary Memory 700

70
Standard Simple
Automatic
The PLC data can be opened from the temporary memory to the onboard where it can be edited and
monitored and the parameters edited.
(Note 1) PLC data read in from the temporary memory and PLC data read in from an external device can
both be displayed in the onboard editing area.
(Note 2) If there is no PLC data in the temporary memory, the list will be blank, and the OPEN button will
be displayed in gray.
(Note 3) When opening parameter data, parameter in the onboard editing area is used if no parameter data
had been selected. If there is no parameter data in the onboard editing area, default parameter data
is created and used.

"OPEN" popup screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

"OPEN" screen (The screen is an example of 70 Series)

IV - 167
 13. NC File Operations
13.1 Opening PLC Data from the Temporary Memory

(1) Displaying the "OPEN" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → NC FILE and the OPEN menu key. When selected, the "OPEN" popup screen
will appear at the center of the screen.
(2) Opening the PLC data
(a) Select the PLC data to be edited from the list. Invalidate the check for data which is not to be
opened.
(Note 1) In 70 Series, these check boxes are all invalidated by default.
(b) After selecting the data, select the OPEN menu key. The selected PLC data will be read on the
onboard.
* If data with the same name exists, an overwrite confirmation popup screen will appear. Select the
operation to be taken.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(4) SEL. ALL/CANCEL

Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.

(5) SELECT PARAM. + PROG.

Makes the parameters and program data in the list selectable.
PLC message data is not selected at this time.
(Example)

(6) SELECT/CANCEL

Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.
"SP (space)" key can also be used for this operation.
When the listed data with a checkbox is not selected, no process occurs.

(Example)
• When data is selected

IV - 168
 13. NC File Operations
13.1 Opening PLC Data from the Temporary Memory

• When data is not selected

(7) PLC MESSAGE

Makes the PLC messages in the list selectable.

(8) Setting the storage destination of device comment

When the device comment storage destination is set to the location other than NC temporary memory,
DEVICE COMMENT displays the status of the folders that were designated in "DevCom Storage Dest.".
Refer to "6.2.1 Setting the Storage Destination of Device Comment" for details.

(Example) When device comment storage destination is specified

IV - 169
 13. NC File Operations
13.2 Saving PLC Data to the Temporary Memory

700
13.2 Saving PLC Data to the Temporary Memory Standard Simple
70
Automatic Automatic
PLC data edited or monitored, or for which the parameters were edited on the onboard, can be saved in the
temporary memory.

(Note 1) The PLC data in the temporary memory is lost when the NC power is turned OFF. Refer to "13.4
Writing the Temporary Memory's PLC Data to the ROM", and always save the data on the ROM.
The message "ROM-Write incomplete" appears in the message area until the data is saved in the
ROM.
(Note 2) If there is no PLC data in the onboard editing area, the list will be blank, and the SAVE button
will be displayed in gray.
(Note 3) Save is not possible in the temporary memory during PLC RUN. (An error message appears.)
When PLC is in RUN, a message appears to confirm whether to stop PLC to save the data.
When PLC is not stopped, the PLC data cannot be saved in the temporary memory. (An error will
appear.)
After successfully saved, a message confirming whether to have PLC returned to the RUN state is
displayed.
(Note that, however, if saving to the temporary memory is executed during PLC STOP, this
message will not be displayed.)
(Note 4) The program data saved in the temporary memory operates in the automatic update mode with
white background of LADDER screen.
"SAVE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "SAVE" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → NC FILE and the SAVE menu key. When selected, the "SAVE" popup screen
will appear at the center of the screen. All of the checks for the PLC data in the onboard editing area will
be validated in the "List".

(2) Saving the PLC data in the temporary memory

(a) Select the PLC data to be saved from the list. Invalidate the check for data which is not to be saved.
(b) After selecting the data, select the SAVE menu key. The PLC data edited on the onboard will
be saved in the temporary memory.
* When the data is saved in the temporary memory with this function, the "ROM-Write incomplete"
message will appear. Refer to "13.4 Writing the Temporary Memory's PLC Data to the ROM", and
always save the data on the ROM.
* If data with the same name exists, an overwrite confirmation popup screen will appear. Select the
operation to be taken.

IV - 170
 13. NC File Operations
13.2 Saving PLC Data to the Temporary Memory

(3) Displaying the NC free space volume

Select the FREE SPACE VOLUME menu key. The free space volume in the temporary memory will
appear.
(4) Closing the popup screen
Press the menu key.
(5) SEL. ALL/CANCEL

Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.
(6) SELECT PARAM. + PROG.
Makes the parameters and program data in the list selectable.
(7) SELECT/CANCEL

Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.
(8) Device comment storage destination setting
When the device comment storage destination is set to the location other than NC temporary memory,
DEVICE COMMENT displays the status of the folders that were designated in "DevCom Storage Dest.".
Refer to "6.2.1 Setting the Storage Destination of Device Comment" for details.
(Example) When device comment storage destination is specified

(9) EXECUTE STEP

The "EXECUTE STEP" screen is displayed.
In this screen, NC's execution area size (number of steps) is displayed.

IV - 171
 13. NC File Operations
13.3 Verifying with the PLC Data in the Temporary Memory

13.3 Verifying with the PLC Data in the Temporary Memory 700
70
Standard Simple

The PLC data (programs) in the onboard editing area can be verified with the PLC data (program) in the
temporary memory.

(Note 1) Only programs can be verified. (Device comments and parameters cannot be verified.)
(Note 2) Multiple programs cannot be verified simultaneously. (Always verify the programs one at a time.)
(Note 3) When there is no PLC data in either the onboard editing area or temporary memory, the list
becomes blank and the "EXECUTE" button is displayed in gray.
(Note 4) With M720 series (when the display unit's OS is CE), drive cannot be selected.

" VERIFY PROJECT " popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → NC FILE and the VERIFY PROJECT menu key. When selected, the "VERIFY
PROJECT" popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Verifying a PLC program

(a) Select the PLC data (program) to be verified from the VERIFY SRC. (EDIT PLC) and VERIFY DEST.
(NC) lists. Multiple data items cannot be selected. (Select only one data item.)
(b) Select the "VERIFY" menu key. The selected PLC data (programs) will be verified, and the results
will be displayed in the "VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen.

(3) Designating the verification step range

(a) Select the STEP TOP menu key, and designate the head step No. of the verification range.
(b) Select the STEP END menu key, and designate the end step No. of the verification range.
* The entire range will be verified if STEP TOP and STEP END are set to 0.

IV - 172
 13. NC File Operations
13.3 Verifying with the PLC Data in the Temporary Memory

(4) Displaying the verification results

(a) When the PLC data is verified, the "VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen will appear.
(b) Confirm the verification results, and revise the PLC data (program).
* This cannot jump to the verification results program in the same manner as GX Developer.

"VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(5) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(6) SELECT/CANCEL

Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

IV - 173
 13. NC File Operations
13.4 Writing PLC Data in Temporary Memory to ROM

13.4 Writing PLC Data in Temporary Memory to ROM 700

70
Standard Simple

The PLC data in the temporary memory can be written to the ROM. The data in the temporary memory,
including the date data, is copied to the ROM.

(Note 1) The data in the temporary memory is lost when the NC power is turned OFF, so always save the
data in the ROM.
(Note 2) The PLC data in the onboard editing area cannot be written directory to the ROM.
(Note 3) ROM writing is not possible during PLC RUN. (An error message appears.)
When PLC is in RUN, a message appears to confirm whether to stop PLC to execute the ROM write
operation.
ROM write is not possible if PLC is not stopped. (An error message appears.)
After ROM write operation is successfully completed, a message confirming whether to have PLC
returned to the RUN state is displayed.
(Note that, however, when ROM write operation is executed during PLC STOP, a message
confirming a return to the RUN state is not displayed.)
(Note 4) When the temporary memory is formatted (in the state where date of creation is not obtained), an
error appears and the "YES" button is displayed in gray.
(Note 5) The date displayed on the "ROM WRITE" screen is the date that the PLC data was last saved in the
temporary memory. The ROM date is also the date that the PLC data was last saved in the
temporary memory.
"ROM WRITE" popup screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "ROM WRITE" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → NC FILE and the ROM WRITE menu key. When selected, the "ROM WRITE"
popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) ROM-Write operations

Select the YES button. Select the NO menu key to cancel the operation.
When PLC is in RUN, a message appears to confirm whether to stop PLC to execute the ROM write
operation.
When PLC is not stopped, ROM writing is not possible. (An error will appear.)

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 174
 13. NC File Operations
13.5 Deleting the PLC Data from the Temporary Memory

13.5 Deleting the PLC Data from the Temporary Memory 700
70
Standard Simple
The PLC data in the temporary memory can be deleted.

(Note 1) If there is no PLC data in the temporary memory, the list will be blank, and the DELETE button
will be displayed in gray.
(Note 2) PLC data in the temporary memory cannot be deleted during PLC RUN. (An error message
appears.)
When PLC is in RUN, a message appears to confirm whether to stop PLC to delete the data.
When PLC is not stopped, the PLC data in the temporary memory cannot be deleted. (An error will
appear.)
A message confirming whether to return the PLC to RUN state will be displayed after deletion is
completed.
(Note that when PLC data in the temporary memory is deleted during PLC STOP, a message
confirming whether to return to the RUN state will not be displayed.)
(Note 3) When the program in automatic update mode is deleted, the mode will be changed to local editing
mode (LADDER screen background is blue) in 700 Series.

"DELETE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "DELETE" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → NC FILE and the DELETE menu key. When selected, the "DELETE" popup
screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Deleting the PLC data

(a) Select the PLC data to be deleted from the list of PLC data. Several data items can be selected.
(b) Press the "DELETE" menu key. When selected, the PLC data will be deleted.
* The deleted PLC data will also be deleted from the list.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(4) SEL. ALL/CANCEL

Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.

IV - 175
 13. NC File Operations
13.5 Deleting the PLC Data from the Temporary Memory

(5) SELECT PARAM. + PROG.

Makes the parameters and program data in the list selectable.

(6) SELECT/CANCEL

Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

(7) Device comment storage destination setting

When the device comment storage destination is set to the location other than NC temporary memory,
the listed files display the status of the folders that were designated as storage destinations.
Refer to "6.2.1 Setting the Storage Destination of Device Comment" for details.

(Example) When device comment storage destination is specified

IV - 176
 13. NC File Operations
13.6 Formatting the Temporary Memory

13.6 Formatting the Temporary Memory 700

70
Standard Simple
The temporary memory can be formatted (cleared of data).

(Note 1) The PLC data in the temporary memory is deleted when format is executed.
(Note 2) The temporary memory cannot be formatted during PLC RUN. (An error will appear.)
(Note 3) The mode in which a program is displayed changes from automatic update mode to local editing
mode (LADDER screen background is light blue).

"FORMAT" popup screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "FORMAT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → NC FILE and the FORMAT menu key. When selected, the "FORMAT" popup
screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Formatting operations

(a) Check the displayed message.
(b) Select the YES menu key to format the temporary memory. Select the NO menu key to
cancel the operation.
* The popup window automatically closes when the YES or NO menu key is pressed.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the Y menu key.

IV - 177
 13. NC File Operations
13.7 Controlling the PLC RUN/STOP

700
13.7 Controlling the PLC RUN/STOP Standard Simple
70

The PLC can be run or stopped.

The popup menu that appears changes according to the PLC RUN/STOP state. (The menu key
correspondence is the same.)

"PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

During PLC RUN During PLC STOP

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen

PLC RUN/STOP is carried out frequently, so the operations are carried out with the following menus.
[Standard operation mode]
• "MAIN" → NC FILE PLC RUN/STOP menu key
• "MAIN" → LADDER → EDIT menu PLC RUN/STOP menu key
• "MAIN" → LADDER → MONITOR menu PLC RUN/STOP menu key
• "MAIN" → DEVICE → "DEVICE BATCH MONITOR" screen PLC RUN/STOP menu key
• "MAIN" → DEVICE → "ENTRY DEVICE" screen PLC RUN/STOP menu key
[Simple operation mode]
• "MAIN" → NC FILE PLC RUN/STOP menu key
• "MAIN" → LADDER MONITOR PLC RUN/STOP menu key
[70 Series]
• "MAIN" → NC FILE PLC RUN/STOP menu key
• "MAIN" → EXTERNAL FILE PLC RUN/STOP menu key
• "MAIN" → LADDER MONITOR PLC RUN/STOP menu key
• "MAIN" → LADDER EDIT PLC RUN/STOP menu key
• "MAIN" → LADDER → "DEVICE BATCH" screen PLC RUN/STOP menu key

When selected, the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) PLC STOP

(a) If the PLC RUN/STOP menu key is pressed during PLC RUN, the "STOP" popup screen will
appear.
(b) When the YES menu key is selected, PLC STOP is executed, and the popup screen closes.
(c) When the NO menu key is selected, nothing takes place.

(3) PLC RUN

(a) If the PLC RUN/STOP menu key is pressed during PLC STOP, the "RUN" popup screen will
appear.
(b) When the YES menu key is selected, PLC RUN is executed, and the popup screen closes.
(c) When the NO menu key is selected, nothing takes place.

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 178
 13. NC File Operations
13.8 Updating the PLC Version (Maintenance Function)

700
13.8 Updating the PLC Version (Maintenance Function) Standard Simple
70

This function is used for maintenance. The following existing functions are carried out in a batch.
(1) The ladders are read out from the external device (IC card).
(2) The read ladders are saved in the NC's temporary memory.
(3) The data saved in the NC's temporary memory is written to the ROM.

(Note 1) Only programs, device comments and parameters that already exist in the NC can be upgraded. (A
different program, device comment and parameter cannot be written to the NC.)
(Note 2) When PLC is in RUN, a message appears to confirm whether to stop PLC to upgrade the ladder.
When PLC is not stopped, ladder cannot be upgraded. (An error will appear.)
A message confirming whether to return the PLC to RUN state will be displayed after upgrading of
the ladder is completed.
(Note that when the ladder is upgraded during PLC STOP, a message confirming whether to return
to the RUN state will not be displayed.)
(Note 3) This function cannot be used unless the password is released. (The PROGRAM UPDATE menu
button will be displayed in gray.)
(Note 4) If there is no ladder file in the external device's "\lad" folder, "LIST" will be displayed blank and the
"YES" and "LIST" button will appear in gray.
(Note 5) Among the PLC data to be upgraded, the data stored in project format is given priority.
(Note 6) When the device comment storage destination is specified as "storage destination specified", the
device comment of the specified path will be the one to be upgraded.

13.8.1 Storing the Upgraded Data

The upgrading PLC data (program, device comment, parameter) can be stored in the following 2 ways.
• Method to store program, device comment and parameter within the same fixed file
• Method to store in the project format

(1) Method to store program, device comment and parameter within the same fixed file
The upgrading data must be stored in the external device (IC card) \lad folder (folder name is fixed).
* If there is data stored in the project format, that data shall be given priority.

[IC CARD]
IC (G: )
IC（G:）
lad
lad
LAD1.wgp
LAD2.wgp
Program
LAD3.wgp
comm1.wcd
comm2.wcd Device comment
comm3.wcd
param.wpa Parameter

IV - 179
 13. NC File Operations
13.8 Updating the PLC Version (Maintenance Function)

(2) Method to store in the project format

The upgrading PLC project folder (plcproj (folder name is fixed)) must be stored in the external device (IC
card) \lad folder (folder name is fixed).

[IC CARD]

IC (G: )
lad PLC project folder (name is fixed)

plcproj
Project.inf
Gppw.gp
Gppw.gpj
ProjectDB.mdb
Resource
Param.wp
Pou

Body
lad1.wgp
lad2.wgp
lad3.wgp
Others
comm1.wc
comm2.wc
comm3.wc

13.8.2 PLC VERSION UP Screen

(1) When the storage destination of device comment is specified as "NC temporary memory":

Menu corresponding to the

popup screen

IV - 180
 13. NC File Operations
13.8 Updating the PLC Version (Maintenance Function)

(2) When the storage destination of device comment is specified as "storage destination specified":

Version up
destination will be
the device comment
specified as the
storage destination.

Menu corresponding to the

popup screen

13.8.3 Operations of This Function

(1) Displaying the "PLC VERSION UP" popup screen
(a) Select "MAIN" → NC FILE screen → PLC VERSION UP menu key. When selected, the "PLC
VERSION UP" popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.
*At this time, the program, device comment and parameter to be upgraded will be displayed
in "LIST".

(2) Upgrading the ladder version

(a) Select the LIST menu key, and select the PLC data to be upgraded from the list. The checks are
validated as the default, so invalidate the check for the ladder not to be upgraded. The check can be
validated only for the program, device comment and parameter stored in the NC ROM and external
device's \lad folder.

(b) Select the YES menu key. The "PLC VERSION UP" popup screen will close, and the ladder
version upgrading will start.
The following popup screen appear in sequence during ladder version upgrading.

IV - 181
 13. NC File Operations
13.8 Updating the PLC Version (Maintenance Function)

Start of program transmission to NC

The device is being checked.

Transmission of programs to NC
The programs are being written.

The programs are written to the NC

ROM.

Overwrite and save was completed

normally.

Select the "OK" menu key to return to the "NC FILE" screen

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(4) SEL.ALL/CANCEL
Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.

(5) SELECT/CANCEL
Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

IV - 182
 13. NC File Operations
13.9 Keyword

13.9 Keyword 700

70
Standard Simple

Keyword is used to protect the sequence programs stored in CNC. Data is protected from being read or
overwritten by GX Developer or with the onboard PLC edit function.
A keyword protects a whole range of data. Only the files with particular names can be free from the keyword
protection.
Only GX Developer can register and cancel the keyword. Onboard is used only to disable the keyword
temporarily. For details of the keyword function, refer to "4.8 Keyword Registration" in the section "III.
PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT".
The following two ways are available to disable the keyword.
• Disabling the keyword on the KEYWORD screen
• Disabling the keyword as required at the read or write operation.

13.9.1 Disabling the Keyword on the KEYWORD Screen

The KEYWORD screen can be used to disable the keyword.

(1) Displaying the "KEYWORD" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → NC FILE and the KEYWORD menu key. The "KEYWORD" popup screen will
appear.

The details of the display of "Keyword Status" on this screen are as follows.
• "------" : Status is uncertain. (No keyword is disabled or registered.)
• "Disable keyword" : The keyword is being disabled.

(2) Disabling the keyword

Click the DISABLE KEYWORD menu key. The popup screen appears to input the keyword. Input the
keyword and click the EXECUTE menu key.

IV - 183
 13. NC File Operations
13.9 Keyword

If the keyword is successfully disabled, "Keyword Status" is changed from "------" to "Disable keyword". If
not, the popup screen appears and shows the message "Keyword is not correct...".
(Note 1) Any "fictitious keyword" can also be disabled when no keyword is registered.

(3) Enabling the keyword

To undo the disabled keyword, click the ENABLE KEYWORD menu key. How to enable the keyword
is different for each series.
700 Series:
End the onboard. The onboard can be ended from the main menu. The keyword runs again with
"enabled" status after the usual onboard start-up. Turning the power OFF and ON also returns the
status to "enabled".
70 Series:
Restart the onboard to return the keyword status to "enabled". Turning the power OFF and ON also
returns the status to "enabled".
(Note 1) If the screen is changed to the CNC setting and display screen without the keyword enabled, the
keyword stays disabled as long as the power is turned OFF and ON or the keyword is enabled
again on onboard.

(4) Reading the programs again

When a keyword is set for the read protection, the onboard in 700 Series simple mode or in 70 Series
does not read the sequence programs at its start-up. Disable the keyword and then click the
PROGRAM RELOAD menu key in this case. The onboard restarts with the keyword disabled.

IV - 184
 13. NC File Operations
13.9 Keyword

13.9.2 Disabling the Keyword as Required at the Read or Write Operation

If the prohibited operation is attempted to the protected data, the popup screen appears and requires
disabling the keyword.

Input the keyword and click the EXECUTE menu key. The operation continues after the keyword has
been successfully disabled.
The keyword, once disabled, stays disabled until any operation enables it.
The following popup screen appears when the keyword has not been disabled.

IV - 185
 13. NC File Operations
13.10 File list

13.10 File list 700

70
Standard Simple

The file list is displayed.

Three types of display are provided.

(1) FILE LIST

The "FILE SIZE DISPLAY" screen will appear.

(2) EXECUTE STEP

The "FILE SIZE DISPLAY" screen will appear. This menu is used to check the execution area size.

(3) FREE SPACE VOLUME

The "FILE SIZE DISPLAY" screen will appear.

IV - 186
 14. External File Operations

700
14. External File Operations Standard Simple
70

The PLC data can be opened from, saved to and verified with GX Developer projects in the external device,
and projects can be deleted.

Example of GX Developer project

M7onbd The folder name is the project name.

Resource Others xxxx.wcd

Resource POU Body xxxx.wpg
Resource param.wpa
Data in folder (M7onbd)
Gppw.wpj
gppw.wps
Project.inf

In 700 Series
"EX FILE" screen

IV - 187
 14. External File Operations

In 70 Series
"EX FILE" screen

(1) Displaying the "EX FILE" screen

Select "MAIN" and the EXTERNAL FILE menu key. When selected, the "EX FILE" screen will appear
on the full screen.

(2) Storage area of files

700 Series stores files in the onboard local editing area, in which the files are read, edited, saved and
verified.
In 70 Series, files are read in the NC's temporary memory area and the same files can be simultaneously
edited on onboard. Files in the temporary memory area is used as master files.

IV - 188
 14. External File Operations
14.1 Opening PLC Data from a Project

14.1 Opening PLC Data from a Project 700

70
Standard Simple

The PLC data for a GX Developer project can be opened from the external device.

(Note 1) PLC data read in from the temporary memory and PLC data read in from an external device can
both be displayed in the onboard editing area.
(Note 2) The OPEN button on the "OPEN PROJECT" popup screen is valid when the PLC data list is
correctly read with "SELECT PROJECT" operations.
(Note 3) The drive cannot be selected for the M720 Series (display unit OS is CE).
(Note 4) When opening parameter data, parameter in the onboard editing area is used if no parameter data
had been selected. If there is no parameter data in the onboard editing area, default parameter data
is created and used.
(Note 5) SFC projected created with the GX-Developer, project of label program, and CPU with other than
type Q4A cannot be opened normally. (An error occurs.)
(Note 6) The common comment created with the GX-Developer, "COMMENT", cannot be used on the
onboard.
(Note 7) In 700 Series, a program opened from an external device will become the local edit mode.
(Note 8) In 70 Series, only compact flash (CF) cards are available as external device.

In 700 Series
"OPEN PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "OPEN PROJECT" popup

Select "MAIN" → EXTERNAL FILE and the OPEN PROJECT menu key. When selected, the
"OPEN PROJECT" popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Reading PLC data from an external device

(a) Press the SELECT PROJECT menu key. The "SELECT PROJECT" popup screen will open.
* The default drive is "D", and the path is "/(route)".

IV - 189
 14. External File Operations
14.1 Opening PLC Data from a Project

"SELECT PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(b) Select the DRIVE menu key, and designate the drive.
(c) Select the LIST menu key, and designate the path of the PLC data displayed under "LIST".
* The drive and path can be directly designated with the DRIVE/PATH menu key.
(d) Select the PROJECT NAME menu key, and designate the name of the file (project) to be read in.
* Normally when selected from the list, this is automatically set.
(e) Select the SELECT menu key. The "SELECT PROJECT" popup screen will close, and the check
marks for the read PLC data will be validated on the "OPEN PROJECT" screen.

* Once set, the drive, path and project name are held until the onboard is ended.
* For some machine types, drive/path/project names are not retained.

(3) Opening the PLC data

(a) Select the PLC data to be edited from the list of PLC data read with the operations in (2). Several
data items can be selected.
(b) Select the "OPEN" menu key. When selected, PLC data will be read on the onboard.

* If data with the same name exists, an overwrite confirmation popup screen will appear. Select the
operation to be taken.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 190
 14. External File Operations
14.1 Opening PLC Data from a Project

(5) SEL. ALL/CANCEL

Switch valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.

(6) SELECT PARAM. + PROG.

Make the parameters and program data in the list selectable.

(7) SELECT/CANCEL

Switch valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

In 70 Series

(1) Displaying the "OPEN PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → EXTERNAL FILE EXT.->NC menu key.
Then the popup screen for selecting the project will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Reading PLC data from an external device

Select the project to read, and then press the SELECT menu key or INPUT key.
When the key is pressed, the screen for selecting files will appear.

IV - 191
 14. External File Operations
14.1 Opening PLC Data from a Project

(3) Opening the PLC data

(a) Select the PLC data to be edited from the list of PLC data. Several data items can be selected.
(b) Press the READ menu key. The selected PLC data will be read on the onboard.

For the other operations, refer to the explanations in 700 Series.

IV - 192
 14. External File Operations
14.2 Saving PLC Data from a Project

700
14.2 Saving PLC Data from a Project Standard Simple
70

The PLC data which has been edited and monitored, and the parameters set on the onboard, can be saved in
the external device. The saved data can be read as a project with GX Developer.

(Note 1) If there is no PLC data in the onboard editing area, the list will be blank, and the "EXTERNAL SAVE"
button will be displayed in gray.
(Note 2) The drive cannot be selected for the M720 Series (display unit OS is CE).
(Note 3) In 70 Series, only compact flash (CF) cards are available as external device.

In 700 Series

"SAVE PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "SAVE PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → EXTERNAL FILE and the SAVE PROJECT menu key. When selected, the
"SAVE PROJECT" popup screen will appear. The checks for the PLC data in the onboard editing area
will be validated.

(2) Selecting the PLC data to save

Select the PLC data to save from the list of PLC data. Several data items can be selected.

(3) Saving the PLC data in the external device

(a) Select the EXTERNAL SAVE menu key. The "EXTERNAL SAVE" popup screen will appear.
* The default drive is "D", and the path is "/(route)".

IV - 193
 14. External File Operations
14.2 Saving PLC Data from a Project

"EXTERNAL SAVE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(b) Select the DRIVE menu key. Designate the save destination drive.
(c) Select the LIST menu key, and designate the path of the save destination displayed under
"LIST".
* The drive and path can be directly designated with the DRIVE/PATH menu key.
(d) Select the PROJECT NAME menu key, and designate the name of the file (project) to be saved.
(e) Select the SAVE menu key. The "EXTERNAL SAVE" popup screen will close, and the data will
be saved with the designated drive, path and file name. If a file with the same name already exists,
an overwrite confirmation popup screen will appear. Confirm and then save.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

* Once set, the drive, path and project name are held until the onboard is ended.
* For some machine types, drive/path/project names are not retained.

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(5) SEL. ALL/CANCEL

Switch valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.

IV - 194
 14. External File Operations
14.2 Saving PLC Data from a Project

(6) SELECT PARAM. + PROG.

Make the parameters and program data in the list selectable.

(7) SELECT/CANCEL

Switch valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

In 70 Series

(1) Displaying the "SAVE PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → EXTERNAL FILE NC ->EXT. menu key. When selected, the "SAVE PROJECT"
screen will appear.

(2) Selecting the PLC data to save

Select the PLC data to be saved from the list of PLC data. Several data items can be selected.

IV - 195
 14. External File Operations
14.2 Saving PLC Data from a Project

(3) Saving the PLC data in the external device

(a) Press the WRITE menu key. Then the popup screen for selecting the project will appear.
(b) When overwriting the existing project, move the cursor to the file to overwrite. When creating a new
project, enter the "PROJECT NAME" and "HEADING".
(c) Press the SAVE menu key. The project is saved.

For the other operations, refer to the explanations in 700 Series.

IV - 196
 14. External File Operations
14.3 Deleting a Project

700
14.3 Deleting a Project Standard Simple
70

A GX Developer project in the external device can be deleted.

(Note 1) The drive cannot be selected for the M720 Series (display unit OS is CE).
(Note 2) The project currently opened on the onboard cannot be deleted. (An error message appears.)
(Note 3) In 70 Series, only compact flash (CF) cards are available as external device.

In 700 Series
"DELETE PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "DELETE PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → EXTERNAL FILE and the DELETE PROJECT menu key. When selected, the
"DELETE PROJECT" popup screen will appear.
* The default drive is "D", and the path is "/(route)".

IV - 197
 14. External File Operations
14.3 Deleting a Project

(2) Deleting a project

(a) Select the DRIVE menu key, and designate the drive.
(b) Select the LIST menu key, and designate the path of the PLC data displayed under "LIST".
* The drive and path can be directly designated with the DRIVE/PATH menu key.
(c) Select the PROJECT NAME menu key, and designate the name of the file (project) to be deleted.
* Normally when selected from the list, this is automatically set.
(d) Select the DELETE menu key. The "DELETE CONFIRMATION" popup screen will appear.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(e) When the YES menu key is selected, deletion will be executed, and the "DELETE
CONFIRMATION" popup screen and "DELETE PROJECT" popup screen will close.
When the NO menu key is selected, the deletion process will be canceled, and the "DELETE
CONFIRMATION" popup screen will close.

* Drive/path/project names set once will be held even after terminating the onboard.
When the onboard is started up again, the path specified last with external file operation is displayed.
* For some machine types, drive/path/project names are not retained.

IV - 198
 14. External File Operations
14.3 Deleting a Project

In 70 Series

(1) Displaying the "DELETE PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → EXTERNAL FILE DELETE EXT. FILE menu key. When selected, the "DELETE
PROJECT" popup screen will appear.

(2) Deleting a project

(a) Specify the project to delete. Press the DELETE menu key. A popup screen will appear to confirm
the deletion process.
(b) When the YES menu key is selected, deletion will be executed. When the NO menu key is
selected, the deletion process will be canceled and the screen moves back to the "DELETE
PROJECT" popup screen.

IV - 199
 14. External File Operations
14.4 Verifying the Project PLC Data

14.4 Verifying the Project PLC Data 700

70
Standard Simple

The PLC data (programs) being edited the onboard editing area can be verified with the PLC data (program)
in the external device.

(Note 1) Only programs can be verified. (Device comments and parameters cannot be verified.)
(Note 2) Multiple programs cannot be verified simultaneously. (Always verify the programs one at a time.)
(Note 3) The EXECUTE button on the "VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen is valid only after the PLC data
list has been correctly read in with the "SELECT PROJECT" operations.
(Note 4) The EXECUTE button on the "VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen is displayed in gray if there is no
PLC in the onboard editing area.
(Note 5) The drive cannot be selected for the M720 Series (display unit OS is CE).
(Note 6) In 70 Series, only compact flash (CF) cards are available as external device.

In 700 Series
"VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → EXTERNAL FILE and the OPEN PROJECT menu key. When selected, the
"VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen will appear.

IV - 200
 14. External File Operations
14.4 Verifying the Project PLC Data

(2) Reading the list of PLC data to be verified from the external device
(a) Select the SELECT PROJECT menu key. The "SELECT PROJECT" popup screen will appear.
* The default drive is "D", and the path is "/(route)".

"SELECT PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(b) Select the DRIVE menu key, and designate the drive.
(c) Select the LIST menu key, and designate the path of the PLC data displayed under "LIST".
* The drive and path can be directly designated with the DRIVE/PATH menu key.
(d) Select the PROJECT NAME menu key, and designate the name of the file (project) to be read in.
(e) Select the SELECT menu key. The "SELECT PROJECT" popup screen will close, and the read
PLC data will appear under LIST on the "VERIFY PROJECT" screen.
The verification destination display will be "VERIFY DEST. (EXT.)".

* Drive/path/project names set once will be held even after terminating the onboard.
When the onboard is started up again, the path specified last with external file operation is displayed.
* For some machine types, drive/path/project names are not retained.

(3) Verifying the PLC data

(a) Select the PLC data (program) to be verified from the VERIFY SRC. (EDIT PLC) and VERIFY DEST.
(NC/EXT.) lists. Multiple data items cannot be selected. (Select only one data item.)
(b) Select the "VERIFY" menu key. The selected PLC data (programs) will be verified, and the results
will be displayed in the "VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen.

(4) Designating the verification step range

(a) Select the STEP TOP menu key, and designate the head step No. of the verification range.
(b) Select the STEP END menu key, and designate the end step No. of the verification range.
* The entire range will be verified if STEP TOP and STEP END are set to 0.

IV - 201
 14. External File Operations
14.4 Verifying the Project PLC Data

(5) Displaying the verification results

(a) When the PLC data is verified, the "VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen will appear.
(b) Confirm the verification results, and revise the PLC data (program).
* This cannot jump to the verification results program in the same manner as GX Developer.

"VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(6) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(7) SELECT/CANCEL

Switch valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

IV - 202
 14. External File Operations
14.4 Verifying the Project PLC Data

In 70 Series

(1) Displaying the "VERIFY" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → EXTERNAL FILE VERIFY EXT. FILE menu key. Then the "VERIFY" screen will
appear.

(2) Reading the list of PLC data to be verified from the external device
(a) Press the SELECT PROJECT menu key. The "PROJECT SELECT" popup screen will appear.
(b) Select the project to read and press the SELECT menu key or INPUT key. "SELECT
PROJECT" popup screen will close, and the read PLC data will appear in the list on the "VERIFY"
screen.

(3) Verifying the PLC data

(a) Select the PLC data (program) to be verified from VERIFY SOURCE (NC) and VERIFY DEST.
(EXT.) lists. Multiple data items cannot be selected. (Select only one data item.)
(b) Select the VERIFY menu key. Then the selected PLC data (program) is verified and the result is
displayed on the "VERIFY RESULT" popup screen.

IV - 203
 15. Diagnostics
15.1 PLC Diagnostics

700
15. Diagnostics Standard Simple
70

15.1 PLC Diagnostics

When an error occurs during program (ladder) execution, the detail of the error will be displayed on the popup
screen. Refer to the following section for details on the error displayed in PLC diagnosis.
"III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT 8.2 PLC alarms on CNC Controller Side"

"VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen

(a) Standard operation mode
• "MAIN" → DIAGNOS. → PLC DIAGNOSIS - or -
• "MAIN" → LADDER → PLC DIAGNOSIS
(b) Simple operation mode
• "MAIN" → PLC DIAGNOSIS
(c) 70 Series
• "MAIN" → PLC DIAGNOSIS
When menu key is pressed, "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen is displayed and the error during program
(ladder) execution is displayed.
When popup screen is opened, screen display is regularly (approximately every one second) updated.
When no error is occurring, "No error" is displayed.

(2) PLC operation status

PLC's RUN/STOP status is displayed.

(3) Rotary switch status

CNC unit rotary switch "CS2" status is displayed.
0(Normal) 1(PLC STOP mode)

(4) Error display

Error No., error type, error occurrence date and time (including seconds), file name, sequence step No.,
or parameter No. are displayed. The error with which file name, sequence step No. or parameter No. is
not specified will be displayed in " -------- ".
Year is displayed in 4 digits. (Note: 2000 to 2099 only)

IV - 204
 15. Diagnostics
15.1 PLC Diagnostics

(5) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(6) ERROR JUMP

Current error jumps to the step of the ladder program shown in the common error information area.
When the conditions are where error jump function is not possible, the button and menu key are
masked.
Refer to the following section for details on the error displayed in PLC diagnosis.
"III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT 8.2 PLC alarms on CNC Controller Side"

<Conditions where error jump is possible>

Error file name and step No. are displayed at error occurrence.
Target file has already been opened by the automatic update mode.

IV - 205
 16. Help

700
16. Help Standard Simple
70

General description of the keys used in the onboard and the version information are displayed.
(The screen is an example of 700 Series)

IV - 206
 17. Error Messages
17.1 Warning Messages

700
17. Error Messages Standard Simple
70

17.1 Warning Messages

The warning messages are displayed in the message display area (above the menu key display).
Warning messages

Message Warning details Remedy

WRITE LADDER After updating the PLC data (saving, Save the contents of the temporary
TO ROM deleting or formatting) in the temporary memory in the ROM with "ROM-Write".
memory, the data has not been written to The message will disappear after the
the ROM. (The contents of the temporary data is saved.
memory are lost when the NC power is
turned OFF.)

IV - 207
 17. Error Messages
17.2 User PLC Alarm

17.2 User PLC Alarm

When user PLC alarm occurs, the alarm message appears in the message display area (above the area
where menu key name is displayed).

Message Error details Remedy

USER PLC ALARM Various user PLC alarms Carry out PLC DIAGNOSIS
GENERATION and resolve the cause of the
error.

* When warning message and user PLC alarm occur at the same time, both are shown next each other in the
message display area.

17.3 Error Message

Error message is displayed in the popup screen as shown below.

Message Display timing

Command that is not supported in the Whether the instruction is supported by MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI CNC is included. Modify the CNC is checked after ladder entry. If not supported,
program. this error is displayed.
Failed in writing into ROM. Displays when ROM write has not been successfully
performed in ROM write operation.
It is over the circuit size which can be copied. Displays when memory required to copy circuit data is
not secured.
PLC is in a RUN state. Is convert performed Displays when conversion has been executed at PLC
after stop PLC? RUN state during automatic update mode.
PLC is in a RUN state. Is preservation Displays when saving has been executed at PLC RUN
performed after stop PLC? state.
PLC is in a RUN state. Is deletion performed Displays when PLC has carried out a deletion process
after stop PLC? with NC file operation during RUN state.
PLC is in a RUN state. Is a ROM write Displays when PLC has carried out a ROM write
performed after stop PLC? process with NC file operation during RUN state.
PLC is in a RUN state. After stop PLC, is Displays when PLC has carried out a program update
updating a program performed? process with NC file operation during RUN state.
PLC is in a STOP state. Is PLC changed into a Displays when the operation has been successfully
RUN state? performed following PLC STOP after operation at PLC
RUN state.

IV - 208
V APPENDIX
 Appendix 1. Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model
Appendix 1.1 Development Tools, etc.

Appendix 1. Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model

This section explains differences between the PLC4B development environment and M700 series PLC
development environment.

Appendix 1.1 Development Tools, etc.

With the M700 Series, the user PLC development environment using the MELSEC PLC development tool is
used. A comparison of each process is shown in "Table 2.1 List of development tool comparisons".
Refer to the respective lnstruction Manuals for details on each tool.

Table 1.1 List of development tool comparisons

Development MELSEC PLC development
PLC4B development environment
process environment
Application from Tool Ladder and message conversion tool Ladder list converter (CNVM7) ∗1
the old model (CHG4PB)
Hardware PC9801/PC-AT PC-AT
List -> ladder Tool PLC development software GX Converter
conversion (list section) (LIST4B)
Hardware PC9801/PC-AT PC-AT
Ladder creation Tool PLC development software GX Developer
(ladder section) (PLC4B)
Hardware PC9801/PC-AT PC-AT
Message creation Tool PLC development software Text editor → GX Converter → GX
(ladder section) (PLC4B) Developer
Hardware PC9801/PC-AT PC-AT
Transfer to the Tool PLC4B ⇔ FLD ⇔ M500 controller GX Developer
CNC ⇔ RS232C/Ethernet
⇔ CNC controller
Hardware Via FLD Via RS-232C/Ethernet
Monitor Tool (1) GX Developer
Hardware PC-AT ⇔ CNC controller
Tool (2) PLC onboard (ONBD) PLC onboard
Hardware M500 controller CNC controller
ROM writing Tool PLC onboard → F-ROM PLC onboard → F-ROM
Hardware M500 controller CNC controller
Print output Tool (1) PLC development software GX Developer
(ladder section) (PLC4B)
Hardware PC9801/PC-AT PC-AT
Tool (2) PLC onboard (ONBD)
Hardware M500 controller

[Note] The arrows → and ⇔ in the list indicate the flow of information when using multiple tools.

V-1
 Appendix 1. Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model
Appendix 1.2 Devices and Device Assignments

Appendix 1.2 Devices and Device Assignments

Table 1.2.1 List of device differences (Machining center system)

Device name M500M M600M M700 Remarks
X (PLC, machine input) X0 to X4FF
(Integrated to X and
U ($2 input) U0 to U17F X0 to XAFF X0 to X1FFF
assignment changed)
I ($3 and following input) I0 to I4BF
Y (PLC, machine output) Y0 to Y57F
(Integrated to Y and
W ($2 output) W0 to W1FF Y0 to YDFF Y0 to Y1FFF
assignment changed)
J ($3 and following output) J0 to J63F
S (spindle input/output) (Divided into X and Y and
S0 to S1FF - -
assignment changed)
M (temporary memory) M0 to M5119 M0 to M5119 M0 to M10239
G (temporary memory) G0 to G3071 M5120 to M8191
F (alarm message I/F) F0 to F127 F0 to F255 F0 to F1023
L (latch relay) L0 to L255 ← ←
E (special relay) E0 to E127 SM0 to SM127 SM0 to SM127
Timer (10ms variable) T0 to T15 T0 to T15 The 10ms timer and 100ms
(10ms fixed) Q0 to Q39 T16 to T55 T0 to T703 timer are differentiated with the
instructions
(100ms variable) T16 to T95 T56 to T135 The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed) Q40 to Q135 T136 to T231 set with parameters.
Integrated timer Integrated timer ST has been
T96 to T103 T232 to R239 ST0 to ST63
(100ms variable) newly added
(100ms fixed) The variable/fixed boundary is
Q136 to Q151 T240 to T255 set with parameters.
C (counter variable) C0 to C23 C0 to C23 C0 to C255 The variable/fixed boundary is
B (counter fixed) B0 to B103 C24 to C127 set with parameters.
D (data register) D0 to D1023 ← D0 to D2047
R (file register, NCI/F) R0 to R8191 ← R0 to R13311 (Assignment changed)
A (accumulator) Discontinued (replaced by D
A0, A1 - -
register)
Z (index register) Z Z0 Z0 to Z1
V (index register) V Z1
N (master control) N0 to N7 ← ←
P (jump, call label) P0 to P255 ← P0 to P2047 Reserved label
P4000 to P4005 Local, common pointer
K (decimal constant) K-32768 to
K32767
← ←
K-2147483648 to
K2147483647
H (hexadecimal constant) H0 to HFFFF ← ←
H0 to
HFFFFFFFF

V-2
 Appendix 1. Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model
Appendix 1.2 Devices and Device Assignments

Table 1.2.2 List of device differences (lathe system)

Device name M500L M600L M700 Remarks
X (PLC, machine input) X0 to X4BF X0 to X4BF
U ($2 input) U0 to U17F X4C0 to X63F
(Integrated to X and
I ($3 to 8 input) I0 to I3FF X640 to XA3F X0 to X1FFF assignment changed)
S (No. 5, 6 spindle input) S0 to S3F XA40 to XA7F
S (No. 3, 4 spindle input) S80 to SBF XA80 to XABF
Y (PLC, machine output) Y0 to Y53F Y0 to Y53F
W($2 output) W0 to W1FF Y540 to Y73F
(Integrated to Y and
J ($3 to 8 output) J0 to J63F Y740 to YD7F Y0 to Y1FFF assignment changed)
S (No. 5, 6 spindle output) S40 to S7F YD80 to YDBF
S (No. 3, 4 spindle output) SC0 to SFF YDC0 to YDFF
M (temporary memory) M0 to M5119 M0 to M5119 M0 to M10239
G (temporary memory) G0 to G3071 M5120 to M8191
F (alarm message I/F) F0 to F127 F0 to F127 F0 to F1023
L (latch relay) L0 to L255 ← ←
E (special relay) E0 to E127 SM0 to SM127 SM0 to SM127
Timer (10ms variable) T0 to T15 T0 to T15 The 10ms timer and 100ms
(10ms fixed) Q0 to Q39 T16 to T55 T0 to T703 timer are differentiated with the
instructions
(100ms variable) T16 to T95 T56 to T135 The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed) Q40 to Q135 T136 to T231 set with parameters.
Integrated timer Integrated timer ST has been
T96 to T103 T232 to R239 ST0 to ST63
(100ms variable) newly added
(100ms fixed) The variable/fixed boundary is
Q136 to Q151 T240 to T255 set with parameters.
C (counter variable) C0 to C23 C0 to C23 C0 to C255 The variable/fixed boundary is
B (counter fixed) B0 to B103 C24 to C127 set with parameters.
D (data register) D0 to D1023 ← D0 to D2047
R (file register, NCI/F) R0 to R8191 ← R0 to R13311 (Assignment changed)
A (accumulator) Discontinued (replaced by D
A0, A1 - -
register)
Z (index register) Z Z0 Z0 to Z1
V (index register) V Z1
N (master control) N0 to N7 ← ←
P (jump, call label) P0 to P255 ← P0 to P2047 Reserved label
P4000 to P4005 Local, common pointer
K (decimal constant) K-32768 to K32767
K-2147483648 to ← ←
K2147483647
H (hexadecimal constant) H0 to HFFFF
← ←
H0 to HFFFFFFFF

V-3
 Appendix 1. Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model
Appendix 1.2 Devices and Device Assignments

Table 1.2.3 List of device differences (M60 Series)

Device name M60 M60 M700 Remarks
(PLC4B) (GX Developer)
X (PLC, machine input) X0 to X4BF X0 to X4BF
U ($2 input) (Integrated to X and
U0 to U17F X4C0 to X63F X0 to X1FFF
assignment changed)
Y (PLC, machine output) Y0 to Y53F Y0 to Y53F
W ($2 output) (Integrated to Y and
W0 to W1FF Y540 to Y73F Y0 to Y1FFF
assignment changed)
M (temporary memory) M0 to M5119 M0 to M5119 M0 to M10239
G (temporary memory) G0 to G3071 M5120 to M8191
F (alarm message I/F) F0 to F127 F0 to F127 F0 to F1023
L (latch relay) L0 to L255 ← ←
E (special relay) E0 to E127 SM0 to SM127 SM0 to SM127
Timer (10ms variable) T0 to T15 T0 to T15 The 10ms timer and 100ms
(10ms fixed) Q0 to Q39 T16 to T55 T0 to T703 timer are differentiated with the
instructions
(100ms variable) T16 to T95 R56 to T135 The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed) Q40 to Q135 T136 to R231 set with parameters.
Integrated timer Integrated timer ST has been
T96 to T103 T232 to R239 ST0 to ST63
(100ms variable) newly added
(100ms fixed) The variable/fixed boundary is
Q136 to Q151 T240 to T255 set with parameters.
C (counter variable) C0 to C23 C0 to C23 C0 to C255 The variable/fixed boundary is
B (counter fixed) B0 to B103 C24 to C127 set with parameters.
D (data register) D0 to D1023 ← D0 to D2047
R (file register, NCI/F) R0 to R8191 ← R0 to R13311 (Assignment changed)
A (accumulator) Discontinued (replaced by D
A0, A1 - -
register)
Z (index register) Z Z0 Z0 to Z1
V (index register) V Z1
N (master control) N0 to N7 ← ←
P (jump, call label) P0 to P255 ← P0 to P2047 Reserved label
P4000 to P4005 Local, common pointer
K (decimal constant) K-32768 to K32767
K-2147483648 to ← ←
K2147483647
H (hexadecimal constant) H0 to HFFFF ← ←
H0 to HFFFFFFFF

V-4
 Appendix 1. Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model
Appendix 1.2 Devices and Device Assignments

Table 1.2.4 List of device differences (M60S Series)

Device name M60S M60S M700 Remarks
(PLC4B) (GX Developer)
X (PLC, machine input) X0 to X4BF X0 to X4BF
U ($2 input) U0 to U17F X4C0 to X63F
I ($3 to 8 input) (Integrated to X and
I0 to I3FF X640 to XA3F
assignment changed)
S (No. 3 spindle input) S0 to S1F XA40 to XA5F X0 to X1FFF
S (No. 4 spindle input) S40 to S5F XA60 to XA7F
S (No. 5 spindle input) S80 to S9F XA80 to XA9F
S (No. 6 spindle input) SC0 to SDF XAA0 to XABF
Y (PLC, machine output) Y0 to Y53F Y0 to Y53F
W ($2 output) W0 to W1FF Y540 to Y73F
J ($3 to 8 output) (Integrated to Y and
J0 to J63F Y740 to YD7F
assignment changed)
S (No. 3 spindle output) S20 to S3F YD80 to YD9F Y0 to Y1FFF
S (No. 4 spindle output) S60 to S7F YDA0 to YDBF
S (No. 5 spindle output) SA0 to SBF YDC0 to YDDF
S (No. 6 spindle output) SE0 to SFF YDE0 to YDFF
M (temporary memory) M0 to M5119 M0 to M5119 M0 to M10239
G (temporary memory) G0 to G3071 M5120 to M8191
F (alarm message I/F) F0 to F127 F0 to F127 F0 to F1023
L (latch relay) L0 to L255 ← ←
E (special relay) E0 to E127 SM0 to SM127 SM0 to SM127
Timer (10ms variable) T0 to T15 T0 to T15 The 10ms timer and 100ms
(10ms fixed) Q0 to Q39 T16 to T55 T0 to T703 timer are differentiated with the
instructions
(100ms variable) T16 to T95 T56 to T135 The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed) Q40 to Q135 T136 to T231 set with parameters.
Integrated timer Integrated timer ST has been
T96 to T103 T232 to R239 ST0 to ST63
(100ms variable) newly added
(100ms fixed) The variable/fixed boundary is
Q136 to Q151 T240 to T255 set with parameters.
C (counter variable) C0 to C23 C0 to C23 C0 to C255 The variable/fixed boundary is
B (counter fixed) B0 to B103 C24 to C127 set with parameters.
D (data register) D0 to D1023 ← D0 to D2047
R (file register, NCI/F) R0 to R8191 ← R0 to R13311 (Assignment changed)
A (accumulator) Discontinued (replaced by D
A0, A1 - -
register)
Z (index register) Z Z0 Z0 to Z1
V (index register) V Z1
N (master control) N0 to N7 ← ←
P (jump, call label) P0 to P2047 Reserved label
P0 to P255 ←
P4000 to P4005 Local, common pointer
K (decimal constant) K-32768 to K32767
K-2147483648 to ← ←
K2147483647
H (hexadecimal constant) H0 to HFFFF ← ←
H0 to HFFFFFFFF

V-5
 Appendix 1. Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model
Appendix 1.3 Instructions with Changed Designation Format

Appendix 1.3 Instructions with Changed Designation Format

Comparison of PLC instruction format with the conventional machine type is shown in the "Table 1.3.1 Table
of instruction correspondence". In M700 extended PLC instruction mode, a number of new instructions were
added. Also, most of the conventional instructions extended the specifications of argument. Refer to "II
PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION 6.2 Instruction List" for details.
Table 1.3.1 Table of instruction correspondence
M700
M500M/M500L/M60(*1)/M60S(*1) M600M/M600L/M60(*2)/M60S(*2)
(Compatible PLC Instruction mode)
Function Inst. sign Symbol Inst. sign Symbol Inst. sign Symbol/remarks
D Alternative ladder is shown
Bit DEFR –[ DEFR D ]– ANDP Discontinued
–┤↑├– in the next page.
Average value AVE –[ AVE S D n ] ┤ S. AVE – [ S.AVE S D n ]┤ ←
Carry flag set STC –[ STC ] ┤ S. STC – [ S.STC ]┤ ←
Carry flag reset CLC –[ CLC ] ┤ S. CLC – [ S.CLC ]┤ ←
ROR –[ ROR n ] ┤ ROT – [ ROR D n ]┤ ← Added D is a rotating word
Right rotation device (Same with RCR
DROR –[ DROR n ] ┤ DROR – [ DROR D n ]┤ ← and DRCR.)
ROL –[ ROL n ] ┤ ROL – [ ROL D n ]┤ ← Added D is a rotating word
Left rotation device (Same with RCL
DROL –[ DROL n ] ┤ DROL – [ DROL D n ]┤ ← and DRCL.)
Added D is word device for
Search SER –[ SER S1 S2 n ] ┤ SER – [ SER S1 S2 D n ] ┤ ←
storing search results
Added D is word device for
Quantity of 1 SUM –[ SUM S ] ┤ SUM – [ SUM S D ]┤ ←
storing total number of bits
ATC ATC –[ ATC Kn Rn Rm ]-< Mm >┤ S. ATC – [ S.ATC Kn Rn Rm Mm ] ┤ ←
ROT ROT –[ ROT Kn Rn Rm ]-< Mm >┤ S. ROT – [ S.ROT Kn Rn Rm Mm ] ┤ ←
TSRH TSRH –[ TSRH Rm Rn ]-< Mn >┤ S. TSRH – [ S.TSRH Rm Rn Mn ] ┤ Discontinued Replaced by PLC window
DDBA DDBA –[ DDBA Rn / Dn ] ┤ S. DDBA – [ S.DDBA Rn / Dn ] ┤ Discontinued Replaced by PLC window
DDBS DDBS –[ DDBS Rn ] ┤ S. DDBS – [ S.DDBS Rn ] ┤ ←
C language
CALL –[ CALL Pn ] ┤ S. CAL – [ S.CAL Pn ] ┤ S. CALL – [ S.CALL Kn ] ┤
release
S1.n (*3)
LDBIT ├[ BIT S1 n ]– LD<= ├ [ <= S1 n ]– LD
├┤├–
S1.n (*3)
ANDBIT –[ BIT S1 n ]– AND<= –[ = S1 n ]– AND
–┤├–
S1.n (*3)
ORBIT └[ BIT S1 n ]┘ OR<= └ [ <= S1 n ]┘ OR
└┤├┘
BIT
S1.n (*3)
LDBII ├[ BII S1 n ]– LD<> ├[ > S1 n ]– LDI
├┤/├–
S1.n (*3)
ANDBII –[ BII S1 n ]– AND<> – [ <> S1 n ]– ANDI
–┤/├–
S1.n (*3)
ORBII └[ BII S1 n ]┘ OR<> └ [ <> S1 n ]┘ ORI
└┤/├┘
Comparative
LD= ├[ = Dn/Kn Dn ]– ← ← LD=
├[ = Dn/Kn Dn ] –
instruction ├[ = Dn Kn ] – (*4)
Arithmetic – [ + Dn Dn/Kn Dn ] ┤
operation + –[ + Dn Dn/Kn Dn ] ┤ ← ← + – [ + Dn/Kn Dn Dn ] ┤
instruction (*5)
– [WAND Dn Dn/Kn Dn ] ┤
Logical opera-
WAND –[ WAND Dn Dn/Kn Dn ] ┤ ← ← WAND – [WAND Dn/Kn Dn Dn ] ┤
tion instruction
(*6)
(R register
Kn/Dn
Timer OUT T ← ← OUT T Kn/Dn/Rn correspondence)
–< Tn >┤
–< Tn >┤ (100ms dedicated)
H Kn/Dn
Timer (10ms) OUT H
–< Tn >┤ (10ms dedicated)
Timer setting
S. TMOV – [ S.TMOV Tn D ]┤
value

(*1) When PLC4B is used as development tool

(*2) When GX Developer is used as development tool
(*3) Follows word device bit designation format. (OUT, SET, and RST instructions also support same format)
(*4) Argument pattern for constant designation added. (AND=, OR=, LDD=, ANDD=, ORD=, LD>, and LD< system
instructions also support same format)
(*5) Argument pattern for constant designation added. (D+, -, D-, *, D*, /, and D/ instructions also support same format)
(*6) Argument pattern for constant designation added. (WOR and WXOR instructions also support same format)

V-6
 Appendix 1. Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model
Appendix 1.3 Instructions with Changed Designation Format

Appendix 1.3.1 Alternative Circuits Resulted from the Ban on DEFR Instruction
When using GX Developer as a development tool, DEFR instruction has to be substituted with an alternative
instruction (ANDP), which has different performance specifications. DEFR instruction has to be substituted
and banned because they are expected to become obstacles when expanding PLC functions in the future. So,
Do not use DEFR instruction in M700 series.
In case DEFR instruction is currently used, substitute the ladder with another one, using the example of
alternative ladders shown below.

DEFR instruction converts operation results up to DEFR instruction into pulse.

Conduction occurs when operation results prior to DEFR instruction is OFF→ON. At the same time, operation
results prior to DEFR instruction will be saved in a specified device.
Examples of circuits and their movement are shown below.

(Ladder example 1) When using PLC4B as a development tool

M0 DEFR M1 M100

(Ladder example 2) When using GX Developer as a development tool

M0 M1 M100

In the case of the ladder above, when M0 is turned OFF→ON (When M0 is ON and M1, or the operation
results of one scan prior, is OFF), M100 will turn ON.
In the case of the ladder other than above, M100 will turn OFF. Also, the operation results prior to DEFR
instruction (Operation result of LD M0 in the case above.) will be saved in M1.

An alternative circuit for the above circuits is shown below.

(Alternative ladder example)

M0 M1 M100

M1

V-7
 Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer
Appendix 2.1 Sequence Instructions

Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

The following instruction lists are excerpts from the "QnACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions)"
(model name: QNACPU-P (KYOUTU) 13J522).
In these lists, the instructions "marked U" are unavailable for the CNC. (When written from GX Developer to
the CNC, they are replaced by "NOP" instructions.)
Note that this list of instructions indicates the status in the extended instruction mode. In the compatible
instruction mode, some instructions cannot be used even if there is no "x" mark.
For details on the usable instructions in each mode, refer to the list of instructions in "II PROGRAMMING
EXPLANATION".

Appendix 2.1 Sequence Instructions

Contact instructions Coupling instructions

Classifi- Instruction Classifi- Instruction
Symbol Symbol
cation sign cation sign
Contact Coupling
LD ANB ANB

LDI
ORB ORB
AND
MPS MPS
ANI MRD MRD

OR MPP MPP

ORI INV

MEP
LDP
MEF
LDF
Vn
EGP
ANDP
Vn
EGF
ANDF

ORP

ORF

Output instructions Shift instructions

Classifi- Instruction Classifi- Instruction
Symbol Symbol
cation sign cation sign
Output Shift
OUT SFT SFT D

SET SET D SFTP SFTP D

RST RST D
Master control instructions
PLS PLS D
Classifi- Instruction
Symbol
PLF PLF D cation sign
Master
MC n D
FF FF D control MC
MCR MCR n
DELTA DELTA D

DELTAP DELTAP D

V-8
 Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer
Appendix 2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

End instructions Other instructions

Classifi- Instruction Classifi- Instruction
Symbol Symbol
cation sign cation sign
Stop
Program FEND FEND STOP STOP
end No
END END NOP
opera-
tion NOPLF NOPLF

PAGE PAGE n

Appendix 2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

Comparison operation instructions Comparison operation instructions (Continued)

Classifi- Instruction Classifi- Instruction
Symbol Symbol
cation sign cation sign

LD S1 S2 LDD D S1 S2

AND S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2

OR S1 S2 ORD D S1 S2

LD S1 S2 LDD D S1 S2

AND S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2

OR S1 S2 ORD D S1 S2

LD S1 S2 LDD D S1 S2

AND S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2

16-bit 32-bit
OR S1 S2 ORD D S1 S2
data data
compar- S1 S2 compar- LDD D S1 S2
LD
ison ison
AND S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2

OR ORD D S1 S2
S1 S2

LD S1 S2 LDD D S1 S2

AND S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2

OR ORD D S1 S2
S1 S2

LD S1 S2 LDD D S1 S2

AND S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2

OR S1 S2
ORD D S1 S2

V-9
 Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer
Appendix 2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

Comparison operation instructions (Continued) Comparison operation instructions (Continued)

Classifi- Instruction Classifi- Instruction
Symbol Symbol
cation sign cation sign
Real E S1 S2 Charac- $ S1 S2
number LDE ter
LD$
data ANDE E S1 S2 string AND$ $ S1 S2
compar- data
ison compar-
ORE E S1 S2 ison OR$ $ S1 S2

LDE E S1 S2 LD$ $ S1 S2

ANDE E S1 S2 AND$ $ S1 S2

ORE E S1 S2 OR$ $ S1 S2

LDE E S1 S2 LD$ $ S1 S2

ANDE E S1 S2 AND$ $ S1 S2

ORE E S1 S2
OR$ $ S1 S2

LDE E S1 S2 LD$ $ S1 S2

ANDE E S1 S2 AND$ $ S1 S2

ORE OR$ $ S1 S2
E S1 S2

LDE E S1 S2 LD$ $ S1 S2

ANDE E S1 S2 AND$ $ S1 S2

ORE OR$ $ S1 S2
E S1 S2

LDE E S1 S2 LD$ $ S1 S2

ANDE E S1 S2 AND$ $ S1 S2

ORE OR$ $ S1 S2
E S1 S2
Block BKCMP S1 S2 D n
BKCMP
data
compar- BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n
ison
BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n

BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n

BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n

BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n

BKCMP P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n

BKCMP P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n

BKCMP P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n

BKCMP P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n

BKCMP P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n

BKCMP P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n

V - 10
 Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer
Appendix 2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

Arithmetic operation instructions Arithmetic operation instructions (Continued)

Classifi- Instruction Classific Instruction
Symbol Symbol
cation sign ation sign
BIN + S D
BCD B+ S D
+ B+
16-bit 4-digit
addition/ +P +P S D addition/ B+P B+P S D
subtrac- subtrac-
tion + + S1 S2 D tion B+ B+ S1 S2 D

+P +P S1 S2 D B+P B+P S1 S2 D

S D B B S D

P P S D B P B P S D

S1 S2 D B B S1 S2 D

P P S1 S2 D B P B P S1 S2 D
BIN D+ S D BCD DB+ S D
D+ DB+
32-bit 8-digit
addition/ D+P D+P S D addition/ DB+P DB+P S D
subtrac- subtrac-
tion D+ D+ S1 S2 D tion DB+ DB+ S1 S2 D

D+P D+P S1 S2 D DB+P DB+P S1 S2 D

D D S D DB DB S D

D P D P S D DB P DB P S D

D D S1 S2 D DB DB S1 S2 D

D P D P S1 S2 D DB P DB P S1 S2 D
BIN S1 S2 D BCD B S1 S2 D
B
16-bit 4-digit
multipli- P P S1 S2 D multipli- B P B P S1 S2 D
cation/ cation/
division / / S1 S2 D division B/ B/ S1 S2 D

/P /P S1 S2 D B/P B/P S1 S2 D
BIN D S1 S2 D BCD DB S1 S2 D
D DB
32-bit 8-digit
multipli- D P D P S1 S2 D multipli- DB P DB P S1 S2 D
cation/ cation/
division D/ D/ S1 S2 D division DB/ DB/ S1 S2 D

D/P D/P S1 S2 D DB/P DB/P S1 S2 D

V - 11
 Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer
Appendix 2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

Arithmetic operation instructions (Continued) Data conversion Instructions (Continued)

Classifi- Instruction Classifi- Instruction
Symbol Symbol
cation sign cation sign
Floating- E+ S D BIN BIN S D
E+ BIN
point conver-
data E+P E+P S D sion BINP BINP S D
addition/
subtrac- E+ E+ S1 S2 D DBIN DBIN S D
tion
E+P E+P S1 S2 D DBINP DBINP S D

E S D BIN -> FLT S D

E FLT
floating-
E P E P S D point FLTP FLTP S D
conver-
E E S1 S2 D sion DFLT DFLT S D

E P E P S1 S2 D DFLTP DFLTP S D
Floating- E S1 S2 D Floating- INT S D
E INT
point point ->
data E P E P S1 S2 D BIN INTP INTP S D
multiplic- conver-
ation/ E/ E/ S1 S2 D sion DINT DINT S D
division
E/P E/P S1 S2 D DINTP DINTP S D
BIN block BK+ S1 S2 D n BIN DBL S D
BK+ DBL
addition/ 16-bit <->
subtrac- BK+P BK+P S1 S2 D n 32-bit DBLP DBLP S D
tion conver-
BK BK S1 S2 D n sion WORD WORD S D

BK P BK P S1 S2 D n WORDP WORDP S D
Charac- $+ S D BIN -> GRY S D
$+ GRY
ter gray code
string $+P $+P S D conver- GRYP GRYP S D
data sion
coupling $+ $+ S1 S2 D DGRY DGRY S D

$+P $+P S1 S2 D DGRYP DGRYP S D

BIN data INC D Gray GBIN S D
INC GBIN
incre- code ->
ment INCP INCP D BIN GBINP GBINP S D
conver-
DINC DINC D sion DGBIN DGBIN S D

DINCP DINCP D DGBINP DGBINP S D

DEC D 2's NEG D

DEC NEG
comple-
DECP DECP D ment NEGP NEGP D

DDEC DDEC D DNEG DNEG D

DDECP DDECP D DNEGP DNEGP D

Data conversion instructions ENEG ENEG D

Classifi- Instruction
Symbol ENEGP ENEGP D
cation sign
Block BKBCD S D n
BCD BCD S D BKBCD
conver-
BCD BCDP S D
sion BKBCDP BKBCDP S D n
BCDP
conver-
sion DBCD S D BKBIN BKBIN S D n
DBCD
DBCDP S D BKBINP BKBINP S D n
DBCDP

V - 12
 Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer
Appendix 2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

Data transfer instructions Program branch instructions

Classifi- Instruction Classifi- Instruction
Symbol Symbol
cation sign cation sign
16-bit MOV MOV S D CJ CJ Pn
data
transfer MOVP MOVP S D SCJ SCJ Pn
Jump
32-bit DMOV DMOV S D JMP JMP Pn
data
transfer DMOVP DMOVP S D GOEND GOEND
Floating- EMOV S D
EMOV
point Program execution control instructions
data EMOVP S D Classifi- Instruction
transfer EMOVP Symbol
cation sign
Charac- $MOV S D
$MOV Interrupt
ter string DI DI
disable
data $MOVP S D
$MOVP Interrupt
transfer EI EI
enable
16-bit CML CML S D Interrupt
data NOT disable/
transfer CMLP CMLP S D IMASK IMASK S
enable
32-bit DCML S D setting
DCML
data NOT Return IRET IRET
transfer DCMLP DCMLP S D

Block BMOV BMOV S D n I/O refresh instructions

transfer BMOVP S D n Classifi- Instruction
BMOVP Symbol
cation sign
Same FMOV S D n I/O
FMOV RFS RFS D n
data refresh
block FMOVP S D n
transfer FMOVP
Other useful instructions
16-bit XCH XCH S D
Classifi- Instruction
data Symbol
XCHP S D cation sign
change XCHP
Up/down UDCNT1 UDCNT1 S D n
32-bit DXCH DXCH S D
data counter
UDCNT2 UDCNT2 S D n
change DXCHP DXCHP S D
Teaching
Block TTMR TTMR D n
BXCH BXCH S D n timer
data Special
change BXCHP S D n STMR STMR S n D
BXCHP timer
Upper/ Nearest
SWAP SWAP D
lower access ROTC ROTC S n1 n2 D
byte control
SWAPP SWAPP D
change Ramp
RAMP RAMP n1 n2 D1 n3 D2
signal
Pulse
SPD SPD S n D
density
Pulse
PLSY PLSY n1 n2 D
output
Pulse
width
PWM n1 n2 D
modula- PWM
tion
Matrix
MTR MTR S D1 D2 n
input

V - 13
 Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer
Appendix 2.3 Application Instructions

Appendix 2.3 Application Instructions

Logical operation instructions Logical operation instructions (Continued)

Classifi- Instruction Classifi- Instruction
Symbol Symbol
cation sign cation sign
AND WAND S D NOT- WXNR S D
WAND WXNR
exclusive
WANDP WANDP S D OR WXNRP WXNRP S D

WAND WAND S1 S2 D WXNR WXNR S1 S2 D

WANDP WANDP S1 S2 D WXNRP WXNRP S1 S2 D

DAND DAND S D DXNR DXNR S D

DANDP DANDP S D DXNRP DXNRP S D

DAND DAND S1 S2 D DXNR DXNR S1 S2 D

DANDP DANDP S1 S2 D DXNRP DXNRP S1 S2 D

BKAND BKAND S1 S2 D n BKXNOR BKXNOR S1 S2 D n

BKANDP BKANDP S1 S2 D n BKXNORP BKXNORP S1 S2 D n

OR WOR S D
WOR

WORP WORP S D Rotation instructions

Classifi- Instruction
WOR WOR S1 S2 D Symbol
cation sign
WORP S1 S2 D Right ROR D n
WORP ROR
rotation
DOR DOR S D RORP RORP D n

DORP DORP S D RCR RCR D n

DOR DOR S1 S2 D RCRP RCRP D n

DORP S1 S2 D Left ROL D n

DORP ROL
rotation
BKOR BKOR S1 S2 D n ROLP ROLP D n

BKORP BKORP S1 S2 D n RCL RCL D n

Exclusive WXOR S D RCLP D n
WXOR RCLP
OR
Right DROR D n
WXORP WXORP S D DROR
rotation
WXOR S1 S2 D DRORP DRORP D n
WXOR
DRCR DRCR D n
WXORP WXORP S1 S2 D

DRCRP DRCRP D n
DXOR DXOR S D
Left DROL D n
DROL
DXORP S D rotation
DXORP
DROLP DROLP D n
DXOR S1 S2 D
DXOR
DRCL DRCL D n
DXORP S1 S2 D
DXORP DRCLP D n
DRCLP
BKXOR S1 S2 D n
BKXOR
BKXORP S1 S2 D n
BKXORP

V - 14
 Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer
Appendix 2.3 Application Instructions

Shift instructions Data processing instructions

Classifi- Instruction Classifi- Instruction
Symbol Symbol
cation sign cation sign
n-bit shift SFR D n Data SER S1 S2 D n
SFR SER
search
SFRP SFRP D n SERP SERP S1 S2 D n

SFL SFL D n DSER S1 S2 D n

DSER
SFLP SFLP D n DSERP S1 S2 D n
DSERP
1-bit shift BSFR BSFR D n Bit check
SUM SUM S D

BSFRP BSFRP D n SUMP SUMP S D

BSFL BSFL D n DSUM DSUM S D

BSFLP D n DSUMP DSUMP S D

BSFLP
1-word Decode DECO S D n
DSFR DSFR D n DECO
shift
DECOP DECOP S D n
DSFRP DSFRP D n
Encode ENCO S D n
ENCO
DSFL DSFL D n
ENCOP ENCOP S D n
DSFLP DSFLP D n
7- SEG S D
SEG
segment
decode SEGP SEGP S D
Bit processing instructions
Dissocia- DIS S D n
Classifi- Instruction DIS
Symbol tion
cation sign • DISP S D n
DISP
Bit BSET D n Associa-
set/reset BSET tion UNI UNI S D n

BSETP BSETP D n
UNIP UNIP S D n

BRST BRST D n NDIS S1 D S2

NDIS
BRSTP BRSTP D n NDISP S1 D S2
NDISP
Bit test TEST TEST S1 S2 D
NUNI NUNI S1 D S2

TESTP TESTP S1 S2 D
NUNIP NUNIP S1 D S2

DTEST DTEST S1 S2 D
WTOB WTOB S D n

DTESTP DTESTP S1 S2 D WTOBP S D n

WTOBP
Bit device BKRST BTOW S D n
Batch BKRST S n BTOW
reset BTOWP S D n
BTOWP
BKRSTP S n
BKRSTP

V - 15
 Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer
Appendix 2.3 Application Instructions

Data processing instructions (Continued) Structuring instructions

Classifi- Instruction Classifi- Instruction
Symbol Symbol
cation sign cation sign
Retrieval MAX S D n Repeat
MAX FOR FOR n

MAXP MAXP S D n NEXT NEXT

MIN MIN S D n BREAK BREAK D Pn

MINP MINP S D n BREAKP BREAKP D Pn

DMAX S D n Sub- CALL Pn S1～Sn

DMAX CALL
routine
DMAXP DMAXP S D n program CALLP CALLP Pn S1～Sn
call
DMIN DMIN S D n RET RET

DMINP DMINP S D n FCALL FCALL Pn S1～Sn

Sort SORT S1 n S2 D1 D2 FCALLP Pn S1～Sn
FCALLP
S2:Number of data blocks to
be compared at a time. SORT * Pn S1~Sn
SORT D1:Device to be forced ON
ECALL * : Program name
at sort completion
D2:Used by system ECALLP * Pn S1~Sn
ECALLP * : Program name
DSORT S1 n S2 D1 D2
S2:Number of data blocks to EFCALL * Pn S1~Sn
be compared at a time. EFCALL * : Program name
DSORT D1:Device to be forced ON
at sort completion EFCALLP * Pn S1~Sn
D2:Used by system EFCALLP * : Program name
Total WSUM S D n
WSUM COM
value COM
calcula- WSUMP WSUMP S D n Fixed
tion IX S
DWSUM S D n
index
DWSUM qualifica- IX Device qualification circuit
DWSUMP S D n tion IXEND
DWSUMP
IXEND
Table operation instructions IXDEV IXDEV
Classifi- Instruction IXSET Pn D
Symbol
cation sign
Table FIFW S D IXSET
FIFW Designation of qualification
process-
ing FIFWP S D value
FIFWP

FIFR FIFR S D

FIFRP FIFRP S D

FPOP FPOP S D

FPOPP FPOPP S D

FINS S D n
FINS
FINS S D n
FINSP
FDEL S D n
FDEL
FDELP S D n
FDELP

V - 16
 Appendix 3. List of Special Relays and Special Registers

Appendix 3. List of Special Relays and Special Registers

Special relay SM and special register SD are the devices whose specifications are defined in the CNC.
Specifications of the available devices are given below. Do not use the devices not indicated below as they
are used in the system.

V - 17
 Appendix 3. List of Special Relays and Special Registers
Appendix 3.1 Special Relay

Appendix 3.1 Special Relay

Setting side
Device Name Operation Operation details
(Set time)
• Turned ON when the PLC alarm (illegal PLC)
OFF: No error System side
SM0 PLC error
ON: Error
has occurred.
（Error）
Reset is done by STOP→RUN.
System side
OFF: Carry OFF
SM12 Carry flag
ON: Carry ON
Carry flag used during function instruction. (State
change)
H/W alarm (Temperature rise
SM16 detection) System side
OFF: No error Used in some machine types.
SM17 H/W alarm (DIO 24V illegal) (State
ON: Error Refer to PLC I/F Manual, etc. for details.
change)
H/W alarm (Power supply
SM18 error)
SM64 ATC display request flag
Tool life management setting System side
SM65 lock Refer to PLC I/F Manual, Used in some machine types.
(State
etc. for details. Refer to PLC I/F Manual, etc. for details.
SM70 Key I/F related change)

SM71 In ATC rotation

SM80 System side
Refer to PLC I/F Manual, Used in some machine types as the PLC switch.
: PLC switch (State
etc. for details. Refer to PLC I/F Manual, etc. for details.
change)
SM111
System side
ON
SM400 Always ON OFF
• Always ON (Every time
END)
System side
ON
SM401 Always OFF OFF
• Always OFF (Every time
END)
• After RUN, turned ON by only 1 scan.
After RUN, turned ON by only System side
ON • OFF during STOP.
SM402 1 scan
OFF 1 scan This contact can be used only in the
(Every time
(Medium-speed ladder) END)
medium-speed ladder.
• After RUN, turned OFF by only 1 scan.
After RUN, turned OFF by System side
ON • OFF during STOP.
SM403 only 1 scan
OFF
1 scan
This contact can be used only in the
(Every time
(Medium-speed ladder) END)
medium-speed ladder.
• After RUN, turned ON by only 1 scan.
After RUN, turned ON by only System side
ON • OFF during STOP.
SM404 1 scan
OFF 1 scan This contact can be used only in the high-speed
(Every time
(High-speed ladder) END)
ladder.
After RUN, turned OFF by • After RUN, turned OFF by only 1 scan. System side
ON
SM405 only 1 scan OFF
1 scan • OFF during STOP. (Every time
(High-speed ladder) This contact can be used only in the high-speed. END)
0.05s
SM410 0.1-second clock
0.05s
• ON/OFF is repeated by the specified second.
0.1s System side
SM411 0.2-second clock • Starts from OFF when the power is turned ON.
(At high
0.1s • The clock operation is continued even in STOP.
speed ladder
0.5s • Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the
SM412 1-second clock processing)
designated time has elapsed during the execution
0.5s *1
of the medium speed ladder.
1s
SM413 2-second clock
1s
• ON/OFF is repeated according to the second
specified with SD414.
System side
• Starts from OFF when the power is turned ON.
(At high
ns • The clock operation is continued even in STOP.
SM414 2n-second clock • If SD414 is 0 or smaller value, operates at n=30.
speed ladder
ns
processing)
• Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the
*1
designated time has elapsed during the execution
of the medium speed ladder.
*1: Processing cycle of the high-speed ladder (sequence program) depends on the machine type.

V - 18
 Appendix 3. List of Special Relays and Special Registers
Appendix 3.2 Special Register

Appendix 3.2 Special Register

Setting side
Device Name Operation Operation details
(Set time)
• Error No. is stored when PLC alarm (illegal PLC) occurs.
0 is set when normal. The error No. is cleared to 0 when
System side
SD0 PLC error No. PLC error No. executing PLC RUN next time.
(Error)
Refer to "Error code" in the list of PLC alarms for details on
numbers.
• Year (last 2 digits) and moth when SD0 data was updated is
Time of occurrence stored as the BCD 2-digit code.
SD1 (Year, month) Upper 8 bits (B15-B8): Year (0-99)
Lower 8 bits (B7-B0): Month (1-12)
• The day and hour when SD0 data was updated is stored as
Time of PLC error Time of occurrence BCD 2-digit code. System side
SD2 occurrence (Day, hour) Upper 8 bits (B15-B8): Day of month (1-31) (Error)
Lower 8 bits (B7-B0): Hour (0-23)
• The minute and second when SD0 data was updated is
Time of occurrence stored as BCD 2-digit code.
SD3 (Minute, second) Upper 8 bits (B15-B8): Minute (0-59)
Lower 8 bits (B7-B0): Second (0-59)
PLC operating Operating status of PLC is stored. System side
SD203 status
PLC operating status
During RUN: 0, During STOP: 2 (Device read)
Character string
SD220 (15th/16th character) • A message character string that is equivalent to an error No.
Character string is stored when PLC alarm (illegal PLC) occurs.
SD221 (13th/14th character) (Diagnosis message displayed on the PLC diagnosis screen.) System side
PLC error character
: : 0 is set when normal. The message character string is cleared (State
string
Character string to 0 when executing PLC RUN next time. change)
SD226 (3rd/4th character) Refer to "Diagnosis display character string" in the list of PLC
Character string alarms for details.
SD227 (1st/2nd character)
Number of points • Stores the number of points currently set for each device
SD290 allocated for X (Note that number of allocated points does not always equal to
Number of points the usable number of points.)
SD291 allocated for Y SD290: Number of points allocated for X
Number of points SD291: Number of points allocated for Y
SD292 allocated for M SD292: Number of points allocated for M
: : SD293: Number of points allocated for L
Device allocation SD294: Number of points allocated for B
Number of points
SD302 (Same as
allocated for D
SD295: Number of points allocated for F System side
parameter SD296: Number of points allocated for SB (Initial)
contents) Number of points
SD303 allocated for W
SD297: Number of points allocated for V
SD298: Number of points allocated for S
SD299: Number of points allocated for T
SD300: Number of points allocated for ST
Number of points SD301: Number of points allocated for C
SD304 allocated for SW SD302: Number of points allocated for D
SD303: Number of points allocated for W
SD304: Number of points allocated for SW

V - 19
 Appendix 3. List of Special Relays and Special Registers
Appendix 3.2 Special Register

Setting side
Device Name Operation Operation details
(Set time)
• After RUN, +1 is added every second of the medium speed System side
ladder. (At high
Count Nos. of 1
SD412 1-second counter • Count is repeated as follows. speed ladder
second unit
0→32767→-32768→0 (decimal) processing)
0→FFFF→0 (hexadecimal) *1
• Stores the n of 2n-second clock (SM420). (Default value: 30)
SD414 2n-second clock set 2n-second clock unit
The setting range is from 1 to 32767.
User side

• After RUN, +1 is added every 1 scan of the medium speed

Scan counter ladder. System side
SD420 (Medium-speed Count Nos. by 1 scan • Count is repeated as follows. (Every time
ladder) 0→32767→-32768→0 (decimal) END)
0→FFFF→0 (hexadecimal)
• After RUN, +1 is added every 1 scan of the high speed ladder.
System side
Scan counter • Count is repeated as follows.
SD430 (High-speed ladder)
Count Nos. by 1 scan
0→32767→-32768→0 (decimal)
(Every time
END)
0→FFFF→0 (hexadecimal)
Current scan time • Stores the medium speed ladder current scan time in SD520
Current scan time and SD521. (1μs unit is used for measurement)
SD520 (Medium-speed
(1ms unit)
ladder) SD520: ms value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 14000) System side
SD521: μs value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 999) (Every time
Current scan time (Example) When the current scan time is 23.6ms, it is stored as END)
Current scan time
SD521 (Medium-speed
(1μs unit) follows.
ladder) SD520=23, SD521=600
Minimum scan time
Minimum scan time • Stores the minimum value of the medium speed ladder scan
SD524 (Medium-speed
(1ms unit) time in SD524 and SD525. (1μs unit is used for measurement; System side
ladder)
2nd scan and after is the target after RUN.) (Every time
Minimum scan time SD524: ms value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 14000) END)
Minimum scan time
SD525 (Medium-speed
(1μs unit) SD525: μs value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 999)
ladder)
Maximum scan
time Maximum scan time
SD526 (Medium-speed (1ms unit)
• Stores the maximum value of medium speed ladder scan time
ladder) in SD526 and SD527. (1μs unit is used for measurement; 2nd System side
scan and after is the target after RUN.) (Every time
Maximum scan SD526: ms value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 14000) END)
time Maximum scan time SD527: μs value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 999)
SD527 (Medium-speed (1μs unit)
ladder)
*1: Processing cycle of the high-speed ladder (sequence program) depends on the machine type.

V - 20
 Appendix 4. List of PLC Alarms

Appendix 4. List of PLC Alarms

PLC diagnosis for each CNC PLC alarm, as well as the error details, causes and remedies are provided
below.

NC alarm display (M700) NC PLC diagnosis

operating
Message Level Sub-status status Error code Diagnosis File name Step No.
SD0 display character
1 2 string
U01 ALM (Red) - - Emergency - - - -
No user stop
PLC (S/W
EMG)

U10 ALM (Red) 0x04xx Number of Emergency 4 S/W INT. ERR ○ ○

Illegal PLC steps stop
(User PLC (S/W
is illegal) EMG)

"xx" in the
lower 16 ALM (Red) 0x20xx Number of Emergency 20 JUMP LABEL ○ ○
bits of the steps stop ERR
sub-status (S/W
1 indicates EMG)
the
program
No.
ALM (Red) 0x21xx Number of Emergency 21 DUP. LABEL(P) ○ ○
steps stop
(S/W
EMG)

ALM (Red) 0x22xx - Emergency 22 LOCAL LABEL ○

stop OVER
(S/W
EMG)
ALM (Red) 0x23xx - Emergency 23 LABEL PARA.
stop ERR
(S/W
EMG)

ALM (Red) 0x24xx Number of Emergency 24 RSV. LABEL ○ ○

steps stop ERR
(S/W
EMG)
ALM (Red) 0x25xx - Emergency 25 PRG. PARA. ○
stop ERR
(S/W
EMG)

V - 21
Appendix 4. List of PLC Alarms

Error Contents and Cause Remedy

Sequence program is included in F-ROM or temporary (1) Write the sequence program from the GX Developer or
memory area. internal PLC edit function, and then execute F-ROM
(1) Sequence program is not stored in F-ROM. writing.
(2) Sequence program is not written from the GX Developer or (2) If (1) does not solve the problem, there is a possibility of
internal PLC edit function. broken F-ROM.
(3) Sequence program cannot be read due to broken F-ROM.
Software instruction interruption illegal Contact Mitsubishi.
An error was found in data for the sequence program in
execution.
(1) Sequence program stored in F-ROM is broken.
(2) Sequence program under development (before writing into
F-ROM) is broken.
Label branching error (Before executing PLC) Check the branch destination of the CJ and CALL instructions
Occurs only when the bit selection parameter (#6452 bit6) existing in the steps occurred.
"branch destination label check valid" is set to "1".
(1) The CJ and CALL instructions were placed to a nonexistent
label.
(2) The CJ instruction was placed to the global label.
(Branching is possible only with the CALL instruction.)
Label duplication error (Before executing PLC) Correct the duplication of the labels existing in the steps
(1) When using the multi-programming method: occurred.
• Global labels are duplicated
• Local labels are duplicated within the same file
(2) When using the independent program method, labels are
duplicated.
Local label over (Before executing PLC) (1) Reduce the number of local labels used.
The boundary value set with the PC parameter (global label • Use as sequentially as possible from P0.
boundary value) has been exceeded by the total number of (2) Reset the PC parameter (global label boundary value).
local labels.
Global label boundary value error (Before executing PLC) (1) When using the multi-programming method, correct the
The contents of PC parameter (global label boundary value) is global label boundary value to an appropriate value.
not normal. (2) When using the independent program method, delete the
(1) When using the multi-programming method, a value global label boundary value.
greater than the maximum value is set.
(2) When using the independent program method, the global
label boundary value is set.
Reserved label error (Before executing PLC) (1) When using the multi-programming method, delete the
(1) When using the multi-programming method, disabled reserved label.
reserved label exists. (2) When using the independent program method:
(2) When using the independent program method, reserved • Delete the PC parameter program settings.
labels are duplicated. • Correct the duplication of reserved labels
Program setting error (Before executing PLC) (1) When using the multi-programming method, check the PC
(1) When using the multi-programming method, PC parameter parameter program settings.
setting is not correct. • Check the program settings and program name stored in
• PC parameter (program setting) is not set. the NC.
• Unstored program name is set. • Set the number to 20 or less.
• More than the maximum number of programs that can be (2) When using the independent program method:
set (20 programs) are set • Store only one program file.
(2) When using the independent program method, multiple
programs are stored.

V - 22
 Appendix 4. List of PLC Alarms

NC alarm display (M700) NC PLC diagnosis

operating
Message Level Sub-status status Error code Diagnosis File name Step No.
SD0 display character
1 2 string
U10 ALM (Red) 0x26xx - Emergency 26 MISSING RET ○
Illegal PLC stop INS.
(User PLC (S/W
is illegal) EMG)

"xx" in the
lower 16
bits of the
sub-status
1 indicates
the ALM (Red) 0x27xx Number of Emergency 27 LAD. CODE ERR △ △
program steps stop
No. (S/W
EMG)

ALM (Red) 0x28xx - Emergency 28 MISSING

stop LAD(M)
(S/W
EMG)

ALM (Red) 0x29xx - Emergency 29 EXE. AREA ○

stop OVER
(S/W
EMG)
ALM (Red) 0x30xx Number of Emergency 30 FOR INS. OVER ○ ○
steps stop
(S/W
EMG)
ALM (Red) 0x31xx Number of Emergency 31 NEXT INS. ERR △ △
steps stop
(S/W
EMG)

ALM (Red) 0x32xx Number of Emergency 32 BREAK INS. ○ ○

steps stop ERR
(S/W
EMG)
ALM (Red) 0x400* - Emergency 40 PLC SYSTEM
stop DOWN
(S/W
EMG)
WNG 0x80xx Number of PLC RUN 80 EXC.INT(BCD) ○ ○
(Yellow) steps

V - 23
Appendix 4. List of PLC Alarms

Error Contents and Cause Remedy

RET instruction error Check the following matters for the entire sequence program
(1) RET instruction was not executed at the branch destination to be executed.
of the CALL instruction. (1) Check if RET instruction is programmed at the end of
(2) RET instruction was executed without execution of CALL sub-routine?
instruction. (2) Check if diverged to the other operation in the middle of
sub-routine and RET instruction is not executed.
(3) Check if jumped to the END reservation label (P4005) in
the middle of sub-routine.
(4) Check if there is delimiter (FEND instruction) between
adjacent program and sub-routine program.
Ladder code error (Before executing PLC) Transferring, storing and F-ROM writing of the sequence
An error was found in data for the sequence program to be program must be re-executed with the GX Developer or PLC
executed. onboard edit function.
(1) Disabled PLC instruction is used.
(2) Sequence program stored in F-ROM is broken.
(3) Sequence program under development (before writing into
F-ROM) is broken.
No main processing ladders (Before executing PLC) (1) When using the multi-programming method, check the PC
Main processing program to be executed cannot be identified. parameter program settings.
(1) When using the multi-programming method, main (2) When using the independent program method, add the
processing "scan" is not set in the PC parameter (program reservation label (P4002) for the medium speed ladder.
setting).
(2) When using the independent program method, no
reservation ladder for the main processing ladder is
available.
Execution area over (Before executing PLC) Check the PC parameter (program setting) and set so that the
The total number of steps for the ladder to be executed has total number of steps for the ladder to be executed does not
exceeded the size of PLC processor execution area. exceed the PLC processor execution area.

FOR instruction nesting over Check the number of FOR instruction's nestings in the steps
17th level of nesting for FOR instruction was executed. generated, and keep the number to 16 or less.

NEXT instruction error (1) Check the NEXT instruction existing in the number of steps
(1) NEXT instruction was executed before FOR instruction. generated and correct.
(2) After FOR instruction, END(FEND) was executed before (2) Check the ladder circuit of the program No. generated and
NEXT instruction. correct. (Note that the number of steps at the error position
is displayed as "0".)
• Check if JMP,CALL,CJ instructions were executed
between FOR and NEXT instruction, and NEXT
instruction was jumped.
• Check if FOR instruction and NEXT instruction are all
paired.
BREAK instruction error Check the BREAK instruction existing in the step generated
BREAK was executed outside the range between FOR and and correct.
NEXT instruction.

PLC system error Contact Mitsubishi.

Software exceptional interruption (BCD instruction error) has Check the usage of BCD,DBCD instructions existing in the
occurred. steps occurred.
With BCD and DBCD instructions, BIN value outside its input
range was attempted to be converted into BCD.

V - 24
 Appendix 4. List of PLC Alarms

NC alarm display (M700) NC PLC diagnosis

operating
Message Level Sub-status status Error code Diagnosis display File name Step No.
SD0 character string
1 2
U10 WNG 0x81xx Number of PLC RUN 81 EXC.INT(BIN) ○ ○
Illegal PLC (Yellow) steps
(User PLC
is illegal)

"xx" in the
lower 16 ALM (Red) 0x82xx Number of Emergenc 82 EXC.INT(D-BUS) △ △
bits of the steps y stop
sub-status (S/W
1 indicates EMG)
the
program ALM (Red) 0x83xx Number of Emergency 83 EXC.INT(INST.) △ △
No. steps stop
(S/W
EMG)

ALM (Red) 0x84xx Number of Emergency 84 EXC.INT(I-FMT) △ △

steps stop
(S/W
EMG)
ALM (Red) 0x85xx Number of Emergency 85 EXC.INT(I-BUS) △ △
steps stop
(S/W
EMG)

ALM (Red) 0x86xx Number of Emergency 86 EXC.INT(CALL) △ △

steps stop
(S/W
EMG)
ALM (Red) 0x87xx Number of Emergency 87 EXC.INT(MEM.)
steps stop
(S/W
EMG)
ALM (Red) 0x88xx Number of Emergency 88 EXC.INT(ZERO)
steps stop
(S/W
EMG)
ALM (Red) 0x89xx Number of Emergency 89 EXC.INT(DUP.) △ △
steps stop
(S/W
EMG)
ALM (Red) 0x90xx Number of Emergency 90 EXC.INT(HALT)
steps stop
(S/W
EMG)
U50 WNG - - Emergency - - -
Ladder (Yellow) stop (S/W
stopped EMG)

V - 25
Appendix 4. List of PLC Alarms

Error Contents and Cause Remedy

Software exceptional interruption (BIN instruction error) has Check the usage of BIN,DBIN,B+,B-,B*,B/ instructions existing
occurred. in the steps occurred.
(1) With BIN and DBIN instructions, BCD value outside its
input range was attempted to be converted into BIN.
(2) With B+,B-,B*,B/ instructions, BCD value of argument 1 or
2 is outside the range between 0 and 9999.
Software exceptional interruption (Bus error) has occurred. Contact Mitsubishi.

Software exceptional interruption (Unmounted instruction (1) Set the bit selection parameter (#6452 bit6) "branch
error) has occurred. destination label check valid" to "1" and check the
(1) When HN102 card is not mounted and the bit selection branching step to the undefined label.
parameter (#6452 bit6) "branch destination label check (2) Contact Mitsubishi.
valid" is set to "0", jumped to an undefined label.
(2) Sequence program in execution is broken.
Software exceptional interruption (Instruction format error) has Contact Mitsubishi.
occurred.

Software exceptional interruption (Instruction bus error) has (1) Set the bit selection parameter (#6452 bit6) "branch
occurred. destination label check valid" to "1" and check the
(1) When HN102 card is not mounted and the bit selection branching step to the undefined label.
parameter (#6452 bit6) "branch destination label check (2) Contact Mitsubishi.
valid" is set to "0", jumped to an undefined label.
(2) Sequence program in execution is broken.
Software exceptional interruption (CALL/CALLS/RET Contact Mitsubishi.
instruction error) has occurred.

Software exceptional interruption (Memory area error) has

occurred.

Software exceptional interruption (Zero interrupt error) has

occurred.

Software exceptional interruption (Duplex exception

occurrence error) has occurred.

Software exceptional interruption (HALT instruction stop) has

occurred.

The ladder is stopped. RUN the PLC.

V - 26
 Revision History

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Sept. 2004 IB(NA)1500036-A First edition created.

Sept. 2005 IB(NA)1500036-B Contents were revised to correspond to Mitsubishi CNC700 Series software version
B1.

Modifications were made to the followings in "II PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION".

• 2.5 User Memory Area Configuration and Size
• 4.2 Bit Selection Parameters
• 4.3 Other Parameters
• "DEFR" instruction was deleted from 6.1 Instruction List.
• 6.4 Index Modifier
• "DEFR" instruction was deleted from 7. Basic Instructions.
• 10.5 Alarm Message Display

Modifications were made to the followings in "III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT •

ENVIRONMENT".
• Explanation of sampling trace function was added to 2.2 Function Support
Conditions.
• 4.4 File Name was split into two sections.
• 4.4.1 File name rule for sequence program, parameter, and device comment
• 4.4.2 File name rule for message data

The following sections were added to "III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT

ENVIRONMENT".
• 3.3 Preparation for Ethernet Communication
• 4.5 Creating a Project
• 5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

Modifications were made to the followings in "IV EXPLANATION OF BUILT-IN

EDITING FUNCTION".
• Descriptions on "Simple operation mode" were added overall.
• 4.2 Type of Data
• 5.1 Basic Operation Keys
• 8.1.6 Testing the Devices
• 8.3.4 Searching for Device

The following sections were added to "IV EXPLANATION OF BUILT-IN EDITING

FUNCTION".
• 6. Environment Setting
• 8.1.5 Registering Monitor
• 8.1.8 Movement on Split Screen
• 8.1.10 Deleting All the Entry Ladder
• 8.1.11 Changing the Split Ratio
• 8.1.12 Setting the Monitor Stop Conditions
• 8.2.14 Undoing the Last Editing Operation
• 8.3.1 Searching for Ladder (Simple search)
• 8.3.2 Searching for Step No. (Simple search)
• 8.4.3 Comment ON/OFF
• 15. Diagnostics
• 16. Help
• 17.2 User PLC Alarm

The following sections were deleted from "IV EXPLANATION OF BUILT-IN EDITING
FUNCTION".
• 14.5 Copying Project Data
• 14.6 Reading Projects from the HD's Fixed Folder
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Jun. 2006 IB(NA)1500036-D Contents were revised to correspond to Mitsubishi CNC700 Series software version
C1.

Modifications were made to the followings in "II PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION".

• Drawing in "2.4.2 Program Execution Order" was improved.
• "2.6 Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode" was added.
• "4.1 Description about PLC constant" was corrected.
• Parameters were added to "4.2 Bit Selection Parameters".
• SB, B, V, SW, SD, W were added to "5. Explanation of Devices".
• Description about GOEND instruction was added to "5.3.14.4 Reserved
Pointers".

Description about extending PLC instructions was added throughout the following
chapters.
• 6. Explanation of Instructions
• 7. Basic Instructions
• 8. Function Instructions

Modifications were made to the followings in "III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT

ENVIRONMENT".
• Description of "IC memory card A (RAM)" was added to "4.3 PLC Data Storage
Areas"
• Description about "4.6.3 Setting the Number of Common Pointer Points" was
corrected.
• 5.2.4 "Operations and Check Items at the Other Errors" was added.
• Sampling trace's applicable devices described in "5.7.2 Basic Specifications"
were corrected.
• Addition was made to "8.1 List of Errors During GX Developer Online Operations"
• Addition was made to "8.2.5 List of Corresponding PLC Alarms"

Modifications were made to the followings in "IV EXPLANATION OF BUILT-IN

EDITING FUNCTION".
• 9.1 Contact Coil Usage List
• 9.2 List of Used Devices
• 9.3 Program Check
• 10.2 Device Registration Monitor
• 11.1 Setting the Program
• 11.2 Common Pointer Setting
• 13.8 Updating the PLC Version (Maintenance Function)

The following section was added to "IV EXPLANATION OF BUILT-IN EDITING

FUNCTION".
• 10.3 Sampling Trace

Modifications were made to the followings in "V APPENDIX".

• Appendix 1.3 Instructions with Changed Designation Format
• Appendix 2. List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

The following sections were added to "V APPENDIX".

• Appendix 3. List of Special Relays and Special Devices
• Appendix 4. List of PLC Alarms

Nov. 2006 IB(NA)1500036-E Mistakes were corrected.

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Mar. 2007 IB(NA)1500036-F Modifications were made to the followings in "II PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION".
• 10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)
• 10.3 PLC Axis Control

The following sections were added to "III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT

ENVIRONMENT".
• 4.8 Keyword Registration

Modifications were made to the followings in "IV EXPLANATION OF BUILT-IN

EDITING FUNCTION".
• Descriptions on "70 Series" were added overall.

The following sections were added to "IV EXPLANATION OF BUILT-IN EDITING

FUNCTION".
• 2.1.3 70 Series Startup
• 5.2.2.3 Menu Keys in 70 Series
• 5.2.3.3 Menu Keys in 70 Series
• 6.4 Ladder Display Setting
• 6.5 Comment Display Setting
• 8.4.1.2 Program Changeover
• 13.9 Keyword
• 13.10 File list

Mistakes were corrected.

 Global service network
NORTH AMERICA FA Center CHINA FA Center
EUROPEAN FA Center KOREAN FA Center

ASEAN FA Center

HONG KONG FA Center

TAIWAN FA Center

North America FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC.) ASEAN FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD.)
Illinois CNC Service Center Singapore CNC Service Center
500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, IL. 60061, U.S.A. 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 (Se FAX: +1-847-478-2650 (Se TEL: +65-6473-2308 FAX: +65-6476-7439
California CNC Service Center Thailand MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (F. A. TECH CO., LTD)
5665 PLAZA DRIVE, CYPRESS, CA. 90630, U.S.A. 898/19,20,21,22 S.V. CITY BUILDING OFFICE TOWER 1 FLOOR 12,14 RAMA III RD BANGPONGPANG,
TEL: +1-714-220-4796 FAX: +1-714-229-3818 YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120. THAILAND
Georgia CNC Service Center TEL: +66-2-682-6522 FAX: +66-2-682-6020
2810 PREMIERE PARKWAY SUITE 400, DULUTH, GA., 30097, U.S.A. Malaysia MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
TEL: +1-678-258-4500 FAX: +1-678-258-4519 (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM SDN. BHD.)
New Jersey CNC Service Center 60, JALAN USJ 10/1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN MALAYSIA
200 COTTONTAIL LANE SOMERSET, NJ. 08873, U.S.A. TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 FAX: +60-3-5631-7636
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 FAX: +1-732-560-4531 JOHOR MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite
Michigan CNC Service Satellite (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM SDN. BHD.)
2545 38TH STREET, ALLEGAN, MI., 49010, U.S.A. NO. 16, JALAN SHAHBANDAR 1, TAMAN UNGKU TUN AMINAH, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 FAX: +1-269-673-4092 TEL: +60-7-557-8218 FAX: +60-7-557-3404
Ohio CNC Service Satellite Indonesia MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
62 W. 500 S., ANDERSON, IN., 46013, U.S.A. (PT. AUTOTEKNINDO SUMBER MAKMUR)
TEL: +1-847-478-2608 FAX: +1-847-478-2690 WISMA NUSANTARA 14TH FLOOR JL. M.H. THAMRIN 59, JAKARTA 10350 INDONESIA
Texas CNC Service Satellite TEL: +62-21-3917-144 FAX: +62-21-3917-164
1000, NOLEN DRIVE SUITE 200, GRAPEVINE, TX. 76051, U.S.A. India MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
TEL: +1-817-251-7468 FAX: +1-817-416-1439 B-36FF, PAVANA INDUSTRIAL PREMISES M.I.D.C., BHOASRI PUNE 411026, INDIA
Canada CNC Service Center TEL: +91-20-2711-9484 FAX: +91-20-2712-8115
4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ON. L3R OJ2, CANADA BANGALORE MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 FAX: +1-905-475-7935 (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
Mexico CNC Service Center S 615, 6TH FLOOR, MANIPAL CENTER, BANGALORE 560001, INDIA
MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO TEL: +91-80-509-2119 FAX: +91-80-532-0480
TEL: +52-55-9171-7662 FAX: +52-55-9171-7698 Delhi MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Parts Center (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
Monterrey CNC Service Satellite 1197, SECTOR 15 PART-2, OFF DELHI-JAIPUR HIGHWAY BEHIND 32ND MILESTONE GURGAON
ARGENTINA 3900, FRACC. LAS TORRES, MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO 122001, INDIA
TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 FAX: +52-81-8365-4171 TEL: +91-98-1024-8895 FAX:
Brazil MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center Philippines MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
(AUTOMOTION IND. COM. IMP. E EXP. LTDA.) (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM CORPORATION)
ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 18550-000 BOITUVA – SP, BRAZIL UNIT No.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY,
TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 FAX: +55-15-3363-9911 ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771
TEL: +63-2-807-2416 FAX: +63-2-807-2417
European FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.) Vietnam MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (SA GIANG TECHNO CO., LTD)
Germany CNC Service Center 47-49 HOANG SA ST. DAKAO WARD, DIST.1 HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM
GOTHAER STRASSE 8, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY TEL: +84-8-910-4763 FAX: +84-8-910-2593
TEL: +49-2102-486-0 FAX:+49-2102486-591
South Germany CNC Service Center China FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (SHANGHAI) LTD.)
KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY China CNC Service Center
TEL: +49-711-3270-010 FAX: +49-711-3270-0141 2/F., BLOCK 5 BLDG.AUTOMATION INSTRUMENTATION PLAZA, 103 CAOBAO RD. SHANGHAI 200233,
France CNC Service Center CHINA
25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE TEL: +86-21-6120-0808 FAX: +86-21-6494-0178
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 Shenyang CNC Service Center
Lyon CNC Service Satellite TEL: +86-24-2397-0184 FAX: +86-24-2397-0185
Beijing CNC Service Satellite
U.K CNC Service Center 9/F, OFFICE TOWER1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE, DONGCHENG DISTRICT,
TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K. BEIJING 100005, CHINA
TEL: +44-1707-282-846 FAX:-44-1707-278-992 TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
Italy CNC Service Center China MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
ZONA INDUSTRIALE VIA ARCHIMEDE 35 20041 AGRATE BRIANZA, MILANO ITALY (BEIJING JIAYOU HIGHTECH TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENT CO.)
TEL: +39-039-60531-342 FAX: +39-039-6053-206 RM 709, HIGH TECHNOLOGY BUILDING NO.229 NORTH SI HUAN ZHONG ROAD, HAIDIAN DISTRICT ,
Spain CNC Service Satellite BEIJING 100083, CHINA
CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80 -APDO.420 08190 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN TEL: +86-10-8288-3030 FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
TEL: +34-935-65-2236 FAX: Tianjin CNC Service Satellite
Turkey MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center RM909, TAIHONG TOWER, NO220 SHIZILIN STREET, HEBEI DISTRICT, TIANJIN, CHINA 300143
(GENEL TEKNIK SISTEMLER LTD. STI.) TEL: -86-22-2653-9090 FAX: +86-22-2635-9050
DARULACEZE CAD. FAMAS IS MERKEZI A BLOCK NO.43 KAT2 80270 OKMEYDANI ISTANBUL, Shenzhen CNC Service Satellite
TURKEY RM02, UNIT A, 13/F, TIANAN NATIONAL TOWER, RENMING SOUTH ROAD, SHENZHEN, CHINA 518005
TEL: +90-212-320-1640 FAX: +90-212-320-1649 TEL: +86-755-2515-6691 FAX: +86-755-8218-4776
Poland MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (MPL Technology Sp. z. o. o) Changchun Service Satellite
UL SLICZNA 34, 31-444 KRAKOW, POLAND TEL: +86-431-50214546 FAX: +86-431-5021690
TEL: +48-12-632-28-85 FAX: Hong Kong CNC Service Center
Wroclaw MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite (MPL Technology Sp. z. o. o) UNIT A, 25/F RYODEN INDUSTRIAL CENTRE, 26-38 TA CHUEN PING STREET, KWAI CHUNG, NEW
UL KOBIERZYCKA 23, 52-315 WROCLAW, POLAND TERRITORIES, HONG KONG
TEL: +48-71-333-77-53 FAX: +48-71-333-77-53 TEL: +852-2619-8588 FAX: +852-2784-1323
Czech MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
(AUTOCONT CONTROL SYSTEM S.R.O. ) Taiwan FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD.)
NEMOCNICNI 12, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2 CZECH REPUBLIC Taichung CNC Service Center
TEL: +420-596-152-426 FAX: +420-596-152-112 NO.8-1, GONG YEH 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTIAL PARK TAICHUNG CITY, TAIWAN R.O.C.
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
Taipei CNC Service Satellite
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
Tainan CNC Service Satellite
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689

Korean FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD.)

Korea CNC Service Center
1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU SEOUL 157-200, KOREA
TEL: +82-2-3660-9631 FAX: +82-2-3664-8668
Notice

Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the
contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some
unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments
regarding the use of this product.

Duplication Prohibited

This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written
permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

© 2004-2007 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED